MH1 – 2016

(Revision of ASME MH1-2005)

Pallets, Slip Sheets, and Other

Bases for Unit Loads

Approved: 8 Jan 2016

Abstract
This standard pertains to pallets used in the unit load method of assembling, stacking, storing,
handling, and transporting materials and products. The standards were to accomplish the
following: define terminology and nomenclature associated with pallets; apply to pallets
irrespective of components and materials used in their fabrication; provide a series of
recommended pallet dimensions and sizes; describe procedures for pallet sampling, inspection
and testing; indicate procedures for designating pallet requirements.

Developed by:

MH1 Committee, Pallets, Slip Sheets,

and other Bases for Unit Loads

Published by MH1 Secretariat:

MHI
8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
[email protected]
phone: (704) 676-1190
fax: (704) 676-1199

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard

Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSI that the requirements for
due process, consensus, and other criteria for approval have been met by the standards
developer.

Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSI Board of Standards Review,
substantial agreement has been reached by directly and materially affected interests. Substantial
agreement means much more than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus
requires that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort be made toward
their resolution.

The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their existence does not in any
respect preclude anyone, whether he has approved the standards or not, from manufacturing,
marketing, purchasing, or using products, processes or procedures not conforming to the
standards.

The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and will in no
circumstances give an interpretation of any American National Standard. Moreover, no person
shall have the right or authority to issue an interpretation of an American National Standard in the
name of the American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should be
addressed to the sponsor whose name appears on the title page of this standard.

CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or withdrawn at any time.
The procedures of the American National Standards Institute require that action be taken
periodically to reaffirm, revise or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National
Standards may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the American
National Standards Institute.

Copyright© 2016 by MHI

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the Materials Handling Industry,
MH1 Secretariat, 8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201, Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
Phone: 704-676-1190, Fax: 704-676-1199
Email: [email protected]

Printed in the United States of America.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 MH1 – 2016

American National Standard

Pallets, Slip Sheets, and Other

Bases for Unit Loads

Developed by:

MH1 Committee, Pallets, Slip Sheets, and other Bases for Unit Loads

Published by MH1 Secretariat:

MHI
8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28217

Approved 8 Jan 2016

American National Standards Institute, Inc.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 Requests for Interpretation and Correspondence with MH1 Committee

MHI standards are developed and maintained with the intent to represent the consensus of
concerned interests. Users of the standard may interact with the committee by requesting
interpretations or proposing revisions.

All correspondence shall be addressed to:

MH1 – 2016
8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201
Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
Attention: MH1 Secretary
Phone: (704) 676-1190
Fax: (704) 676-1199

Electronic submissions may also be made to the Standards Coordinator at [email protected].

Interpretations Policy. Upon request, the MH1 Committee will render an interpretation of this
standard. ANSI does not provide interpretations and shall refer to any inquiries to the MH1
Committee. Requests for interpretation shall follow the procedures below and shall be provided in
a written request sent to the Secretariat as follows:

In general, only questions or interpretation and applicability of Standards will be given a response.
The request for interpretation should be clear and unambiguous.

The inquirer shall submit the request utilizing the following format:

Designation: Cite the standard designation, for example, MH1-2016.

Subject: Cite the applicable paragraph number(s) and provide a concise

description.

Question: Phrase the question as a request for an interpretation of a specific

requirement suitable for general understanding and use, not as a request
for approval of a proprietary design or situation. The inquirer may also
include any plans or drawings which are necessary to explain the
question; however, they should not contain proprietary names or
information.

Requests that are not in this format will be required to be rewritten in this format prior to being
answered. The inquiry shall be forwarded promptly to the Chair of the MH1 Committee by the
MH1 Secretary. Within forty-five (45) days, the inquirer shall receive a response from the MH1
Secretary.

ii

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 Disclaimer

This standard was approved by ANSI on 8 Jan 2016. It was developed with the
sole intent of offering information to parties engaged in the manufacture,
marketing, purchase, or use of pallets, slip sheets and other bases for unit loads.
This standard is advisory only and acceptance is voluntary and the standard
should be regarded as a guide that the user may or may not choose to adopt,
modify, or reject. The information does not constitute a comprehensive safety
program and should not be relied upon as such. Such a program should be
developed and an independent safety adviser consulted to do so.

Material Handling Industry (MHI), the MH1 Committee and its officers and
members assume no responsibility and disclaim all liability of any kind, however
arising, as a result of acceptance or use or alleged use of this standard. User
specifically understands and agrees that MHI, the MH1 Committee and their
officers, committee members, agents, and members shall not be liable under any
legal theory of any kind for any action or failure to act with respect to the design,
installation, manufacture, preparation for sale, sale, characteristics, features, or
delivery of anything covered by this standard. Any use of this information must be
determined by the user to be in accordance with applicable federal, state, and
local laws and regulations.

MHI, the MH1 Committee and its officers and members make no warranties of
any kind, express, implied, or statutory, in connection with the information in this
standard. MHI and the MH1 Committee specifically disclaim all implied warranties
of merchantability or of fitness for particular purpose.

By referring to or otherwise employing this standard, the user agrees to defend,

protect, indemnify, and hold MHI, the MH1 Committee, their officers, committee
members, agents, and members harmless from and against all claims, losses,
expenses, damages, and liabilities, direct, incidental, or consequential, arising
from acceptance or use or alleged use of this standard, including loss of profits
and reasonable attorneys' fees which may arise out of the acceptance or use or
alleged use of this standard. The intent of this provision and of the user is to
absolve and protect MHI, the MH1 Committee, their officers, committee members,
agents, and members from any and all loss relating in any way to this standard,
including those resulting from the user's own negligence.

iii

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 Foreword (This foreword is not part of American National Standard MH1 – 2016)

Hundreds of millions of wood pallets were manufactured in the United States of America during each of the past 30
years, considerably more than the 37 million pallets produced during 1953 when the ASME Standards Committee MH1
was established. It was estimated that approximately 20% of the total annual production of lumber in the United States
was required for the assembly of these pallets. One pallet size of the approximately 100 sizes used, the 48 x 40 in. and the
40 x 48 in. (1219 x 1016 mm and 1016 x 1219 mm) size, accounts for more than one-third of all the pallets produced; while
ten additional sizes account for more than 1% of all pallets produced. Pallets made of metal, paper, and plastics are also
manufactured in the United States. However, their production is limited and no production statistics are available.
The need for standardization of pallets used in the unit-load method of assembling, stacking, storing, handling, and
transporting materials and products, originated from the interconnecting nature of pallet usage. The great variety of pallet
sizes and constructions restricted their movement through manufacturing and distributing channels. This variety was the
result of each user treating pallet design as a private problem. More intense application of the unit-load method of
assembling, stacking, storing, handling, and transporting of commodities in the United States and in international trade
fostered extensive use of pallets both as captive and exchange pallets. The latter pallets, especially, required maximum
standardization for any exchange to be successful.
Some industries and military services developed, by evolution, certain pallet standards to solve specific problems which
are also existent with other users. Consequently, their sizes and constructions of pallets established a pattern of value to
all users.
The American National Standards Institute (formerly the American National Standards Association) project on pallet
standardization was initiated in October 1953. A Material Handling Standards Committee, MH1 (initially B69), was
organized to coordinate information and prepare standards under the scope of standardization of nomenclature, types,
sizes, materials, and components of pallets, including sampling, inspection, and test procedures. The standards pertain to
pallets used in the unit-load method of assembling, stacking, storing, handling, and transporting materials and products.
The standards were to accomplish the following:
(a) define terminology associated with pallets;
(b) apply to pallets irrespective of components used in their fabrication;
(c) provide a series of recommended pallet dimensions;
(d) describe procedures for pallet testing; and
(e) indicate procedures for designating pallet requirements.
During 1967, the MH1Committee was reorganized. A Nominating Committee was established in compliance with the
procedures of ANSI. The Nominating Committee selected officers for the MH1Committee during 1968 and, in turn, became
the nucleus for the new MH1 Executive Committee to guide the continuing revision activities and organize the task groups
to be formed.
The name of the MH1Committee was changed in 1979 to Standardization of Pallets, Slip Sheets, and Other Bases for
Unit Loads by action of ANSI’s Physical Distribution Standards Management Board in light of the establishment of the MH1
Subcommittee on Standardization of Slip Sheets in March 1979. The following scope of the Committee was established:
standardization of nomenclature, types, sizes, materials, and components of pallets, slip sheets, and other unit load bases,
including sampling, inspection, and test procedures.
The MH1Committee, consisting of individual members and representatives of trade associations, engineering societies,
and government agencies, organized a Technical Committee to perform its work. During July 1981, this Technical
Committee was reorganized as an ASME Standards Committee operating under the ANSI accredited organization
procedures.
The following MH1Committee standards were issued:
MH1.1.2 Definitions and Terminology Covering Pallets and Related Structures
MH1.2.2M Pallet Sizes
MH1.4.1M Procedures for Testing Pallets
MH1.5M Slip Sheets
MH1.6 Standard Procedures for Determination of Durability of Wooden Pallets and Related Structures
MH1.7M Driven Fasteners for Assembly of Pallets and Related Structures
MH1.8M Wood Pallets
MH1.9 Export Pallets
The MH1Committee published the above eight separate standards consolidated into a single publication, MH1Pallets,
Slip Sheets, and Other Bases for Unit Loads. The 1997 Edition contained the consolidation of the revised MH1.1.2,
MH1.4M (formerly MH1.4.1M), MH1.6, and MH1.7M standards. All of the documents contained in the previous Edition of
the Standard were approved by ANSI as American National Standards on July 16, 1996.
The first addenda to the previous Edition added the remaining four standards to be consolidated into MH1. Part 2, the
revised MH1.2.2, was approved by ANSI on August 6, 1998. Part 3, the revised MH1.8, was approved on August 6, 1998.
Part 4, the revised MH1.9, was approved on January 30, 1998. Part 8, the revised MH1.5M, received approval on August
6, 1998. In addition, the military-specific Part 9, entitled “Wood Pallets for U.S. Government Use,” was developed by the
MH1Committee in response to the Government’s need to use voluntary standards. This final Part was approved by ANSI
on February 4, 1999.
The second addenda to the previous Edition added Part 10 and revisions to Parts 3, 8, and 9. Part 10 was approved by
ANSI on January 19, 2000. Revisions to Part 9 were approved by ANSI on June 7, 2000. The 2005 Edition was approved
by ANSI on August 28, 2003 and on March 9, 2005, incorporating changes in all parts and the addition of a new Part 6.
This Edition incorporates changes in all parts (with the exception of Parts 8 and 10) and the addition of new Parts 11, 12,
13 and 14. This Standard was approved by ANSI on 8 Jan, 2016.

iv

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 MHI STANDARDS COMMITTEE MH1
Standardization of Pallets, Slip Sheets, and Other Bases for Unit Loads

(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Standard)

COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

Don Balazs ORBIS Corporation

Kevin C. Cheung Western Wood Products Association
John Clarke The Nelson Company
John G. Conway Conway & Robison, LLC
Christopher D. Forth USAMC Logistics Support Activity (LOGSA)
Jay Garner CHEP Americas
Brad Gething National Wooden Pallet and Container Assoc.- NWPCA
Mark C. Halverson APA – The Engineered Wood Association
John J. Healy 360 Solutions Group
Laszlo Horvath Virginia Tech – Center for Packaging and Unit Load Design
Timothy G. Keller DLA Troop Support
Christopher F. Merther Industrial Truck Association
Richard Owen NIPHLE
Don Pulver Worthington Steelpac
Mark J. Rehmstedt US Army, RDECOM/ARDEC
Ralph L. Rupert Millwood Inc.
Bob Sanders Global Logistics Program Management
Gary Sharon Litco International
Daniel R. Steppan Underwriters Laboratories
Marshall S. White White and Company LLC

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

Palletts, Slip Sh
heets, an
nd Other B
Bases for Unit Loads
Table
e of Conte nts
word ............................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. . iv
Forew

Part 1 Definition
ns and Term
minology Co
overing Palllets and Rellated Structtures .......... . 1
Figurre
1-1 Principle Parts of Woo
od Stringer and
a allets .......... .................. ................. 19
Block Pa
mandatory Appendix
Nonm A
A1-A Special Pallets Const ructed of a Variety
V aterials ....... .................. ................. 38
of Ma
Figurres
A1-1 Molded Plastic Pallet .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 38
A1-2 Combination Pallet wiith Corrugate d Honeycom b Stringers . ................. 38
ed Deck and
A1-3 Steel Pallet ................................ .................. .................. .................. ................. 38
A1-4 ed Fiberboarrd Pallet ........................ .................. .................. ................. 38
Corrugate
A1-5 mb Pallets ... .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 38
Honeycom
A1-6 Steel ...... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 38

Part 2 Sizes of Wood

W Palletts ............... .................. .................. .................. ................. 39
Figurre
2-1 ns Common to 48 x 40 in
Dimension n. (1219 x 10 ood Pallets
016 mm) Wo
A. ............... .................. .................. .................. ................. 40
Produced in the U.S.A
e
Table
2-1 Wood Pal let Sizes Mo he U.S.A. .... .................. ................. 39
ost Common ly Used in th
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A2-A Criteria ..................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 41
A2-B monly Used Pallet Sizess ................. 44
ble Metric Diimensions off Most Comm
Comparab
A2-C Utilization
n of Floor Are g on Pallet . 45
ea of Common Carriers, With No Lo ad Overhang
A2-D Reference nts .............. .................. .................. .................. ................. 46
ed Documen

Part 3 Wood Pallets ........... .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 47

Figurres
3-1 c Diagram o f a Typical Stringer
Schematic S Palle abeled ....... 49
et with Princcipal Parts La
3-2 Schematic
c Diagram o f a Typical Block
B Pallet w
with Principa eled .......... 50
al Parts Labe
3-3 Compone nt Names fo
or Perimeter and Crucifo rm Bottom D uction ........ 51
Deck Constru
3-4 outs ............ .................. .................. ................. 52
Panel Botttom Deck Showing Cuto
3-5 Schematic
c Diagram o f a Pallet Stringer with N
Notch Featurres .............. ................. 56

vi

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

3-6 c Diagram o f Driven Fas

Schematic steners Used
d in Pallets, Indicating th
he
Measurem
ments of the Physical Ch
haracteristicss ................. .................. ................. 60
3-7 Schematic
c Diagrams of Block Lam
mination and
d Fastening . .................. ................. 65
3-8 Schematic
c Diagrams of Broken D eckboard, S tringer and S
Stringer Foo
ot ............... 67
3-9 Schematic
c Diagrams of Splits in Deckboards
D and Stringerr ................. ................. 68
3-10 Schematic
c Diagrams of Missing Wood
W .......... .................. .................. ................. 69
3-11 Schematic
c Diagrams of a Block Class
C Pallet S
Showing the Butted Con nection
in the Botttom Deck off a Perimete r Base Desig
gn .............. .................. ................. 70
3-12 Schematic
c Diagrams Showing the
e Allowable L
Locations an
nd Extent of
Missing Wood
W in a Blo
ock Pallet ... .................. .................. .................. ................. 70
3-13 Schematic
c Diagrams of Panel Dellamination .. .................. .................. ................. 72
3-14 Schematic
c Diagrams of Two of the
e Common S
Styles of Me
etal Connecto
or Plates .... 74
3-15 Schematic
c Diagrams Showing Pro
oper Placem
ment of Metall Plates Ove r Splits ...... 75
3-16 Schematic
c Diagrams of Companio
on Stringer C
Componentss Used to Re
epair
Wood Pal lets ............ .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 76
3-17 c Diagrams of a Full-len gth Compan
Schematic nion Stringerr Repair ....... ................. 77
3-18 Schematic
c Diagram o f Half-compa
anion Stringe
er Repair .... .................. ................. 77
3-19 Schematic
c Diagram o f C-block an
nd Notched B
Block Stringe
er Repairs ... ................. 78
3-20 Example of
o a Plug Re
epair of a Sp lit Stringer 'F
Foot' .......... .................. ................. 78
3-21 HT and MB
M Treatment Marks ...... .................. .................. .................. ................. 84
es
Table
3-1 Minimum Lumber Com ality ............ .................. .................. ................. 54
mponent Qua
3-2 Minimum Wood-based
d Composite
e Componen t Quality ..... .................. ................. 58
3-3 Physical and
a Mechan ical Characteristics of D riven Fasten
ners used in Pallets ...... 60
3-4 Minimum Characteristtics of Drive n Fasteners for Single-u
use (S) and
Reusable (R) Pallets . .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 61
3-5 Minimum Number of Driven
D Faste
eners .......... .................. .................. ................. 63
3-6 Maximum Allowable Deviation
D of Replacemen
nt or Compan
nion Compo nents from
Compone nt Being Re placed, Rep aired, i.e. Co
omponents o
of Similar
ns .............. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 79
Dimension
3-7 Wood Spe
ecies Groups
s ................ .................. .................. .................. ................. 81
3-8 Dimension
n Tolerances
s of Compon
nents .......... .................. .................. ................. 82
exes
Anne
Anne x A Standa rds Concern ing Wood Pa
allets and C ontainers .... .................. ................. 85
Anne x B Wood Species
S Clas
sses ............ .................. .................. .................. ................. 89
Anne x C Definition and Clas sification of Defects ...... .................. .................. ................. 92
Anne x D Grading
g Agencies for
f Structura l Panels ..... .................. .................. ................. 93
Anne x E Wood-b
based Comp osite Tests . .................. .................. .................. ................. 93
Anne x F Connec
ction Design .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. 97

vii

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

Anne x G Physica on of Typical Fasteners M

al Descriptio Meeting Crite
eria in Sectio
on
5.5.1, Table
T 3-3 .... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 03

allets ......... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 06

Part 4 Export Pa

asteners forr Assembly of Pallets a

Part 5 Driven Fa and Related Structures
s............... 1 07
Figurre
5-1 Number of
o Fastener Couples
C ...... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 08
es
Table
5-1 hreaded, Stifff-Stock and Hardened-S
Standard,, Helically Th Steel, Pallet--Assembly
Nails with
h Filleted, Fla
at Head, Poi ntless or Sh < 5 / 32 in.)
hort, Blunt, o r Medium (<
Diamond or Chisel Po
oint (not Wid er than Wire
e Diameter), Four Thread
d Flutes,
and 60 to 68 (±2) deg al Units) ...... .................. ............... 1 10
g. Thread An gle (Imperia
5-2 Standard,, Bright and Coated, Pla in-Shank, Re
egular-Stockk Steel, ½ in . Wide,
Pallet-Ass
sembly Stap les with Two
o, Equal-Len
ngth, Flattene
ed Legs and
d Short,
Blunt Chis
sel Points (Im s) ............... .................. .................. ............... 1 15
mperial Units
5-3 Standard,, Bright and Coated, Pla in-Shank, Re
egular-Stockk Steel, Nailss
and Staples for Pallett-Mat Assem
mbly: Nails wiith Filleted, Flat Heads a
and
unt Chisel Po
Short, Blu oints; and Sttaples with T
Two, Equal L
Length, Flatt ened
Legs Connected by S taple Crown and Short, Blunt Chisell Points with ½ in.
wn (Imperiall Units) ....... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 16
Wide Crow
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A5-A Applicable s ................ .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 20
e Documents
A5-B Standard Pallet-Faste mperial Units ) ................ ............... 1 22
ener Packag e Labels (Im

Part 6 Protocol for Measuriing Quality of Pallet Na aples ........... ............... 1 23

ails and Sta
Figurres
6-1 s of Driven Nails
Examples N aples ........... .................. .................. ............... 1 23
and Sta
6-2 Schematic
c Diagram o f Nails and Staples
S Used
d for Pallet A
Assembly, In
ndicating
Measurem
ments to be Taken
T in Ord
der to Determ
mine the Phyysical Chara
acteristics
of These Fasteners ... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 26
6-3 c Diagram o f Major and Minor Threa
Schematic ad Rings on A hreaded
Annularly Th
ed Pallet Nai ls ............... .................. .................. ............... 1 29
and Helically Threade
m
Form
6-1 heet ............ .................. .................. ............... 1 38
Fastener Quality Anallysis Worksh
e
Table
6-1 Fastener Sampling ... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 28
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A6-A Inch Fracttions and De valents ........ .................. .................. ............... 1 44
ecimal Equiv

viii

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

A6-B Common Wire Gauge s for Pallet Nails N and Sttaples and T heir Decima l
nts in Inches .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 44
Equivalen
A6-C The Morgan Impact Bend-Angle Nail
N Tester, T
The MIBANT
T Device or T
Tool ......... 1 45
A6-D ment of Thre ad-Crest Dia
Measurem ameter for H
Helically Thre
eaded Nails . ............... 1 50

Part 7 Testing Procedures

P for Pallets and
a Related s ................ ............... 1 51
d Structures
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A7-A Potential Uses of Des s ................ .................. .................. ............... 1 55
scribed Tests
A7-B Selected Standards, Specification
S ns, Articles, a
and Reportss Referenced
d in Text .. 1 56

ets .............. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 57

Part 8 Slip Shee
Figurres
8-1 ed Machine Direction
Corrugate D (M D) .............. .................. .................. ............... 1 62
8-2 One-Tab Slip Sheet .. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 64
8-3 Two-Tab Slip Sheet, Opposite
O .... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 64
8-4 Two-Tab Slip Sheet, Adjacent
A ..... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 65
8-5 b Slip Sheet ................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 65
Three-Tab
8-6 Four-Tab Slip Sheet . .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 66
8-7 egree Cornerr Cutout ...... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 66
Ninety-De
8-8 Diagonal Corner Cuto
out ................................ .................. .................. ............... 1 66
8-9 er Design .... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 66
Slit-Corne
e
Table
8-1 Range of Tensile Stre
ength Values
s ................. .................. .................. ............... 1 62
datory Appe
Mand endices
A8-I heet Uses ... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 67
Guidelines for Slip Sh
A8-II g a Slip She et Unit Load
Guidelines for Starting d Handling S
System ........ ............... 1 68
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A8-A Developm
ment of the Slip andling Conccept ............ .................. ............... 1 68
S Sheet Ha
A8-B Published
d Documents S Sheets .. .................. .................. ............... 1 70
s Covering Slip

Part 9 Wood Pallets for Dep se ............... .................. ............... 1 72

partment of Defense Us
Figurres
9-1 Isometric View, Partia
al 4-Way Enttry, Size 2, D
Double Deckk, Flush, Non
nreversible
Pallet for Warehouse Use ........... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 79
9-2 y Entry, Size
Isometric View, 2-Way e 5, Double D
Deck, Flush , Nonreversiible Pallet 1 79
9-3 Top and Side
S View, Partial
P 4-Way
y Entry, Size
e 2, Double D
Deck, Double
e-Wing
Pallet ....................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 80
9-4 Top, Side , and End V iews, Full 4--Way Entry, Size 2, Dou ble Deck,
Wing, Nonreversible Bloc k Pallet ...... .................. .................. ............... 1 81
Double-W

ix

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

9-5 Compone nts for a Fulll 4-Way Ent ry, Size 2, D

Double Deck , Double-Wi ng,
sible Block Pallet
Nonrevers P .......... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 82
9-6 Top, Side , and End V iews, Full 4--Way Entry, Size 6, Dou ble Deck,
Wing, Nonreversible Bloc k Pallet ...... .................. .................. ............... 1 83
Double-W
9-7 Compone nts for a Fulll 4-Way Ent ry, Size 6, D
Double Deck , Double-Wi ng,
sible Block Pallet
Nonrevers P .......... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 84
9-8 Top, Side , and End V iews, Full 4--Way Entry, Size 7, Dou ble Deck,
Wing, Nonreversible Bloc k Pallet ...... .................. .................. ............... 1 85
Double-W
9-9 Compone nts for a Fulll 4-Way Ent ry, Size 7, D
Double Deck , Double-Wi ng,
sible Block Pallet
Nonrevers P .......... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 86
9-10 Top, End,, and Side V iews of Partial 4-Way En ng Pallet ... 1 87
ntry, Size 1, Double-Win
9-11 Side View
ws, Partial 4--Way Entry, Flush or Dou
uble-Wing, S et ............ 1 88
Stringer Palle
9-12 Top, End,, and Side V iews, Partia l 4-Way Entrry, Size 3, D
Double Deck,,
Wing, Nonreversible Strin ger Pallet ... .................. .................. ............... 1 89
Double-W
9-13 Top, End,, and Side V iews, Partia l 4-Way Entrry, Size 8, D
Double Deck,, Flush,
Nonrevers er Pallet ........................ .................. .................. ............... 1 90
sible Stringe
9-14 Top, End,, and Side V iews, 2-Way
y Entry, Size
e 4, Double D
Deck, Flush,
Nonrevers er Pallet ........................ .................. .................. ............... 1 91
sible Stringe
9-15 Top, Side , and End V iews, Partia l 4-Way Entrry, Double D
Deck, Double
e-Wing,
Nonrevers
sible Stringe
er Pallet with Wood Deckb oards ...... 1 92
h Reclaimed--/Recycled-W
9-16 Isometric View, Size 2,
2 Double De Nonreversiblle Pallet ...... ............... 1 93
eck, Flush, N
9-17 Nailing Diiagrams and Nail Sizes for
f Sizes 2, 6
6, and 7, No
onreversible
Block Pallets ............ .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 94
es
Table
9-1 et Sizes ...... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 72
DoD Palle
9-2 Stringer and
a zes ............. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 76
Block Siz
9-3 Actual De zes, (inch). .. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 77
eckboard Siz
9-4 DoD Palle
ets, by Part Number
N ...... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 78
9-5 Cross Refference Llistt and Charac
cteristics, Pa ational Stockk Number .. 1 95
art No. to Na
datory Appe
Mand endix
A9-I Reference nts .............. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 96
ed Documen
mandatory Appendix
Nonm A
A9-A Reference nts .............. .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 96
ed Documen

mance Specification for Pallets to b

Part 10 Perform be Used in A
Automated
ad Material Handling Equipment ... .................. .................. ............... 1 99
Unit Loa
Figurres
10-1 ment of Palle
Measurem et Length, Width,
W eight, with a "T"
and He
nd Carpente r Square .... .................. .................. .................. ............... 1 99
Square an

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

10-2 Measuring
g the Diagon ottom .......... .................. ............... 1 99
nals of Pallett Top and Bo
10-3 Schematic
c Diagram Showing
S the Measuring o
of Pallet Decck Flatness .. ............... 2 00
10-4 Schematic
c Diagram o f the Slip Re
esistance Te
ests of Pallett Decks ....... ............... 2 01
10-5 Measuring
g Pallet Defl ection ........ .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 02
10-6 Schematic
c Diagram Showing
S Pallet Compone
ent Deflection
n when Supp
ported
in Automa
atic Handling
g Equipment ................. .................. .................. ............... 2 02
datory Appe
Mand endix
A10-II nce Specific ations for Pa
Performan allets to be U
Used in Auto
omated Unit--Load
Material Handling
H Equ
uipment ...... .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 04
mandatory Appendices
Nonm A
A10-A
A Typical Clearances B etween Com
mponents and
d Between P
Pallets and C
Components
ated Unit Loa
of Automa ad Handling Equipment .................. .................. ............... 2 05
B Reference
A10-B es ............... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 05

Part 11 Plastic and

a Plastic Composite Pallets ..... .................. .................. ............... 2 06
Figurres
11-1 allet ............ .................. .................. ............... 2 07
Type 1, Two-way Entrry Plastic Pa
11-2 way Entry Pl astic Pallet . .................. .................. ............... 2 07
Type 2, Partial Four-w
11-3 Type 3, Full Four-way
y Entry Plasttic Pallet ..... .................. .................. ............... 2 08
11-4 Nestable Pallets ....... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 08
11-5 e Pallets ...... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 09
Stackable
11-6 Photograp
ph of Rubbe rized Spray Coating of a Pallet Deckk to Reduce Slipping
of Packag
ged Product .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 11
11-7 Photograp
ph of Rubbe r Grommet and
a Texturin g in Pallet D
Deck to Redu
uce
o Product ... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 11
Slipping of
11-8 Partial Ca
argo Lips ....................... .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 12
11-9 Photograp
ph of Inserts
s Placed in In
nside of Pall et Deck ...... .................. ............... 2 12
0 A Cut-Aw ay of a Plasttic Pallet Se ction Showss the Foamed
11-10 d Interior of Ribs from
d Foam Mold
Structured ding ............ .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 14
1 A Cut-a-w
11-11 way View of a Twin Shee
et Thermoforrmed Pallet S
Section ....... ............... 2 15
11-12
2 Example of
o a Pallet Assembled
A with
w Profile Exxtended Pla stic Compon
nents ....... 2 16
11-13
3 Example of
o a Snap Fi tting Betwee
en a Pallet D
Deck and a P
Post ............ ............... 2 17

Based Palletts ............... .................. .................. ............... 2 23

Part 12 Corrugatted/Paper-B
Figurres
12-1 mb Pad and Sample with Liner Rem
Honeycom moved to Exp
pose Honeyccomb
Cell Struc
cture ........... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 27
12-2 Folded Intterlocking C orrugated Pa
allet ........... .................. .................. ............... 2 29
12-3 Laminated
d Corrugated
d Strips to F orm a String
ger .............. .................. ............... 2 30

xi

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1-20 016
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loa
ads

12-4 Folded Sttringer Style with Folded Deck Corru

ugated Pallett ................. ............... 2 30
12-5 Folded Block Style wi th Folded Sa
andwich Decck Corrugate
ed Pallet ..... ............... 2 31
12-6 ound Tube Block Style C orrugated Pa
Spiral Wo allet ........... .................. ............... 2 31
e
Table
12-1 Typical Corrugated Bo
oard Specific d in Paper P allets .......... ............... 2 26
cations used

allets ......... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 34

Part 13 Metal Pa
Figurres
13-1 Metal Stri nger Pallet . .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 36
13-2 Metal Block Pallet ..... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 36
13-[3-11] Various et Designs ... .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 37
s Metal Palle
2 Flat Bar .................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 43
13-12
13-13
3 Angle ..... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 43
13-14
4 Rod .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 44
13-15
5 Channel ................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 44
13-16
6 Square Tu
ubing .......... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 45
13-17
7 Rectangular Tubing .. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 45
13-18
8 Round Tu
ubing ........... .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 46
13-19
9 Roll Form
med Channel .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 46
13-20
0 Example of
o Standard Stamped Co
omponent (s tacking guid
de) .............. ............... 2 47
13-21
1 Custom Roll
R Formed Component
C .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 48
13-22
2 Custom Roll
R Formed Component
C .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 48
13-23
3 Custom Stamped
S Com
mponent ..... .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 49
13-24
4 Custom Stamped
S Com
mponent ..... .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 49

Part 14 Molded, Wood-Base

ed Composite Pallets. . .................. .................. ............... 2 55
Figurres
14-1 A Pressw ood Pallet .. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............... 2 55
14-2 Typical Wood
W Particle
es Used in Presswood Pa
allets .......... .................. ............... 2 57
e
Table
14-1 o Weight Cllass Distribu tions .......... .................. .................. ............... 2 60
Example of

xii

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

PALLETS, SLIP
S SHEETS, AND
D OTHER
R BASES FOR UNIT LOADS
S

Part 1
Definitions
D s and Term
minology Co
overing Pa
allets and R
Related Structures

1 SCOPE

Part 1 provides deffinitions and terminology

t associated
a witth the constru
uction and use
e of pallets an
nd
relate
ed structures, such as skidss and pallet containers.
c

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Pa
art 1 is to prov
vide generally
y accepted de
efinitions and terminology tthat serve as
the ba
asis for commmon understan nding when describing pal lets and relatted structuress and their use
e.

3 REFERENCED
R D STANDARDS

ollowing is a list of standarrds and speciffications that were reviewe

The fo ed during the preparation o
of
Part 1,
1 showing the e year of approval:

ANSI//MHIA MH1 - 2005, Part1 Definitions an

nd Terminolog
gy Covering P
Pallets and R
Related
Structtures

ANSI//MHIA MH1 - 2005, Part3 Wood

W Pallets
s

ANSI//MHIA MH1 - 2005, Part 4 Export Palletts

ANSI//MHIA MH1 - 2005, Part 5 Driven Faste

eners for Asse
embly of Palle
ets and Relatted Structuress

ANSI//MHIA MH1 - 2005, Part 7 Testing Proc

cedures for Pa
allets and Related Structurres

sher: Materia
Publis al Handling Industry of Ame
erica (MHIA),, 8720 Red O
Oak Blvd, Suite
e 201,
Charlotte, NC 2821
17-3992. www w.mhia.org

ASTM
M D 1185 – 19 998a, Standard Test Metho d Structures Employed in
ods for Palletts and Related
Materrials Handling
g and Shipping
g

ASTM
M F 680 – 198
80 (1993), Tes
st Methods fo
or Nails

ASTM
M F 1575 – 19
995, Test Metthod for Deterrmining Bend ing Yield Mom
ment of Nails

ASTM
M F 1667 – 20
000, Specifica ven Fastenerss: Nails, Spikkes, and Staples
ations for Driv

IEEE//ASTM SI-10,, Standard forr Use of the In System of Units (SI): The Modern Metriic
nternational S
Syste
em

sher: ASTM International,

Publis I West Conshohocken, PA, 19428-2959.
100 Barr Harrbor Drive, W
www.astm.org

ISO 445
4 – 1996, Pallets
P ng – Vocabul ary
for Matterials Handlin

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ISO 6780
6 – 1988 (1994), Generral-Purpose Flat ansit of Goods – Principal
F Pallets forr Through Tra
Dimennsions and Toolerances

ISO 8611
8 – 1991, General-Purp gh Transit of Goods – Tesst Methods.
pose Flat Pallets for Throug
Performance Requuirements, De
esign Rating, and Maximum m Working Looad. Determination of Join
nt
Strength

ISO/DDIS 12777-1 – 1994, Metho

ods of Test fo
or Pallet Joints
ts with Mechaanical Fastene
ers – Pallet
Nails, Other Dowel-Type Fasten
ners, and Staples – Determ mination of Be
ending Resisttance, Testing
g
hank Withdraw
for Sh wal and Headd Pull-Through Resistance e

sher: Internattional Organiz

Publis andardization (ISO), 1 rue d
zation for Sta de Varembé, Case Postale
e
56, CH-1211, Genève 20, Switz zerland/Suisse e. www.iso.orrg

CA, Uniform Standard

NWPC S for Wood
W Pallets
s

sher: Nationa
Publis al Wood Palle
et and Contain
ner Associatio
on (NWPCA), 1421 Prince
e Street, Suite
e
340, Alexandria,
A VA, 22314. wwww.palletcentrral.com

Fiber Box Handboo

ok – 1999

sher: Fibre Box

Publis B Associatio g Meadows, IL, 60008. ww
on, 2850 Golf Road, Rolling ww.fibrebox.o
org

FAO (Food
( and Ag griculture Organization), IS
SPM, Publicattion No. 15, In
nternational S
Standards for
Phyto
osanitation Me easures – Regulation of Wood
W Packagin ng Material and Internationnal Trade, 20
009
FAO Rome,
R Italy. www.ippc.int
w

4 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

accurracy: degree of agreementt between spe

ecified value and that actu
ually obtained.

adhessive: material capable of adhering

a one surface to an nother, such a
as plies of fibe
erboard,
facing
gs of corrugatting medium in combined corrugated
c booard, overlapp
ping sides of container, and
flaps in closing con
ntainer as well as unit load to pallet decckboards or de
eck.

ay entry pallett: see pallet, all-way entry

all-wa y.

num pallet: se
alumin ee pallet, alum
minum.

nation of level of performan

ysis: determin
analy nce.

annullarly threaded
d nail or annullar nail: see nail,
n annularlyy threaded orr nail, annularr.

mbled pallet: see pallet, as

assem ssembled.

mbly: process
assem s of connectin
ng componentts to form an integral struccture.

bandiing notch: see strap slot.

bark-ffree wood: wo
ood from whic
ch all bark, ex
xcluding the vvascular camb
bium, ingrown
n bark around
d
knots, and bark poockets betwee
en rings of annual growth h have been rem
moved. [ISPMM No. 15, 200
02]

base:: structural as
ssembly desig
gned to suppo
ort unit load.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

base pallet: see pallet, base.

basis weight, conta

ainerboard: see
s containerb
rboard, basis weight.

er: see stringe

beare e preferential term in some
er; bearer (the e British Com
mmonwealth ccountries).

bearinng surface: in
nterface betwween pallet eleements and ccomponents, ssuch as deckboard and
stringer or stringerboard or cros
ss stringer of corrugated
c pa
allet. Also, in
nterface betweeen pallet top
p
deck and unit load supported by y pallet, such as complete top deck for cconcentrated unit load.
Also, interface betwween pallet bottom deck and pallet-sup pporting area. Also, interfaace between
bottomm deck of stacked pallet annd palletized unit load sup
pporting stackked pallet.

bevel: see chamfe

er.

l, sawn: missing edge alon

bevel, ng wood component, resul ting from saw
wing or planning.

d: see deckboard, chamfe

bevelled deckboard ered.

bias: systematic error

e in test results; contribu
uting to differe
ence between population means of test
resultts.

bin: multi-sided
m sup
perstructure to
t be mounted
d on pallet ba
ase, with or w
without cover; also known a
as
box or container.

allet: see palllet, bin.

bin pa

biodegradable: maaterial properrty resulting in

n deterioration
n due to such
h environmenttal factors as
expos
sure to moistu
ure, oxygen, and
a bacterial action.

block:: rectangularr, square, multisided, or cylindrical deckk or deck-mat spacer betwe een top and
bottom
m decks or be eneath top deeck of single-ddeck pallets, ooften identifie
ed by its locattion within palllet
as corner block, ennd block, edgee block, innerr block, centeer or middle block; post.

block dimensions: length meas sured in directtion of pallet l ength; width measured in direction of
pallet width; heightt measured in
n direction of pallet
p height; not related too grain direction of block.

block pallet: see pallet,

p block.

block size: stated in terms of width followed by height and

d length.

blow molding:
m see
e molding, blo
ow.

boardd: wood mem

mber sawn and
d dressed on its four sidess, less than 2 in. (50 mm) in
n nominal
thickn
ness.

d, corrugated: see corruga

board ated board.

boardd, water-resisttant: sized bo

oard, treated with water-re
epellant materrial, to have a degree of
resistance to dama age or deteriooration by watter.

bolt: fastener with coarse threa

ad along shan nk at end of op
pposite squarre or hexagon
nal head,
providded with washhers and nut; to be inserted
d in oversize predrilled hole.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

bolted
d pallet: see pallet,
p bolted..

m deck: asse
bottom embly of elem
ments compris sing lower facce of pallet; be
earing surface
e of pallet; with
construction being unidirectionaal, overlap (tw
wo-directional)), and of perim
meter or cruciform design
(see pallet
p classific
cation).

m deckboard:: see deckbo

bottom oard, bottom.

box: see bin; also,, container with solid or clo

osely fitted sid
des, ends, bo ottoms, and toop made of
wood, metal, plastiic, fiberboard, paperboard,, or foamed o or cellular plasstic, complete
ely and secure
ely
enclosing box conttents.

box pallet: see palllet, bin.

ket: angle-sha
brack aped support or connection
n fastened to components to be tied tog
gether.

ngth, in lbf/in..2, as measurred with Cadyy or Mullen tesster.

burstiing strength: material stren

d deckboard: see deckboa

butted ard, butted.

CAD: computer-aided design.

CAD pallet
p softwarre: tool to des
sign pallet forr specified us e conditions.

cage pallet: see pallet, cage.

er: sheet thick

calipe kness, in thou
usandths of in
nch, with 0.00
01 in. often ca
all “point.”

ever pallet: see

cantile s pallet, can
ntilever.

cap: see mat.

city, shock-ab
capac pability of susttaining impacct load without failure.
bsorbing: cap

city, shock-da
capac amping: capa
ability of lesse
ening effect off impacted loa
ad.

ve pallet: see
captiv e pallet, captiv
ve.

age bolt: bolt with square or

carria o other shapeed oversize e
element next tto head to pre
event head
from turning
t duringg nut tightenin
ng or loosenin
ng; coach boltt.

center cluster deck

kboards: center bottom de
eckboards loccated below s tringer foot be
etween string
ger
notches.

chamfer: machine ed or molded inclined

i surfa
ace along partt or full length
h of edges or deckboards
betweeen stringers or blocks to fa acilitate passage of fork-arrm wheels of pallet trucks and to guide
tines of fork lift truc
ck during entrry into pallet; bevel.

chambered deckbo
oard: see dec
ckboard, cham
mfered.

chipboard: paperb
board usually made from re
eclaimed pap
per stock, with
h center ply orr plies of solid
d
board.
fiberb

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

chord
d: see stringe
er chord.

class:: denoting strringer or block pallet (see pallet

p classificcation).

classiification: arra
angement acc
cording to sys
stematic divisiion into group
pings (see pallet
classiification).

hed nail: see

clench e nail, clenche
ed.

hed nail: see nail, clinched

clinch d.

d distribution system: ship

closed pping system restricted to m
moving goodss between sp
pecified plantss
and fa
acilities.

h bolt: see ca
coach arriage bolt.

coeffiicient of frictio
on: ratio of fric
ction force be
etween two bo
odies to norm
mal force pressing these
bodies together.

coeffiicient of frictio
on, kinetic: co macroscopic relative motio
oefficient of friction under cconditions of m on
betweeen two touch hing bodies.

coeffiicient of frictio
on, static: coeefficient of fric
ction correspo
onding to maxximum friction
n force that
must be overcome e to initiate ma
acroscopic mo otion betweenn two touchin
ng bodies.

coeffiicient of variattion: measure

e of dispersio d values; stan
on of observed ndard deviatio
on of observe
ed
values divided by value
v average
e.

psible bin, box

collap x, or containe
er: superstruc
cture that mayy be folded orr separated in
nto its
component elemen nts.

collarr: fixed, hinge

ed, removablee, or collapsib
ble horizontal solid, slatted, or mesh, fra
aming membe ers
to tie together vertiical elements of pallet supe
erstructure; a
also, element on top of palllet deck to
contain unit load placed on palle et; rail.

mn: fixed or detachable vertical member forming partt of superstru

colum ucture to facilittate stacking
with or
o without side
e superstructu
ure components; post.

combined board: fabricated

f pan
nel assemble
ed from severa
al componentts such as so
olid or
corrug
gated fiberboard.

combo pallet: see pallet, combo

o.

commmercial pressu
ure impregnattion: treatment of wood wiith a chemica al preservative e through a
proce
ess of pressurre in accordan
nce with an offficially recog nized techniccal specificatio
on.

companion stringer: see stringe

er, companion
n.

compliance: meas
surement of conformance with
w establish
hed requireme
ents and crite
eria.

component: eleme ent of pallet such as deckb

board, stringe
er, stringerboa
ard, and blockk, and cross
stringer of corrugatted pallet.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

conce
entrated load:: see load, co
oncentrated.

condiitioning: expo
osure to speciific environme
ent, often untiil approximate
e equilibrium is reached w
with
that environment.
e

conne o two or morre members, ccomponents, or assemblie

ection: structural junction of es, designed tto
be assembled with h mechanical fasteners, adhesives, weld ds, or interloccks, or a comb bination of
them, to transmit structural
s force
es safely; ofte
en identified b
by location wiithin pallet as end
conneection, centerr connection, corner
c conne ection. Colloq quially, the terrm “joint” is ussed in place o
of
the te
erm “connectio on.”

ector: see fas

conne stener.

container: see bin.

containerboard: co orrugated and

d solid fiberbo
oard manufacctured from lin
nerboard, corrrugating
materrial, and filler.

containerboard, ba
asis weight: weight
w 00 ft2 (MSF).
of linerrboard or corrrugating medium, in lbf/100

container pallet: se
ee pallet, bin..

contin er: beveled edge along full length of de

nuous chamfe eckboard betw
ween outer strringers or
blocks
s.

nuous deck pa
contin allet: see palllet, solid-deck
k.

erter: supersttructure place

conve ed on flat palle
et to change iit to post palle
et.

er bracket: an
corne ngle-shaped connector
c fasttened to both
h pallet compo
onents to be ttied together.

er chamfer: bevel on pallett corner, that is, along oute

corne er vertical corrner of outer p
pallet stringerr or
block.

mpact test to determine pa

er drop test: im
corne allet rigidity.

gated board
corrug

siingle face: bo
oard consistin
ng of one corrrugated eleme
ent glued to o
one flat facing
g.

siingle wall, dou

uble face: on
ne corrugated
d inner elemen
nt glued to tw
wo flat facingss.

ouble wall: tw
do wo corrugated
d inner eleme
ents glued to ttwo outer and
d one inner fla
at facings.

trriple wall: thre

ee corrugated
d inner elements glued to ttwo outer and
d two inner fla
at facings.

gated paper pallet:

corrug p see pa
allet, corrugatted paper.

gating facing:: see facing, corrugated bo

corrug oard.

gating materia
corrug g medium: paper used in forming fluted
al, corrugating d element of corrugated
board
d.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

corrug
gation: flute in corrugated board.

cost per
p trip: avera
age cost of pa
allet use for single
s one-wa
ay trip consistiing of four to six handlingss.

counttersunk fasten
ner: see faste
ener, counterrsunk.

k: lengthwise separation off parts of woo

crack od member th rough part off cross sectionn (for purpose
es
of ASME MH1.8M – 1996 stand dard, cracks exceeding
e one
e-half of deptth, width, or th
hickness of
memb ber shall be trreated as splits).

ce for moving heavy objectts by means o

e: lifting devic
crane of movable ovverhead equip
pment.

p deflection: gradual
creep g chang
ge in flexural deformation o
over time.

criteriion: standard
d of measurem
ment.

al defect: see
critica e defect.

cross stringer: see

e stringer, cro
oss.

crucifform bottom-d
deck construcction: butted oro mitered bo ottom deckboa ards arrangedd in same plane
and loocated along pallet perimeter in both dirrections of pa
allet length an
nd width, with center and
conne ector boards perpendicular
p r to each othe
er.

crucifform perimete
er-base pallet:: see pallet, cruciform
c peri
rimeter-base.

cup: conical, squa

are, or rectang
gular spacer, designed to ffacilitate palle
et nesting.

plete repeatable series of sequential

cycle of use: comp s ha
andling.

damaage: physical deterioration of pallet or container due to rupture of members, co

omponents, or
conne
ections.

damaage coefficient: economic factor

f relating of pallet repair, based on
g damage sevverity to cost o
econo
omic indicatorrs for prices, cost
c of materials, and labo
or.

dama age cost: mea

asure of econ
nomic deteriorration resultin e occurrence of damage to
ng from single o
pallet.

age frequency
dama y: number of occurrences of damage to
o pallet.

age rate: ratio

dama o of damage frequency
f to number
n of pa
allet trips.

age severity: measure of extent

dama e et damage perr damage occcurrence.
of palle

m load: see lo
datum oad, datum.

debarrking: removaal of bark from

m round wood
d. (Debarking
g down does not necessarrily make the
wood bark-free.) [F
FAO, 1990]

yed wood: wo
decay ood of insignificant strengtth as compare
ed to that of ssound wood o
of same speciies
and origin.
o

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

deck: top or bottomm surface of pallet,

p consistting of one orr more eleme nts, that is, sllatted, close-
board
ded, or solid; (see
( pallet cla
assification).

deck, cantilevered:: deck extend

ding beyond stringers
s or b locks, or both
h, resulting in deck
hang.
overh

deck, racked acros

ss: pallet dec
ck spanning between
b pallett supports.

deck, solid: singular, continuous sheet.

deck dimensions: length of top or bottom surface of palle et measured inn its length direction; width
h
p or bottom su
of top urface of palle
et measured in its width dirrection; thickn
ness of deck ccomponents
measured from spa acer to top orr bottom surfa
ace of pallet.

deck mat: assemb

bly of deckboa
ards and strin
ngerboards orr solid sheet o
of material, fo
orming deck o
of
block pallet.

deck opening: ape

erture provide
ed in bottom deck
d to allow pallet-truck w
wheels to bear on floor; decck
ow.
windo

deck spacer: see spacer.

deck spacing: see

e deckboard spacing.
s

deck span: distanc

ce between deck
d supports
s.

deck window: see deck opening

g.

deckbboard: eleme
ent or compon
nent of pallet deck,
d oriented
d perpendicular to stringerr or
stringerboard.

board, beveled: see deckb

deckb board, chamfe
ered.

board, bottom
deckb m: any of deck
kboards locatted in pallet b
bottom deck.

board, butted:: inner deckb

deckb board placed tightly
t againsst adjacent de
eckboard durin
ng pallet
assem
mbly.

deckbboard, chamfe ered: deckbo

oard with edge
es of one facee beveled, eitther along fulll or specified
length
h of board or between strin
ngers or block
ks, with bevel facilitating en
ntry of pallet-jjack wheels
and tines of forklift trucks.

board, end: deckboard

deckb d loc
cated at pallett end; leadboa
ard; leading-e
edge deckboa
ard; outer
deckb
board.

board, inner: any deckboa

deckb ard located be
etween end de
eckboards; in
nterior deckbo
oard.

board, outer: see deckboa

deckb ard, end.

deckbboard, rackedd across (RAS S): pallet deckboard spann ning between pallet supports (an outputt
of pallet software evaluation
e of wood
w pallets, providing info
formation on lload-carrying capacity and
d
mation of pallet and its dec
deform cks where racck frame supp ports pallet att deckboard e
ends).

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

deckb
board, top: an
ny deckboard
ds located in pallet
p top dec k.

deckbboard dimens sions: length of

o deck comp ponent measu ured in direction of pallet w
width; width off
deck component measured
m in direction of pa
allet length; th ickness of de
eck componen nts measured d
vertically from top to
t bottom of deckboard.
d

deckb board projectiion: overhang

g extending frrom outer facce of outer stringer to deckboard end (se
ee
lip, wiing).

board size: sttated in terms

deckb s of thickness
s followed by w
width and len
ngth.

board spacing
deckb g: distance be
etween adjac
cent deckboarrds; deck spa
acing.

board span: distance

deckb d betw
ween deckboa
ard supports.

defec arity or imperfection that reduces streng th, durability, or value.

ct: an irregula

definiition: explicit statement of meaning of words

w and phrrases.

ction: amount of flexural deformation du

deflec ue to imposed
d load; sag.

mination: visib
delam ble separation
n in the plane
e or panel com
mponent.

design: see pallet design.

design load: see lo

oad, design.

chable-frame pallet:
detac p see pa
allet, detacha
able-frame.

e: mechanica
device al contrivance
e.

necting two non-adjacent, opposite pall et corners me

onal: line conn
diago easured acro
oss pallet deckk.

dimennsion: bulk piiece of lumbe

er to be reman
nufactured intto pallet comp
ponent; meassured extent o
or
distan
nce; see palle
et dimension.

nsional lumbe
dimen er: see lumbe
er, dimension.

directtion: line of movement.

m

disposable pallet: see pallet, ex

xpendable; pa
allet, single-u
use.

bution system
distrib m: system of shipping
s good
ds among pla
ants and facilitties.

doublle-deck pallet: see pallet, double-deck.

d

doublle-face pallet: see pallet, double-face.

d

doublle-wing pallet:: see pallet, double-wing.

d

ally threaded or fluted palle

drive screw: helica et nail; occasiionally, helica
ally threaded pallet nail with
small thread angle.

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

driven
n fastener: se
ee fastener, driven.
d

bottom box pallet: see palllet, drop-botttom box.

drop-b

drop height:
h distan
nce of free-fall.

my load: see load, dummy

dumm y.

my product: see
dumm s load, dum
mmy.

age: wood pa
dunna ackaging matterial used to secure or sup
pport a comm
modity, but wh
hich does not
remaiin associated with the com
mmodity.

bility: life expe

durab ectancy and cost
c per trip, in terms of nu
umber of one--way trips.

dwell time: time re

equired or spe
ecified at each equency until damage occcurs or unit loa
h resonant fre ad
mes unstable.
becom

mic load: see

dynam e load, dynam
mic.

econoomic life: num

mber of trips pallet
p will makke, provided itt is properly rrepaired, with maximum
return
n on investmeent (an outputt of pallet softw
ware evaluatiion).

edge deckboard: see

s deckboarrd, edge.

edge of pallet: see

e pallet side.

edge stringer: see

e stringer, edg
ge.

effecttiveness: resu
ult of producin
ng desired ha gree of conforrmance to design.
appening; deg

ying device: contrivance

empty c fo
or moving or removing con
ntents of conttainer.

end of
o pallet: see pallet, end off.

entry:: opening bettween decks or eck to permit passage of liifting devices of handling
o beneath de
equipment between stringers orr blocks.

ange pallet: see

excha s pallet, exc
change.

ndable pallet: see pallet, expendable.

expen e

exporrt pallet: see pallet, exportt.

sed pallet surrface: see palllet surface, exposed.

expos e

g, corrugated board: linerb

facing board used as
s flat memberrs bonded to ccorrugating m
medium to form
m
corrug
gated board.

g weight: weight of all facin

facing ngs of 1000 ftt2 (90 m2) of ccorrugated bo
oard, excludin
ng that of
coatin
ngs, impregna
ants, and adhesive.

1
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

failure
e: breakdown n of functionin
ng, when palleet is no longeer suitable for specified, subsequent,
seque ential testing or
o intended seervice; rupturre of test speccimen, compo onent, or connnection.

ner: device fo
fasten or connecting pallet compo
onents to form
m integral stru
ucture; such a
as nail, staple
e,
screw
w, bolt, lag bollt, adhesive, and
a weld.

ner, countersu
fasten unk: fastenerr with top of head
h e than ⅛ in. ((3 mm) below
flush wit h, or not more w,
surfac
ce of fastened
d member.

ner, driven: ro
fasten ound-wire plaain-shank, hellically threade
ed, annularly threaded, flutted, or twisted
d
squarre-wire nail an
nd staple with
h the round- and
a squared-w wire legs of sa
ame length.

fastenner shear indeex (FSI): mea mated shear rresistance of a given pallett fastener
asure of estim
relativ
ve to shear re
esistance of high-quality “base” pallet na
ail.

ner shear resiistance (FSR)): computed force required

fasten d to cause co
onnections to fail in shear
(see load,
l fastenerr withdrawal or
o load, fasten
ner pull-throug
gh).

fastenner withdrawa al index (FWI)): measure of the estimate ed withdrawal resistance o

of a given
fastenner, based on n lesser of shaank or leg withdrawal or he
ead or crown pull-through resistance,
relativ
ve to that of high-quality “b
base” pallet na
ail.

ner withdrawa
fasten al resistance (FWR)
( or fasttener pull-thro
ough resistan
nce (HPR): se
ee load,
fasten
ner withdrawa
al or load, fastener pull-thro
ough.

board: in conttainer industry

fiberb board used in container
y, solid or corrrugated fabri cated paperb
manufacture.

board, solid: solid

fiberb s board made
m by laminating two or m
more plies of containerboa
ard.

fiberb s pallet, fiberboard.

board pallet: see

filler: center ply orr plies of solid fiberboard.

fillet: concave tran

nsition from on other part of a product, dessigned to reduce internal
ne part to ano
stress s.

fingerr: see tine.

fixed side: vertical wall of superrstructure atta

ached perman
nently to palle
et base.

board pallet: see pallet, fla

flakeb akeboard.

allet surface: see pallet su

flat pa urface, flat.

flush pallet:
p see pa
allet, flush.

flute: see corrugattion.

flute corrugation
c diirection: norm
mal direction parallel
p to boxx depth (in en
nd-opening co
ontainers, flutte
directtion may be parallel to leng
gth and width)).

1
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

foam:: multicellularr form of plasttic, usually off low density, 2 to 8 lbf/ft3 ((300 to 1200 N
N/m3), create
ed
by acttion of blowing agent on pllastic in molte en condition.

foam pallet: see pallet, foam.

foot: see stringer foot.

f

g from fork truck.

fork: pronged deviice projecting

fork entry:
e opening ecks, beneath top deck and
g between de d ground, or b
beneath string
ger boards; to
o
admitt forks of lifting
g device.

forklifft truck: mova

able, motorize
ed, load-carry
ying device fo r handling pa
alletized unit lo
oad by
insertting forks in pallet.

way block palllet: see palle

four-w et, four-way bllock.

way entry palllet: see pallet, four-way bllock or pallet, four-way strin
four-w inger.

way stringer pallet:

four-w p see pa
allet, four-way
y stringer.

e: mat-assem
frame mbled superstrructure or sup
perstructure a
accessory.

free entry:
e entry fo eels of pallet truck without leaving ground support.
or passage off fork-arm whe

entry pallet: see

free-e s pallet, free
e-entry.

free span:
s pacers within pallet; distan ce between e
distance between sp external pallett supports.

et: see pallet, full-perimete

erimeter palle
full-pe er base.

ment with a chemical agent that reachess the commod

gation: treatm
fumig dity wholly or p
primarily in a
gaseoous state.

functiionality: effec
ctive performa
ance under sp
pecified condiitions.

generral-purpose pallet: see palllet, general purpose.

p

glue: see adhesive

e.

d pallet: see pallet,

glued p glued.

s: movable product or merrchandise forming unit load

goods d.

hand jack:
j see palllet jack.

hand--jack opening
g: see pallet-jack opening.

ent as a result of picking up

handlling: moveme p, transportin g, and setting
g down of em
mpty or loaded
d
pallet.

wood: wood from

hardw f broad-lea
aved tree spe
ecies, contain
ning vessel ele
ements (not n
necessarily
hard in
i texture or dense).
d

1
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

heavy
y-duty pallet: see pallet, he
eavy duty.

height: measure of
o vertical dista
ance.

d crest along tangent para

helix: single thread allel to shank o
of helically th readed fasten
ner; see nail-
threadd helixes.

identiical measurem
ments: obserrved readings within speciffied tolerance
e limits.

injectiion molding: see molding, injection.

inner deckboard: see

s deckboarrd, inner.

or deckboard:: see deckbo

interio oard, inner.

mediate bulk container:

interm c see pallet, silo.

jack: see pallet jac

ck.

joint: see connectiion.

kiln-drying: a process in which wood is driedd in a closed cchamber usin

ng heat and/or humidity
controol to achieve a required mo
oisture conten
nt.

kdown pallet: see pallet, knockdown.

knock kn

olt: wood scre

lag bo ew with bolt head
h provided
d with washerr under head.

latera ailure of pallett connections caused by exxcessive lateral force in direction

al collapse: fa
perpe erpendicular tto stringerboa
endicular to sttringer axis orr parallel or pe ard axis.

leadboard: see de
eckboard, end
d.

ng-end deckboard: see de

leadin eckboard, end
d.

leg: for
f wood palle ets, use block k (leg is the prreferential terrm in some Brritish Commoonwealth
counttries); for plas
stic pallets, us
se leg, a spac cer between to op and bottom
m decks or be
eneath top de
eck
of single-deck palle et.

lid: movable
m coverr for superstru
ucture.

life to first repair: number

n of one
e-way trips off pallet prior to
o requiring re
epair.

weight pallet: see pallet, lig

light-w ght-weight.

oad: see load

line lo d, line.

liner: creased fiberboard sheet covering all side

s walls of ccontainer.

linerboard: paperb
board used fo
or flat facings in corrugated
d fiberboard; a
also, facings o
of solid
fiberb
board.

1
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

linerboard, wet stre

ength: chemically treated flat facings off containerboard to impart improved
rupturre resistance when water-s
saturated.

lip: smmall top-deckkboard overha and for load support

s by wo
ood pallet and
d wrapping an
nchorage (nott
intendded for enabling lifting; lip is
i a common term in some e British Commonwealth co ountries); also
o,
an eleement of plastic pallets, pe erpendicular to
o deckboard length on top
p of deckboard
ds, to keep unnit
load from
f sliding offf pallet.

load: imposed stattionary force, constant in magnitude,

m se
ense, and dire
ection; static lload;
monootonic load.

load, concentrated
d: load imposed over restriicted area of pallet deck.

load, datum: load level at fractio

on of estimate
ed or safe wo
orking load, te
entatively esta
ablished durin
ng
sting, serving as base load
pretes d during subsequent testin g, at observe
ed test deflecttion, and
servin
ng as base for subsequentt deflection me easurementss.

load, design: safe load based on

o probability of failure; ultiimate load mo
odified by facctor of safety;
workinng load.

load, dummy: test load simulatiing actual loa

ad in size and mass; dumm
my product.

load, dynamic: pro ogrammed, singular or repetitive (seque ential, cyclic), unidirectionaal or two-
directtional (reversing), load-rate e influenced, impact
i or vibrrational force applied to strructure
sufficiiently fast for the inertial re
esponse of thee structure to o be of significcant influencee; to simulate
naturaal and man-m made forces to o which structture is likely to
o be exposed d, including th
hose generate ed
while loaded pallett is supported by tines of liffting device d during pallet hhandling; used d in testing too
providde data on es stimated physical durability y and function nality of reusa
able and single-use pallet in
speciffied material handling
h and shipping env vironments; sa afe load supp ported by palle et during its
handling.

load, fastener pull--through or load, fastener withdrawal:

w ccomputed forcce required to
o cause
conneections to fail due to force parallel to axiis of fastener .

load, fastener shea

ar: computed d force require
ed to cause cconnection to fail due to forrce
endicular to ax
perpe xis of fastener.

load, line: weight of

o unit load ac
cting along na
arrow area accross full leng
gth or width off pallet.

load, palletized: un
nit load suppo
orted by palle
et.

load, patch: uniforrmly or partially uniformly distributed

d loa
ad, restricted to portion of p
pallet deck.

load, point: concentrated load at

a point locatio
on of deck.

load, prerated: fixe

ed percentage of average ultimate load obtained durring prerating tests.

load, rated: uniformmly distribute

ed load suppo
orted by pallett, with safety ffactor determ
mined during
preratting tests and
d confirmed du uring mandattory tests.

load, shock: impac

cted force.

1
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

load, static: one-directional loadd applied gradually to struccture in such a manner thaat forces
create
ed by change es in momentu um of load caan be neglecteed in data evaaluation; used
d in testing to
o
provid
de data on the e estimated stiffness,
s stren
ngth, and safee working load for reusablee and single-
use pallets of differrent designs and
a constructtions in speciffied material handling and shipping
onments as well
enviro w as under specified
s load
d and supportt conditions; mmonotonic loaad; safe load
suppoorted by pallet when at rest.

load, test: consisting of mass ofo all unattached load appliccators, includ
ding that of loa
ad-containing
g
box, iff used, and of applied load
d.

load, ultimate: load

d resulting in destruction of
o test specim displacement,, deformation,
men or when d
or defflection becom
mes excessive.

load, uniformly disttributed: load

d imposed in a uniform ma
anner over tota
al, or major p
part of, pallet-
deck area.

bearing pallett surface: see

load-b e bearing surfface.

carrying capa
load-c ad consistent with performance criteria
acity: capability to support given test loa
(not design
d load).

carrying pallet surface: top

load-c p deck of pallet.

load duration:
d periiod of time su
upporting give
en load.

load span:
s free sp e width of supporting memb
pan less twice ber.

ng cycle: com
loadin mprising incremental load increase from m datum load tto ultimate tesst load,
requirred period of load applicatiion, and reduction to datum
m load.

asteners of single shipmen

lot: fa nt of same typ
pe, grade, and
d finish, taken
n from same m
manufacturing
g
lot.

lumbe er, dimensions: sawn piec

ce of wood dre maller than 4 in. (100 mm) in
essed on its ffour sides, sm
its lea
ast dimension.

er-deck pallett: see pallet, lumber-deck.

lumbe l

er pallet: see pallet, lumbe

lumbe er.

datory test: re
mand equired evalua
ation procedu
ure.

mat: panel to be placed

p on top of unit load to hout damaging unit load;
o allow tight sstrapping with
cap; see
s deck mat.

um, wet-stren
mediu ngth: see wett-strength med
dium.

mesh: panel or fab

bric with multitude of adjac
cent openingss or pores.

meshed side: superstructure with

w wall consttructed of messh or framed mesh, self-su
upporting or
ed panels with
frame h multiple ope
enings next to
o each other.

metall pallet: see pallet,

p metal.

1
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

metall plating: see stringer platin

ng.

MIBANT device: Morgan

M Impac
ct Bend Angle
e Nail Tester.

MIBANT angle: an ngular deform

mation of faste
ener shank whhen subjected
d to MIBANT test, providin
ng
ation of impac
indica ct bending res
sistance and toughness
t of fastener.

MIBANT test: stan ndard impact force applied to fastener h head, with fasstener shank cclamped in vise
ch a manner that
in suc t impacted portion, exteending fixed ddistance from vise, is impaccted by
standard mass dro opped from staandard heigh ht, to determin
ne impact ben nding resistan
nce and
toughhness of fastener, such as nail or staple.

ulus, flexural: in packaging

modu g, denoting de egree to which h film or sheeet resists strettching or
bending prior to reaching elastic
c limit during application
a off external forcce; sometimes used to
denotte degree of stiffness.
s

ed pallet: see
molde e pallet, molde
ed.

moldin ocess of forming semi-rigid

ng, blow: pro d plastic elem ent, that invo olves use of gas pressure
inside
e of almost mo
olten plastic tube
t to expan
nd it until it fillss mold cavity and solidifiess along mold
walls.

ng, injection: process of fo

moldin c element by extruding mo
orming plastic olten plastic in
nto cavity.

ss of forming plastic eleme

ng, thermoforrmed: proces
moldin ent by applyin
ng heat and prressure.

onic load: see load, static..

monto

multitiine forktruck: forktruck equipped with more

m than two
o forks to allow
w handling off unit load on
pallet or without paallet.

nail: straight,
s slend der wire faste
ener, usually pointed
p and h
headed, desig gned to be driiven, to hold
two or more pieces s together; maade from endless wire by ccutting point a
and forming hhead and sha ank
end opposite
o pointt end; see thre
eaded nail.

nail, annularly
a threaded or nail, annular: pallet nail with an
nnular thread
ds rolled onto shank; ring
nail; ring-shank
r nail; ring-thread
ded nail.

nail, clenched:
c ven nail with point end ben
driv nt back into w ning member (common terrm
wood of fasten
in somme British Commonwealth countries).

nail, clinched:
c driv
ven nail with point
p end bentt parallel and in tight conta
act with, or ba
ack into, wood
d
of fastening memb ber (see nail, clenched).
c

nail, hardened-stee
h el: heat-treatted and tempe
ered stiff-stocck steel pallett nail, with MIB
BANT angle
betwe een 8 and 28 deg, inclusive
e.

nail, helically
h threa
aded or nail, helical:
h threadded or fluted ppallet nail with continuous helical threadd;
sometimes incorrectly referred to t as spiral orr spirally threa
aded nail; drivve-screw nail; screw nail.

nterrupted thrread: nail witth non-threaded zone betw

nail, in ween threaded
d shank portio
ons, to facilita
ate
collatiing with weldeed wire or pla
astic strip.

1
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

nail, pallet:
p bright, stiff-stock or hardened-steeel, helically tthreaded (with
h medium lea ad angle) or
annularly threaded d nail, up to 4 x 0.177 in. (102 x 4.5 mm ) size with sm mooth or checckered, flat
head up to 11 mm (7/16 in.) diameter and me edium or blun nt diamond orr blunt chisel point or
pointless.

nail, soft:
s pallet na
ail made of low
w-carbon stee
el, with MIBA NT angle of 4
47 deg and hiigher.

nail, stiff-stock
s stee
el: pallet nail made of med
dium-high carrbon steel without heat trea
atment and
tempe ering, with MIBANT angle between 29 and a 45 deg, in nclusive.

nail diiameter or na
ail-wire diameter: average diameter of n
non-deformed
d portion of na
ail shank.

nail-head diameterr: average dia

ameter of hea
ad.

ength: distanc
nail le ce measured parallel to sh
hank axis from
m maximum d
diameter of he
ead-bearing
surfacce to point end.

ength, effectiv
nail le ve: distance measured
m parrallel to shankk axis from m
maximum diam
meter of head-
bearinng surface of two-thirds of point length.

hread: continuous helical or

nail th o annular deformations off nail shank.

hreaded angle
nail-th e: angle of th
hread helix with plane perp
pendicular to n
nail axis.

hread crest diiameter: max

nail-th ed portion of shank.
ximum diametter of deforme

hread flute: continuous

nail-th c he
elical deformation along na
ail shank.

hread helixes: number of helical

nail-th h thread crests along threaded len
ngth of shank.

hread length: length of defformed portio

nail-th on of shank m
measured para
allel to nail axxis.

ype: classifica
nail ty ation of nail with
w plain, heliically threade uted, or annularly threaded
ed, helically flu d
shank k.

wire diameter or nail diameter: average diameter of n

nail-w non-deformed
d portion of na
ail shank.

d pallet: see pallet,

nailed p nailed.

nestable pallet: se
ee pallet, nesttable.

net wrap:
w flexible, plastic netting for wrapping palletized g
goods, includiing pallet, for stability, often
allowiing ventilation
n and refrigeraation of heat-producing loa
ad, such as frresh fruits andd vegetables.

nomin n: customary description of

nal dimension o component or element o
of standard sizze,
uninfluenced by pe
ermissible tole
erance.

eturnable palle
nonre et: see pallett, expendable
e.

eversible palle
nonre et: see pallet,, nonreversiblle.

ative test: see mandatory test.

norma

1
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

notch: filleted cuto

out in lower po
ortion of string
ger to allow e
entry for fork ttine, usually 9 in. (230 mm)
long and
a 1¼ to 1½ ½ in. (32 to 38
8 mm) high.

n around stringer notch with special defe

notch area: region ect limitationss.

notch depth: see notch

n height.

notch fillet: concav

ve transition at
a notch corne
er.

notch height: vertical distance measured

m from bottom of sstringer to top
p of notch.

notch length: dista

ance measure
ed in direction
n of stringer le
ength betwee
en two notch e
ends.

notch location: dis

stance measu
ured from end of stringer ne
earest notch to start of nottch.

notched stringer: stringer

s with two
t or more notches
n space
ed for fork-tine entry.

notched stringer pa
allet: see palllet, notched stringer.
s

openiing: aperture provided in pallet

p bottom deck
d to allow
w forkarm whe
eels of pallet ttruck to bear o
on
groun
nd; window.

openiing height: veertical dimens sion measuredd between de ecks, from floo
or to undersid
de of top deckk,
or from
m floor to top of stringer no
otch or cross stringer of co
orrugated palllet.

outer deckboard: see

s deckboarrd, end.

outer stringer: see

e stringer, outter.

n-conformance to rectangu
out off square: non ular configurattion; pallet of same length or width with
unequual diagonals.

all height: verrtical dimensio

overa ottom to palle
on measured from pallet bo et top.

overhhang: distance of deck or deckboard

d exxtending from outer face off outer pallet sstringer,
stringerboard, or block; wing; lip
p; cantilever; distance
d unit load extendin
ng beyond de eck.

ap pallet: see
overla e pallet, overla
ap-deck.

pallett: portable, ho
orizontal, rigid
d, composite platform used d as base for assembling, storing,
stackiing, handling,, and transporting goods as unit load; offten equipped d with superstructure (see
Fig. 1-1); describedd by providing g the following
g information in the seque
ence listed: cllass, use, typ
pe,
style, bottom deck,, size, and de esign.

pallet, y: pallet with openings forr fork entry tha

t, all-way entry at allow inserrtion of fork th
hrough pallet
sides and ends (se ee pallet, parttial four-way entry
e or pallett, full four-wayy entry).

pallet,
t, aluminum: pallet constru
ucted with aluminum-alloy ccomponents.

pallet,
t, assembled: pallet consis anufactured ccomponents, ready for use
sting of prema e.

pallet,
t, base: flat pa
allet forming base for supe erstructure; sttringer pallet sselected as a
arbitrary basiss
for meeasurement of o durability du
uring pallet-performance e evaluation.

1
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Fig
gure 1-1
Principal
P Pa
arts of Woood Stringe
er and Bloc
ck Pallets

1
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet,
t, bin: base pallet with perm
manently fixed, removable
e, or collapsib le, mounted, bin
superrstructure; box
x pallet; conta
ainer pallet.

pallet, et with blocks between dec

t, block: palle cks or beneath
h top deck.

pallet,
t, bolted: palle
et assembled
d with bolts an
nd nuts.

pallet,
t, box: see pa
allet, bin.

pallet,
t, cage: pallett with perman apsible mesh, rodded, or
nently fixed, hinged, removvable, or colla
barredd-side supersstructure.

pallet,
t, cantilever: pallet
p with top
p or bottom sttringerboardss extending be
eyond pallet ffootprint.

pallet, f use within confines of ssingle facility, system, or ow

t, captive: palllet intended for wnership (not
to be exchanged).

t, combo: pallet made of new and recyc

pallet, cled (reclaime
ed) componen
nts.

pallet,
t, corrugated board:
b pallet constructed of d paper, pape rboard, or fiberboard.
o corrugated

pallet,
t, cruciform pe
erimeter-basee: perimeter-bbase pallet w ith center and
d connector b
boards
perpeendicular to ea
ach other in single
s plane.

t, detachable--frame: pallett with removable superstru

pallet, ucture.

pallet,
t, disposable: see pallet, single-use.
s

t, double cantiilever: pallet with top and bottom string

pallet, gerboards exttending beyon
nd pallet
footprrint.

pallet, k: pallet with top and botto

t, double-deck om decks.

pallet,
t, double-wingg: pallet with top and botto
om deckboard
ds or decks exxtending beyo
ond outer
edgess of stringers or stringerboards.

pallet,
t, drop-bottom
m box: bin palllet with hinge
ed base to pe
ermit discharg
ge of contentss.

pallet,
t, edge of: see pallet, side.

pallet,
t, end of: porttion of pallet at
a end of strin
ngers or string
gerboards.

pallet,
t, exchange: reusable palle
et intended foor use among g designated g
group of shipppers and
receiv
vers where poossession of pallet
p is transferred with ow
wnership of u
unit load; pool pallet.

pallet,
t, fiberboard: pallet constru
ucted with fibe
erboard comp
ponents.

pallet,
t, flakeboard: pallet constructred with fla
akeboard com
mponents.

pallet,
t, flat: genera
al-purpose palllet with even top and botto d without superstructure.
om decks and

pallet,
t, flush: pallett without wing
gs or cantileve
ers; deckboarrds or decks n
not extending
g beyond
spaceers along ends and sides of o pallet.

2
20

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet,
t, foam: pallett constructed with foamed plastic comp
ponents.

pallet,
t, free-entry: block
b pallet having two enttries though w
which fork-arm
m wheels of p
pallet truck ca
an
pass without
w leavinng ground sup pport.

pallet,
t, full four-way
y entry: pallett with opening
gs at both opp
posite ends aand sides, with h accessibilityy
of all openings
o not limited to com
mmon handlin ng equipmentt; block palletts with unidire
ectional
perim
meter boards or o without botttom deck (see pallet, partiial four-way e
entry; pallet, a
all-way entry).

pallet, er base: block pallet with bottom

t, full-perimete b deckb
boards arrangged in same p
plane, with
butted
d or mitered connections,
c forming
f compplete frame alo
ong pallet ends and sides; window palle
et.

pallet,
t, general-purp
pose: double eturnable pall et intended fo
e-deck, flat, re or a wide variety of uses;
reusaable pallet.

pallet,
t, glued: palle
et assembled with adhesive
e.

t, heavy-duty: pallet design

pallet, ned to supporrt heavy unit lloads during multiple usess prior to first
repairr.

pallet,
t, knockdown:: unassemble
ed pallet components, with
h or without fa
asteners, read
dy for
assemmbly.

t, lightweight: pallet made of lumber hav

pallet, ving dimensio han standard lumber
ons smaller th
dimen nsions; pallet made of lighttweight materrials, such as corrugated bboard; intende
ed to support
light unit
u loads.

pallet,
t, lumber: pallet constructe
ed with compo om hardwood or softwood lumber or a
onents cut fro
combination of botth.

pallet,
t, lumber-deck
k: pallet cons
structed with wood
w deckbo
oards with or w
without space
e between
them.

pallet,
t, metal: palle
et fabricated using
u metal orr metal compo
onents.

pallet,
t, molded: pallet formed in mold, made of either plasstic or wood p
particles, flake
es, or strands
bondeed together with
w adhesive.

t, multiple-trip: pallet intend

pallet, ded for repea
ated use; multtiple-use palle
et.

pallet,
t, nailed: palle
et assembled with nails.

pallet,
t, nestable: sk kid having ho
ollow cups or other
o suitablee spacers allo
owing those o
of adjacent
emptyy sides to fit in
nto each othe
er for stacking
g; also, appliccable to nesta
able wood pallets.

pallet,
t, noncaptive: pallet design
ned for reuse within and ou
utside of conffines of single
e enterprise o
or
systemm.

pallet,
t, nonreturnab
ble: see palle
et, single-use.

pallet,
t, nonreversible: pallet with
h dissimilar to
op and bottom
m decks or witthout bottom deck.

pallet,
t, notched strin
nger: pallet with
w all stringe
ers provided w
with two or m
more notches.

2
21

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet,
t, one-trip: se
ee pallet, singlle-use.

pallet,
t, one-way: se
ee pallet, sing
gle-use.

pallet,
t, overlap-dec
ck: block palle
et with top and bottom deccks, deckboarrds, or stringe
erboards abovve
and below
b deck sp
pacers.

t, panel-deck: pallet whose

pallet, e deck or dec
cks consist of such board mmaterials as p
plywood,
partic
cleboard, flake
eboard, strand
dboard, fiberb
board, corrug ated paper, p
plastic, and m
metal.

pallet,
t, paper: see pallet, corrug
gated board.

pallet,
t, partial four-w
way entry: pa
allet with open
nings at both ends and sid des, with limitiing accessibility
of ope
enings to com mmon handling equipment; notched strin nger pallet an nd block palleet with
overla
apping bottom m stringerboarrds and deckbboards (see ppallet, full fourr-way entry; p
pallet, all-wayy
entry)).

pallet,
t, particleboarrd: pallet cons
structed with particleboard
d componentss.

pallet,
t, perimeter-ba
ase: see palllet, full-perime
eter base.

pallet,
t, permanent: pallet intended for repeatted use; reusa
able pallet.

t, plastic: pallet formed witth synthetically produced, p

pallet, polymerized cchemical com
mpounds or
components thereo of.

pallet,
t, plywood: pa
allet whose deck or decks and possibly its deck spaccers consist oof plywood (th
hat
is, venneers adhesiv
vely bonded together,
t with
h the grain of a
adjacent laye
ers at right angles).

pallet,
t, pool: excha
ange pallet forr use in open circuit.

pallet,
t, post: pallet fitted with fixe
ed or detacha
able columns or posts as p
part of its sup
perstructure.

pallet,
t, reassembled: pallet asse
embled with used
u compon ents.

pallet,
t, reclaimed: see
s pallet, recycled.

pallet, allet made reusable by rep

t, recycled: pa pairing, sorting ng pallet, usin
g, or rebuildin ng reclaimed
components or parrts from dama aged pallets.

pallet,
t, remanufactu mbled: pallet made entirelyy of recycled components or parts from
ured, reassem m
dama aged pallets.

pallet,
t, rental: palle
et owned by other
o er and rented by user.
than use

pallet,
t, repaired: pa maged components replace
allet with dam ed with new o
or used components.

pallet,
t, required: pa
allet manufac
ctured accordiing to applica
able specificattions.

pallet,
t, returnable: see pallet, re
eusable.

pallet,
t, reusable: see pallet, mulltiple-use.

2
22

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet,
t, reversible: pallet intende
ed for repeate
ed uses for mo
ore than one unit load.

pallet,
t, screwed: pa
allet assembled with screw
ws.

t, sealed bin: tightly closing

pallet, g bin pallet.

pallet,
t, seaport: use stevedore pallet
p preferential term in some B
(seaporrt pallet, the p British
Comm monwealth co ountries).

pallet,
t, shipping: se
ee pallet, sing
gle-use.

pallet,
t, side of: see
e pallet side.

pallet,
t, silo: pallet container
c usually having liq
quid-tight wal ls and bottom
m provided witth emptying
devicee, for storagee of liquids or particulate go
ood; Intermeddiate Bulk Con ntainer (IBC)..

pallet,
t, single-cantillever: pallet with
w top or bo
ottom stringerb
board extend
ding beyond p
pallet footprintt.

pallet,
t, single-deck:: see skid.

t, single-use: pallet intende

pallet, ed for use witth a single un it load.

pallet,
t, single-wing:: pallet with to
op deckboard
ds or deck exttending beyo nd outer edge es of stringerss
or striingerboards and
a with botto om deckboardds or deck flussh with outer edges of strin
ngers or
stringerboards.

pallet,
t, slatted-deck
k: see pallet, spaced-deck
kboard.

t, slatted-side bin: base pa

pallet, allet with mounted bin supe
erstructure, w
with bin walls h
having space
es
betweeen adjacent narrow-board d wall membe ers.

pallet,
t, slave: rigid pallet or platfform; single, thick
t alletized load in
panel ussed as support base for pa
rack-s
storage facilities or production system.

t, solid-deck: pallet with de

pallet, eck constructe
ed or single o
or multiple ele
ements withou
ut space
betweeen individual deck elemen nts during pallet assembly..

pallet,
t, solid-side: pallet
p with sup
perstructure having
h sides cconsisting of tightly placed
d boards or
panels.

pallet,
t, spaced-deckkboard: palle
et with more or
o less uniform
m spaces betw
ween adjacen
nt deckboardss
or decck sections.

pallet,
t, special-purp
pose: pallet designed
d to ac
ccommodate specific prod
duct or use.

pallet,
t, stacking: pa erstructure that allows pallletized unit load to be placced on top of
allet with supe
loaded pallet witho
out bearing on n lower unit lo
oad, to minimiize, if not elim
minate, damag ge to lower un
nit
load.

pallet,
t, standard: pallet
p design and
a size acce
epted by conssensus approvval of standarrd-developing
g
body.

pallet,
t, stapled: pallet assemble
ed with staples
s.

2
23

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet,
t, steel: pallett fabricated us
sing steel or steel
s compon
nents.

pallet,
t, stevedore: pallet designe
ed for use on seaport ship
pping docks; n
normally large
e pallet of
heavyy-duty, double
e-wing construction.

pallet, d: pallet constructed with strandboard

t, strandboard s ccomponents.

pallet,
t, stringer: do
ouble-deck pa
allet with string
ger spacers b
between deckks.

pallet,
t, surface of: outer face of top or bottom
m deck.

pallet,
t, take-it-or-lea
ave-it: pallet fitted with fixe
ed, spaced, ssolid or notche
ed cleats on ttop deck to
permiit tines of multi-tine fork tru
ucks to pass beneath
b unit lo
oad and remo ove it from pa
allet.

pallet,
t, tank: pallet fitted with tan
nk as supersttructure provid ptying device, for storage o
ded with emp of
liquidss, particulate goods, or gas ses.

pallet,
t, thermoplasttic: pallet con
nstructed with componentss made of syn
nthetically produced,
polym
merized thermmoplastic comp ponents.

pallet,
t, through-tran esigned for reuse.
nsit: pallet de

t, timber: see pallet, woode

pallet, en or wood.

pallet,
t, top deck of: assembly off components
s comprising u
upper load-ca
arrying pallet fface.

pallet,
t, two-way: se
ee pallet, two-way entry.

t, two-way enttry: pallet with openings, accepting

pallet, a han
ndling equipm
ment, only at tw
wo opposite
ends; pallet withou
ut notches in stringers.
s

pallet,
t, unassemble
ed: see pallett, knockdown.

pallet, k, flat, reusable pallet inten

t, warehouse: double-deck nded for gene
eral warehousse use.

t, wing: pallett with top deckboards, botttom deckboarrds, or top and

pallet, d bottom decckboards or
deckss extending be eyond outer edges
e of stringers or string
gerboards.

pallet,
t, wood or woooden: pallet constructed
c with
w wood or w
wood-based ccomponents o
or a
combination of botth.

pallett cap: see ma

at.

pallett classification
n (for wooden pallets)
bottom deck
k: unidirectional, overlap (two
o-directional), p
perimeter, and cruciform consstructions.

class: string
ger and block pallets.
p

style: single
e-deck, doublee-deck reversible, and double--deck nonreversible, flush, single-wing, and
d
double-wingg, single-cantile
ever, and doub
ble-cantilever.

way, partial fourr-way, and full four-way entryy pallets.

type: two-w

ble- and single-use pallets.

use: reusab

2
24

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallett container: bin superstructure mounted

d on pallet basse.

pallett converter: superstructure

e, with or without infill, whicch is applied tto pallet to ch
hange it to posst
n pallet.
or bin

ection of pallet size, class, style, type, bo

pallett design: sele ottom-deck laayout, and appplicable use
category, as well as
a materials, components,
c and fastenerss, resulting in
n description o
of constructio
on
and performance
p in
n terms of loa
ad-carrying ca apacity and d urability of woood pallet.

pallett designationss: terms included in any orrder or specifiication of palllet, such as design,
classiification, cons
stituent materrials, compone
ents, and fastteners.

pallett dimension

length: me easured betwween extreme pallet ends, p parallel to stringers, stringerboards, or

oblong bloocks, parallel to
t strong panel axis, that iss, to face grain of plywood d top deck,
parallel to production-flo
ow direction of
o flakeboard and oriented strandboard top deck, or
parallel to corrugations of corrugated d-board top de eck for pallet without stringgers,
stringerboaards, or oblon
ng blocks; for all other recttangular palle ets with isotrop
pic decks,
length beinng the longesst footprint dim
mension.

width: measured betwe

een extreme pallet
p erpendicular to pallet length.
sides pe

easured vertic
height: me cally from botttom surface o
or floor to top
p surface of pa
allet.

pallett edge: see pallet side.

pallett end: portion of pallet at ends

e of stringe
ers or stringerrboards and a
along outer edge of end
deckbboards.

pallett footprint: ne
et or actual pa
allet top-deck area or floor area occupie
ed by pallet, w
whichever is
largerr, expressed in terms of lenngth and widtth.

pallett handling: sin

ngle pick up, movement, and
a set-down of empty or lo
oaded pallet.

pallett handling env

vironment: co ondition consiisting of chara
acteristics inflluencing palle
et damage,
ding equipmen
includ nt, facilities, handling
h practtices, and palllet repair and
d maintenancce practices.

pallett height: see pallet

p dimens
sion; refers to third dimens ion when desscribing pallett size.

pallett jack: hand-p

propelled, whe
eeled platform e equipped wiith lifting device for moving
m contrivance g
palletized unit load
d.

pallett-jack opening
g: entry way between
b palle
et blocks or sttringers for pa
allet jack, reaching form
floor to
t underside of
o stringerboa
ard or top dec
ck or deckboa ard.

pallett length: see pallet

p dimens on when desccribing pallet size.
sion; refers to first dimensio

pallett life: period during

d which pallet
p remains
s useful undeer given mainttenance cond
ditions,
expreessed in units of time or in number of onne-way trips.

pallett map: see mat.

2
25

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallett nail: see naiil, pallet.

pallett opening: see opening height.

pallett performance
e: measurement of stiffnes
ss, flexural strrength, lateral stability, and
d durability off
pallet.

pallett price: delive

ered cost of pa
allet.

pallett side: portion

n of pallet at ends
e of flush deckboards
d o
or deck along stringers or sstringerboards.

pallett size: overall dimensions of ed in terms off length, follow

o pallet, state wed by width and height
(see pallet
p dimensiion, pallet cla
assification).

pallett spacer: vertical pallet me

ember betwee ottom decks or deck assem
en top and bo mblies, such a
as
pallet stringer and pallet block.

pallett span: distan

nce between pallet
p supportts (see load sspan).

pallett specification requirements

s: see pallet.

pallett style: denote

es dingle-decck, double-decck reversible,, and double-ddeck nonreve ersible, flush,
e-wing, double
single e-wing, single
e-cantilever, and
a double-ca antilever palle
ets (see pallett classification
n).

pallett support: for pallet testing, placement of

o pallet on rig
gid, square, ssemi-circular, or circular
suppo ort beams serrving as simulated ground support, supe erstructure suupport, rack ssupport, fork-
tine support, and sling
s support.

ground sup pport: being uniformly disttributed acrosss bottom decck of double-d
deck pallet orr
stringers, block,
b or spac
cers of single--deck pallet.

superstruccture support: being uniforrmly or non-un

niformly, patcch, or line-disttributed acrosss
pallet-botto
om deck depeending on typpe of superstr ucture involve
ed.

rack suppoort: being linee-distributed along

a edge off pallet-bottom
m deck along narrow area
across full pallet length (racked across deckboard ds) or width (rracked acrosss stringers).

upport: being
fork-tine su g line-distributted along narrrow area acro
oss bottom off pallet-top
deck or strringer-notch chords.
c

sling support: being line

e-distributed along bottomm of pallet-top deck along n
narrow area
outside of deck spacers s of wing palle
et across full pallet length.

pallett surface, exposed: all pallet planes exp

posed to pote
ential contact by goods and
d individuals
handling pallets properly.

pallett surface, flat: flatness of pallet

p surface measured byy its deviation
n from corner--to-corner
straight line across s pallet.

pallett top: load-supporting surfa ce componentts or deck of pallet.

ace of top-fac

pallett trip: pallet us

se including an
a average off five handling
gs.

2
26

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallett truck: see pallet jack.

pallett type: denote

es two-way, partial
p four-wa
ay, and full fou
ur-way entry pallets (see p
pallet
classiification).

pallett use: denotes reusable an

nd single-use pallets (see p
pallet classificcation).

pallett weight: unde

er static cond
ditions, mass of
o pallet.

pallett width: see pallet

p dimension; refers to second
s dimen
nsion when describing palllet size.

palleti
tized goods: see
s unit load..

panell: flat, normally square or rectangular,

r thin, structura
al component.

panell-deck pallet: see pallet, pa

anel deck.

paperrboard: board d made of cellulosic fibers on board ma achine, encom

mpassing fiberrboard; used
for linerboard, corrrugating medium, and plies s of solid fiberrboard.

paperr pallet: see pallet,

p corruga
ated board.

partia ntry pallet: see pallet, partiial four-way e

al four-way en entry.

partia
ally uniformly distributed
d loa
ad: load plac
ced onto portio
on of pallet de
eck.

partic
cleboard pallet: see pallet, particleboard
d.

patch load: see load, patch.

payload: unit load on pallet, witth amount of load

l being ab
bove, identica
al with, or belo
ow rating load
d.

perforrmance stand
dard: specificcation describing functiona lity of standarrdized producct as
determmined by phy
ysical testing or
o computer models,
m or bo
oth.

perim
meter-base palllet: see palle
et, full perime
eter-base.

perim
meter bottom-ddeck construcction: butted or
o mitered bo ottom deckboa ards arrangedd in same
plane and located along pallet perimeter
p in both
b directionss of pallet len gth and width
h, including
side, center, and end
e boards.

anent pallet: see pallet, re

perma eusable.

perma eformation or deflection rem

anent set: de maining after reduction of load.

plan dimension,
d ov allet dimension.
verall: see pa

plastic
c, recycled: normally,
n consisting of poly
yethylene tere
ephthalate (PPET), high-den
nsity
polyetthylene (HDPPE), polyvinyl chloride (PVCC), low-densitty polyethylen
ne (LDPE), po
olypropylene
(PP), and/or polysttyrene (PS) post-consumer and post-ind dustrial plastics.

plastic
c pallet: see pallet, plastic
c.

2
27

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

platform: raised, horizontal,

h stru
uctural eleme
ent, such as a pallet.

plating
g: see stringer plating.

plug: see stringer plug.

a of several layers of ply

ply: any ywood or fiberrboard.

plywo
ood pallet: se
ee pallet, plyw
wood.

point:: one-thousan
ndth of an inc
ch (see calipe
er).

pool pallet:
p see pa
allet, exchang
ge.

post: see column, block.

post pallet:
p see pa
allet, post.

power spectral dennsity: quantifiication of inte

ensity of rando
om vibration iin terms of me
ean square
eration per un
accele nit of frequenc
cy; means of simulating tra ansport or maaterial handlin
ng system.

precis
sion: degree of agreementt between sett of specified tolerances.

precy n basis of its potential reusse and recycling.

ycling: selecting product on

preratted load: see

e load, prerate
ed.

presc
criptive standa
ard: specificaation describin
ng standardizzed product in
n such detail tto allow its
manufacture withinn specified lim
mitations.

proce
essed wood material:
m products that are composite off wood constrructed using g
glue, heat,
pressure, and/or a combination thereof.

protottype design: typical, repre

esentative model produced
d for evaluatin
ng suitability o
or object.

pull-th o withdrawal load: see loa

hrough load or ad, fastener p
pull-through or load, fasten
ner withdrawal.

punctture test: testt method to de unces per in. of shear, as

etermine strength of materrial, in inch ou
measured by Beac ch puncture teester.

ty: relative me
quality easure of perrformance cha
aracteristics o
of pallet or pa
allet compone
ents, normallyy
repressented in term
ms of conform
mance to pred
determined ag greed standarrds, including quality classses
or gra
ades.

spection and testing by qualified person

ty assurance: certification, based on ins
quality nnel, whetherr
produ
uct conforms with
w relevant prescriptive anda performan nce standards.

ty control: sys
quality stem of mainttaining desire
ed standard in
n production w e to materials,
with reference
dimennsions, and workmanship.
w

ty index: mea
quality ails and stapl es during pallet use of their influence on
asure of effecttiveness of na
useful pallet life, re
epresentative of fastener withdrawal
w (FW
WI) and fastener shear (FS SI) resistancee.

2
28

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

rack span:
s distanc
ce between ra
ack supports.

rack storage:
s ware
ehousing palle
etized unit loa
ads on specia
ally designed shelves or ra
acks.

racked across deck

k: see deck, racked acros
ss.

racked across deck

kboards (RAD
D): see deckb
kboard, racked
d across.

racked across strin

ngers (RAS): see stringer, racked acrosss.

rail: see
s collar.

rated load: see loa

ad, rated.

g: ranking; cla
rating assifying; spe
ecifying perforrmance as loa
ad-deformatio
on or durabilitty rating of
objectt.

g load: design
rating nated, uniform mly distributed
d, unit load pl aced onto pa
allet, designed
d to be
suppoorted by pallet as verified by
b testing.

raw wood:
w wood which
w has nott undergone processing
p or treatment.

sembled pallet: see pallet, reassembled

reass d.

reclaiimed component: recycled

d part of dama
aged pallet orr other structu
ure.

reclaiimed pallet: see

s pallet, rec
cycled.

nditioned palle
recon et: see pallet,, repaired.

recyclled pallet: se
ee pallet, recy
ycled.

nd: recovered
regrin d, ground up, scrap polyme
er, often adde
ed to virgin po
olymer and offten coextrude
ed
into plastic sheets, films, and ob
bjects.

rejecttion: refusal to
t accept, norrmally as resu
ult of non-con formance to a
agreed criteria.

allet: see palllet, remanufactured; pallet,

nufactured pa
reman t, combo; palllet, reassemb
bled.

vable side: detachable sid

remov de componentt of pallet sup
perstructure.

vable wall: de
remov all componentt of pallet sup erstructure.
etachable wa

rentall pallet: see pallet,

p rental.

repairred pallet: se
ee pallet, repa
aired.

ducibility: cap
reprod pability of dup
plication.

nance: reinforrced vibration

reson n of body expo
osed to vibrattion of anothe
er body at its natural
freque
ency.

nance frequen
reson ncy: frequenc
cy at which re
esonance exissts.

2
29

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

return
nable pallet: see
s pallet, reu
usable.

sible pallet: see

revers s pallet, rev
versible.

ty: resistance
rigidity e to deformatio
on within plan
ne of object a
as determined
d by pallet corrner drop testt.

ring nail:
n see nail, annularly thrreaded.

hreaded nail: see nail, ann

ring-th nularly thread
ded.

rivet: tube with larg

ge heads whic
ch are pressu
ure-peened affter insertion into predrilled
d hole.

roller:: rotating cylinder or whee

el to facilitate horizontal
h palllet movemen
nt.

d-robin test: id
round dentical expe
eriment perforrmed by seve ral investigato
ors in differen
nt laboratoriess.

er, bearer: us
runne se stringer; runnner, bearer (the preferenttial terms in ssome British C
Commonwealth
counttries); in plastic pallet, a pa
artial bottom deck.
d

ficial board: deckboard

sacrifi d cated at ends of panel-dec k pallet to faccilitate deck-e
loc end repair
withouut replacement of panel de
eck.

safe load,
l safe worrking load: se
ee load, desig
gn.

sag: see deflection

n.

sample: representtative specimen or group of

o specimens from population.

screww, wood: wiree fastener, poiinted and hea

aded, designe ed with screwdriver or othe
ed to be turne er
devicee during inserrtion into woo
od member; having in its si mplest form o
one or two co
ontinuous
helica
al threads alon
ng portion of shank nearesst point; to ho
old two or morre pieces toge
ether.

wed pallet: se
screw ee pallet, scre
ewed.

sealable lid: mova

able, tightly clo
osing cover of
o bin pallet.

sealed bin pallet: see

s pallet, se
ealed bin.

ort pallet: see

seapo e pallet, seaport.

shearr strength: res eformation in plane perpen

sistance to de ndicular to axxis of specime
en.

sheett: rectangularr, untrimmed or

o trimmed, single
s mbined board possibly scorred
or multi ple-wall, com
one way
w across co orrugations.

shelf life:
l period off time during which packag
ged material ccan be sold o
or used.

shiner: fastener sh
hank or leg prrotruding from
m side of faste
ening membe
er.

shippiing containerr: container sufficiently stro

ong for use in
n commerce fo
for packing, sttoring, and
transp
porting commmodities.

shippiing pallet: se
ee pallet, sing
gle-use.

3
30

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

shock
k-absorbing capacity: see capacity, sho
ock-absorbing
g.

k-damping cap
shock pacity: see capacity,
c shoc
ck-damping.

k load: see lo
shock oad, shock.

k: cut-to-size lumber pallett component, such as deckkboard, string

shook ger, stringerbo
oard, or blockk.

k grade: class
shook sification of quality of lumbber pallet com
mponent relatiive to its perfo
ormance
chara
acteristics bas
sed on size an nd distribution
n of defects (i ndependent o
of wood speccies).

short block: see sttringer plug.

k wrap: tightly
shrink y fitting, heat--shrunk, plasttic film around
d loose or pallletized goodss including
pallet, fabricated of polyethylene e, polypropyle
ene, polystyre ene, saran orr vinyl.

SI uniits: measuress based on Innternational System

S oped to serve as basis for
of Unitts (SI) develo
worldwwide standarddization of me
easurement units,
u the “Moodern Metric S System,” using, e.g.,
millim
meters for dimensions, newwtons for force
es and loads, and pascals for stresses a and pressuress.

side of
o pallet: see pallet, side of.
o

allet: see palllet, silo.

silo pa

e-deck pallet: see skid.

single

e-trip pallet: see

single s pallet, sin
ngle-use.

e-wing pallet: see pallet, siingle-wing.

single

size: see pallet siz

ze.

skid: pallet without bottom deck

kboards or de
eck.

skip chamfer:
c mac
chined, incline
ed surface alo
ong part of ed
dges of deckb
boards between stringers o
or
blockss (see chamfe
fer).

slatted-deck pallet:: see pallet, spaced-deckb

s board.

slatted-side bin palllet: see palle

et, slatted-sid
de bin.

slave pallet: see pallet,

p slave.

sling: system of ca ables, ropes, nets, spreade ombination of them, used fo

er bars, or co or lifting and
depos siting palletize
ed unit-load or
o bulk goods..

softwoood: wood froom coniferous or needle-b bearing tree s pecies, not co

ontaining vesssel elements
(not necessarily
n so
oft in texture or
o of low dens
sity).

solid-deck pallet: see

s pallet, solid-deck.

solid fiberboard:
f see fiberboard
d, solid.

3
31

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

solid-side pallet: see

s pallet, soliid-side.

ed-deckboard
space d pallet: see pallet,
p spaced
d-deckboard.

spaceer: rectangula
ar, square, cy
ylindrical, or conical
c pallet ccomponent lo
ocated betwee
en top and
bottom
m deckboards s or decks or beneath top deckboard
d orr deck.

er bar: rigid element

space e of slin
ng, placed under wing of to aintain cable or rope
op deck to ma
spacin
ng.

span:: distance bettween supporrts.

al-purpose pa
specia allet: see palllet, special-pu
urpose.

split: lengthwise separation of parts

p of wood member all tthe way throu
ugh cross-secction, see cracck.

squarreness: confoormance to reectangular con nfiguration, ass measured b

by difference in length of tw
wo
principal diagonals
s of square po
ortion of pallett.

stack height: meas sure of height, in. (mm), orr number of u

unloaded or lo
oaded pallets in stack,
ding pallet in contact
includ c with support.
s

ed loads: pallletized unit lo

stacke o top of one another to form a vertical column.
oads placed on

stackiing of palletiz
zed loads: pro ocess of storing palletized unit loads in vertical colum
mns without u
use
of inte
ermediate she elving or rack
king.

stackiing pallet: se
ee pallet, stack
king.

dard deviation: square roott of variance; measure of vvariability of sset of values; basis of
stand
precis
sion statemen
nt.

dard lumber diimensions: lu

stand umber size offficially listed b
by lumber gra
ading organizzation.

dard pallet: se
stand ee pallet, stan
ndard.

standdard test conddition: atmosp

phere of 73ºF
F ± 2ºF (23ºC ± 1ºC) tempe
eratures and 5
50% ± 2%
relativ
ve humidity.

e: wire fasten
staple ner formed byy bending wire
e to form two legs of equall length and a crown
conneecting both leg
gs at ends op
pposite leg po
oints.

e-crown width
staple h: distanced measured
m parrallel to crown aple legs; length of bearing
n between sta g
surfac
ce of staple crown.

e-crown width
staple h: see staple width.

e length: dista
staple ance measure
ed parallel to leg axis from
m bottom of crrown to extrem
me end of
staple
e leg.

e length, effec
staple ctive: distanc
ce measured parallel
p to leg
g axis from bo
ottom of crown
n to two-thirds
of point length.

3
32

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

staple
e width: overa
all dimension parallel to sta
aple crown fro
rom outside to
o outside of sttaple legs.

e-wire diameter: diameter of round-wire

staple e staple leg.

e-wire thickne
staple ess: dimensio
on of flattened
d-wire staple leg measured
d parallel to ccrown axis.

e-wire width: dimension off flattened-wirre staple leg m

staple measured perrpendicular to
o crown axis.

ed pallet: see
staple e pallet, staple
ed.

static load: see loa

ad, static.

steel pallet:
p see pa
allet, steel.

step: surface unev

venness of wo
ood compone
ent, resulting ffrom sawing o
or planing.

stevedore pallet: see

s pallet, ste
evedore.

stiffne ce to flexural deformation in

ess: resistanc i direction off applied force
e.

stiff-stock steel naiil: see nail, sttiff-stock stee

el.

ge: skid with two

stillag t ed stringers orr four blocks ((preferential tterm in some British
unnotche
Comm monwealth co ountries).

stitch:: staple-type fastener form ed continuouss wire at point of pallet or ccomponent

med from coile
assem mbly.

stopped chamfer: intermittent bevel

b along ed
dges of one d
deckboard facce; stop cham
mfer.

ge: placemen
storag nt of goods in
n holding area
a.

ge life: see sh
storag helf life.

strap notch: see strap

s notch.

strap slot: recess or

o cutout in to
op or bottom deck
d of pallett designed to allow tie-dow
wn or unit load
d
to pallet deck; strap notch; bandding notch.

ping: thin, flat band used to

strapp t secure unitt load to palle
et.

gth: resistanc
streng o generation of internal sttrain; expresssed in terms o
ce to externall force, load, or of
units of force, lbf, pound
p force (N
N, newtons); resistance to o tensile, compressive, or sshear force, o or
a commbination of th hese, as compared to stres ss that is exp ressed in term
ms of force peer unit area;
load-c
carrying capa acity indicated
d by ultimate value
v obtaineed during desttructive test.

s: internal forrce developed

stress on of externa l force, load, or general of internal strain
d by applicatio n;
expreessed in terms s of units of fo
orce per unit area,
a psi, pou
unds mass pe er square in. ((MPa,
mega apascals).

ch wrap: tightly fitting, strettched, extens

stretc sible, plastic fiilm around loo ose or palletizzed goods
often including palllet, held undeer tension by heat-sealing
h oor frictional de
evice.

3
33

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

string
ger: continuouus, longitudinal, solid, builtt-up, or notche
ed beam com mponent of pa allet, supportin
ng
and spacing deck components,
c often identifie
ed by locationn as outer, intterior, or centter stringer;
beareer, runner (the
e preferential terms in some British Com mmonwealth ccountries).

ger, center: sttringer placed

string d centric betw
ween outer strringers.

ger, companio
string on: full or halff-length supplementary striinger placed next to damaged stringer
duringg pallet repairr.

ger, cross: combination of stringer and top-deck

string t com
mponent, perp
pendicular to sstringer of
corruggated pallet.

ger, edge: see

string e stringer, outer.

ger, interior: stringer

string s placed
d between ou
uter stringers.

ger, outer: stringer located at deckboard

string d ends; outsid
de stringer.

ger, racked ac
string cross (RAS): pallet stringer of stringerbo
oard spanning between pa allet supports
(an ouutput of pallett software eva
aluation, prov
viding informa
ation on load-ccarrying capa acity and
deflecction of pallet and its decks
s where rack frame supporrts pallet at sttringer or strin
ngerboard
ends)).

ger chord: con

string ntinuous top portion
p above
e notch of notcched stringerr connecting sstringer feet.

ger-chord heig
string ght: dimensio
on of stringer chord
c measu red from top to stringer to top of notch.

ger dimensions: length of stringer

string s meassured along itss axis in direcction of pallet length;
thickn
ness of stringe
er measured in direction off pallet width;; height of striinger measurred in direction
of pallet height.

ger end: portio

string on of stringerr supporting pallet-end
p decckboard.

ger foot: lower portions of notched

string n string
ger between sstringer ends and notch an
nd between
notches.

ger notch: see

string e notch.

ger pallet: see

string e pallet, string
ger.

ger plating: re
string einforcement or
o repair of da
amaged string
ger by applyin
ng metal plate
e connector
over weak
w or damaaged surface..

ger plug: lumb

string ber block of le
ength shorter than one halff stringer, use
ed for stringerr repair.

ger projection:: extension frrom outer edg

string ge of end decckboard to striinger end.

ger size: state

string ed in terms off width, follow
wed by height and length.

string orts when striingers are raccked.

ger span: disttance between pallet suppo

ger top: top su

string urface of strin
nger.

3
34

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

string
gerboard: con
ntinuous, solid
d board memb
ber extending
g for full lengtth of pallet, pe
erpendicular tto
deckbboard membe ers, and place
ed between de
eckboards annd blocks, to sserve as supp port for
deckbboards or dec
ck.

gerboard, canttilevered: striingerboard ex

string xtending beyo esulting in striingerboard
ond blocks, re
overhhang.

gerboard dime
string ensions: length measured along length axis of stringgerboard; widtth measured
perpeendicular to le
ength; thickness measured vertically from
m top to botto
om of stringerrboard.

gerboard size:: stated in terrms of thickne

string ess, followed by width and length.

style: see pallet sttyle.

superrstructure: pe
ermanently fix assembly attached to
xed, hinged, removable, orr collapsible a
suppo
orting base paallet.

ce of pallet: see
surfac s pallet, surrface of.

take-iit-or-leave-it pallet:
p see pa
allet, take-it-orr-leave-it.

tank pallet:
p see pa
allet, tank.

targett dimension: specified mea asure, at time

e of compone
ent manufactu
ure, giving con
nsideration to
o
allowa
able tolerancee deviations.

ut: threaded metal

teenu m bushingg with base, serving as nutt and washer;; often provideed with long o
or
short prongs for retention in woo od and other materials andd to provide re
esistance to rrotation; if
speciffied, provided
d with self-locking barrel (trrademarked b
by Carr Fasteener Companyy, Division of
United
d-Carr Fasten ner Corporatio on of Cambrid dge, MA).

nology: terms
termin s characteristtic of particula
ar field.

oad: see load

test lo d, test.

test method:
m proce
edure for evaluating perforrmance.

moforming: prrocess of form

therm ming plastic sh
heet into desi red shape byy using heat a
and pressure to
force softened plas
stic into mold.

moplastic: material produce

therm ed synthetically from polym
merized plastiic which meltss during
applic
cation of heat without deco
omposing.

moplastic palle
therm et: see pallet,, thermoplastiic.

moset: plastic which harden

therm ns during app
plication of he
eat and will th ereafter not m
melt without
decommposing.

ded nail: pallet nail with th

thread hread rolled onto shank.

gh-transit palllet: see palle

throug et, reusable.

own: system of
tie-do o securing un
nit load to palllet base.

3
35

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

timber: sawn wood

d member witth its least no
ominal dimenssion 5 inc. (12
25 mm) or mo
ore.

timber pallet: see pallet, woode

en or wood.

tine: horizontal loa

ad-lifting portio
on of fork of forklift
f truck; ffinger (the pre
eferential term
m in some
h Commonwe
British ealth countries s).

ed amount of deviation from average sp

ance: permitte
tolera pecified dimension.

ap: panel or frame

top ca f placed on top of palletized unit lo
oad to facilitatte stacking an
nd to allow tight
strapp
ping without damaging
d unitt load.

eckboard: se
top de ee deckboard,, top.

eck of pallet: see pallet, to

top-de op-deck of.

hness: material property which

tough w indicates
s resistance tto energy abssorption.

porting: moving from one place to another.

transp

trip: series
s of 15 handlings requ
uired to move
e palletized un
nit loads from
m shipping point to receiving
g
point.

directional bottom deck con

two-d ottom boards oriented in bo
nstruction: bo oth directionss of pallet leng
gth
and width,
w with botttom deckboa
ards overlappiing bottom strringerboards..

way pallet entrry: see pallett, two-way entry.

two-w

way pallet: se
two-w ee pallet, two--way.

type: see pallet typ

pe.

ate load: see load, ultimate

ultima e.

ate strength: maximum res

ultima sistance to exxternal force, load, or gene
eration of internal strain of
materrial, member, connection, component,
c or
o assembly o of given size, at which failu
ure occurs;
expreessed in termss of units of fo
orce, lbf, poun
nd force (N, n
newtons); som metimes referred to as
maximmum load, ultimate load, or maximum sttrength; and iincorrectly refferred to as u ultimate stresss.

sembled palle
unass et: see pallet,, knockdown.

unidirrectional botto
om-deck cons
struction: botttom deckboa rds oriented iin direction off pallet length
or wid
dth.

uniforrmly distribute
ed load: see load,
l uniformly distributed..

oad: assembly of goods orr single item on

unit lo o pallet for h
handling, movving, storing, a
and stacking,,
as sinngle entity; als
so, unit load, as defined, in
ncluding suppporting pallet.

units of measurem y units and SI units.

ments: see U.S. customary

use: see pallet use

e.

3
36

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

U.S. customary
c un
nits: measurees based on Im
mperial units, such as inch
hes for dimensions, pound
force for forces and
d loads, and pounds
p masss for stresses and pressurees.

house pallet: see pallet, warehouse.

wareh w

waterr-resistant boa
ard: see boarrd, water-resiistant.

ht of facing: see
weigh s facing weight.

wet-strength linerb
board: see lin
nerboard, wet strength.

um: chemically treated containerboard to impart imp

wet-strength mediu proved rupture
e resistance
when water-satura
ated.

wheell-jack opening ce provided in bottom deckk to allow palle

g: clear spac et-jack wheels to bear on
floor.

ow: see open

windo ning.

ow pallet: see
windo e pallet, full-perimeter base
e.

wing: deckboard or o deck overhang, not less than 2½ in. ((65 mm), alon ng pallet side,, to increase
oad area, to add
unit-lo a pallet load d-bearing cap
pacity, to redu
uce deckboarrd-end splitting by fastenerrs,
and too facilitate lifting with bar slings hanging
g from crane ((see lip).

wing pallet:
p see pa
allet, wing.

wood pallet or woo

oden pallet: see
s pallet, wood or wooden
n.

wood screw: see screw,

s wood.

wood species: bottanical classiffication of tree

e species.

ng load: see load, design..

workin

manship: cha
workm aracteristic qu
uality of produ
ucing goods.

wrap:: see net wrap; shrink wrap

p; stretch wra
ap.

yield stress:
s limit to internal stre
ess developedd by applicatiion of externa
al force, load, or generationn
of inte
ernal strain too material, me ember, connec ction, compon nents, or asseembly beyond d which
marke ed increase in n deformation n occurs witho
out appreciabble increase inn load; expresssed in terms of
units of mass per unitu area, psi, pounds force e per square in. (MPa, meg gapascals); inn the case of
nonlinnear initial rate of force, agreed-on conv vention is app
plied; sometim mes incorrectly referred to as
yield strength
s and as ultimate sttrength.

5 SPECIAL PAL
LLETS

A nummber of speciaal pallets constructed of a variety of ma

aterials, as de
efined in para.. 4, are picturred
in Nonn-mandatory Appendix A1-A (previously y included in Appendix E o of ASME MH1 1.4.1M – 1989 9)
to pro
ovide a visual description of
o these palletts.

3
37

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A1-A

Sp ets Constrructed of a Variety off Materials
pecial Palle

Figure A1-1
A Figure A
A1-2
Mold
ded Plastic
c Pallet Combi nation Pallet with Co
orrugated
Deck a
and Honeyc comb Strinngers

Figure A1-3
A F
Figure A1-4 4
Steel Pa
allet Corrugated Fiberrboard Palllet

Figure A1-5
A F
Figure A1-66
Honeycomb
H b Pallet S
Steel Pallett

3
38

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 2
Sizes of
o Wood Pa allets

1 SCOPE

Part 2 of this Stand

dard providess a series of th
he most commmon sizes of wood pallets recommendeed
as bases for assem mbling, storing
g, stacking, handling, and transporting g
goods as unitt loads.

2 PURPOSE

The main
m objective
e of Part 2 of this
t Standard
d is the attainm
ment of a min
nimum numbe er of sizes of
wood pallets, which provide the maximum effficiency, econ nomy, interch
hangeability, a
and flexibility
when used in the U.S.A.
U and wo orldwide.

3 SIZES

(a) The definitions

s of pallet size
es shall be in accordance wwith Part 1 off this Standard
d, Definitions
nd Terminology Covering Pallets
an P and Related
R Structtures.

(b) Tolerances of ±¼ in. (6 mm

m) are permiss
sible on the ovverall dimenssions.

(c) The most commonly used sizess of wood pallets, amon or less 200 sizes currentlyy
ng the more o
sed in the U.S
us S.A., are listed in Table 2-1
1, with their d
dimensions givven in inchess and arrangeed
ac
ccording to th
he reported freequencies of use.

(d) Criteria
C for the establishmen
nt of the mostt common sizzes are given in Nonmanda
atory Append
dix
A2-A.
A

(e) Metric
M equivale
ents and recoommended intternational pa allet sizes are
e listed in Nonnmandatory
Appendix
A A2-B
B, to assist us
sers of this Standard in the
e selection of pallet sizes.

(f) To reduce poteential misunderstandings, nominal palleet sizes, in millimeters, as ggiven in

Nonmandatory
N y Appendix A2 2-B for the mo
ost common p
pallet sizes lissted in Table 2-1, should n
not
be
e used in palllet specificatio
ons.

(g) Comparisons
C of
o the utilizatio
on percentages of the floo
or area of sele ected common carriers aree
given in Nonmandatory App pendix A2-C for
f current pa llet sizes liste
ed in this Stan
ndard. These
e
ercentages are valid for pa
pe allets with no load overhan
ng.

Table
T 2-1
Wo
ood Pallet Sizes
S Mostt Common nly Used in
n the U.S.A
A.
Sizes, in. 1996 Production, %
48 x 40 26.9
40 x 48 5.3
42 x 42 4.8
48 x 48 4.3
48 x 42 3.7
48 x 45 2.1
37 x 37 1.6
48 x 36 1.5
Other sizes 50.0

GENE
ERAL NOTE: The 95% co
onfidence limitts are ±3.4% around the m
mean data

3
39

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4 DIMENSIONS
D

Dimen
nsions common to 48 x 40 0 in. (1219 x 1016 mm) woo
od pallets pro
oduced in the U.S.A. during
2006 are given in Figure
F 2-1.

A = 3 1/2 in. (89 mm) min. to 3 3/4 in. (96 mm) max.
B = 4 3/16 in. (106 mm m) min.
C = 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) min. to 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) max.
D = 1 7/8 in. (48 mm) min.
E = 9 (±1/4) in. [229 (±
±6) mm]
F = 6 (±1/4) in. [152 (±
±6) mm]
G = 5 in. (127 mm) ma ax.
H = 6 in. (152 mm) ma ax.
I = 48 (±1/4) in. [1219 9 (±6) mm] for 48
8 x 40 in. pallet
J = 18 (±1/4) in. [457 (±6) mm] for 48 x 40 in. pallet
K = 40
4 (±1/4) in. [1016 (±6) mm] for 48 8 x 40 in. pallet
L = 1 1/4 in. (32 mm) to 1 1/2 in. (38 mm)
m
R = 1//2 (±1/16) in. [19 (±2) mm] to 1 1//2 (±1/16) in. [388 (±2) mm]
S = 4 (±1/4) in. [101.6 (±6) mm] to 8 (±±1/4) in. [203.2 (±±6) mm]

Figure
F 2-1
on to 48 x 40 in. (1219 x 1016 m
Dimensions Commo mm) Wood Pallets
Produce ed in the UU.S.A.

4
40

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appenndix A2-A

Criteria

A1 USE
U

Palletts are used to

o assemble, store, stock, handle, and tra
ansport a wid de variety of sshapes, sizes,
and kinds
k of goods
s and materia
als as unit load
ds in various facilities with different type
es of
equipment and in all
a types of tra
ansport carrie
ers.

A2 BENEFITS
B

Palletts, properly se
elected and applied
a in distrribution syste
ems, may resu
ult in benefits which improvve
servic
ce from growe er/producer to
o consumer/user, reduce ccosts, improve e inventory coontrol, and
decre
ease damage and loss.

A3 STANDARD SIZES
S

Standdards for the most

m common n pallet sizes should, conssistent with the
e above-mentioned uses,
resultt in attaining a minimum nu
umber of palle et sizes in com
mmon use. S Standard sizes must be
adequ uate and com mprehensive fo
or current oveerall condition
ns, and be adaptable to changing
metho ods and equip pment. Provis
sions must be e made for th e efficient usee not only of a single size
but also of combinations of sizees.

A4 NONCAPTIVE
N E PALLETS

aptive pallets should be off common standardized sizzes.

Nonca

A5 ADAPTABILIT
A TY

Pallett sizes should

d be adaptable
e to the width
hs and lengthss of warehousse stacks, rail, highway, an
nd
oceann carriers, and
d combination
ns of these caarriers.

A6 EFFECTS OF DENSITY

ation of availa
Utiliza able volume or
o cube of storrage facilitiess and carriers becomes eco onomically
signifiicant when low-density ma aterials and prroducts are s hipped. For iinstance, if th he density of
materrials and prod ducts and the pallets shipped on land ca arriers is 20 lb b/ft3 (320 kg/m
m3) or less, thhe
size of
o the pallet se
elected and th
he height of th
he load may b be an econom mic considera ation to freight
forwarders, shippe ers, and consuumers. If the density is 40 0 lb/ft3 (640 kg g/m3) or highe er, the pallet
oads will usua
unit lo ally be stowed
d one high. Inn the latter caase, filling of tthe entire carrrier cube
becom mes of lesser importance.

A7 DETERMINAT
D PROPRIATE PALLET SIZ E(S)
TION OF APP

otal storage, handling,

The to h and
d distribution cycle
c should ddetermine the e size(s) of th
he most
commmon pallet(s) to
t be used. Transportation
T n is only a parrt of the total flow cycle of materials and d
goodss. The influennce of the nin
ne most comm mon pallet size es on the utiliization of the floor area of
commmonly used ca arriers is show
wn in Nonman ndatory Appe ndix A2-C forr the case when the unit lo oad
does not overhang g beyond the pallet
p sides and ends.

4
41

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

A8 MOST
M COMMON WOOD PALLET
P SIZE
ES

The nine
n most com
mmon wood pallets
p sizes in
n use during 2
2006 cover diimensions fro
om 37 to 48 in
n.
(914 to
t 1219 mm). These dime
ensions should d accommoda ate many req
quirements co ommonly
encouuntered.

A9 SELECTION CRITERIA
C

The selection
s of the nine most common
c wood
d pallet sizess is based on the most com
mmon sizes
fabric
cated in the U.S.A. during 2006,
2 as show
wn in Table 2--1.

A10 EVALUATION
E N OF 2006 U..S. WOOD PA
ALLET INDU DUCTION SURVEY
USTRY PROD

The 2006
2 pallet pro
oduction quan
ntities for give
en pallet sizess are based o
on a survey b
by Virginia Tecch
and th
he USDA Forrest Service.

A11 COMPARISO
C ON OF 1999 AND
A 2006 PR
RODUCTION SURVEYS

The 1999 productio able A2-1 below is not fullyy comparable

on listed in Ta e with the 200
06 data shown n
ble 2-1, since the two surveys were bas
in Tab sed on slightlyy different queestionnaires a
and the data
was evaluated
e usin
ng different sttatistical procedures. How wever, the ove erall ranking o
of the sizes off
new wood
w pallets produced
p cann be considere ed representa ative of the prroduction.

Ta
able A2-1
Wood Pallet Sizes Most
M Comm
monly Used d in the U.S
S. During 1
1999, %
48 x 40 30.0
42 x 42 5.7
48 x 42 4.7
40 x 48 4.0
48 x 48 3.7
44 x 44 3.5
40 x 40 3.1
36 x 36 3.0
36 x 48 1.7

A12 DEPARTMEN
D NT OF FORES
STRY OF SO
OUTHERN ILL
LINOIS CARBONDALE S
SURVEY

The Department
D off Forestry of Southern
S ois Universityy (SIU) underttook surveys of U.S. pallett
Illino
manufacturing duriing 1980, 198 85, 1990, 199 95 and 2000. The observe ed ranking of p
pallet sizes
produ
uced during th hose years is shown in Tab ble A2-2 of Noonmandatoryy Appendix A2 2-A.
Consiistently, in the
e Virginia Tecch – USDA Fo orest Service and SIU survveys, the 48 x 40 in. pallet
sizes was found to o be the most frequently pro oduced. It acccounted for mmore than one-quarter of a all
wood pallets produ uced.

4
42

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Taable A2-2
Ran
nking of U.S
S. Producttion of New
w Wood Pa allets by Siize During 1980, 1985
5,
1990, 1995
1 and 2000
2 (Accoording to S
Surveys by y Southern Illinois
Universiity, Carbon
ndale, IL)
Size
S 2000 1995 19900 1985 1980
48
8 x 40 1 1 1 1 1
42
2 x 42 2 2 2 2 4
40
0 x 48 3 3 3 3 3
48
8 x 42 5 5 4 4 7
48
8 x 48 3 4 5 5 2
36
6 x 36 9 6 6 6 5
40
0 x 40 5 7 7 7 8
42
2 x 48 - 9 8 8 10
36
6 x 48 - 10 9 9 6
44
4 x 44 8 8 10 10 9
48
8 x 45 7
48
8 x 36 10

4
43

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A2-B

Comparab
C le Metric Dimensions
D s of Most C
Commonly y Used Pallet Sizes
When n pallets are to
o be used in international
i trade,
t conside
eration should
d be given to the specific
sizes recommende ed in the Interrnational Orga
anization for S
Standardizatio
on (ISO) Stanndard 6780:
2003, Flat pallets for
f intercontinental materia als handling – Principal Dim
mensions andd Tolerances.
The six
s pallet sizes s included in ISO
I 6780:20003 are listed b
below:

Ta
able B2-1
Rec
ctangular Plan
P Dimennsion Sizes
s

mm In.
1200 x 800 4
47.2 x 31.5
1200
1 x 1000 4
47.2 x 39.4
1219
1 x 1016 48 x 40

Ta
able B2-2
Square
S Plan Dimensi on Sizes

mm In.
1067
1 x 1067 42 x 42
1100
1 x 1100 4
43.3 x 43.3
1140
1 x 1140 4
44.9 x 44.9

Taable B2-3
Com
mparable Metric
M Dime
ensions off Most Com
mmonly Us
sed Pallet D
Dimension
ns
Inches
s Nearest Whole
W Millim
meters Nominal Millimeter Size
48 1219 1200
42 1067 1050
40 1016 1000
36 914 900
45 1143 1150
44 1118 1100
42 1067 1050

4
44

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A2-C

Utilization of Floor Area of Co
ommon Ca arriers,
Witth No Loadd Overhangg on Pallett

Ta
able C2-1
Utilization of Floor Area of Co
ommon Ca arriers,
Witth No Loadd Overhangg on Pallett
Pallet Siize, 40 x 8 ft Truck 48 x 8½ ft
f Truck 28 x 8½ ft Twin 40½ x 50½
½ x 9½ ft Railro
oad Boxcar
in. (mmm) Trailer and Trailerr and T
Trailer and and Freig
ght Containerr Approx.
Freight Freigght Freight Inside Dimensioon
Container Contaainer CContainer
Approx. Insidde Approx. Inside Ap prox. Inside
Dimension
D 92 x Dimensio on 96 x D
Dimension
474 in. 570 in. 96
6 x 330 inc. 110 x 48
86 in. 110 x 606 in.
48 x 48 (1219
9 x 1219) 47.5% 92.6
6% 87.4% 86.2% 8
83.9%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 9 22
2 12 20 24
48 x 42 (1219
9 x 1069) 87.8% 95.8
8% 89.1% 86.7% 8
84.7%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 19 22
2 14 23 28
40 x 48 (1219
9 x 1016) 92.5% 98.2
2% 97.0% 86.2% 8
86.5%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 21 28
8 16 24 30
36 x 48 (12199 x 914) 87.2% 94.7
7% 98.2% 97.0% 9
93.3%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 22 30
0 18 30 36
44 x 44 (1118
8 x 1118) 88.8% 84.9
9% 85.6% 79.7% 7
75.5%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 20 24
4 14 22 26
42 x 42 (1067
7 x 1067) 89.0% 83.8
8% 78.0% 72.6% 7
74.1%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 22 26
6 14 22 28
40 x 40 (1016
6 x 1016) 80.7% 81.9
9% 80.8% 71.8% 7
72.0%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 22 28
8 16 24 30
36 x 36 (9144 x 914) 77.3% 71.1% 73.6% 94.6% 9
93.3%
Number of Palle
ets on Floor 26 30
0 18 20 48

4
45

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen
ndix A2-D
Referenced Docum
ments
The fo
ollowing docu
uments were reviewed
r duriing the prepa
aration of Partt 2:

ANSI//MHIA M1-20 005, Pallets, slip

s sheets and d other basess for unit load
ds. Publisher: MH1
Secre
etariat, Material Handling In
ndustry, 8720
0 Red Oak Blvvd., Suite 201 1, Charlotte, N
NC 28217-
1190. www.mhia.o org

ISO 6780:
6 2003, Flat pallets for intercontinenntal materials handling – P
Principal Dimeensions and
Tolera
ances. Intern
national Organ nization for Standardizatioon (ISO), 1, ch
h. De la Voie--Creuse, Case
e
postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20 0, Switzerlandd. www.iso.o org

Manggun, J. C. and J. E. Phelps. 2002. A su urvey of the w

wood pallet industry in the U.S., 2001.
Department of Forestry Researc ch Publication
n No. NS-009 9. Southern Illinois Universsity
ondale, Carbo
Carbo ondale, IL. 288 p.

Bush,, R. J. and P. A. Araman. 2008. Updatted pallet and container ind

dustry producction and
recycling research. SRS 04-CA A-11330142-2
205. 31 p.

4
46

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 3
Wo
ood Pallets
s
1 PU URPOSE
The purpose
p of this
s Uniform Staandard for Wo
ood Pallets (h
hereinafter refferred to as th
he Standard) is
to esttablish nationaally recognize
ed minimum quality
q require
ements for the e principal typ
pes of wood
pallets, and to provvide a basis fo
or common understanding g among manufacturers, re ecyclers,
butors, and us
distrib sers of wood pallets.

2 SCCOPE
This Standard
S applies to all lumber-deck and d panel-deck ppallets, eitherr new, repaire
ed or
remannufactured as
s well as theirr lumber, pane
els, wood-bassed composittes and engineered wood
components and faasteners. Criteria containe ed in this Stan
ndard are app plicable only a
at the
completion of manufacture.

This Standard
S is in
n three parts. Part I is the Prescriptive
P S
Standard whicch concerns th he manufactuure
of the
e pallet. This includes palleet and pallet component
c deescriptions, d
definitions, fasstener
descrriptions, workm manship crite
eria, dimensional tolerance es, markings, moisture content levels, an nd
repairr and remanufacture of pallets. Part II is s the Perform
mance Standa ard which concerns the
functionality of the pallet. This contains
c referrences to the testing of phyysical modelss or prototypees,
and computer
c softw
ware to assistt manufacture ers, recyclerss, distributors, and users too determine th
he
perforrmance level of a specified d pallet. Use of the Perform mance Stand dard is require
ed for new,
repairred and remanufactured pa allet constructions, along w with conforma ance to Part I of the
Presccriptive Standard. Part III covers
c Phytos sanitation of W
Wood Pallets .

This Standard
S does not describe other estab blished specia al requirements for export ppallets and
does not address thet safety pro oblems, if any, associated w with the use o
of wood pallets. It is the
onsibility of the
respo e user of this Standard to establish
e app propriate safetty and health practices and
d
determ
mine the appllicability of reg
gulatory limita
ations prior to
o its use.

ssist the user of this Standa

To as ard, other rela
ated standard
ds are listed in
n ANNEX A.

y dispute rega
In any arding dimens
sions of comp
ponents or de
efects, the U.S
S. customary units are
goverrning.

Subp
part I PRES
SCRIPTIVE
E STANDA
ARD
3 TE ERMINOLOGY Y AND DEFIN NITION1
block: rectangularr, square, multisided, or cylindrical deckk spacer, often
n identified byy its location
n the pallet as
within s corner block
k, end block, edge
e block, in
nner block, orr center or midddle block.

block size: pallet member

m dime eight and length.
ension, specified by width ffollowed by he

deckbboard: eleme
ent or compon
nent of pallet top
t and botto
om, perpendiccular to stringe
ers or
stringerboards.

1 For a complete listing

g of pallet definitio
ons, see Part 1

4
47

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

deckb pecified by thickness follow

board size: sp wed by width and length.

mination: a vis
delam ne of a panel or panel com
sible separation in the plan mponent. Thiss may occur in
the pa
anel manufac cturing proces
ss, or in use due
d to rough h handling. The e latter may b be caused by
impaccting panel ed
dges with a tin
ne tip, and maay or may nott result in matterial being re
emoved from
the pa
anel compone ent (see Figurre 3-13).

MIBANT Angle2: fa astener bend angle providing indication

n of (fastener)) toughness a
and bending
resistance (see Ta
able 3-3).

notch area: a regio

on around strringer notches
s with speciall defect limitations (see Fig
gure 3-5).

pallett length: palle

et dimension between
b the extreme
e palle
et ends, parallel to the strin
ngers or top
stringerboards. Fo or panel-deckk block pallets
s without string
gerboards, it is the top decck pallet
dimen nsion parallel to the face grain for plywo
ood (strong pa anel axis).

pallett width: pallett dimension between the extreme pallett sides, paralle el to and corrresponding to o
the length of the toop deckboards s. For panel deck block p pallets withoutt stringerboarrds, it is the to
op
deck panel dimens sion perpendiccular to the fa
ace grain for p
plywood (stro
ong panel axiss).

pallett size: pallet dimension

d specified by stringer or string
gerboard leng
gth, followed b by top
deckbboard length anda overall paallet height. For
F panel decck block palletts, it is the len
ngth, width, a
and
overaall pallet heigh
ht.

panell: a wood bas

sed structural panel, eitherr plywood or o
oriented stran
nd board (OSB).

recyclled pallet: pa
allet made reu
usable by sortting, repairing
g or remanufa
acturing, using
g new or
reclaimed components from dam maged palletss.

recyclled wood palllet part: a pallet part that has

h been rem
moved from a wood pallet a
after it has been
in serrvice.

nufactured pa
reman allet: a pallet assembled entirely
e part with recyccled wood pallet parts and
or in p
manufactured by complete
c reasssembly of all parts with ne
ew fasteners.

remannufactured co
ombination "co
ombo" pallet: a pallet asseembled, speccifically, with b
both new and
d
recycled wood partts. Combo paallets are typically assemb
bled with recyycled top and bottom
boards and ne
deckb ew wood strin
ngers.

repairred pallet: a pallet

p with damaged components replacced with new or used components.

shiner: protruding fastener poin

nt.

ger: continuou
string us, longitudinal, solid, builtt up, or notche
ed beam com mponent of pa allet, supportinng
and spacing deck components,
c often identifie ed by its locattion as edge (side) or interrior (center)
stringer.

ger size: spec

string cified by width
h followed by height and le
ength.

2 MIBAANT angles are measured

m accord
ding to procedure
es contained in A
ASTM F680 Stan
ndard Test Metho
ods for Nails, AS
STM
Interna
ational, www.astm
m.org

4
48

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

string
gerboard: con
ntinuous, solid
d member exttending the fu
ull length of th
he pallet, perp
pendicular to
deckbboard membe ers and placedd between de
eckboards and d blocks.

gerboard size:: pallet and member

string m nsions, speciffied by thickn
dimen ness followed by width and
d
lengthh.

oad: assembly of goods orr single item on

unit lo o pallet for h
handling, movving, storing, a
and stacking,,
as sinngle entity.

3 CL
LASSIFICATIIONS

4.1 Classes
 Stringer Pa
allet (see Figu
ure 3-1)
 Block Palle
et (see Figuree 3-2)

4.2 Use Catego ories

 Reusable pallet is intended for more than one uniit load.
 Single-use
e pallet is intended to be lo
oaded once fo
or one unit trip
p.

Figure
F 3-1
Schematic
S Diagram of
o a Typica l Stringer P
Pallet with
Principa
al Parts Labeled

4
49

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-2
Schematic
c Diagram of a Typicaal Block Pallet with
Principa
al Parts Labeled
4.3.1 Entry Typ
pes
 Two-w way entry palllet with openings acceptin ng handling eequipment on nly in two palllet
ends, i.e. unnotched stringer pallet.
 Partiall four-way entry pallet with
w openingss at both en nds and side es with limitiing
access sibility of the
e openings to
o common ha andling equippment, i.e. n
notched string ger
pallet and
a block palllet with overlapping bottomm stringerboaards and botto om deckboard ds,
or pannels.
 Full four-way entry pallet with op oth ends and sides with acccessibility of all
penings at bo
openinngs not limited to standardd handling eqquipment, i.e. block palletss with perime
eter
boards s, unidirectioonal, without bottom decckboards, or panel botto om decks w with
cutouts.

4.4 Styles
 Single-face
e
 Double-facce, nonreverssible
 Double-facce, reversible

4.5 Top Deck Constructions s

 Deckboard d
 Deckboard d/stringerboarrd
 Panel
 Panel/strin
ngerboard

5
50

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.6 Bottom Dec ck Constructions

 Unidirectio
onal bottom deeckboards orriented in the direction of thhe pallet length or
width only..
 Overlappinng bottom boa ards oriented in both directtions of the le
ength and widdth of the palle
et
containing both bottom deckboards anda bottom sttringerboardss.
 Perimeter bottom deckb boards oriente
ed in both direections of thee length and wwidth of the
pallet containing butted boards and end
e boards (ssee Figure 3-3 3).
 Cruciform bottom deckb boards oriente
ed in both direections of thee length and wwidth of the
pallet containing butted boards, end boards, and cconnector bo oards (see Figgure 3-3), or
panels withh cutouts (see
e Figure 3-4)..

4.7 Sizes
Each of the classified
c palllets is availab
ble in many si zes and desig
gns. Therefo
ore, size and
design details need to be specified.

Figure
F 3-3
Compone
ent Names for Perimeeter and Crruciform
Bottom Deck Consttruction

5
51

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-4
Pane
el Bottom Deck
D Show wing Cutou
uts
5 MATERIALS
M

5.1 Lumber Com

mponents

5.1.1 Wood spe ecies

The specie es of woods used
u in pallet manufacture are numerou us. As an aid to the pallet
designer, ANNEX
A B conntains a classsification of m
many commerccially availablle woods liste ed
according to similarities
s in mechanical properties,, regional ava ailability, and ccommercial u
use
in pallets3. When speciifying wood pallets, the wo ood species p permissible in the structure
can be indicated by the wood specie es class numb bers given in A
ANNEX B.

5.1.2 Quality
Lumber coomponents sh hall meet or exxceed the minnimum qualityy indicated byy the growth
and manuffacturing defeect limitations contained in Table 3-1. D
Definitions and descriptionss
of growth-rrelated defectts can be found in ANNEX X C.

erwise called saw

step - othe s (arbor) mismatch:
m nott to exceed 1//32 in. (0.8 mm) on expose
ed
face of com
mponents.

3 Detaiils concerning the development of o these wood-sppecies classificatiions are found in

n McLeod, J.A. 1985, “Developme ent
of Flexural Values for Pallet
P Stock,” M.S
S. Thesis, Departtment of Wood SScience and Fore est Products, Virg
ginia Polytechnicc
Institute
e & State Univerrsity, Blacksburg,, VA 24061.

5
52

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

bevel sawwing - accepta

able if no moore damaging g than allowa able wane orr allowable size
tolerance for
f deckboardds, stringerboards, stringerrs and blocks.

ured (unintenttional) hole- same as unso

manufactu e Table 3-1 and Section
ound knot (see
6.1.2).

Saw cuts - Same as unsound knot (s

see Table 3-1
1 and Section
n 6.1.2).

5.1.3 Moisture content

c
The moistuure content le
evel of pallet components
c i s not limited. For measuriing the
moisture content
c of woo
od, use the foollowing metho ods:
 AS
STM D4442 Standard
S testt methods forr direct moistu ure content m
measurementt of
wo
ood and wood d-base materials
 AS
STM D7438 Standard
S practice for field
d calibration aand applicatio
on of hand-he
eld
mooisture meters

5
53

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 3-1
Minimum Lumber Compo onent Qua
ality

DEFFECT LIMITA
ATIONS
EFECT
DE DE
ESCRIPTION
REUSABBLEa SINGLE-USEbb,c
S
und knotd
Sou Maximum portion off the ½ 7
/8
cross section affected
Freq
quency of Number of maximum siz ze knots 2 in 6 in. (15
52 mm) 1 in every ½
knots
k peer component of lenggth length of
component
2
Unso
ound knots Maximum portion off the ¼ /3
andd holese cross section affecttedf
Wane
W Maximum portion of the e actual ¼ x 2/ 3 h 3
/8 x
deckboa ard or stringerrboard (expose ed) ffullthicknessg.h
hickness (full length)f
width by th 1
/3 x 2/3h (exposed)
(non-expo osed) ½ x full
thicknessg.h
1
Maximum portion of the e actual /3 x ½h ((non-exposed d)
nger and block
strin
width and ength)f
d height (full le 5
/8 x 2/3h
Decay
D Maximum portion off the ¼ ¼
cross section affecttedi
Splits/shakesj Maximum portion of the e actual Deckboards: 1/3 L Full length
deckboard, stringerboard d, stringer ds: 1/3 L
Stringerboard Less than full
ength (L) or width
and block le w (W) length
Stringersk:
Horizontal - Less L
Less than 4 in
n.
than 4 in. ((102 (102 mm) orr
mm) or (2 x W W) (2 x W)
Vertical - Sa
ame ½L
Blocks: ½ L ½L
Slope
e-of-grain Maximuum deviation along
a 1 in. (25 m
mm) in 1 in. (25 mm) in
deckboarrds, stringerb
boards, 4 in. (102 mmm) of 4 in. (102 mm) of
stringers length length
h length
a.. With the exc ception of the slope
s of grain criteria
c and wanne restrictions,, this minimum quality
description corresponds to o a standard co omponent grad de.
b.. This minimu um quality desc cription correspponds to an eco onomy compon nent grade.
c. This quality is limited to usse for deckboards and stringe erboards 5/8 in. (16 mm) thickk or greater and d
stringer or blocks
b 1-1/4 in. (32 mm) wide e or greater. Siingle-use palletts with deckboa ards and
5 in. (16 mm) thick or stringe
stringerboarrds less than 5/8 er or blocks lesss than 1-1/4 in
n. (32 mm) in
width shall meet
m or exceed d the reusable quality level.
d.. Sound knots are limited in any portion off the notch area a “B” (see Figu ure 3-5) to 1/3 o
of the net crosss
section above the notch and in any portio on of notch areea “A” to ½ the net cross secttion above the notch.
e.. Unsound kn nots (decay witthin knot) or ho oles are limited to ¼ of the nett cross section above the notch
in areas “A”” and “B” (see Figure
F 3-5).
f. Provided the average widtth of the wood is not less than n ¾ of the actu ual width of the component.
g.. Full thickness of wane on non-exposed surfacess is perm
mitted in no mo ore than 2 piecces per pallet.
h.. Fasteners driven
d through maximum wane or decay sha all be compenssated (see Secttion 6.1.3).
i. No decay (o outside of unso ound knot) is allowed over or w within 2 in. (51 mm) of the en nds of the string
ger
notches
j. See definitioon and descrip ption of splits in ANNEX C.
k. Not allowed d in the notch area
a (see Figuree 3-5).
l. In the notchh area the wane e shall be limite
ed to 1/3 of the
e stringer widthh and 1/3 of thee height above the
notch. No wane
w shall be permitted
p in or below the notcch fillets within the notch areaa (see Figure 3-5).

5
54

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.1.4 Preparatio
on
Lumber co
omponent tole
erances apply
y at any moistture content.

5.1.4.1 Dimennsions
Lumbe er componentts shall have a target thickkness and wid dth uniform in dimension an nd
50% of
o components s shall meet or
o exceed the e target dimennsion at the tim
me of
compo onent manufa acture. Based d on current GGood Manufaccturing Practiices (GMP), the
target thickness of deckboards
d and
a stringerbo oards may de eviate ±1/32 in n. (±0.8 mm).
arget width an
The ta nd height of sttringers and b
blocks may exxceed the spe ecified
dimensions by a ma aximum of 1/8 8 in. (3 mm) a
and 1/4 in. (6 mm), respecctively.

The fo
ollowing are acceptable ma
anufacturing ttolerances allo
owed on esta
ablished targe
et
dimensions:

boards and Sttringerboards

Deckb
Thicknessees: ±1/16 in n. (±1.6 mm) mmaximum devviation
(includin
ng target deviiation of 1/32 in. [±0.8 mm])
Width: +un nlimited, -1/4 in. (-6 mm) mmaximum devviation
Length: +1//8 in. (+3 mm), -1/4 in. (-6 mm) maximu um deviation

ers and Block

Stringe ks
Width: ±1//16 in. (±1.6 mm)
m maximum m deviation
Height: ±1//16 in. (±1.6 mm)
m maximum m deviation
Length: +1//8 in. (+3 mm), -1/4 in. (-6 mm) maximu um deviation

Conforrmance to the ese manufactturing tolerancces in compo onents and pa allets can be
expresssed using sta andard statisttics reflecting variations eq
qual to or lesss than those
permittted in this Sta
andard. Two standard devviations from target size sh hall be less
than th
he tolerances specified.

5.1.4.2 Deckbboard chamferr

The deeckboard cha amfers, if speccified, shall be
e located on b
both outside ffaces of botto
om
end booards and all interior edgess of bottom bo oards adjoinin
ng wheel opeenings. The
chamffers shall be at
a least 12 in. (305 mm) lon ng and at an a
angle betweeen 35 to 45º,
located
d 1/4 in. (6 mm), ±1/8 in. (±
±3 mm) from the bottom off the board. C Chamfers sha all
not exttend into connections.

5.1.4.3 Stringe
er notches
Notchees in stringers
s, if required, shall be speccified by locattion (distance
e from stringer
end), depth,
d and lenngth (see Figure 3-5). The e recommend ded opening ssizes to be
provided by the nottch and the bo ottom deck, iff present, are 2 in. (51 mmm) to the top of
the notch and 9 in. (229 mm) in length
l with a minimum flatt surface of 7 in. (177 mm))
recommended for th he notch top. Notches sha all have roundded or filleted
d corners with
ha
radius not less than
n 1/2 in. (13 mm),
m nor greaater than 1-1/22 in. (38 mm). Square
notchees are not accceptable. Manufacturing to olerances sha all be ±1/8 in. (±3 mm) of
actual specified dim
mensions exce ept for the no
otch location wwhich shall bee within ±3/8 iin.
(±9.5 mm)
m of targett.

5
55

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-5
Schem
matic Diag
gram of a Pallet
P Strin
nger with N
Notch Featu
ures
5.2 Wood Panel (Plywood or
o OSB) Com
mponents

5.2.1 Quality
Wood panels shall confform to the lattest edition off one of the fo
ollowing stand
dards:
 S 1-07 Structu
PS ural Plywood
 PS
S 2-04 Performmance Stand dard for Wood d-Based Strucctural-Use Pa anels
 PR
RP 108 Performance Stand dards and Po olicies for Stru
uctural-Use P
Panels
 AN
NSI/HPVA HP P-1-2004 Ame erican Nation al Standard fo for Hardwood and
De
ecorative Plyw
wood

Each pane el deck piece shall be identtified with the

e appropriate trademark of a recognized d
grading aggency (see AN NNEX D). Th he firm supplyying the panells shall furnish certification
n
that the original panels were trademaarked.

All panels used for palleet componentts shall be boonded with extterior (fully waaterproof)
adhesive. Panels that exceed
e the deelamination li mits of the sta
andards listed
d in this
Section ass a result of th
heir manufacturing processs are not perm mitted to be used for new,
repaired or remanufactu ured pallets.

5.2.2 Grade
Unless spe ecified otherw
wise by the pu
urchaser, pan nels for panel decks shall b
be either: Rate
ed
Sheathing, Exposure 1;; or Rated Stu urd-l-Floor, Exxposure 1. EExterior is an a
acceptable
e to Exposure 1. Panels off any grade m
alternative may be used to o fabricate laminated palle
et
blocks.

5.2.3 Preparatio
on

5.2.3.1 Dimen nsions

Panel decks for block class palle ets shall conssist of a single
e piece. Paneel decks for
er class palletts shall be oriented with the
stringe e plywood facce grain (strong panel axiss)
perpen ndicular to the
e stringers, an
nd may consi st of more tha an one piece, provided thee
minimu um width (perrpendicular to o plywood facce grain or strrong panel axxis) of any piece
is 24 in
n. (610 mm) oro greater, annd the panel jo oints are perppendicular to the stringers.

Wood panel compo onents shall have a target tthickness andd width uniforrm in dimensio
on
0% of compon
and 50 nents must meet
m or exceed d the target d
dimension at tthe time of
compoonent manufa acture. Basedd on current G
GMP, the targ get thickness of panel deckks
and ply
ywood strip bottom
b deckbooards may deeviate ±1/32 in n. (±0.8 mm)..

5
56

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Blocks ma ay be laminate
ed from panell componentss. The target width, length and height o of
finished paanel compone ent blocks maay exceed the e specified dim
mensions by a maximum o of
1/8 in. (3 mm).
m Sides sh
hall not deviatte from being square to thee block top orr bottom by
more than 1/8 in. (3 mm m), and any de eviation from square shall not be in adddition to the
target widtth and length..

The face grain

g of plywo
ood strip botto
om deckboardds shall run in
n the direction
n of the
deckboardds' length. OS
SB strips are not permitted
d to be used aas bottom decckboards.

The following are accep

ptable manufa
acturing tolera
ances allowed
d on establish
hed target
dimensions.

Panel Dec cks and Plywo

ood Strip Bottom Deckboarrds
Plywood strip bottom de
eckboards an nd panel area
as around cuttouts shall be not less than
n6
in. (152 mmm) wide
Th
hicknesses: ±1/32 inn. (±0.8 mm) m
maximum devviation
Le
ength and Wid
dth: ±1/8 in. (±3 mm)

d Blocks (inclu
Laminated uding individuual lamination s)
Width: ±1//8 in. (±3 mmm) maximum d deviation
eight:
He ±1//16 in. (±1.6 mm)
m maximum m deviation
Le
ength: ±1//8 in. (±3 mm)) maximum d eviation

Conforman nce to these manufacturing

m g tolerances iin componentts and palletss can be
expressed using standa ard statistics reflecting
r variiations equal to or less tha
an those
permitted in
i this Standa
ard. Two stan ndard deviatioons from targe et size shall b
be less than the
tolerances
s specified.

5.2.3.2 Panel Decks and Plywood

P Strip Bottom Deckkboard Chamffer
The de
eckboard cha amfers if speccified, shall be
e located on b
both outside fa
aces of bottom
end bo
oards and all interior and exterior
e edgess of panel botttom decks addjoining wheeel
openin
ngs. The chamfers shall ex xtend the full width of the oopenings, and
d shall be at a
an
angle of 35 to 45º lo
ocated 1/4 in.. (6 mm), ±1/88 in. (±3 mm) from bottom of deck or
board.

5.2.3.3 Laminated Pallet Bllocks

Pallet blocks may be
b laminated from
f panel coomponents ussing either fassteners (see
Section 6.2.6) or ad
dhesives. A water
w resistan
nt adhesive sh
hall be used aand applied
accordding to manuffacturers' reco
ommendationns.

5.3 Wood-based
d Composite
es Components

5.3.1 Quality
High-density moisture-rresistant woo
od-based com
mposite blockks shall meett or exceed tthe
following criteria:
c

ensity:
De 36..9 – 42.1 lbs. ft3 (591 – 675
5 kg/m3)
Ad
dhesive: only approved glue
g and addittives that can assure the sstability of the
ocks can be us
blo sed as bondin ng agents

Table 3-2 lists the minim

mum performa
ance requirem
ments of the b
blocks. Testss are describe
ed
in ANNEX E.

5
57

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 3-2
nimum Wood-based Composite
Min e Component Quality
y

TEST MINIMUM
M PERFORMA
ANCE
24-hour block soak test
Weight cha
ange ≤225% increase
Length cha
ange ≤22% increase
Width cha
ange ≤22% increase
Height cha
ange ≤66% increase
Side tine coompression test ≥ 1,400
0 lbf. @ 9 in./min.
Nail insertio
on force test ≤ 500 lb
bf. @ 1.5 in./min.
Nail withdraawal force test ≥ 310 lb
bf. @ 1.5 in./min.

All wo
ood-based composite used d for block com
mponents sha all be bonded
d with exteriorr (fully
waterrproof) adhesiive. Wood-ba ased composite blocks tha at exceed the limits of the ttests listed in
this Section
S as a re
esult of their manufacturing
m g process are
e not permitte
ed to be used for new,
repairred or remanu ufactured pallets.

5.3.2 Preparatio
on
Wood-based composite e blocks shall have target l ength, width and height un
niform in
dimension and 50% of blocks
b shall meet
m or exceeed the target ddimension at the time of
componennt manufacture e. Based on current GMP P, the target le
ength, width a
and height of
blocks may
y exceed the specified dim
mensions by a maximum off 3/16 in. (4.8 8 mm), 1/8 in. (3
mm) and 1/16
1 in. (1.5 mm),
m respectiv
vely.

The following are accep

ptable manufa
acturing tolera
ances allowed
d on establish
hed target
dimensions.

Blocks
Le
ength: +3/16 in. (+4.8 mm), -0 in. (-0 mm
m) maximum deviation
Width: +1/8 in. (3 mm), -1/1
16 in. (1.6 mmm) maximum d
deviation
eight: ±1/16 in
He n. (±1.6 mm) maximum de eviation

Conforman nce to these manufacturing

m g tolerances iin componentts and palletss can be
expressed using standa ard statistics reflecting
r variiations equal to or less tha
an those
permitted in
i this Standa
ard. Two stan ndard deviatioons from targe be less than the
et size shall b
tolerances
s specified.

5.4 Engineered Wood Comp

ponents

5.4.1 Quality
High-density moisture-rresistant engineered wood laminates sh
hall meet or exceed the
following standards:
s

 AS
STM D3043 Standard
S test methods for sstructural pan
nels in flexure
e
 AS
STM D4761 Standard
S test methods for mmechanical p properties of lumber and
wo
ood-base stru
uctural materia
al

All enginee ered wood coomponents us sed for deckbo oards and strringers shall b
be bonded witth
exterior (fu
ully waterproo
of) adhesive. Engineered w wood that fail the test meth
hods of the
standards listed in this Section
S as a result of theirr manufacturinng process arre not permittted
to be used d for new, repa
aired or remaanufactured p pallets.

5
58

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.4.2 Preparatio
on
Engineered wood comp ponents shall have target t hickness and d width uniformm in dimensioon
and 50% of
o components shall meet or o exceed the e target dimen nsion at the tiime of
componen nt manufacture e. Based on current GMP P, the target le
ength, width aand height of
deckboardd or stringer may
m exceed th he specified d
dimensions byy a maximum of 3/16 in. (4 4.8
mm), 1/8 in
n. (3 mm) andd 1/16 in. (1.6
6 mm), respecctively.

The following are accep

ptable manufa
acturing tolera
ances allowed
d on establish
hed target
dimensions:

Deckboard
ds and Stringeerboards
Thhicknesses: ±1/16 in. (±1 1.6 mm) maxiimum deviatio on
(including ta
arget deviationn of 1/32 in. [[±0.8 mm])
Width: +unlimiited, -1/4 in. (-6 mm) maxim mum deviatio on
Leength: +1//8 in. (+3 mm), -1/4 in. (-6 mm) maximu um deviation

Stringers
Width: ±1/16 in n. (±1.6 mm) maximum de eviation
Heeight: ±1/16 in
n. (±1.6 mm) maximum de eviation
Leength: +1//8 in. (+3 mm), -1/4 in. (-6 mm) maximu
um deviation

Conforman nce to these manufacturing

m g tolerances iin componentts and palletss can be
expressed using standa ard statistics reflecting
r variiations equal to or less tha
an those
permitted in
i this Standa
ard. Two stan ndard deviatioons from targe et size shall b
be less than the
tolerances
s specified.

5.5 Fasteners
Fasteners arre classified as s and staples , bolts, wood screws, and lag screws.
a driven nails
The types an
nd properties of fasteners affect
a pallet p
performance.

5.5.1 Driven Fasteners

Driven fastteners includee nails and sttaples. As ussed in pallets, nails are classsified as plain
shank, helically threadeed, annularly threaded,
t flutted, or twistedd square wire. Staples havve
nd wire or app
either roun proximately sqquare wire leg gs, referring tto the cross ssectional shap
pe
of the wire
e. All driven fa
asteners shall be specifiedd using either of three meth hods:

1. Direct measuremen nt of the physical and mechhanical chara

acteristics (ind
dicated in
Table 3-3 and Figurre 3-6); and
2. Speciffication of con
nnection desiggn properties,, or
3. Both 1 and 2.

The fastenner length sha all be sufficien

nt to provide a minimum pe enetration of 1-1/4 in. (32
mm) into thhe stringer orr block for all deckboard
d th icknesses ovver 1/2 in. (13 mm) and a
minimum penetration
p off 1 in. (25 mmm) for deckboa ard thicknessses of 1/2 in. ((13 mm) or
less. Manufacturing tolerances shall conform to tthose specifie ed in ASTM F1667 and
bending yield strength shall
s not be leess than 100,0 000 psi (690 MPa). The m minimum
acceptablee quality of drriven fastenerrs is specified in Table 3-4.. Design for laateral
resistance shall follow the National Design
D Speciffication (NDS)4 with applica able
adjustments for shank deformation
d (C
Cz) and moistture as descrribed in ANNE EX F. Design n
awal resistanc
for withdra ce shall followw the NDS witth inclusion off adjustmentss for strength
level, shan
nk characteris stics (Cw), andd moisture ass described in ANNEX F.

4 Amerrican Forest & Pa

aper Association
n (AF&PA). 2005
5. National Desig
gn Specification for Wood Constrruction. AF&PA,,
Washin
ngton, DC. 174 pp.
p

5
59

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 3-3
Physical and
a Mechan
nical Charac
cteristics off Driven
Fasteners Palletsa
s Used in P
AILSb
NA STAP PLES
Plain
n shank Helically Annularly Fluted/S
Squared Round wire Square wire
e
threaded threaded w
wire
Lengthh Leength Length Length Le
ength Length
Wire diameter Wire diameter Wire diameter Wire diammeter Wiire diameter Wire diameter
Thhread length Thread length h Crrown length Crown length
Thhread-crest Thread-crest Flute-cre
est Crrown width Crown width
diaameter diameter diameterr
Nuumber of Number of rinngs Number o of helixes
heelixes
Nuumber of Number o of flutes
flutes
MIBAN NT anglec MIIBANT angle MIBANT anglle MIBANT angle or MIIBANT angle MIBANT anglle
or bending yield or bending yield or bending yieeld bending yyield or bending yield eld
or bending yie
strengtthd strrength strength strength strrength strength
a ASSTM F680 Stan ndard Test Methhods for Nails
b Nail heads shall be flat or sligh
htly countersunk k in shape. Na ails shall have no point or a blunt point, nott to
exxceed 5/32 in. (4
4 mm) in length. In chisel point nails, the poin t width shall nott exceed the wirre diameter.
c When
W the MIBANNT test is performed, not more e than 8% of th he fastener shalll show partial o or complete sha ank
fa
ailure.
d ASSTM F1575 Sta andard Test Metthod for Determmining Bending Y Yield Moment off Nails

Figure
F 3-6
Schematic
S Diagram of
o Driven Faasteners UUsed in Pallets, Indic
cating the
Meassurements of the Phy
ysical Charracteristics
s in Table 3
3-2

6
60

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.5.2 Bolts
For bolted constructions s, steel carria
age bolts can be used. Un nless otherwisse specified,
s shall be furn
these bolts nished in the coarse
c thread
d series, Classs 2A tolerancce (ASME
B1.1). Whhen steel carriage bolts are e employed, wwashers unde er the head off the bolt shalll
be used if specified. If bolts with undderhead fins a
are specified,, instead of ca
arriage bolts,
washers under the head d shall not bee used. Wash hers shall be located under the bolt nut..

Table
T 3-4
Minimum
M Characteris
C stics of Driiven Fastenersa for
Single
e-use (S) and
a Reusab ble (R) Palllets
Nails Staples
Ap
pplication Minimum Minimumm Cwb mum Czc
Minim Minimum head- Minimum
Penetration annd Fybd shank ratio crown lengtth
in. (mm) R S R S R S in. (mm)
Stringer New 1.25e,f (32) 1.9 1.5 22.25 2.00 0.375
or blocck 1.0 < Cz < 1.5 (9.5)
Repair 1.5 2.00
palletts and F yb > 100
Clinch
hed All Complete 1.0 1.0 ksi 2
2.00 2.00 0.375
matt nd
penetration an (6900 MPA) (9.5)
clinched
a Or equivalent con nnection as dete
ermined by com mparison of the C w, Cz, and Fasstener Head or C
Crown Pull-
hrough Resistan
Th nce (HPR) multiplied by the min nimum number of fasteners pe er connection in Section 6.2.4.1.
b Fa
astener withdraw wal characteristtic. Calculation shown in ANNE EX F.
c Fa
astener shear characteristic
c (withdrawal basis)). Calculation sshown in ANNEX X F.
d Fa
astener bending g yield strength as determined by ASTM F1575 5.
e Fo
or deformed-sha ank fasteners, penetration
p inclu
udes only deformmed portion emmbedded in the mmain member.
f or pallets with deckboards that are  ½ in. (13
Fo 3mm) thick, minnimum penetratiion shall be 1 in
n. (25 mm).

The sizes of the holes drilled

d throughh deckboardss and stringerboards into sttringers or
blocks shaall be 1/32 in. (0.75 mm) larger in diame eter than the b
bolt diameter for bolts less
than 1/2 in
n. (13 mm) dia ameter. For 1/2
1 in. (13 mm m) or larger diiameter bolts,, the hole sha
all
be 1/16 in.. (1.5 mm) larrger. When tw wo or more bo olts are conneecting green members, the e
over sizing
g of holes shaall be twice tha
at specified a
above.

The head and

a nut bearing surfaces shall
s be wash her faced with
h a flat or lockk washer as
specified. If "Teenuts," or equivalentt, are specifie
ed, washers bbelow the hea ad shall not be
e
used.

5.5.3 Wood Scrrews and Lag g Screws

Wood scre ews and lag screws,
s generrally in compliiance with ASSME B18.2.1 and ASME
B18.6.1, shall have cut or rolled, sing gle or double threads along two-thirds o of their shankk
lengths, sh hall be inserte
ed into the pallet compone nts to be asse embled with a screwdriverr
or screw motion
m machinne tool. Overr driving and oover tighteninng of the conn
nection shall bbe
avoided. Approximately
A y two-thirds of
o the screw leength and sevven times the e shank
diameter shall
s be the minimum
m peneetration length
h into the mainn member. W Where pre-
drilling is re
equired, the maximum
m lead hold diame eter shall be th
he fastener sh
hank diamete er,
and the pilot hole diame eter shall not be larger tha n the thread rroot diameterr. Where lag
screws are e used, washe ers under thee head of the sscrews shall be used.

Design forr connections with screws and

a lag screw ws shall follow
w NDS for she ear and
withdrawal. Adjustment for strength design shall use the strenngth level adju
ustment facto
or
(KF) equal to 3.32.

6
61

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6 MANUFACTU
M RE OF PALL
LETS

6.1 Componentt Defects

ns and classiffications, see ANNEX C.
For definition

6.1.1 Sound knots

en through sound knots.
Fasteners may be drive

6.1.2 Unsound knots and ho oles

Fasteners shall be compensated when associated d with unsoun
nd knots or ho
oles. Unsounnd
knots or hooles shall not be permitted in the outer e
edge of end b
boards, nor on the exposed
ends of strringers or bloc
cks.

6.1.3 Wane and d decay

Wane and decay are pe ermitted on anny componen nt; provided it is not located
d on the outer
edge of enndboards, or ono the expose ed sides of st ringers or blo
ocks. Decay iis not permitte
ed
in the notc
ch area (see Figure
F 3-5). Wane
W may ap ppear on the ssurface or edg ge of other
componen nts; but in no case
c shall fas
steners be dri ven into or th
hrough either defect. Not
more than one third (33 3%) of the com mponents in a pallet may ccontain wane. Any fastene er
associatedd with maximu um wane shall be compenssated.

6.1.4 Splits andd shake

Splits and shakes running the full thickness of a ccomponent (n
not applicable to nail splits))
shall be straddled with fasteners
f in th
he top and boottom end decckboards and
d butted side
bottom dec ckboards.

6.1.5 Panel com mponents

Knots, knootholes, splits in individual veneers and other voids d
do not affect thhe strength aand
stiffness off plywood pannels having a minimum dim mension of 24 4 in. (600 mmm). For widthss
less than 24
2 in. (600 mm m), the plywoood face shall not have knoots, plugs, or open defects
(knotholess and splits) th
hat aggregate e more than o
one fourth the width of eitheer face ply at
any cross section of the e piece.

6.2 Assembly

6.2.1 Wood com mponent plac cement

The placemment of wood d components s shall be as ffollows:
 Alll leading deck
kboards shall be within ±1//4 in. (±6 mm) of their speccified location
n.
 Otther wood com mponents shaall be within ±
±1/2 in. (±13 m
mm) of their sspecified
loc
cation, except that bottom boards shall not extend innto the stringeer notch.

Maximum placement de eviation shall be limited to one third of th

he componennts in any
pallet. All similar compo
onents shall be
b placed parrallel unless o otherwise spe
ecified.

6.2.2 e deviation
Pallet size
The pallet size shall be limited to plus +1/4 in. (+6
6 mm) and -1//2 in. (-13 mm m) of the targe
et
dimension, as measure ed at specific points
p along tthe pallet lenggth and width
h. The palletss
at on their top
must be fla p and bottom surfaces to w within 1/4 in. (6
6 mm) maxim mum deviation n
from the co
orner-to corne er straight line
e.

6
62

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.2.3 Squareness
Square or rectangular pallets
p shall be limited to 1 .5% or 1 in. (2
25 mm) differrence in the
measured top deck diaggonals, which hever is greate er.

6.2.4 Fastening
g - driven fasteners

6.2.4.1 Fasten
ner schedules
s

Nails and
a staples
The minimum
m numbber of driven fasteners
f onent is speciified in
perr pallet compo
Table 3-5.

Table
T 3-5
Minim
mum Numb
ber of Drive
en Fastene
ers
MINNIMUM NUMB BERa OF FAST TENERS PER
DECK KBOARD WID DTH CONN NECTION OF S SINGLE-USE O OR REUSABLE
P
PALLETS
Up to 5-1/4 in. (133 mm)
m 2
5-1/4 up to 7 in. (133-17 79 mm) 3
7 to 8 in. (179-203 mm)
m 4
Corner
C block 3b
Interior
I block 2
a noo less than onee nail or staple per 8 sq. in (5,,161 mm2) of bblock fastening surface
b coorner blocks wiith less than 166 sq. in. (10,3222 mm2) of blocck fastening surrface shall be cconnected with
h at
le
east two (2) fasteners

Bolts, wood screws s, and lag scre

ews
The ennd deckboard ds shall have at least two bbolts, wood sccrews, or lag screws, per
cornerr connection and
a at least one at all othe er connectionss. It is recommended that
bolts be
b retightened d at the time the
t connected d componentss reach equiliibrium moistuure
contennt (EMC) durin ng the use off the pallet. P
Panel deck bloock pallets sh
hall have at
least one
o bolt per block. Bolted blocks that arre not round sshall have at least one
additio
onal pallet ass
sembly fasten ner per block to prevent bloock rotation.

6.2.4.2 Fasten ner placemen nt

Fasten ners shall be placed in succh a way as to o minimize sp plitting of the cconnected
compo onents. Staplle crowns sha all not be paraallel to the gra
ain of the decck componentts.
A com mbination of the various fastener types in n a single con nnection shalll not be
permittted if they do not interact effectively;
e tha
at is, simultanneously contrributes to the
stiffnes
ss and strenggth, or both, of
o the connecttion. For exa mple, bolts in n oversize holes
and drriven fastenerrs represent a poor combin nation and ca annot be expe ected to work in
unisonn. They shall not be placed d in the same e connection o or different coonnections of
an ass sembly.

Panel deck stringerr pallets shall have a minimmum of three fasteners at tthe end of eacch
er starting 1 in
stringe n. (25 mm) in from the endd and spaced 2 in. (51 mm) on center.
Interior fasteners shhall be spaced a maximum m of 10 in. (25
54 mm) on center. When
using laminated
l blo
ocks, the faste
ener length re
equires a minimum of 1 in. (25 mm)
overlap between the top and botttom deck fassteners (see F Figure 3-7).

6.2.4.3 Clinching points of driven fasteners

Clinched fasteners shall be at least ¼ in. (6 m
mm) longer tha
an the sum oof the
esses of the components
thickne c being
b fasteneed and driven in such a ma
anner as to
prevennt buckling of the fastener under the cro
own or head.

6
63

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.2.4.4 Fastenner caused sp plits

sible fastener shanks or leg
Open splits with vis gs shall be lim
mited. No mo ore than one
open split
s with a vis
sible fastener shank or leg per connectio on shall be peermitted and
not moore than 1/3 of
o the compon nents per pall et shall conta
ain open splitss with visible
fastener shanks or legs at the coompletion of mmanufacture.

6.2.4.5 Protruding fastenerrs

Nail heeads, staple crowns,
c bolt heads,
h nuts, a
and screw hea ads shall be fflush or below
w
deck surfaces.
s Couuntersinking fastener
f head ds and protrudding fastener points shall n
not
signific
cantly affect pallet
p perform
mance. No pro otruding faste
ener points (shiners) shall bbe
permittted on the ex xposed face ofo outside strin
ngers or blockks or in lead d
deckboard
areas. Two protrud ding fasteners s on unexpose ed surfaces a
are permitted so long as th hey
do nott significantly affect pallet performance.
p Protruding fa
astener points are not
permittted when usin ng non clinchhed fasteners to attach decckboards to sttringerboardss in
block class
c pallets. Fasteners not driven into stringers and d
blockss shall be commpensated.

6.2.5 Fasteningg - chemical adhesives

a orr glues
Adhesives e used in conjunction with d
s shall only be ers conformin
driven fastene ng to
Section 5.5
5.

6.2.6 Laminated d block fasteening schedu ule

Laminated d blocks shall be assembleed with a minimmum of two faasteners driven through
either face
e conforming to
t the quality requirementss of Table 3-3
3, but equal to
o the block
height [1/2
2 in. (13 mm) if countersunk 1/4 in. (6 m
mm)] (see Figu
ure 3-7).

6
64

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-7
Sche
ematic Dia
agrams of Block
B Lammination an
nd Fastenin
ng

6
65

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7 REPAIR
R OF PALLETS
Prope erly repairing and recycling
g wood palletss is an enviro nmentally con nscientious practice, which
h
also in
ncreases unitt load materiaal handling effficiency and rreduces the ccost of producct storage and
d
distrib
bution. All pallets should be
b removed frrom service a nd be repaire ed, recycled o
or properly
disposed of, if deteermined to bee unsafe to pe
ersons or goo ds.

7.1 Damages
Damages wh hich should be repaired in pallets with lu
umber, panel, wood-based
d composite, or
engineered wood
w compon nents:

7.1.1 Missing deckboards, sttringers, blocks, or stringe rboards.

7.1.2 Broken deeckboards, stringers, the stringer foot, b

blocks or strin
ngerboards (see
Figure 3-8).

7.1.3 Splits in deckboards orr stringerboarrds of more th

han half the le
ength or width
h, which cannot
be securely fastened (s
see Figure 3-9 9).

7.1.4 Splits in stringers or blo

ocks of more than half the height or wid
dth and more than half the
length (seee Figure 3-9)..

7.1.5 Full width y length in strringer notchess (see Figure 3-8).

h splits of any

7.1.6 Missing wood

w on moree than two connections of tthe same com
mponent, whicch exposes o
one
or more sh
hanks (see Fig
gure 3-10).

7.1.7 Missing wood

w of more than a fourth
h of the board
d width and ha
alf of the boarrd length or
equivalent (see Figure 3-10).
3

7.1.8 Missing wood

w at anyon ne connection
n, which expo oses two or mmore fastener shanks, exce ept
at 4 in. (10
02 mm) wide deckboard
d annd butted jointts in perimete
er base block style pallets,
which requ uire repair if one
o or more fa asteners are eexposed (see e Figure 3-10 and Figure 3 3-
11).

7.1.9 Missing wood

w on struc
ctural panel de
ecks and pan m deckboards less than 24
nel strip bottom 4
in. (610 mm
m) wide (see Figure 3-12)..

Any one area of rectang

gular shape up
u to 1 in. (25 5 mm) deep and 10 in. (254
4 mm) long in
n
one edge of
o any compo onent, or up to
o 1-1/2 in. (38
8 mm) deep a
and 20 in. (508 mm) long in
n
aggregate on opposite edges.
e

0 Missing wood
7.1.10 w on struc
ctural panel de
ecks and pan m deckboards between 24
nel strip bottom 4
and 36 in. (610 and 9144 mm) wide (s see Figure 3- 12).

Any one area of rectang u to 1-1/2 in. (38 mm) dee

gular shape up ep and 10 in. (254 mm) lon ng
ge of any com
in one edg mponent, or up
p to 2 in. (51 m
mm) deep an
nd 20 in. (508 mm) long in
aggregate on opposite edges.
e

6
66

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-8
Schema
atic Diagrams of Brokken Deckb
board,
Stringer and
a Stringe er Foot

6
67

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 3-9
Sche
ematic Diag
grams of Splits
S in Deeckboards and String
ger

6
68

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-10
Schem
matic Diag
grams of M
Missing Wo
ood

6
69

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-11
Schematic Diagramms of a Blo
ock Class Pallet Sho
owing the B
Butted
ection in th
Conne he Bottom Deck of a Perimeterr Base Dessign

Figure 3-12
Schem
matic Diagrams Show wing the A
Allowable L
Locations a
and
Extentt of Missing Wood inn a Block P
Pallet

7
70

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.1.11
1 Missing wood
w on paneel decks and panel
p strip bo
ottom deckboa
ards over 36 in. (914 mm)
wide (see Figure 3-12).

Any one area of rectang

gular shape up
u to 2 in. (51 mm) deep and 10 in. (2544 mm) long in
n
one edge of
o any compo onent, or up to
o 3 in. (76 mm
m) deep and 2
20 in. (508 mm) long in
aggregate on opposite edges.
e

2 Missing wood
7.1.12 w in areas
s around cutouts in panel d
decks (see Fig
gure 3-12).

In areas arround cutouts axis does not span the ope

s where the sttrong panel a ening between
n
stringer or blocks, the to
otal damage cannot
c exceeed 1 in. (25 mm) deep and 10 in. (254
mm) long ono either or both
b opposite sides. Otherrwise, missingg wood is limited as in
Sections 7.1.9
7 through 7.1.11.

3 Delaminattion of panel decks and pa

7.1.13 anel bottom d
deckboards le
ess than 24 in
n. (610 mm)
wide (see Figure 3-13).

Missing wo ood due to de

elamination is
s limited to a m
maximum of o one-third of th
he panel’s tota
al
thickness for
f any width panel section
n and shall no ot occur in connections. D Delamination is
limited to a maximum of 3 in. (76 mmm) deep and h half the length
h of the affectted edge or up
to 4 in. (10
04 mm) and tw
wo-thirds the length in agggregate on opposite edges.

4 Delaminattion of panel decks and pa

7.1.14 anel bottom d
deckboards be
etween 24 an
nd 36 in. (610
and 914 mm)
m wide (see e Figure 3-13)).

Delamination is limited to a maximum m of 8 in. (203

3 mm) deep a and half the to
otal length of
ed edge or up to 10 in. (254
the affecte 4 mm) and tw wo-thirds the length in aggrregate on
opposite edges.
e

5 Delaminattion of panel decks and pa

7.1.15 anel bottom ddeckboards ovver 36 in. wid
de (see Figure e
3-13). Dellamination is limited to a maximum
m of 12
2 in. (305 mm
m) deep and hhalf the total
length of th
he affected ed
dge or up to 15
1 in. (381 mm m) and two-th
hirds the leng
gth in aggrega ate
on oppositte edges.

6 Delaminattion around cutouts

7.1.16 c in pan
nel decks (see
e Figure 3-13 3). In areas around cutoutss
where the strong panel axis does no ot span the op
penings betwe een the stringgers or blockss,
elamination cannot exceed
the total de d 3 in. (76 mm
m) and one-th hird the total le
ength on eitheer
or both opposite edges.. Otherwise, delamination
d is limited as iin Sections 7..1.13 through
7.1.15.

7.1.17 st, which overhangs pallet sides or end s.

7 Block twis

7
71

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-13
atic Diagrams of Pane
Schema el Delamin
nation

7
72

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.2 ded General Repair Proc

Recommend cedures

7.2.1 Pallets of known spec

cification

ccordance with the respecctive requirem

The repairr shall be in ac ments.

7.2.2 Pallets of unknown sp

pecification

7.2.2.1 Deckbboard/stringerrboard/block components

c
Pallet components with unaccep ptable damage e should be rremoved and replaced with h
new orr used compo onents of simiilar material a
and dimension ns where matterial quality
and tolerances are given in Secttion 7.3.

7.2.2.2 Panel Deck Repair

A minimum width off 3-½ in. (89 mm)
m shall be removed from m the entire le
ength or width
h
amaged edge
of a da e of a panel de
eck that is to be repaired. The removed d section musst
be repplaced by a buutted leading edge lumber deckboard off the same dimensions. For
block class
c pallets, the blocks that the replaceement deckbo oard is fasten
ned to must bee
twice as
a long as thee width of the replacementt deckboard o or 7 in. (178 m
mm) minimum m,
and orriented with th
his dimensionn perpendicula ar to the repla
acement deckkboard.

An occcasional wide
er or narrowerr component m
may be used so long as th
he gaps
betweeen deckboardds are not exc
cessive and th
hat these com
mponents aree properly
fastened.

7.2.2.3 Fastenner heads, cro

owns or pointts on exposed
d exterior palllet surfaces sshall be driven
n
flush or
o below the component
c su
urface.

7.2.2.4 Free standing

s faste
eners should be
b driven into
o the block, sttringer, or strin
ngerboard an
nd
the join
nts shall be compensated
c with additiona
al fasteners.

7.2.2.5 Loose components should be removed or seccurely fastene

ed.

7.2.2.6 Twisteed blocks overhanging pallet sides or en

nds shall be ssquared and rrefastened with
at leas
st two fastene
ers.

7.2.2.7 Stringeers with horizontal or diagoonal splits sha

all be repaired d with metal cconnector
plates (see Figure 3-14).
3 The onnly permissiblle repair of a completely se eparated partt,
is the reattachment
r t of a stringer end foot. Spplits at large kknows, 1 in. (2
25 mm) in
diametter, or greater, shall not be
e repaired. R Repair of crosss-grain breaks are not
permittted.

Metal connector pla

ates specifications
Size: Plaates shall be a minimum off 2-3/4 in. (70 mm) in lengtth and width
and 7097 mm2) in area as determined by external plate
d 11 sq. in. (7
dim
mensions.

Material: nimum basse-metal thickne

Min ess: 20 gauge (0.034 in.) ((0.9 mm)
min
nimum thickne
ess of uncoatted commerccial grade sheet steel.

Teeth: At least
l 4 teeth per sq. in. (6445 mm2) of plate area as d determined byy
extternal dimenssions. The len ngth of teeth sshall be at lea
ast 0.325 in.
(8.3
3 mm) exclud ding plate thicckness.

7
73

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-14
Schematic Diagrams
D of
o Two of tthe Common Styles
of Metal Connector
C r Plates

7
74

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Metal plate applicattion

Apply plates with mechanical,
m hy
ydraulic, or pn
neumatic pow
wer, using ma
achinery
ned and manu
design ufactured for this
t purpose.

The spplit shall be closed with a mechanically,

m hydraulicallyy, or pneumatically operate ed
press prior to plate application. A minimum o of two plates sshall be used per repair.
The plates shall be applied oppo osite one anotther on each stringer side and pressed
mecha anically, hydraaulically, or pn
neumatically flush with the e wood surfacce at locationss
(see Figure
F 3-15). Plates shall be b aligned in ssuch a way th hat they do no ot overhang tthe
stringe
er ends or edg ges. The platte edges or e ends shall be a approximately parallel to the
ends or
o edges of th he stringers. All
A teeth of ea ach plate shall be pressed into the wood d.
The longest dimens sion of the plaate shall be in
n the directionn of the split. Each plate
appliedd shall cover the split. Splits longer tha an 8 in. (200 mmm) shall be repaired with
four plates. Two op pposite plates s at each end of the split sh hall be used ((see Figure 3
3-
15).

Figure 3-15
Schematic
S c Diagramss Showing Proper Plaacement
of Metal Plates
P Ove
er Splits

7.2.2.8 Compa
anion stringers
s — full length
h, half, notched
d, block, C-blo
ock, or plugs (ssee Figure 3-1
16)
Compa anion stringers shall be similar in widtth (see Table e 3-6) and shhall be no mo
ore
than 1/4 in. (6 mm)) “lower” in he
eight than thee component being repaire ed. Companiion
compo onents shall be
b fastened to o all supporte d top and botttom deck com
mponents usiing
the fas
stener scheduule in Section 6.2.4.1.

7
75

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-16
Schemattic Diagram
ms of Commpanion Stringer
Compo
onents Use ed to Repaiir Wood Pa
allets

Full len
ngth companion stringer
This is
s the stronges st companion repair practicce and is reco ommended w when both
interior notched fille
ets are cracke ed or severe ccracks are evvident between notches. T The
compa anion stringerr is similar in length to the rrepaired stringer and contaains notches if
used to repair a parrtial 4-way pa allet (see Figu
ure 3-17 and T Table 3-6).

Half Sttringers
This may
m be used when w only onee notch or strringer "foot" has failed. It iss of a similar
size an
nd half the len ngth of the orriginal stringerr and when necessary, con ntains a notch h
of simiilar size to tha
at being repaiired (see Figu ure 3-18).

ck
C-bloc
This may
m be used when
w a stringeer end foot orr above notch
h area requirees repair. Thee
repair component consists
c of a complete
c strin
nger end foot and most of tthe above
notch area. Typically the C Bloccks are approxximately 14 too 15 in. long ((356 to 381
mm) (ssee Figure 3-19).

Notcheed block
This companion
c component co ontains a no otch of simila
ar size to th
he notch beiing
repaire
ed and has tw wo "feet" at least
l 4 in. (1 02 mm) long
g on either sid
de of the nottch
(see Figure
F 3-19).

Plugs
These are short unn notched blockks, typically b
between 4 and d 18 in. (102 and 457 mm))
hat may be us
long th sed to repair a split stringe
er foot and bettween notchees in notched
stringe
ers (see Figurre 3-20).

7
76

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-17
Schemaatic Diagram of a Full-length Co ompanion Stringer R Repair
* Deckboards
D s are shorttened for iillustrative
e purposes
s

Figure 3-18
Schhematic Diagram of Half-compa
H anion Strinnger Repaiir
* Deckboards
D s are shorttened for iillustrative
e purposes
s

7
77

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 3-19
Schematic
c Diagram of C-block
k and Notcched Block k Stringer R
Repairs
* Deckboards
D s are shorttened for iillustrative
e purposess

Figure 3-20
Example of a Plug Repair of a S
Split Stringer "Foot"
* Deckboards
D s are shorttened for iillustrative
e purposes
s

7
78

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.3 mponent Quality

Repair Com

7.3.1 Fastenerss
ners used to repair conne
The fasten ections or attaach replaced d componentss or companiion
componen nts shall meet or exceed the quality desccribed in Secction 5.5.

7.3.2 Wood com

mponents

7.3.2.1 Compo onent grade

New or
o used compo onents may beb used. The component g grade shall be
e equivalent o
or
better than the reus
sable pallet de
escribed in Se
ection 5.1 and
d Table 3-1.

7.3.2.2 Speciees replacement or compan nion compone ents

Medium to high deensity hardwo ood and softw wood speciess may be ussed to repair or
replace any compoonent. These e are Wood S Species Classses 1, 2, 3, 4
4, 6, 11, 12, 2
21,
nd 29 in ANN
22, an NEX B. Low wer density haardwoods and softwood sspecies classses
should
d be used forr interior top and bottom deckboard re eplacement a and repair on nly.
These are Wood Sp pecies Classe es 7, 13, and 14 in ANNEXX B.

7.3.2.3 Replaccement panells or panel strrips

Shall be
b of similar grade, performance ratin g, and dimennsion, as those componen
nts
being replaced and shall be in co
onformance w
with Section 5
5.2 and 5.4.

7.3.2.4 Replaccement comp ponents of sim

milar dimensio
on
Table 3-6 defines "s
similar dimensions" and co
ontains the mmaximum allow
wed deviation
n of
replacement compo onents from th
he componen nt replaced.

Table
T 3-6
Maximum Allowa able Deviattion of Repplacement or Compa anion
Com
mponents from Component Be eing Replac ced, Repaiired, i.e. Co
omponents
s
of
o Similar Dimension
D ns. The Tolerances a are Based o on the Com mponent
Dimension
D ns of the Orriginal Pal let Being R
Repaired
LENGTH
L (in.) TH ICKNESS OR W
WIDTH (in.)
H
HEIGHT (in.)
Deckb board and + 1/4 (+ 6 mm) + 1/8 (+ 3 mm) -3
3/8 (- 9 mm)
stringe
erboard
Stringeer + 1/4 (+ 6 mm) + 1/8 (+ 3 mm) -1
1/8 (- 3 mm)
Block + 1/4 (+ 6 mm) + 1/8 (+ 3 mm) -1
1/4 (- 6 mm)

7.4 Repair Work

kmanship

7.4.1 Flatness
Pallets mu
ust be flat an
nd the deckbo
oard thicknesss within a pallet shall no
ot vary by mo
ore
than 3/16 in.
i (5 mm).

7.4.2 Squareness
The differe
ence in diagon
nal length sha
all not exceed
d 1/2 in. (12 m
mm).

7.4.3 Deckboarrd spacing

The spacin
ng shall not exceed 4 in. (1
102 mm) betw
ween top deckkboards in pa
allets of
unknown specification.
s

7
79

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.4.4 Overall paallet length and

a width
The tolerances on palleet length and width
w for Rep
paired Pallet C
Class 1 shall be ± 1/4 in. (±
±6
mm) , and for Repaired Class 2 or 3 the tolerancee ± 1/2 in. (12
2 mm).

7.4.5 Fasteningg schedule annd placemen nt

In conform
mance with Se
ections 6.2.4.1
1. and 6.2.4.2
2.

7.4.6 Overall apppearance

Sound co onstruction, no
n deckboarrds in the n notches, commponents are parallel a
and
perpendicu ular and commponents are flush with the pallet perimeter un
nless otherwise
specified.

7.5 Classes of Repaired

R 48xx40 Notched Three String ger Pallets
Class 1 - Repaired
R palle
ets, shall be permitted
p to ccontain metal plates, but no
o companion
stringer repairs.

Class 2 - Repaired pallets with one or two string

gers repaired using plugs and/or notch
hed
blocks or lo
onger compa
anion stringers
s.

Class 3 - Repaired
R palle
ets otherwise not meeting Class 1 and 2 criteria.

7.6 Additional Descriptions

D for Class off Repaired Pa
allets
To better balance pallet economy
e and performance , the above cclasses may in
nclude
escriptions such as describ
additional de bed below:

GMA Deck Coverage

C his implies seven top deckkboards and fiive bottom de
- Th eckboards.
More top and d bottom deckboards betteer protect prodduct. The pallets are stron
nger, more
functional, and more duraable than palle
ets with fewerr deckboards.

Four- or Six--Inch Wide En

ndboard - Pallets with nom 2 mm) wide, properly
minal 6 in. (152
fastened end d deckboardss are more funnctional and d
durable. Two properly fasteened nominall 4
in. (102 mm)) wide endboa ards, butted to
ogether, are e
equivalent in performance to a single
nominal 6 in. (152 mm) prroperly fastenned board.

Hardwoods anda Softwood ds - Repaired pallets of the n fabricated p

e same design predominantlyy
with dense hardwoods
h will be more durable and stroonger than pa
allets of a sim
milar design
fabricated prredominantly with softwood
d species.

epaired with Metal

Stringers Re M Connecttor Plates - N otched string gers repaired using metal
connector plates, in accorrdance with procedures
p deescribed in thiis Standard, h
have been
store the stringer to its orig
shown to res ginal strength..

7.7 Marking
The recomm mended markin ng should incclude:
 Class of re
epair
 Repairer’s identification
n
 Date of rep
pair
 Owner identification (if applicable,
a nd for pallets of known spe
an ecification)

Space permitting, the marrk shall be a minimum

m of 2 in. (51 mm) high, with lettters 1 in. (25
mm) high.

8
80

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8 REMANUFAC
R CTURE OF PA ALLETS
The reemanufacture e of a pallet using recycled
d pallet parts iis an environm
mentally consscientious
practice, which also increases unit
u load efficiency, and red duces the cosst of product sstorage and
bution. All pallets should be
distrib b removed frrom service a nd be remanu ufactured, reccycled or
propeerly disposed of, if determin ned to be uns
safe to person ns or goods.

8.1 Quality of Parts

P

8.1.2 Fasteners s
The fasten ners used for the assembly y of remanufaactured palletss shall meet o or exceed the
e
quality crite
eria described
d in Section 5.5.
5 Combo p pallets containning new strin ngers or blockks
shall be asssembled usin ng fasteners, which meet o or exceed the e criteria for "M
Manufacture o of
Pallets.” Pallets
P assemmbled with recycled stringerrs or blocks sshall be assem mbled using
fasteners meeting
m or ex
xceeding the criteria
c for "R epair of Palle
ets."

8.1.2 New wood d parts

The qualityy of new woodd parts for us
se in remanufa
actured palletts shall confo
orm to Section
ns
5.1, 5.2, 5..3 and 5.4.

8.1.3 Quality off recycled pa

allet parts

8.1.3.1 Recyccled component grades

Recyccled components shall confform to the qu
uality criteria in Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.3
and 5.4.

8.2.3.2 Wood species

The wood species used
u in remannufactured paallets is not lim
mited. Howevver, suggesteed
groupings of wood species of pra
actical value during sortatiion are listed Table 3-7. T
The
wood species
s in each wood speccies class cann be found in ANNEX B.

Table
T 3-7
Wood Species
S Grroups
WOOD GR ROUP WOO OD SPECIES CLASSES C CONTAINED IN GROUP
Mediuum/High dens
sity woods All species listed in Sp ecies Classes 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 21, 22
Low density
d woods
s All species listed in Sp ecies Classes 6, 7, 12, 133, 14, 29
Hardwwoods All species listed in Sp ecies Classes 1, 2, 3, 4, 6
6, 7, 21, 29
Softw
woods All species listed in Sp ecies Classes 11, 12, 13, 14, 22
Mixed
d woods All species listed for otther wood gro
oups

8.2 Quality of Assembly

A
Quality of assembly of remanufacture
r ed pallets sh
hall be accorrding to Secttion 6, with tthe
ceptions and additions.
following exc

8.2.1 Driving faasteners

Driving fas
steners throug
gh existing fas
stener holes in recycled pa
allet compone
ents shall
be avoided d.

8.2.2 Pre-existing fastener holes

h
Pre-existin oles shall be positioned du
ng fastener ho bly so as to limit their impa
uring assemb act
on pallet performance e. This inc cludes positio
oning such holes near but not with hin
connectionns.

8
81

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8.2.3 Fastener cause

c splits
Not more than one ha alf of the com
mponents in a reassemble
ed pallet sha
all contain op
pen
splits with visible fasten
ner shanks or legs.

8.2.4 Recycled component dimensionall variation

Recycled component
c dimensional
d variation
v anufactured pallet, relative to
within each rema
the target dimension
d (se
ee Table 3-8)).

Table
T 3-8
Dimen
nsion Tole
erances of Components

COMPONENT DIMEN
NSION TOOLERANCE
Board
d Thickness -0 +1/8
8” (-0 +3 mm))
Board
d Width +unlim ited – ¼” (-6 mm)*
Board
d Length +¼” (+ 6 mm)

String
ger Height -0 +1/8
8” (-0 +3 mm))
String
ger Width -0 +¼” (-0 +6 mm)
String
ger Length +¼” (+ 6 mm)

Blockk Height -0 +1/8

8” (-0 +3 mm))
Blockk Width -0 +¼” (-0 +6 mm)
Blockk Length +¼” (+ 6 mm)
* for each
e nominal deckboard width
w

Subp
part II PE
ERFORMA
ANCE STAN
NDARD
9 CONDITIONS
C OF PALLET USE
The use
u conditions s which palletts shall sustain during unit load materiall handling varry. Therefore
e,
the co
onditions of us
se shall be sppecified, inclu
uding perform ance levels. Where condiitions of use
vary, the condition which resultss in the highest stress leve
els shall be ussed as a basiss for
mining performance.
determ

9.1 Load Condition

Provide the description
d off the package
es, containerss or units to be
e placed on th
he pallet (i.e.
bags, boxes, barrels, bulk
k containers, blocks
b and m
machinery including the use e of load
stabilizers).

Provide meaasurements an nd location off bearing area

as for the pacckages, contaainers or unitss
to be placed on the pallet and the palle
et top and botttom decks, sstringers or blo
ocks.

ximum and av
Provide max verage load le
evels and load
d level variatio
ons.

9.2 Support Conditions

Indicate max
ximum unsupp
ported free sp
pan along the
e pallet length
h and width.

ximum numbe
Indicate max er of unit loads in a stack.

asurements and locations of

Indicate mea o bearing areeas between the pallet striingers or
stringerboard
ds and top an
nd bottom dec
cks and their supports.

8
82

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10 MEASURES
M OF
O PALLET PERFORMAN
P NCE
Pallett performance
e shall be speecified in term
ms of strength,, stiffness and
d durability. P
Pallet
perforrmance is dire
ectly correlate
ed to the type
e and quality o
of fastener, grade, speciess, and moisturre
content of lumber components
c and
a the material handling e environment.

Strength - determin ne design or safe

s of use. When reusable pallet
working loads for eacch condition o
condittions exist, the pallet and pallet
p componnent performa ance shall be based on the
e minimum
design or safe worrking load.

ess - determin
Stiffne ne maximum deflection or pallets and p
pallet compon
nents for each
h condition of
use.

bility - Single-use or Reusa

Durab able categorie
es (see Sectio
on 4.2).

Singlee-use pallets are intended for use with a single unit lo

oad. This cattegory of pallets requires
sufficiient damage resistance to survive at lea
ast one trip w
without requirin
ng repair.

Reusa able pallets are

a intended fo or repeated uses
u for more than one uniit load. This ccategory of
pallets requires suffficient damag
ge resistance
e to survive m
multiple trips w
without requiring repair.

The criteria
c for the classification
n of pallets are e documentation of the testt procedures
e given in the
provid
ded in Section n 11.

11 TEST PROCEDURES

11.1 Testing for Physical Models or Proto otypes

When possibble, actual loa
ads and suppo orts shall be u
used in the te
est. Howeverr, load and
support analogs, based ono sound engineering princciples, are accceptable. The e following test
methods andd their design criteria are re
ecognized:

ISO 8611 seeries. Pallets for materials handling – F lat pallets

International Standards Organization
O (ISO)
www.iso.org

ASTM D1185. "Standard Test Methods

s for Pallets a
and Related S
Structures Em
mployed in
ndling and Shipping."
Material Han
ASTM Internnational
www.astm.org

11.2 Testing of Computer

C Moodels
ysical testing of pallets, pallet design so
In lieu of phy oftware shall b
be used to pre
edict the
measures off performance e defined in Section 10; strrength, stiffne
ess, and durab
bility.

Subp
part III PHYTOSAN
P NITATION STANDARD
S D
12 PHYTOSANIT TATION OF WOOD
W PALLEETS
Treatmment and marking of wood d pallets mustt conform to t he Internation
nal Standardss for
Phytoosanitary Mea asures Publica
ation No. 15 (ISPM
( 15) Reegulations of wwood packaging material in
intern
national trade.. ISPM 15 haas been adoptted by the Un nited States aand its trading
g partners as
their import require
ements for woood pallets.

8
83

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Treatm
ment or qualitty mark (Figure 3-21) shou
uld include the
e following:
 IPPC logo
 Two-letter U.S. abbrevia ation
 Unique number assigne ed by an inspe
ection agencyy to the facilitty
 HT or MB abbreviation

Figure 3-21
HT
H and MB
B Treatmen nt Marks

Wood
d pallets can be
b ISPM 15-c
compliant by adhering
a to an
ny of the follo
owing:

12.1 Debarked
Wood palletss must be ma ade of debarked wood. An ny number of visually sepaarate and clea
arly
distinct small pieces of ba
ark may remain if they are:
 Less than 3 cm (13/16 inn.) in width (re
egardless of leength), or
 Greater than 3 cm (13/16 1 in.) in width
h, with the to
otal surface a dividual piece of
area of an ind
bark less than 50 cm2

12.2 Heat treatedd (HT) Wood Pallets

Heat treatmeent and markiing of wood pallets
p shall co
onform to the
e enforcementt regulations
and policy off the American Lumber Sta
andards Com mmittee (ALSCC) Wood Packkaging Materiial
(WPM) Program.

12.3 Methyl brommide (MB) Fu umigated Palllets

MB fumigatioon and markin ng of wood pa
allets shall co
onform to the enforcement regulations
and policy off the Export WPM
W Fumigattion Program..

12.4 New Palletss

New pallets that will be us ust be ISPM 15-compliantt.
sed for exportt shipment mu

12.5 Recycled Pa allets

Reusing ISPPM 15-complia
ant wood pallets do not req ment and remarking.
quire retreatm
However, repaired, reman
nufactured annd combo pal lets must be rretreated and
d remarked in
SPM 15-compliant. Old ma
order to be IS arks must be obliterated.

8
84

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A A
STANDA
ARDS CONC
CERNING WOOD
W PAALLETS AN
ND CONTA
AINERS

Natio
onal Wooden Pallet and Container
C As
ssociation (N
NWPCA)
www.palletcentral.com
 NWPCA Uniform
U Stand
dard for Wood
d Pallets
 NWPCA Uniform
U Stand
dard for Wood
d Containers

Materrial Handling
g Industry (M MHI)
www.mhi.org
 MH1 Palleets, Slip Sheetts, and Otherr Bases For U Unit Loads (20005 edition)
 Pa
art 1 Definition
ns and Terminology Coverring Pallets an nd Related Structures
 Pa
art 2 Sizes of Wood Pallets s
 Pa
art 3 Wood Pa allets
 Pa
art 4 Export Pallets
P
 Pa
art 5 Driven Fasteners for Assembly
A of P
Pallets and R
Related Structtures
 Pa
art 6 Protocol for Measuring Quality of P Pallet Nails an
nd Staples
 Pa
art 7 Testing Procedures
P fo
or Pallets and
d Related Struuctures
 Pa
art 8 Slip Sheets
 Pa
art 9 Wood Pa allets for Milita
ary Use
 Pa
art 10 Performmance Specifiication for Pa llets to be Ussed in Automa ated Unit-Load
Maaterial Handling Equipmen nt

ASTMM Internationnal
www.astm.org
D10 Packaging
P
 ASTM D11 185 Standard Test Method ds for Pallets a
and Related SStructures Emmployed in
Material Handling and Shipping
S
 ASTM D41 169 Standard Practice for Performance Testing of Sh hipping Contaainers and
Systems
 ASTM D60 055 Standard Test Method ds for Mechan nical Handling
g of Unitized L
Loads and
Large Shippping Cases and
a Crates
 ASTM D61 179 Standard Test Method ds for Rough H Unitized Loadss and Large
Handling of U
Shipping Cases
C and Crrates
 ASTM D61 198 Standard Guide for Traansport Packkaging Design n
 ASTM D61 199 Standard Practice for Quality
Q of Woood Memberss of Containerrs and Palletss
 ASTM D62 253 Standard Practice for Treatment
T an
nd/or Markingg of Wood Pacckaging
Materials

F16 Fasteners
F
 ASTM F68
80 Standard Test
T Methods for Nails
 ASTM F15
575 Standard Test Method for Determin ning Bending Yield Momen nt of Nails
 ASTM F16
667 Standard Specification
n for Driven Fa
asteners: Nails, Spikes, an
nd Staples

D07 Wood
W
 ASTM D17761 Standard test methods
s for mechaniical fastenerss in wood
 ASTM D30043 Standard test methods
s for structura
al panels in fle
exure
 ASTM D44442 Standard test methods
s for direct mo
oisture conten ment of wood
nt measurem
and wood--base materia
als

8
85

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

 ASTM D47 761 Standard test methods s for mechaniical propertiess of lumber and wood-base
structural material
m
 ASTM D54 456 Standard specification
n for structura l composite luumber
 ASTM D54 457 Standard specification
n for computin ng reference rresistance of wood-based
materials and
a structurall connections for load and resistance de esign
 ASTM D74 438 Standard practice for field
f calibratio
on and applicaation of hand-held moisturre
meters

Intern
national Orga anization forr Standardiza ation (ISO)
www.iso.org
55 Paackaging and distribution ofo goods
55.18
80 Freight disttribution of go
oods
55.18
80.20 Generall purpose palllets
 ISO 445 Pallets
P for matterials handlin
ng – Vocabula ary
 ISO 6780 Pallets for intercontinental materials ha ndling - Princcipal Dimensio ons and
Tolerances s
 ISO 8611-1 Pallets for materials
m hanndling - Flat P allets - Part 1
1: Test metho ods
 ISO/TS 86 611-2 Pallets for
f materials handling - Fla at Pallets - Paart 2: Perform
mance
requirements and selec ction of tests
 ISO/TS 86 611-3 Pallets for
f material handling - Flatt Pallets - Parrt 3: Maximum m working loa ads
 ISO/TR 11444 Quality of o sawn wood d used for thee construction of pallets
 ISO 12776 6 Pallets - Slip
p sheets
 ISO 12777 7-1 Methods of o test for pallet joints - Parrt 1: Determinnation of bend ding resistancce
of pallet na
ails, other dowwel-type fasteeners and sta aples
 ISO 12777 7-2 Methods of o test for pallet joints - Parrt 2: Determinnation of withddrawal and
head pull-tthrough resisttance of palle et nails and sttaples
 ISO 12777 7-3 Methods of o test for pallet joints - Parrt 3: Determinnation of strenngth of pallet
joints
 ISO 13194 4 Box pallets – Principal re equirements a and test metho ods
 ISO 15629 9 Pallets for materials
m handdling - Qualityy of fasteners for assemblyy of new and
repair of ussed, flat, woo
oden pallets
 ISO 18333 3 Pallets for materials
m handdling - Qualityy of new wood den compone ents for palletss
 ISO 18334 4 Pallets for materials
m handdling - Qualityy of assemblyy of new, wooden, flat palle ets
 ISO 18613 3 Repair of fla
at wooden palllets

national Plan
Intern nt Protection Convention n (IPPC)
www.ippc.int
 Internation
nal Standard for
f Phytosanittary Measure es (ISPM) Pub
blication No. 1
15 Regulation
n
for wood packaging
p maaterial in interrnational trade
e

Amerrican Society
y of Mechanical Engineerrs (ASME)
www.asme.org
 ASME
A nified inch scrrew threads (UN and UNR
B1.1 Un R thread form))
 ASME
A B18.2.1
1 Square, hex x, heavy hex and
a askew heead bolts and hex, heavy h
hex, hex flang
ge,
 lo
obed head and lag screws (inch series)
 ASME
A B18.6.1
1 Wood screw ws, inch seriess

onal Institute of Standards and Techn

Natio nology (NIST T)
www.nist.gov
 PS 1-07 Structural Plyw
wood
 PS 2-04 Performance Standard
S for Wood-Based
W Structural-Usse Panels
 PS 20-05 American
A Sofftwood Lumbe er Standard

8
86

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

APA – The Engine

eered Wood Association n
www.apawood.org
 PRP 108 Performance
P Standards an
nd Policies forr Structural-U
Use Panels

wood Plywoo
Hardw od and Vene
eer Association (HPVA)
www.hpva.org
 ANSI/HPVVA HP-1-2004
4 American Naational Stand
dard for Hardw
wood and Deccorative
Plywood

Natio
onal Hardwoo od Lumber Association
A (NHLA)
www.natlhardwood d.org
 Rules for the measurem
ment and insp
pection of hard
dwood and cyypress

SPECIFICA
S ATIONS CO
ONCERNING WOOD P
PALLETS A
AND CONT
TAINERS
Norrth America
a

Amerrican Societyy of Agricultu ural and Biollogical Engin

neers (ASAB
BE)
www.asabe.org
 Agricultura
al pallet bins (ASAE
( S337.1)

APA - The Engineeered Wood Association

A
www.apawood.org
 Softwood plywood
p palle
ets PP 61-80
 Collapsible
e big bin
 Collapsible
e slim bin

ASTMM Internation
nal
www.astm.org
D10 Packaging
P
 ASTM D60 039/D6039M Standard Spe ecification Oppen and Cove ered Wood Crrates
 ASTM D62 251/D6251M Standard Spe ecification forr Wood-Cleate ed Panelboarrd Shipping
Boxes
 ASTM D62 254/D6254M Standard Spe ecification forr Wirebound PPallet-Type W
Wood Boxes
 ASTM D62 256/D6256M Standard Spe ecification forr Wood-Cleate ed Shipping B
Boxes and
Skidded, Load-Bearing
L Bases
 ASTM D65 573/D6573M Standard Spe ecification forr General Purrpose Wirebound Shipping g
Boxes
 ASTM D68 880 Standard Specification
n for Wood Bo oxes
 ASTM D74 478/D7478M Standard Spe ecification forr Heavy Duty Sheathed Wo ood Crates

Canadian Pallet Council

C (CPCC)
www.cpcpallet.com
m
 48x40 in. stringer
s pallett

mittee for Grraphics Arts Technology Standards ((CGATS)

Comm
 Graphic te
echnology - Pa
allet loading for
f printed ma
aterials (1995
5)

The Electronic
E Ind
dustry Pallett Specificatioon (EIPS) Tas
sk Group
www.hp.com/packaging/EIPS/
 Electronic Industry Palle
et Specificatio
on, 2003

8
87

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Groce
ery Manufacturers Assoc
ciation of Am
merica (GMA A)
www.gmabrands.c
com
 Recommendations on the Grocery In
ndustry Pallett System (199
92)

Department of Deefense
www.assist.daps.d
dla.mil/quickse
earch
 A-A-52586 Pallet, material handling, woo od stringer con struction, 4-waay partial, 48 x 40 inches
 MIL-C-37744B Crates, Woo od: Open 12,00 00 and 16,000--Pound Capaciity
 MIL-DTL-24427H Box, Amm munition Packing: Wood, nail ed
 MIL-C-37744B Crates, Woo od: Open 12,00 00- and 16,000 0-pound capaciity
 MIL-C-212115A(1) NOT 1 Crates,
C Pallets, Ammunition
 MIL-P-15011J Pallet, Mate erial Handling, Wood Post Co onstruction, 4-WWay Entry
 MIL-P-159443D(5) Pallet, material
m handlinng, wood, ship cargo, stevedo oring, 48 inchees long by 72
inches wide
e, 2-way entry
 MIL-P-454449B Pallets, units, wood, for shipment
s of pro
ojectile metal pa
arts, and projecctile ammunitio
on
 MIL-P-870889 Pallets, mateerial handling, molded wood p particles 40 x 4
48 inch, 4-way
 MIL-STD-1447 Palletized Unit
U Loads
 MIL-STD-2999 Visual inspeection standard ds for nailed woood boxes and wirebound wo ood boxes used d in
small arms ammunition
 QSTAG-880 0 ED.1 Military
y pallets, packages and conta iners
 STANAG-28 828 ED.6 Militaary pallet, pack
kages and conttainers

Euro
opean Unio
on
Association of Pla
astic Manufa acturers in Europe
E (APM E)
www.apme.org
Chem
mical Industry (CP) Pallets
 CP1 1000x1
1200 mm
 CP2 800x12
200 mm
 CP3 1140x1
1140 mm
 CP4 1100x1
1300 mm
 CP5 760x11
140 mm
 CP6 1200x1
1000 mm
 CP7 1300x1
1100 mm
 CP8 1140x1
1140 mm
 CP9 1140x1
1140 mm

Pallett Return Syste

em (PRS) Pallets
 PRS 4 1100
0x1300 mm
 PRS 7 1300
0x1100 mm
 PRS 8 1140
0x1140 mm
 PRS 9 1140
0x1140 mm

Europ
pean Pallet Association
A (EPAL)
(
www.epal.eu
 800 x 1200 mm EUR
 1200 x 1000 0 mm EUR 2
 1000 x 1200 0mm EUR 3
 800 x 600 mmm EUR 6
 Box pallets
 Pallet collarrs

Asia
 1100 x 110
00mm (T11)

8
88

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A B
WOOD SP
PECIES CL
LASSES

CLA
ASS NUMBE
ER CLASS NAME SPEC
CIES
North Am
merican Hardw
woods
American beech
Ash ((green, white)
Birch
h (sweet, yello ow)
Blackk cherry
Blackk locust
1 High density Eas
stern hardwoo
ods Dogwwood
Elm ((rock, slipperyy)
Hickoory
Maplle (black, red,, sugar)
Persimmon
Tan ooak
Bigle
eaf maple
2
Oreggon ash
Ash ((black, pumpkin)
Hackkberry
Maplle (silver, strip
ped)
Magn nolia
3 Mediu
um density Ea
astern hardw
woods
Papeer birch
Swee etgum
Sycaamore
Tupeelo
Califo
ornia black oa ak
Casccara
Chinquapin
4 Western hardwoods
Madrrone
Myrtlle
Oreggon white oakk
6 Red alder
American basswo ood
Aspeen (bigtooth, q quaking)
Buckkeye
7 Low
w density Eas
stern hardwoo
ods Butte
ernut
Cataalpa
onwood (balsam,black)
Cotto
Easteern poplar
Red oak
21 Eastern
n oaks
Whitee oak
29 Yello
ow poplar

8
89

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

CLA
ASS NUMBE
ER CLASS NAME SPEC
CIES
North Am
merican Softw
woods
Doug glas fir (coastt, Interior Wesst,
Interior Northh, Interior
11 Dougllas-fir
South)
Westtern larch
Fir (C
California red, grand, noble e,
12 Hem
m-Fir Pacific silver, white)
Hemmlock (Western n, Mountain)
Baldccypress
Easteern hemlock
Fir (b
balsan, subalp pine)
Pine (Eastern whiite, jack,
lodgepole, M Monterey,
Norway, Pon nderosa, suga ar,
13 SP
PF
Western whitte)
Redw wood
Soutthern pine (pittch, pond)
Spruuce (black, En ngelmann, red d,
sitka, Virginia
a, white)
Westtern red ceda ar
Ceda ar (Alaska, Attlantic white,
14 Low density
y softwoods Eastern red, incense,
Northern whiite, Port Orforrd)
Soutthern yellow p pine (loblolly,
22 SY
YP
longlleaf, shortleaff, slash)

Euro
opean Specie
es
Kapuur
31 Imported Hardwoods
H Keruuing
Meng gkulang
Ash
Beecch
32 Dense Europea
an Hardwood
ds
Oak
Planee
Doug glas fir
33 Dense
D Europe
ean Softwoodss Larchh (European, Japanese)
Pine (jack, maritimme, Scots)
Dutcch elm
Hyrbbrid larch
Pine (Corsican, lo odgepole)
34 Medium Dense Woods
Poplaar (black Italia
an, grey)
Redw wood
Silve
er fir
English elm
35 Whitewood a spruce (Can
Sitka nada)
Whiteewood
Radiate pine
Spruuce (black, No orway, white,
36 Co
ommon Europ
pean softwood
ds
a)
Sitka
Whitee willow
37 Hybrrid poplar

9
90

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

CLA
ASS NUMBE
ER CLASS NAME SPEC
CIES
South
S Americ
can and Othe
er Species
41 Radiiate pine (Chile)
42 Gmeelina arborea (Costa Rica)
43 Pinuss caribaea (V
Venezuela)
44 Pinuss elliottii
45 Pinuss taeda
46 Eucaalyptus granddis (Uruguay)

9
91

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A C
DEFINITION
D N AND CLA
ASSIFICAT
TION OF D
DEFECTS
DEFINITIONS DEFECT CCLASSIFICA
ATION
Critical Defects
decayy: a disintegration of the wood
w substanc ce Broken n componentss
due to
o actions of wood-destroyi
w ng fungi, also
o
knownn as dote, rott and unsoundd wood. Protrudding nails on eedge or end sstringers,
stringerrboards, bloccks, or deckbo
oards
soundd knot: a knot that is tight, solid, without
voids and at least as
a hard as the surrounding g Nonconnforming palle
ets due to sizze, flatness orr
wood in at least on
ne face, exhib biting structura
al square ness
gth.
streng
g wood excee
Missing eding allowab
ble limits
split or
o shake: sep paration within
n a wood
memb ber not confinned to the woood surface, area defect (ssplits, decay, excess knot)
Notch a
usually intersecting g two surfaces. For the
purpo oses of this Sttandard, a split intersecting
g Other DDefects
only one
o face of the pallet comp ponent will bee Checkss
treateed as a split only when it ex
xceeds ½ the e Compo onent placing
depth h, width or thic
ckness of the component. Compre ession wood
Crook
Unsouund knot: a knot
k ose and/or, due
that is loo Decay
to dec
cay, has no sttructural strenngth. Decaye ed knot
Fasten er in decay
Wanee: bark or lack of wood from any cause,, Fasten er in maximum wane
excep
pt eased edge es, on the edg
ges of the palllet Holes
component. Honeyccomb
Inside sshiner
Knots
Missingg nail
Moisturre content
Overha ang
Pitch
Saw cu ut
Shake
Slope oof grain
Splits
Step
Underh hang
Wane
Wane a above notch
Wane o on edge of lea oard or exposed
ading deckbo
stringerr

9
92

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A D
GRADING
G AGENCIES
A FOR STRU
UCTURAL
L PANELS
APA - The Enginee
ered Wood As
ssociation
www.apawaood.orrg
Professional Servic
ce Industries//Pittsburgh Te
esting Labora
atories
www.psiusa.com/s services/wood d.aspx?
Timbe
er Engineering Company (TECO)
www.tecotested.co
om

ANNEX
A E
WOO
OD-BASED
D COMPOSSITE TEST
TS
E1. 24
4-hour Comp
posite Block
k Soak Test

E1.1 Samples
 Ten (10) blocks
b (minimu um) are requiired.
 Condition each
e block att ambient labo
oratory condittions for at lea
ast 48 hrs. prrior to testing..

E1.2 Test equip pment

 An approp priately sized open-top
o flat--bottom waterr tight tank ca
apable of bein
ng filled to a
depth of att least 12 inch
hes. If require ed, more than
n one tank ca an be used.
 A suitable “hold down” fixture(s)
f to prevent the bloocks from floaating and to m
maintain a
constant water
w hydraulic pressure off 0.2 psi at thee top surface of the block.
 The ho old-down fixtuure may be su uspended from m above or p laced into thee tank.
 The fix xture should beb designed to t allow waterr free access to all block su
urfaces.
 The fix xture should beb designed so s that when submerged, tthe bottom off the block is a at
least 1”
1 above the bottom
b of the tank and 5.5 inches (+/- .2 25) below the e surface leveel
of the water (providding a hydraullic pressure o of .20 psi).

E1.3 Procedure es
 Measure and
a record ea ach block’s weeight, length, width and height.
 Dimension nal measurem ments are to be
b made using g a surface pllate and digita
al height gage
e
capable off measuring to o an accuracy y of +/- .001 inn.
 Each dime ension should be measured d at three diffferent location
ns on the blocck, with the
location off the measureement marked d for future refference.
 Place the blocks
b into the tank such that:
 blocks s are oriented bottom (smo ooth) side up.
 water temperature
t should
s be ma aintained betw ween 65 and 75°F.
 blocks s are separateed by at least 1 in. (25 mm )
 Blocks shoould be submerged for a minimum
m of 24
4 hours
 Remove blocks and allo ow to drain on
n an open gra ate.
 Final meas surements sh hould be made e within 5 min n. of removal from the tankk.

E1.4 Measurem ments

 Measure thhe after-soak weight, lengtth, width and height of eacch block.
 Measure dimensions
d att the same po oints as meas ured before.
 Calculate and
a report res sults as follow
ws:
 % change = (wet - dry)
d / dry x 10 00.
 Averag ge % and standard deviatio on of water-w
weight gain.
 Averag ge % and standard deviatio dimensional c hange.
on for each d

9
93

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

E2. Pallet Block Side

S Tine Com
mpression Test
T

E2.1 Samples
 Ten (10) blocks
b (minimuum) are requiired.
 Condition each
e block @ ambient laboratory condiitions for at le
east 48 hr. prior to testing.

E2.2 pment
Test equip
Compression testing ma achine must have
h the follo
owing:
 a peak k-load capacitty of at least 5,000
5 lbf.
 adjusta able platen se
et at 10 in./miin.
 a fixturre designed to simulate a fork
f truck forkk tine (Figure E1).

Figure
F E1
Fork Tine Fixtu
ure

9
94

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

E2.3 Procedure es
 Measure and
a record the e block’s weig
ght, length, w idth and height.
 The test bllock should be oriented soo that the fixtu
ure force is dirrected toward
d the center o
of
one of the ends of the block
b (Figure E2).

Figure
F E2
Tine Test Block Orie
entation
E2.3 Measuremment
 Measure th
he peak load at failure.

N Insertion Force Test

E3. Nail

While a sppecific nail inssertion force standard

s meth
hod is not inc luded in ASTM D1761,
insertion foorce can be ofo significancee. Typical naiil guns may h
have more diffficulty with
insertion iff driving force required is to
oo high.

E3.1 Samples
 Ten (10) blocks
b (minimu um) are requiired.
 3 nails perr block, nails should
s ould be clean and free of o
be sho oil and any su
urface
irregularitie
es
 Condition each
e block att ambient labo
oratory condittions for at lea
ast 48 hr. prio
or to testing.

E3.2 Test Equipment

Compression testing ma achine must have
h the follo
owing:
 a peak k-load capacitty of at least 5,000
5 lbf.
 adjusta able platen seet at 1.5 in./m
min.
 a fixturre capable off holding the nail
n upright an nd perpendicu
ular to the blo
ock surface.

E3.3 Procedure es
 Measure anda record the e block’s weig ght, length, w idth and height.
 Position thhe nailing forc ce fixture on thhe center of t he top side of the block.
 Insert first nail into fixturre hole.
 Drive nail until
u nail tip is
s 2.1 in. into block
b surface using a plate
en speed of 1..5 in./min.
 Repeat witth second and d third nails.

9
95

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

E3.4 Measuremment
 Measure maximum
m forc
ce required to
o insert each n
nail.

E4. Nail
N Withdraw
wal Force Tes
st

E4.1 Samples
 Ten (10) blocks
b (minimu um) are requiired.
 3 nails perr block, nails should
s ould be clean and free of o
be sho oil and any su
urface
irregularitie
es
 Condition each
e block att ambient labo
oratory condittions for at lea
ast 48 hr. prio
or to testing.

E4.2 Test Equipment

Compression testing ma achine must have
h the follo
owing:
 a peak k-load capacitty of at least 2,500
2 lbf.
 adjustaable platen seet at 1.5 in./m
min.
 a statio
onary fixture designed
d to secure
s the blo
ock to one plaaten.
 a grippping fixture sh
haped to fit the head of thee nail and dessigned to provvide true axial
loading
g (Figure D3)).

Figure
F D3
Fixturres for Naill Withdraw
wal Force T
Test

E4.3 Procedure e
 Measure anda record the e block’s weig ght, length, w idth and height.
 Position thhe nailing forc ce fixture on thhe center of t he top side of the block.
 Insert first nail into fixturre hole.
 Drive nail until
u nail tip is
s 2.1 in. into block
b surface using a plate
en speed of 1..5 in./min.
 Withdraw nail
n
 Repeat witth second and d third nails.

E4.4 Measuremments
 Measure maximum
m forc
ce required to
o remove each
h nail.

9
96

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A F
CONNECTION DEESIGN

F.1 Withdrawal
W Resistance
R
The sttrength-level withdrawal
w res
sistance is ca
alculated as:
380G2.5DsLpCwCmKF
W = 13 [U.S.]
2.5
W = 9..58G DsLpCwCmKF [SI]
where
w
W - Withdrawal
W resistance (lbf [N])
[
G - Specific
S gravitty (oven-dry weight
w and vo
olume basis o
or equivalent sspecific gravitty)
Ds - Diameter
D of no
ominal shank
k (in. [mm])
Lp - Length
L of penetration into main
m memberr (in. [mm])
Cw - Fastener
F withd
drawal adjusttment (calcula
ated or empirrical)
Cm - Moisture
M adjustment factorr
KF - Strength
S level conversion factor
f (3.32)
Withdrawal
W callculation is for fasteners drriven into the side grain of sawn wood o or the wood
material.
m Palle
et construction ns where fastteners are loa aded in withdrrawal from en nd-grain of so
olid
wood
w shall to be
b avoided. For F wood-bas sed composite es, the speciffic gravity is a
an equivalent
sp
pecific gravity
y as determined following ASTMA D5456 6.

The fastener withdrawal

w adjjustment (Cw) quantifies th
he effect of sh
hank deformattion on the
astener withdrrawal resistan
fa nce and is callculated baseed on fastenerr geometry, oor alternativelyy
may
m be determ mined from em mpirical test data. For a smmooth-shank fastener, Cw= =1.0. The
addjustments fo
or moisture (C
Cm) are shown n in F.1.2. Th
he strength levvel conversio
on factor adjussts
from an allowaable value to average
a stren
ngth-level with
hdrawal resisttance followin
ng AF&PA an nd
ASTM
A D5457.

For staples, W is per leg, so o the calculate

ed W value iss multiplied byy 2. For recta
angular wire
sttaples, substittute wire thick
kness for Ds.

An
A allowable withdrawal
w res
sistance (Wall) is calculated
d with KF=1.0

9
97

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

F.1.1 Fastener wiithdrawal adjjustment

The fastener withdrawal ad djustment (Cw) was develope ed based on tthe original calculations of
Fastener With hdrawal Indexx (FWI)5 as doc cumented by O 5)6 as part of a larger functio
Osborn (1985 on
for pallet nail withdrawal. It is the expectted effect of th
he shank deforrmations on th he withdrawal
resistance of the fastener. It is calculated based on fa astener geomeetry specifications or
measuremen nts as,

Cw = 1+ K(D
Dt-Ds)(H/Lt)
e
where
Cw - Faste
ener withdrawa
al adjustment
K - Constant (helically threaded = 22
2, annularly th readed = 60)
Dt - Diameter of the thre
ead crest (in. [mm])
Ds - Diameter of the nom
minal shank (in. [mm])
H - Numb
ber of helixes
Lt - Threa
ad length (in. [mm])
[
For sc
crew-shank fas
steners, the H-value
H is,
H = (Lt*F)//(*Dt*tan(At))
where
e
F ber of flutes
- Numb
At - Threa
ad angle meas
sured from normal to shank (deg)
For annulaarly threaded fasteners,
f H is
s calculated b
by substituting the number o
of rings per in
nch
divided by 3, e.g., H=(rings/inch)/3 [U.S.], or H= (rings/mm)/0.1 118 [SI]. Fo
or smooth-sha ank
fasteners, Cw=1.0.

F.1.2 Empirical De
etermination
n

The fastener withdrawal ad djustment for deformed-shan

d nk fasteners mmay be determmined empirica ally
by comparing g withdrawal re esistance test data for the d
deformed-shan nk fastener to the calculated
d
withdrawal reesistance per unit
u of penetra ation for a smoooth shank fasstener with thee same nomina al
shank diametter. The test fo ollows D 1761. The calculat ion is based o on the allowabble withdrawal
capacity for nails
n that is converted to the reference streength level byy using
the conversioon factor (KF) as given NDS S (2005), Appe endix N. The faastener withdrrawal
adjustment iss the ratio:

C w = Pw / W r

e
where
Cw = Fastener withdrawa
al adjustment
Pw = Mean maximum witthdrawal resisttance per unit length of penetration (lbf/in
n.
[N/mm])
G2.5DsCm KF [U
Wr = 1380G US], or 9.58G2.5DsCmKF [SI]

5 Faste
ener Withdrawal Index (FWI) is a measure of estimated withdrawa
al resistance of a given fastener relative to that fo
or a
high qu
uality "base" nail..

6 Osboorn, L.E. 1985. Evaluation

E of the
e Joint Performannce Estimates wiithin the PDS Du
urability Procedure. M.S. Thesis,,
Virginia
a Polytechnic Ins
stitute and State University, Black
ksburg, Virginia.

9
98

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

F.1.3 Moisture adjustment

a for
f withdrawal resistance e
Moisture adjustment
a fac
ctors (Cm) forr withdrawal rresistance in Table C1 are
e from the ND
DS,
Table 10.3
3.3.
Table
T F1
Adju
ustment to Withdrawa
al for Expe
ected Mois
sture Servic
ce
MOISTURE C
CONTENT
FASTENER TYPE At time
t of Cm
In-Service
fabrrication
 19%  19% 1.0
Sm
mooth-shank Nails
N and Staples
> 19%  19% 0.25
 19% > 19% 0.25
> 19% > 19% 1.0
Threade
ed Nails Any
A Any 1.0

F.2 Lateral
L Resis
stance
La
ateral resista
ance is calcuulated using the yield limmit equations of NDS, Se ection 11. T The
so
olution with th
he least value
e is the referrence design value and reepresents the
e expected yieeld
mode.
m The reeference desiggn value is adjusted by thhe fastener sh
hear adjustmeent (Cz) and for
moisture
m condiition (Cm),
Z = Zr CzCmKF
where
w
Z - Strength-level
S la
ateral resistanc
ce (lbf [N])
Zr - Reference
R desig
gn value (lbf [N
N])
Cz - Fastener
F shear adjustment
Cm - Moisture
M adjustment factor
KF - Strength-level
S adjustment
a (3.3
32)
For staples, Znds
n is per leg and
a is doubled d. For rectan
ngular wire sta aples, substitute wire
hickness for fa
th astener shankk diameter in the yield equ ations. It is a
assumed that a connectionn
with
w more than n one fastener has the capacity of the p roduct of the number of fa asteners and
th
he single faste
ener connectiion capacity. An
A LRFD allo owable shear resistance iss calculated byy
multiplying
m the Z by the stre
ength level ad
djustment facttor of 3.32.

F.2.1 o bending yiield strength

MIBANT to h
When MIB BANT angle is supplied instead of Fyyb, then convversion from MIBANT to Fyb
follows ISO
O 12777-1

BANT-0.9653
My = 1219.1*MIB (lbf·in.) [U.S..]
-0.9653
My = 138.72*MIB
BANT (N·m
m) [SI]
where
My - fastene
er bending yield moment (lbf··in)
MIBANT- MIBAN
NT angle (degre
ees) measured by using F680
0
Ds - Nominal diameter of shank (in.)
Th
hen, bending yield strength is calculated follo
owing F1575
Fybb = My/(Ds3/6)

The calcula
ated Fyb (psi) is
s the average 5%
5 offset bend
ding-yield stren
ngth of the fasttener that is ussed
in the NDS yield mode equ uations.

9
99

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

F.2.2 Fastener shear

s adjusttment
The fastenner shear adjjustment (Cz) quantifies th
he effect on llateral resista
ance of the n
nail
head and deformed shank
s as a “rope”
“ effect (DIN EN 20 0087). The fastener she ear
adjustment (Cz) is calculated base ed on speciffications and Cz = 1.0 fo or yield moddes
controlled by wood bearing failure (M
Modes IS and IM).

The fa m be calcul ated from spe

astener shear adjustment may ecifications as,
Cz = 1 + (W/4)/ Zr
where
Cz - Fastener shear
s adjustm
ment
Zr - Reference
e design value esistance (lbff)8
e for lateral re
W - Strength-level withdraw
wal resistance
e as calculate
ed in C.1 (lbf)
For smootth-shank nails
s and staples s, Cz is limite e not greaterr than 1.15; for
ed to a value
deformed-shank nails, Cz is limited to
o not greater than 1.50.

F.2.3 Moisture adjustment

a for
f lateral res
sistance
Moisture adjustment
a fa
actors (Cm) fo
or lateral ressistance given
n in Table F
F2 are from tthe
NDS, Table 10.3.3.

Table
T F2
Adjus
stment to Shear
S Values for Exp
pected Moisture Serv
vice
MOISTURE CONTE
ENT
STENER TYP
FAS PE Cm
At time
t of fabrica
ation In-Service
 19%  19% 1.0
Nails and Staple
es > 19%  19% 0.7
Any > 19% 0.7

7 DIN EN.
E 2008. Eurocode 5: design of
o Timber Structuures – Part 1: Ge
eneral – Commonn Rules and Rule es for buildings
(Includes Amendment A1:20089)
A Englis
sh Version of DIN
N EN 1995-1-1:2 2008-09, DIN Deu
utsches Institut ffur Normung e. V V.,
Berlin. Beuth Verlag Gm
mbH, 10772 Berllin, Germany.

8 Yield
d limit can be d etermined usin
ng the Connectiion Calculator,
ww
ww.awc.org/calc culators/connecctions/ccstyle.a
asp

00
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

F.3 Fastener Head

d Pull-throug
gh
Methods
M of es
stimating fasttener head pu
ull-through re
esistance (HPPT) of nails a
and staples a
are
prresented by Osborn (19 985). Head pull-through h resistance is the estim mated averaage
re
esistance for the head of a nail (or crow
wn of a staple
e) being pulle
ed through the
e deckboard. If
HPR
H is less than
t W (sha ank withdrawwal resistancee), then HPR R governs de esign. HPT is
ca
alculated by

Nails

HPT = 1,662,500 TG 2.25 (Dh2–Ds2) / (MC–3) [U.S.]

HPT = 454.3 TG2.255(Dh2-Ds2) / (M

MC-3) [SI]

Staples

T 2.25 (4 / ) (L
HPT = [1,250,000 TG ( c) (Ds)] / (M C–3) [U.S.]

HPT = [341.7 TG 2.225 (4 / ) (Lc) (D

( s)] / (MC–3)) [SI]

where
w

HPT- Head
H pull-thro
ough resistan
nce (lbf [N])
T - Deckboard th
hickness (in. [mm])
G - Specific
S graviity of deckboa
ard based on o.d. weight a
and volume
Lc - Crown
C length
h (in. [mm])
Dh - Head diamete
er (in. [mm])
Ds - Nominal shan
nk diameter (iin. [mm])
MC - Moisture conttent (%) at tim bly (max = 28%, min = 12%
me of assemb %)

01
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

F.4 Notations
N

SYMBOL DEFINITION
At Thread angle
a
Cm Moisture content adjus stment factorr
Cw Withdrawwal adjustmen nt factor
Cz Shear addjustment facttor
Dh Diameterr of head
Ds Diameterr of smooth sh hank or wire
Dt Diameterr of thread creest
F Flutes
Fyb
y Bending yield strength h
G Specific gravity
g or equ
uivalent speci fic gravity
H Helixes
HPT
H Head pulll-through
KF Strength level adjustmment
Lc Crown leength
Lp Penetratiion length into
o main memb ber
Lt Thread Length
L
My Bending yield moment
MC
M Moisture content
MIBANT
M MIBANT angle
T Thicknesss of deckboa ard
W Withdrawwal resistancee
Wall Allowablee withdrawal for
f strength leevel design
Wr Referencce withdrawal resistance
Z Shear ressistance
Za Allowablee shear for strength level d
design
Zr Referencce shear resisstance

02
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ANNEX
A G
PH
HYSICAL DESCRIPTI
D ION OF TY
YPICAL FASTENERS
MEETING
M CRITERIA
C IN
I SECTIOON 5.5.1, TA
ABLE 3-3
Table
T G1
Exa
amples of Fasteners
F and Fastening Scheedules whic
ch Meet the Minimum m
Performance Requirements Provided in Section 5.5.1, Table e 3-3 for
Reusable
R (New Palletts) and for Repaired Classes 1,, 2 and 3 (R
Repaired
a b a
Pallets) with Minimmum FWI= =65 and FS
SI =55
FA
ASTENER FASTENER PHYSICAL MINIMUM ONE ADD
DITIONAL DOUBLE THEE
TY
YPE/SIZE CHARACTERRISTICSc FASTENER FAST
TENER/ MINIMUM
SCHEDULE CONNEECTIONd FASTENER
SECTION 6.2.4..1)
(S SCHEDULEd
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.0 099 0.099
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.108 0.104
12 ½-ggauge thread angle (d deg) 7
70 70
MIBANT angle (deg) 5
55 75
FWI per nail 5
51 38
FSI per nail 4
40 30.9
Flutes=5
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.105
0 0.10 5 0.105
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.122
0 0.11 8 0.115
12-gauuge thread angle (d deg) 68 64 6
68
MIBANT angle (deg) 41 41 5
57
FWI per nail 68 66 5
51
FSI per nail 55 55 42 2.5
Flutes=4
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.112
0 0.1122e 0.112
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.127
0 0.12 2 0.122
11 ½-ggauge thread angle (d deg) 68 60 6
68
MIBANT angle (deg) 46 46 4
46
FWI per nail 66 65 5
53
FSI per nail 55 55 5
55
Flutes=4
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.120
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.134
11-gauuge thread angle (d deg) 68
MIBANT angle (deg) 52
FWI per nail 65.2
FSI per nail 56
Flutes=4
annulaarly wire diameter (in.)
( 0.120
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.130
11-gauuge thread angle (d deg) 20
MIBANT angle (deg) 51
FWI per nail 72.2
FSI per nail 57
RPI=20
a When
W repairing connections
c to re
epaired Classes s 1, 2 and 3, it iss assumed the original fastene ers in the
co
onnections whic ch are still effecttive meet the minimum requirem ments in Sectio n 5.5.1, Table 33-3 of this
Sttandard for reussable new palletts.
b Faastener Shear Index (FSI) - me easure of estima ated shear perfo ormance of a givven fastener rellative to that forr a
high quality “base e" nail.
b Faastener length and
a the ratio of head to wire dia ameter shall con nform to the critteria in Section 5
5.5, Table 3-3.
Thhese examples include both the e four- and five--flute fasteners.
c Repairing connec ctions, using an excessive num mber of fastenerss which would d degrade overall connection
integrity, shall be avoided.
d Or the same faste ener with a 68° thread angle an nd 9% greater le ength.

03
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T G2
Exa
amples of Fasteners
F and Fastening Sche
edules whic ch Meet the Minimum m
Perrformance Requirements Provided in Secction 5.5.1,, Table 3-3 for Single
e-
us
se (New Pa
allets) and for
f Repaire s 1, 2 and 3 (Repaired Pallets)a
ed Classes
with Minimum
m FWI=50 aand FSI=40 0
FA
ASTENER FASTENER PHYSICAL MINIMUM ONE ADD
DITIONAL DOUBLE THEE
TY
YPE/SIZE RISTICSb
CHARACTER FASTENER FAST
TENER/ MINIMUM
SCHEDULE CONNEECTIONc FASTENER
SECTION 6.2.4..1)
(S SCHEDULEc
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.099
0 0.09 9 0.099 0.099 0.099
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.108
0 0.10 6 0.104 0.102 0.102
12 ½-ggauge thread angle (d deg) 70 60 70 60 70
MIBANT angle (deg) 55 55 75 75 85
FWI per nail 51 58 38 38 32
FSI per nail 40 40 31 31 28
Flutes=5
helically wire diameter (in.)
( 0.105
0 0.10 5 0.105
threaded nail thread diamete er (in.) 0.115
0 0.11 2 0.110
12-gauuge thread angle (d deg) 70 62 770
MIBANT angle (deg) 59 59 881
FWI per nail 49 50 337
FSI per nail 41 41 332
Flutes=4
adhesiive coated wire width (in.) 0.080
staple wire thickness (in.) 0.075
14-gauuge MIBANT angle (deg) 55
FWI per staple 44
FSI per staple 61
adhesiive coated wire width (in.) 0.0 073
staple wire thickness (in.) 0.0 067
15-gauuge MIBANT angle (deg) 885
FWI per staple 339
FSI per staple 336
adhesiive coated wire width (in.) 0.062
staple wire thickness (in.) 0.055
16-gauuge MIBANT angle (deg) 100
FWI per staple 33
FSI per staple 24
a When
W repairing connections
c to th
he repaired Clas sses 2 and 3, it is assumed the e original fastenners in the
co
onnections whic ch are still effecttive meet the minimum requirem ments in Sectio n 5.5.1, Table 3 3-3 of this
Sttandard for singgle-use new pallets.
b Faastener length and
a the ratio of head to wire dia ameter shall con nform to the critteria in Section 5 3.
5.5.1, Table 3-3
Thhese examples include both the e four- and five--flute fasteners.
c Repairing connec ctions, using an excessive num mber of fastenerss which would d degrade overall connection
integrity, shall be avoided.

04
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T G3
Example
es of Faste
eners and Fastening
F S
Schedules s which Meeet the
Minimum
m Performance Requ uirements Provided iin Section 5.5.1,
Table at Fastenerrsa
e 3-3 for Cllinched Ma
PALLET
P FASTENER FAST
TENER PHYSIC
CAL MINNIMUM O
ONE ADDITIONA
AL
CAT
TEGORY TYPE/SIZE CHA CSb
ARACTERISTIC FAST TENER FASTENER/
SCHE EDULE CONNECTIONNc
(SECCTION
6.2
2.4.1)
Repaiired Class 1 staple wire width
w (in.) 0.062
16-gaugee wire th
hickness (in.) 0.055
MIBAN NT angle (deg) 130
FWI per staple 33
FSI peer staple 19
staple wire width
w (in.) 0..073
16-gauge e wire th
hickness (in.) 0..067
MIBAN NT angle (deg) 5
FWI per staple 3
39
FSI peer staple 3
33
plain nail wire diameter (in.) 0..105
16-gauge e MIBAN NT angle (deg) 8
85
FWI per staple 2
23
FSI peer staple 3
30
Repaiired Class 2 staple wire width
w (in.) 0..062
and 3 16-gauge e wire th
hickness (in.) 0..055
MIBAN NT angle (deg) 1
115
FWI per staple 3
33
FSI peer staple 2
21
plain nail wire diameter (in.) 0..099
16-gauge e MIBAN NT angle (deg) 1
115
FWI per staple 2
22
FSI peer staple 2
21
a When
W repairing connections
c to any
a of the catego ories, it is assum
med the originaal fasteners in th he connections
which are still effe
ective meet the minimum requirements in Secction 5.5.1, Table e 3-3 of this Sta
andard for single
e-
usse and reusable e new pallets.
b Faastener length and
a the ratio of head to wire dia ameter shall con nform to the critteria in Section 55.5.1, Table 3-3
3.
Thhese examples include both the e four- and five--flute fasteners.
c Repairing connec ctions, using an excessive num mber of fastenerss which would d degrade overall connection
integrity, shall be avoided.

05
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 4
Exp
port Pallets
s

Phyto
osanitary Requiremen
R nts of Regu
ulated Woo
od Packag ging
Materrials Used in the Tran
nsport of C
Commoditiies for Exp
port
1 SCOPE

This information is now included

d in Subpart III of Part 3 off this standard
d.

06
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 5
Driven Fasteners for
f Assemb
bly of Palle
ets and Re
elated Struc
ctures
1 SCOPE

(a) Part 5 is based d on technological develop pments in the pallet and pa allet-fastener fields and
emph hasizes the be enefits of use of the fastener withdrawall and shear in ndexed as me eans of rating
fastenner performan nce.
(b) Part 5 provides s manufacture ers and users s of pallet naills and stapless with a detailed descriptio on
of commmon, regula ar-stock, stiff-s
stock and harrdened stiff-sttock steel nails as well as common
regulaar-stock steel staples used d for the assembly of single e-use and reu usable wood p pallets and
relate
ed structures employed
e in materials
m handling and shi pping.
(c) Such pallet fas steners that do o not conform
m to Part 5 sh all be conside ered special ffasteners.
These e specials incclude such sta andardization fasteners ha aving featuress different from m those
descrribed in Part 5,
5 such as hea ads, points, and
a threads off different dessigns.
(d) In
nspection and d MIBANT (Mo organ Impactt Bend Angle Nail Tester) T Testing (see N Nonmandatorry
Appen ndix A5-A) of the pallet fas steners described in Part 5 shall be con nsidered a rou utine procedure.
All oth
her required testing
t shall be
b covered sp pecifically in th
he purchase o order.
(e) The standard fasteners
f are coded for easy reference by all involve ed, i.e., pallet--fastener
manufacturers and d specification n writers as well
w as for orde ering by palleet manufacturers. The
perforrmance index xes estimated and presente ed for each sttandard faste ener should be e helpful in
fastenner selection as the optimu um one for a given
g end pro oduct.
(f) Thhe listing, coding, and inde exing of the sttandard pallett fasteners in Part 5 should d result in the
e
preferrred use and reduce prolife eration of spe
ecial fastenerss.
(g) The fastener in nformation pre esented includes the inputt required for fasteners use ed in the Palle
et
Desiggn System (se ee Nonmanda atory Appendiix A5-A).
(h) Part 5 may be incorporated in related documents by rreference. An ny required de eviation from
Part 5 shall be note ed prominenttly in order to reduce any p possible misin nterpretationss to a minimum m.
(i) Paart 5 may invoolve hazardou us materials, operations,
o a nd equipmen nt. Part 5 doe es not purport to
addreess all the safety problems associated with w its use. Itt is the user’ss responsibilityy to consult
and establish
e apprropriate safety y practices an
nd determine the applicability of regulatory limitationss.

2 PURPOSE

The descriptive
d and performanc ce specificatio
on in Part 5 co
overs nails an
nd staples used for the
assem
mbly of pallets
s and related structures made of wood and wood-ba ase materials.

3 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

The te
erminology us
sed in Part 5 is in accordan nce with Part 1 and Nonmandatory App
pendix A5-A.
The fo
ollowing spec
cific definitions
s are basic to
o Part 5:

fasten
ner shear inde
ex (FSI): meaasure of estimmated shear rresistance of given pallet fa
astener relativve
to she
ear resistance
e of high-quality “base” pallet nail.

fastenner withdrawa al index (FWI)): measure of estimated w withdrawal ressistance of givven pallet
fastenner, based on n lesser of shaank or leg withdrawal or he
ead or crown pull-through resistance
relativ
ve to that of high-quality “b
base” pallet na
ail.

helix: single thread

d crossing alo aded fastener.
ong shank of helically threa

MIBANT angle: an ngular deform

mation of faste
ener shank orr legs when su ubject to MIBANT test,
ding indication
provid n of impact be
ending resista
ance and toug ghness of fasstener, with de
evice and
methood described in ASTM F 68 80 (see Nonm mandatory Apppendix A5-A)).

07
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

staple
e-crown length h: distance measured
m parrallel to crown
n between sta
aple legs; leng
gth of bearing
g
surfac
ce of staple le
egs.

staple
e-crown width h or staple wid
dth: overall dimension parrallel to staple
e crown from outside to
outsid
de of staple le
egs.

staple
e-wire thickne
ess: dimensio
on of flattened
d-wire staple leg measured
d parallel to ccrown axis.

staple
e-wire width: dimension off flattened-wirre staple leg m
measured perrpendicular to
o crown axis.

4 SYMBOLS US
SED

C = number of the
e fastener cou
uples (single staple is one fastener):

Fasteners per joint 2 3 4 5 6

Fastener couples
c per jo
oint 1 3 4 5 6

Example: For 4-nail joint, use four couples as sho

own in Figure
e 5-1

Figure
F 5-1
Number of
o Fastener CCouples
(Examp
ple shown: Four-fastener joint uses four coup
ples)
CL = staple-croown length meas sured between staple legs, in. (m mm)
FL = fastener length, in. (mm)
FSI = fastener shear index, %, the relative shea ar resistance of th he fastener in the
e specific pallet
FSR = fastener shear resistance e, lb (N), the com mputed total shea ar resistance of a
all fasteners in asssembly
FWI = fastener withdrawal index x, %, the relative withdrawal resisstance of the fasttener used in the e base pallet to th
he
fastener used in the spec cific pallet
FWR = fastener withdrawal resisttance, lb (N), the e computed total withdrawal resisstance of all faste eners used in thee
pallet
FWRF = fastener withdrawal resisttance, lb (N), of single
s fastener
GD = oven-dry specific gravity of
o deckboard com mponents
GS = oven-dry specific gravity of
o stringer or block components
H = number ofo helixes along thread
t length
HD = nail-headd diameter, in. (m
mm)
HPR = head-pull-through resistance, lb (N), the computed
c total he
ead-pull-throughh resistance of all fasteners used in
the pallett
HPRF = fastener head-pull-throug gh resistance, lb (N), of single fasstener
M = MIBANT angle of fastene er, deg, according g to test using 3 1/2 lb (15.6 N) w weight and 15 7/1 16 in. (392 mm)
drop heigght or equivalent computed for other weight or dro op height
MC = moisture content of wood d during pallet assembly, % of dryy weight (maximu um: 28% for gree en wood; minimu um:
12% for dry
d wood)
N = number ofo fasteners driveen into stringers or blocks
P = penetration of threaded shank
s portion of fastener
f in fastenning member, in.. (mm)
T = thicknesss of fastened member, in. (mm), limited
l to maxim um of 3/4 in. (19 9 mm) in computa ation of head-pull-
through resistance
r
TA = thread anngle, deg
TD = thread-crrest diameter of threaded
t or flutedd nails, in. (mm)
WD = round-wire diameter of fa astener of the equ uivalent for squa are-wire or helica
ally fluted nails, th
hat is, WD = 0.9T TD,
in. (mm)
WT = thicknesss of flattened round wire measure ed parallel to crow wn axis, in. (mmm)
WW = width of flattened
f round wire
w measured pe erpendicular to ccrown axis wire w width, in. (mm)

08
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5 FA
ASTENERS COVERED

5.1 Standard Pa
allet-Assemb
bly Nails

The standard d, helically thrreaded, stiff-s

stock and harrdened steel, pallet-assem mbly nails are
described in Table 5-1. They
T have fille
eted flat head
ds, are pointle
ess or provideed with short,
blunt or meddium-long diam mond or chise el points (not wider than th
he wire diame eter), have fou
ur
thread flutes with 60 to 68 8 (±2) deg thread angles [ssee Part 5, pa ara. 10(e)]. TTheir fastener
withdrawal inndex FWI and d fastener she ear index FSII with respect to their withd
drawal
resistance FWRF
F and she ear resistance e FSRF, resp pectively, are based on the e following
relationships
s.

ence Part 3 Annex F for altternative meth

Note: Refere hods to deterrmine fastene
er performancce

Using SI units:
WI = 8.7WD [1 + 27.15 (T
FW TD – WD) (H/TTL)] (1a)
Using Imperial units
s:
WI = 221WD
FW D [1 + 27.15 (T
TD – WD) (H//TL] (1b)

Using SI units:
SI = 2056WD
FS D1.5 / (3M + 40
0) (2a)
Using Imperial units
s:
SI = 263,260
FS 0WD1.5 / (3M + 40) (2b)

09
10

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 5-1
Stan
ndard, Helically Threa aded, Stiff-S
Stock and Hardened-S Steel, Palle
et-Assemblly
Naiils with Filleted, Flat Head,
H Pointtless or Short, Blunt, or Medium m (< 5/32 in.)
Diamond or Chisel Pointt (Not Wide er Than Wirre Diameterr), Four Thrread Flutess,
and
a 60 to 68 8 (±2) deg. Thread Anngle (Imperrial Units)
Crrest Diameter Th
hread Angle
ngth,
Len Wirre Stand. Min
n. Stand. Min.. Head
Co
ode in
n. Diam.., in. in. A in. B deg. A deg.. B Diam., iin.
150x105 AA 1½ 0.10
05 0.12
24 … 60 … 0.25
AB 0.12
24 … … 67 0.25
BA … 0.12 0 60 … 0.25
BB … 0.12 0 … 67 0.25

175x105 AA 1¾ 0.10
05 0.12
24 … 60 … 0.25
AB 0.12
24 … … 67 0.25
BA … 0.12 0 60 … 0.25
BB … 0.12 0 … 67 0.25

175x112 AA 1¾ 0.11
12 0.13
32 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.13
32 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.12 8 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.12 8 … 67 0.28

200x105 AA 2 0.10
05 0.12
24 … 60 … 0.25
AB 0.12
24 … … 67 0.25
BA … 0.12 0 60 … 0.25
BB … 0.12 0 … 67 0.25

200x112 AA 2 0.11
12 0.13
32 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.13
32 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.12 8 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.12 8 … 67 0.28

200x120 AA 2 0.12
20 0.14
42 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.14
42 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.13 7 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.13 7 … 67 0.28

225x112 AA 2¼ 0.11
12 0.13
32 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.13
32 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.12 8 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.12 8 … 67 0.28

225x120 AA 2¼ 0.12
20 0.14
42 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.14
42 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.13 7 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.13 7 … 67 0.28

250x112 AA 2½ 0.11
12 0.13
32 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.13
32 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.12 8 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.12 8 … 67 0.28

10
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Tablee 5-1 (Contt’d)

Stan
ndard, Helically Threa aded, Stiff-S
Stock and Hardened-S Steel, Palle
et-Assemblly
Naiils with Filleted, Flat Head,
H Pointtless or Short, Blunt, or Medium m (< 5/32 in.)
Diamond or Chisel Pointt (Not Wide er Than Wirre Diameterr), Four Thrread Flutess,
and
a 60 to 68 8 (±2) deg. Thread Anngle (Imperrial Units)
Crrest Diameter Th
hread Angle
ngth,
Len Wirre Stand. Min
n. Stand. Min.. Head
Co
ode in
n. Diam.., in. in. A in. B deg. A deg.. B Diam., iin.
250x120 AA 2½ 0.12
20 0.14
42 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.14
42 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.13 7 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.13 7 … 67 0.28

250x135 AA 2½ 0.13
35 0.15
59 … 60 … 0.30
AB 0.15
59 … … 67 0.30
BA … 4
0.154 60 … 0.30
BB … 4
0.154 … 67 0.30

275x120 AA 2¾ 0.12
20 0.14
42 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.14
42 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.13 7 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.13 7 … 67 0.28

275x135 AA 2¾ 0.13
35 0.15
59 … 60 … 0.30
AB 0.15
59 … … 67 0.30
BA … 4
0.154 60 … 0.30
BB … 4
0.154 … 67 0.30

300x120 AA 3 0.12
20 0.14
42 … 60 … 0.28
AB 0.14
42 … … 67 0.28
BA … 0.13 7 60 … 0.28
BB … 0.13 7 … 67 0.28

300x135 AA 3 0.13
35 0.15
59 … 60 … 0.30
AB 0.15
59 … … 67 0.30
BA … 4
0.154 60 … 0.30
BB … 4
0.154 … 67 0.30

350x135 AA 3½ 0.13
35 0.15
59 … 60 … 0.30
AB 0.15
59 … … 67 0.30
BA … 4
0.154 60 … 0.30
BB … 4
0.154 … 67 0.30

11
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table 5-1 (Con t’)

Stan
ndard, Helically Threa aded, Stiff-S
Stock and Hardened-S Steel, Palle
et-Assemblly
Naiils with Filleted, Flat Head,
H Pointtless or Short, Blunt, or Medium m (< 5/32 in.)
Diamond or Chisel Pointt (Not Wide er Than Wirre Diameterr), Four Thrread Flutess,
and
a 60 to 68 8 (±2) deg. Thread Anngle (Imperrial Units)
Qua
ality Qualitty Index FSI With
W Respect too Shear Resis
stance
Index
x FWI For Give
en MIBANT An
ngle deg.
Wiith Stiff-Stock
S Steeel Nails Harde
ened Steel Naiils
Respeect to
Withd
drawal
Resistance 29 34 40
4 46 8 12 16 2
20 24 28 C
Code
94
4 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 150xx105 AA
76 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 AB
81 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BA
66 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BB

4
94 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 175xx105 AA
76 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 AB
81 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BA
66 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BB

100 (1) 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9

99 88 80 175xx112 AA
80 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 AB
87 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BA
70 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BB

94
4 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 200xx105 AA
76 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 AB
81 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BA
66 70 63 56 50 140 118 102 9
90 80 72 BB

100 (1) 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9

99 88 80 200xx112 AA
80 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 AB
87 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BA
70 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BB

10
08 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 200xx120 AA
87 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 AB
92 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 BA
75 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 BB

100 (1) 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9

99 88 80 225xx112 AA
80 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 AB
87 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BA
70 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BB

08
10 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 225xx120 AA
87 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 AB
92 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 BA
75 86 77 68 62 171 144 124 10
09 98 88 BB

100 (1) 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9

99 88 80 250xx112 AA
80 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 AB
87 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BA
70 78 70 62 55 154 130 112 9
99 88 80 BB
NOTE: (1) Basis of com
mparison.

12
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Tablee 5-1(Cont’’d.)
Standard,
S Helically Threaded,
T Stiff-Stock
S k and Hardened-Steel, Pallet-
Assembly
A Nails withh Filleted, Flat
F Head, Pointless o or Short, B
Blunt, or
Medium (<( 5/32 in.) Diamond or Chisel P Point (Not Wider Tha an Wire
Diaameter), Fo our Thread d Flutes, a nd 60 to 68
8 (±2) deg.
Thread
T Anggle (Imperiial Units)
Qua
ality Qualitty Index FSI With
W Respect tto Shear Resis
stance
Index
x FWI For Give
en MIBANT An
ngle deg.
Wiith Stiff-Stock
S Stee
el Nails Harde
ened Steel Naiils
Respeect to
Withd
drawal
Resistance 29 34 40
4 46 8 12 16 2
20 24 28 C
Code
10
08 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 250xx120 AA
87 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 AB
92 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BA
75 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BB

12
20 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 250xx135 AA
96 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 AB
10
03 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BA
84
4 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BB

10
08 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 275xx135 AA
87 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 AB
92 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BA
75 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BB

12
20 103 92 82
8 73 204 2
172 148 130 117 105 275xx135 AA
96 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 AB
03
10 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BA
84
4 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BB

10
08 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 300xx120 AA
87 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 AB
92 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BA
75 86 77 68
6 62 171 144
4 124 109 98 88 BB

12
20 103 92 82
8 73 204 2
172 148 130 117 105 300xx135 AA
96 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 AB
03
10 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BA
84
4 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BB

12
20 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 350xx135 AA
96 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 AB
10
03 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BA
84
4 103 92 82
8 73 204 172
2 148 130 117 105 BB

13
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.2 Standard Pa
allet-Assemb
bly Staples

(a) The stanndard, bright or

o coated, pla ain-shank, reg
gular-stock steeel, 1/2 in. (13 mm) wide,
pallet-assem
mbly staples are described in Table 5-2. They have ttwo, equal-len ngth, flattenedd
legs connectted by the flatttened staple crown. The legs are provvided with sho ort, blunt, chissel
points. Their fastener-qua ality indexes FWI and FSI with respect to their withdrawal
resistance FWRF and she ear resistancee FSRF, resp pectively, are based on the e following
s:
relationships

Using SI units:
WI = 8.7 (1.2
FW 273) (WW + WT)
W (3a)
Using Imperial units
s:
WI = 221 (1.2
FW 273) (WW + WT)
W (3b)

Using SI units:
SI = 2056 [0..8476 (WW + WT)]1.5 / (3M
FS M + 40) (4
4a)
Using Imperial units
s:
SI = 263,260
FS W + WT)]1.5 / ((3M + 40) (4
0 [0.8476 (WW 4b)

(b) For any coating to be given consid deration in dettermining con nnection effecctiveness, thee
increase in delayed
d withdrawal resistance of coated d staples, drivven into green n wood and
tested after its seasoning to 12% moisture content, shall be at le east 33% beyo ond that of
ght staples. Iff the coating is more effecttive, its beneffit can be prorrated in
identical brig
determining the fastener’s s FWI.

5.3 Standard Pa
allet-Mat Ass
sembly Nails
s and Staples
s

ank, regular-sttock steel nails and staple for pallet-ma

Standard, brright and coatted, plain-sha at
assembly are e described inn Table 5-3. The nails havve filleted flat heads and short, blunt,
diamond or chisel
c points. The staples have two equ ual-length, fla
attened legs, cconnected byy
the flattened staple crownn, and short, blunt,
b chisel p
points. To allo ow for at leasst 1/4 in. (6 mm)
e fastener len
clinching, the ngth shall be at
a least equall to the thicknesses of the fastened and d
fastening me embers plus 1/4
1 in. (6 mm)) less the dep pth of counterrsinking.

6 PERFORMAN
NCE CRITERIA

The performance
p criteria,
c in pou
unds (lb) or ne
ewtons (N), a
as applicable, are based on
n the 5%
exclus
sion level and
d are determin ned as followws:

(a) Fasten
ner Withdrawa al Resistancee Values (FWR
WRF)
Using SI units:
FWRF F = 38.9FWI((GS2.25)(P) / (MC – 3) (5a)
Using Impeerial units:
FWRF F = 222.2FW WI(GS2.25)(P) / (MC – 3) (5b)

ner Head-Pulll-Through Resistance Valu

(b) Fasten ues (HPRF)
Using SI units:
HPRF for nails = 3339T(GD2.25) x (HD2 – WD2) / (MC – 3) (6a)
Using Impeerial units:
HPRF for nails = 1,250,000T(GD D2.25) x (HD2 – WD2) / (MC – 3) (6b)

Using SI units
HPRF for staples = 432T(GD2.25) (CL) x (WWW) / (MC – 3) (7a)
Using Impeerial units:
GD2.25) x (CL )(WW) / (MC – 3)
HPRF for staples = 1,591,550T(G (7b)

14
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

(c) Fasten
ner Shear Res sistance Valuues (FSR)
Using SI units:
FSR = 10.84FSI(G GD)(T)(C) / (M
MC – 3) (8a a)
Using Impeerial units:
FSR = 61.93FSI(G GD)(T)(C) /(M
MC – 3) (8b
b)

Table
T 5.2
Stan
ndard, Brig
ght and Coated, Plain
n-Shank, R Regular-Stoock Steel, 1
1/2 in. Wid
de,
Pallet-Assembbly Staples
s with Two, Equal-Le ength, Flatttened Legs
s and Shorrt,
Bluunt Chisel Point
P (Imp erial Units
s)
Quality Indeex FSI with
Qualiity Index Respect tto Shear
FW
WI with Resistance for Given
minal
Nom Cross Section Finish Resspect to C
Computed MIB BANT Angle,
Wire
W With
hdrawal d
deg., for Brigh
ht or Coated
Length, Diam., Thickn ness, Width, Bright Co ated Resistance Fastenners
Code in. in. in. in. A B Bright Coated 8
85 115 150
2
200x062 A 2 0.062 0.05
55 0.061 x … 33 … … … 17
B … x … 50 … … 17
2
200x072 A 2 0.072 67
0.06 0.073 x … 39 … 28 …
B … x … 59 … 28 …
2
200x080 A 2 0.080 75
0.07 0.080 x … 44 … 42 … …
B … x … 65 42 … …
2
225x062 A 2¼ 0.062 55
0.05 0.061 x … 33 … … … 17
B … x … 50 … … 17
2
225x072 A 2¼ 0.072 67
0.06 0.073 x … 39 … … 28 …
B … x … 59 … 28 …
2
225x080 A 2¼ 0.080 75
0.07 0.080 x … 44 … 42 … …
B … x … 65 42 … …
2
250x072 A 2½ 0.072 67
0.06 0.073 x … 39 … 28 …
B … x … 59 … 28 …
2
250x080 A 2½ 0.080 75
0.07 0.080 x … 44 … 42 … …
B … x … 65 42 … …
3
300x072 A 3 0.072 0.06
67 0.073 x … 39 … 28 …
B … x … 59 … 28 …
3
300x080 A 3 0.080 0.07
75 0.080 x … 44 … 42 … …
B … x … 65 42 … …
3
375x072 A 3¾ 0.072 0.06
67 0.073 x … 39 … … 28 …
B … x … 59 … 28 …
3
375x080 A 3¾ 0.080 0.07
75 0.080 x … 44 … 42 … …
B … x … 65 42 … …

15
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 5-3
Standard,
S Bright
B and
d Coated, Plain-Shan
P k, Regularr-Stock Ste eel, Nails
and Staple
es for Palleet-Mat Ass
sembly: Na ails with Fiilleted, Flatt Heads
and Short,, Blunt Chiisel Points; and Stapples with Twwo, Equal--Length,
Flatten
ned Legs Connected
C by Staple Crown an nd Short, B Blunt
s with 1/2 in. Wide Crrown (Impe
Chisel Points erial Units))
Nails Staples
Wire Head Nominall
Le
ength Diameter, Diameter, Length, Wire Diamm.,
Cod
de in. in. in. Code in. in.
100x086 1 0.086 0.19 100x062 1 0.062
100x091 1 0.091 0.22 100x072 1 0.072
100x099 1 0.099 0.25 100x080 1 0.080
100x105 1 0.105 0.25
125x062 1¼ 0.062
125x086 1¼ 0.086 0.19 125x072 1¼ 0.072
125x091 1¼ 0.091 0.22 125x080 1¼ 0.080
125x099 1¼ 0.099 0.25
125x105 1¼ 0.105 0.25 150x062 1½ 0.062
150x072 1½ 0.072
150x086 1½ 0.086 0.19 150x080 1½ 0.080
150x091 1½ 0.091 0.22
150x099 1½ 0.099 0.25 175x062 1¾ 0.062
150x105 1½ 0.105 0.25 175x072 1¾ 0.072
175x080 1¾ 0.080
175x086 1¾ 0.086 0.19
175x091 1¾ 0.091 0.22 200x062 2 0.062
175x099 1¾ 0.099 0.25 200x072 2 0.072
175x105 1¾ 0.105 0.25 200x080 2 0.080

200x086 2 0.086 0.19

200x091 2 0.091 0.22
200x099 2 0.099 0.25
200x105 2 0.105 0.25

7 ORDERING
O IN
NFORMATION
N

(a) Orders
O for the pallet-assembly fasteners listed in Partt 5 shall includ
de the following informatio
on:

Example
Quantity (weight orr number of packaged
p fastteners) 50 lb b bulk
Type and Size Pallet nail: 2½ x 0.120 in.
Materrial, grade, an
nd finish Steeel, hardened, bright
Shankk-thread desc cription Heliical, 1¾TL, 0..142TD, 60TA
A
Head (crown) and point description 0.28
8 in., flat, poin
ntless
ANT angle
MIBA 16 deg
d
FWI and
a FSI performance index xes 8FWI; 124FSI , %
108
Code number 250
0 x 120AA
Speciial information
n …

(b) Standard palle

et-assembly fa
astener-packaage labels sh all provide the bel informatio
e required lab on
in a uniform manneer and sequence, as indica
ated in Nonm andatory App pendix A5-B.

16
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8 MATERIALS
M AND
A MANUF
FACTURING

(a) The steel used d for making faasteners shall be made byy any suitable e means and tthe method oof
ner manufactu
fasten ure shall be at
a the manufacturer’s discre etion to provid
de a uniform product of
speciffied properties. Part 5 covvers the follow
wing three ste
eel grades:
(1) Regularr-Stock Steel. This grade is customary
c if no
o special mecha
anical propertie
es are specified.

(2) Stiff-Sto
ock Steel. This
s grade of stiffe
er than regular stock and resu
ults in higher re
esistance to
buckling and bending and less MIBANT angles than re gular-stock ste eel.

(3) Hardened Steel. This grade denotes s heat-treated a

and tempered fasteners (see
e Warning below w),
de higher resis
which provid stance to buckling and bendin
ng and lesser M
MIBANT angless than regular-
stock and stiff-stock fasten
ners.
WARNING: The driving off hardened-ste eel fasteners in
nto certain materials is potentially hazardou
us
because of the possibility
y of fastener brreakage and fly
ying particles. Hardened-stee el fasteners sh
hall
en without app
not be drive propriate precautions. Wearin ng approved safety glasses a and/or other
equivalent protection
p is mandatory.
m

(b) Coating
C and finnishes shall be
b applied to the
t fasteners as specified.. The fastene
er dimensionss
shall apply
a to the fa
asteners prior to any coating or finishing
g.

(c) Galvanized
G coaating shall meeet requiremeents of weightt and adheren nce given to A
ASTM A 153,
Classs D (see Appeendix A5-A). TheT coating may
m be applie ed by the hot--dip, tumblingg, or mechaniccal
galvanization proceess, if not spe
ecified otherw
wise. Galvani zed wire for ssteel staples sshall be coate
ed
cordance with
in acc h ASTM A 641 1 (A 641M), Class
C 1 (see A
Appendix A5-A). Supplem mentary
chrommate or dichro
omate treatme ent may be ussed to enhancce the corrosion resistance e of the
fasten
ners, subject to
t prior agree ement betwee en vendor andd purchaser.

(d) cooated fasteneers shall be un niformly coateed with a natu

ural resin (cem ment) or convversion coatinng
(therm
moplastic polyymer). Other coatings may y be used sub bject to prior a
agreement be etween vendo or
and purchaser.
p If test
t verificatio
on of the effec
ctiveness of t he coating is required, it shall provide a
minim
mum increase of 33% in de elayed withdra awal resistancce of the fasteener when drriven into greeen
wood and tested after its seasoning to 12% moisture
m conttent in accorddance with AS STM D 1761
(see Nonmandator
N ry Appendix A5-A).
A None of
o the coatinggs shall be taccky or gummyy under
ambieent conditionss normally enc countered.

(e) Helical shank deformations

d of the fasteners listed in P
Part 5 shall be
e applied by threading, in
line with
w ASTM F 547 5 (see Nonmandatory Ap ppendix A5-A A). However, other method ds of applyingg
shankk deformations may be use ed where they y are shown tto be suitable for the fastenner applicatio
on,
subject to prior agrreement betw
ween vendor and
a purchase er.

(f) Th
he helical thre
eads shall extend from the nail point to a
at least two-th
hirds of the na
ail length. Th
he
thread
d flanks on the nail-head side
s shall be almost
a perpen ndicular to the
e nail axis, an
nd the thread
flanks
s on the point side shall be
e tapered towaard the point. Both flat-botttom and roun nd-bottom
thread
ds are suitable.

9 PHYSICAL RE
EQUIREMENTS

(a) The nails desc cribed in Part 5 shall be suffficiently duct ile and tough to provide an
n average
MIBA ANT angle, in line with AST TM F 680 (see e Nonmandato ory Appendixx A5-A), for 25
5 random
samples of the lot under test, ra anging from 8 to 28 deg forr hardened stteel nails, 29 tto 46 deg for
stiff-sttock steel nails, and 47 de
eg and beyond d for regular-sstock steel naails which may be clinched d,
provid ded that not more
m than 8%
% of the nail heeads or shankks fail partiallyy or complete
ely during
impac cting. In borderline cases, retesting is permitted.
p Beecause of the different wea ar conditions o
of
differeent MIBANT devices,
d corre
ection factors may have to be applied w which relate to
o the condition
n
of thee device in usee.

17
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

(b) The mechanica

al properties of
o the wire may be used inn guiding its sselection. Thu
us, stiff-stock
steel wire
w may havve a minimum m tensile stren
ngth of 120,00
00 psi (827 MPa).

(c) When
W MIBANT T or equivalen
nt data cannot be made avvailable, stiff-sstock steel na
ails shall have
ea
minim
mum hardness s of HRC 24, as determine
ed by converssion of tensile strength to h hardness in
accorrdance with SAE J 417b (see Nonmandatory Append dix A5-A); while hardened steel nails sh hall
have a minimum hardness of HRC 37 unless s specified oth
herwise.

10 DIMENSIONS
D RANCES
AND TOLER

(a) The nominal faastener dimen ven in Tables 5-1, 5-2, and
nsions are giv d 5-3. The tollerances
ded for in Parrt 5 are applicable to hamm
provid mer-driven andd machine-drriven nails and tool-driven
staple
es. The toleraances for tool-driven nails shall be mate
ed to the requ
uirements of the driving
equipment, subjectt to prior agreeement betwe een vendor annd purchaser..

(b) The nail length h shall be meaasured from the

t underside e of the head tto the tip of th
he point (see
Part 3,
3 Figure 3-6). The nail-len ngth tolerance
es shall be ±0
0.078 in. (±2 mmm) for lengtths from 1.00 in.
(25 mm)
m up to and including 2.5 50 in. (64 mm) and ±0.118 in. (±3 mm) ffor lengths ovver 2.50 in. (6 64
mm). The length of o tool-driven staples shall be measured d from the botttom of the sta aple crown too
the sttaple point (se
ee Part 3, Figure 3-6). Thee staple-lengtth tolerance sshall be +0.016 in. and
-0.0622 in. (+0.5 mmm and -1.6 mm m).

(c) Th
he wire diame eter of nails shall
s be measured away fro om the grippeer marks and prior to the
applic
cation of any coatings
c and finishes. The e diameter tollerances shalll be ±0.002 inn (±0.05 mm)).
The le
eg width and thickness of tool-driven
t sta
aples shall bee measured p prior to the application of an
ny
coatin
ng or along the leg portion which is not coated.
c The tolerances off the leg thicknesses and
widths
s of tool-drive
en staples shaall be as indic
cated in the fo
ollowing tabulation:

Nominal
N Wire Diameter
D Thic
ckness Range
e Width Range

in.
i mm in. m
mm in. mm
0.062
0 1.6 0.054 to 0.0
058 1.4 tto 1.5 0.0
062 to 0.066 1.6 to 1.7
0.072
0 1.8 0.064 to 0.0
068 1.6 tto 1.7 0.0
072 to 0.076 1.8 to 1.9
0.080
0 2.0 0.070 to 0.0
078 1.8 tto 2.0 0.0
082 to 0.090 2.1 to 2.3

(d) The thread-cre

est diameters of threaded nails
n shall be the mean dia
ametral dimen nsion along th
he
med portion of
deform o the shank. The tolerancce shall be +00.004 in. and --0.000 in. (+0
0.10 mm and
-00.0 mm).

(e) The thread-ang gle tolerance of helically th

hreaded nails shall be ±2 d
deg with the p
plane
endicular to th
perpe he nail axis.

(f) Th
he nominal he ead diameterss shall be bas
sed on the me ean of the maajor and minor head
diameeters. The tollerance shall be ±10% of the nominal he ead diameterr in individual
measurements, an nd the differen
nces in major and minor he ead diameterss shall not exxceed 10% of
the noominal head diameters.
d Th
he shape of the heads ma ay deviate from
m the round to permit tightt
collatiing, provided the bearing area
a of the he
ead is not deccreased by this change.

11 WORKMANSH
W HIP

The fa
asteners coveered in Part 5 shall be subs stantially clea
an and free off foreign mate
erial, corrosio
on
produ
ucts, and fine metal slivers. Cohered fas steners shall be properly aaligned in their assembled
form. Machine-qua ality fasteners
s shall be sub
bstantially freee of foreign m
matter which ccould clog toools
and machines.
m Driven fastenerss shall be suffficiently tough
h and straight to ensure efffective driving
withou
ut buckling an
nd bending.

18
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

12 TESTING

(a) When
W required
d in the purchase order tha at tests be con
nducted on th
he performancce of randomly
selectted fasteners of the lot invoolved, the tes
st methods to be used sha ll be in accord
dance with
ASTM M F 680 and ASTM
A F 15755 (see Nonma andatory Appe endix A5-A), e
except that th
he MIBANT teest
shall be
b the govern ning test in prreference of th
he convention nal bend test and the Rockkwell hardnesss
test.

(b) When
W required
d in the purchase order, the e manufacturrer shall furnissh a certified ttest report
which
h covers the fa
asteners in th
he lot involved
d. (Note: A loot shall consisst of fastenerrs of a single
shipm
ment of the same type, grad de, and finish
h, taken from tthe same manufacturing lo ot).

13 REJECTION
R AND
A REHEAR
RING

(a) Fasteners thatt fail to conforrm to the requ

uirements of P
Part 5 may be e rejected. Re ejection shall
be repported prompptly to the vendor in writing. In the case of dissatisfacction, the ven
ndor may makke
a claim
m for a rehea
aring. Under these
t rehearing procedurees, the lot sha
all be reinspeccted in the
preseence of both vendor
v and pu
urchaser, unleess special arrrangements were negotia ated at the tim
me
of ord
dering.

(b) A random sam

mple shall be obtained
o from
m the lot for exxamination ass indicated be
elow:

A
Acceptance Nuumber for Each
Test Typ pe Sample
S Size Test [Note (1)]
Nondeestructive test 100 8
Destru
uctive test 30 2
Functionally defective [Note(2)] 100 2

NOTES S:
(1) Accceptance numbe er is the maximum m number of defeectives that mayy occur for accepttance of the lot.
ctive lot includes defects such as brittle and bent fasteners, duds, lack of coating, incorrect coating
(2) A functionally defec g,
ng grade. If the acceptance
or wron a number is exceeded for any of the chharacteristics sub
bject to rehearingg, the lot
represe
ented by the sam mple shall be reje
ected.

(c) Thhe responsibiility for the pe

erformances of
o the required d inspection aand testing in line with thiss
Speciification is tha
at of the fastener manufactturer, unless sspecified otheerwise in the purchase
order. The fastene er manufacturrer may use his
h own or anyy other suitab ble facilities fo
or the
perforrmance of ins spection and testing,
t unless specified ottherwise in th
he purchase o order. The
purch
haser shall have the right to o perform any
y of the inspecctions and tesst, where succh inspectionss
and te
ests are considered necessary to ensurre that the fassteners conform to the spe ecified
requirrements.

14 PACKAGING

asteners shall be packaged in accordan

The fa nce with the ssupplier’s stan
ndard practicee which is
accep
ptable to the carrier
c at the lowest
l rate, unless
u specifie
ed otherwise in the purcha ase order.
Conta
ainers and packaging shall comply with the Uniform F Freight Classsification Rule
es or National
Motorr Classification Rules (see Nonmandato ory Appendix A5-A). Mark ing of the con ntainers for
shipm
ment of the fas steners shall be in accorda ance with Non nmandatory A Appendix A5-B, unless
speciffied otherwisee in the purchhase order.

19
11

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen
ndix A5-A
Applica
able Docum
ments
ollowing docu
The fo uments were reviewed
r duriing the prepa
aration of Partt 5:

ASTMM A 153 – 95,, Specification n for Zinc Coaating (Hot Dip

p) on Iron and d Steel Hardw ware
ASTMM A 641 – 92,, Specification n for Zinc Coaated (Galvani zed) Carbon Steel Wire
ASTMM D 1185 – 98 8a, Methods for
f Testing Pa allets and Re lated Structurres Employed d in Materials
Handling and Shipping
ASTMM D 1761 – 95 5, Methods off Testing Meta al Fasteners in Wood
ASTMM E 18 – 94, Methods
M of Te
est for Rockwwell Hardnesss and Rockwe ell Superficial Hardness of
Metallic Materials
ASTMM F 547 – 95, Definitions ofo Terms Rela ating to Nails ffor Use with W
Wood and Wo ood-Base
Materrials
ASTMM F 592 – 95, Definitions ofo Terms Rela ating to Collateed and Cohered Fastenerss and Their
Applic
cation Tools
ASTMM F 680 – 93, Test Method ds for Nails
ASTMM F 1575 – 95 5, Test Methoods for Determmining Bendin ng Yield Mom ment of Nails
ASTMM F 1667 – 95 5, Specificatio
on for Driven Fasteners: N Nails, Spikes, and Staples
Publis
sher: ASTM In nternational, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, We est Conshoho ocken, PA 194 428.
www.astm.org

Federral Specificaation FF-N-10 05B-71, Nails, Brads, Stapples, and Spikkes: Wire, Cu
ut and Wrough
ht;
Amen ndments: Dec cember 1972 and Octoberr 1974.
Publissher: Federal specifications available fro endent of Doccuments, U.S. Government
om Superinte
Printin
ng Office, Wa
ashington, DC C 20402-9325 5

Wallinn, W.B., and Whitenack, K.R., “Life Ex xpectancy and d Cost per Usse Analysis o
of Wooden
Palletts, Skids, Etc..,” Forestry Scciences Labooratory, Januaary 1981. Alsso, “Life Expectancy and
Cost per
p Trip Analy ysis for Wood den Pallets an
nd Related Sttructures,” Ibid dem, Decembber 1981.
Also, “Durability Annalysis for Wo ooden Palletss and Related d Structures,” Ibidem, Auguust 1982.
Wallinn, W.B., and Whitenack, K.R., “Pallet JointJ Shear RResistance, thhe F(2) Factor,” Pallet
Enterprise 1(4): 200-21, May/Jun ne 1982. Alsoo, “Applicationn of Joint Perrformance Criteria to Pallett
Desiggn,” Ibidem, 1(5): 24-27, Ju uly/August 1982. Also, “Fa astener Equivvalence Guide es for Wooden
Palletts,” Ibidem, 1((6): 25, 27-299, September//October 1982 2.
Repoorts: U.S. Forrestry Science es Laboratoryy, P.O. Box 1 52, Princeton n, WV 24740

onal Motor Cllassification Rules

Natio
Publis
sher: Nationa
al Motor Freig
ght Traffic Ass
sociation (NM
MFTA), 2200 M
Mill Road, Ale
exandria, VA
223144

SAE J 417b – 198 83, Hardness Test and Harrdness Numb er Conversions
Publis
sher: Society
y of Automotiv
ve Engineers (SAE), 400 C
Commonwealth Drive, Warrrendale, PA
150966-0001

Pallett Design Sys

stem, 2008 (V
Version 4.1)
Unifo
orm Standard d for Wood Pallets,
P 2007
Publis
sher: Nationa
al Wooden Paallets and Conntainer Assocciation (NWPC
CA), 1421 Priince Street,
Suite 340, Alexand
dria, VA 22314-2805. www w.palletcentra
al.com

orm Freight Classification

Unifo C n Rules
Publis
sher: Uniform
m Classificatio e (UCC), 202 Union Station
on Committee n, Chicago, IL
L 60606

20
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Loferrski, J.R., and

d Gamalath, S., “Predictin
ng Rotational Stiffness of NNail Joints,” Bulletin No. 13
3,
Januaary 1990. Als so, Forest Pro
oducts Journa
al 30 (7/8): 8-1
16, July / Aug
gust 1989

Loferrski, J.R., and d Stern, E.G.., “Understand ding Impact T Testing of Palllet Nails and Staples,”
Bullettin No. 18, Ap pril 1992. Also o, Journal of Testing
T and EEvaluation 19 9(5): 379-384,, September
1991
McLa ain, T.E., Wallin, W.B., and d White, M.S S., Pallet Desiign Short Cou urse Manual, June 1985
Sternn, E.G., “Asse embly of Dens se Hardwood Pallets with S Superior Nailss,” Proceedin ngs of
CIB/WW18B Internattional Confere ence of Tropiical and Hardw wood Timberr Structures, K Kuala Lumpurr,
Malayysia, Septemb ber 1992
Sternn, E.G., “Gloss sary of Test inn Pallet Field,” Proceeding gs of ’85 Interrnational Physsical
Distrib
bution Conferrence, Tokyo,, Japan, May 13-15, 1985, Vol. II (A3-1:: 1-24). Also,, Virginia
Polyteechnic Institutte and State University’s
U William
W H. Sarrdo, Jr. Pallett and Container Research
Laborratory, 1985
Sternn, E.G., “MIBA ANT Test Crite eria for Pallett Nails,” Bulle
etin No. 115, D December 1972
Sternn, E.G., “MIBA ANT Tests forr Pallet Staple es,” Bulletin NNo. 149, April 1977
Sternn, E.G., “Nails s – Definitionss and Sizes, A Handbook fo for Nail Userss,” Bulletin No o. 61,
Septeember 1967
Sternn, E.G., and Wallin,
W W.B., “Model Specification for D Driven Fastene ers for Assemmbly of Palletss
and Related
R Structtures,” Procee edings of Mee eting of Intern
national Coun ncil for Buildin
ng Research
Studiees and Docum mentation (CIIB) Committee e on Timber S Structures (WW 18) in Beit O Oren, Haifa,
Israel, June 3-7, 19 985. Revised d paper prese ented at Pallett Workshop In nternational 1
1985 on
Fédérration Europé éenne de Fabricants de Pa alettes et Emb ballages en B Bois, Hamburg g, Federal
Republic of Germa any, October 14, 1985
Sternn, E.G., Wallin n, W.B., and Whitenack, K.R., “Pallet R Rigidity, A Ma ajor Indicator for Pallet
Durabbility,” Bulletin
n No. 4, Janua ary 1985. Als so, Proceedin ngs of Sympo osium on Fore est Products
Resea arch Internatiional, Pretoria a, South Africa a, April 22-266, 1985, Vol. 4 (3-20: 1-23)). Also, Foresst
Produucts Journal 35 3 (11/12): 83 3-86, Novemb ber/Decemberr 1985. Also,, “Evidence Shows Pallet
Rigidiity to be a Ma ajor Indicator of
o Pallet Dura ability,” Pallet Enterprise 6((1): 42-45,
Januaary/February 1986
Sternn, E.G., and White,
W M.S., “Protocol
“ for Measuring
M Quuality of Pallet Nails and Sttaples,” Bulleetin
No. 23, December 1993
Whitee, M.S., “Effec ct of Mat Fasttener Stiffnesss on the Diag gonal Rigidityy of Wooden B Block Pallets,”
Bullettin No. 14, Feebruary 1991. Also, Forestt Products Journal 41(1): 5 57-60, Januarry 1991
Whitee, M.S., Pallet Design Systtem (PDS), Fé édération Eurropéenne de Fabricants de e Palettes et
Emba allages en Bois, Pallet Worrkshop Interna ational 1985, Hamburg, Fe ederal Repub blic of German ny,
Octobber 1985
Whitee, M.S., and Gales,
G T.L., “Quality Variations in Helica ally Threaded d Nails,” Bulle
etin No. 15,
Februuary 1991. Also, Forest Prroducts Journal 40(11/12): 64-66, November/December 1990
Whitee, M.S., McLa ain, T.E., and d Padla, D., “RRelationshipss Between the e Results of NNail Impact
Bend Tests and Se elected Materrial Properties s,” Bulletin Noo. 17, February 1991. Also o, Journal of
ng and Evalua
Testin ation 18(3): 219-226, May 1990
Whitee, M.S., McLa ain, T.E., Pad dla, D., and Kasal,
K B., “Ha
ardness Gradients Within R Roll-Threaded d
Steel Nails,” Bullettin No. 16, February 1991. Also, Journa al of Testing aand Evaluatio on 18(2): 128--
130, March
M 1990
Publissher: Virginia a Polytechnic Institute & Sttate Universityy (VPI&SU), W William H. Saardo Jr. Pallett
and Container
C Res search Labora atory, Blacksb burg, VA 2406 61

21
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A5-B

Labels (Im
Standard Pallet-Fastenerr Package L mperial Unitts)
(1) NAILS Quantitty _________
____lb
Manufacture
er _________
_____________
____________
_____________
____________
_
Manufacture
er’s Code ___
_____________
____________
_ Lot _______
____________
_

Type: Palle
et nail _______
____________
_____________
______
Length ___
_____________
_______ in. Wire diameterr ___________
________in.

Metal: Regular-stock stee

el _____ Stiff-s
stock steel ___
___ Hardened
d steel _____
ght _______
Finish: Brig Galvanized __
_______ Coa
ated (type) ___
___________

Shank deformation: Helically threaded _________

_ None ______
_____
e:
Thread type
Length ___
_____________
____in. Cres
st diameter ___
____________
_in.
Number of flutes
f _______
____________
____
Angle ____
__________deg Helixes/in. ___________
____________
Head type ____________
____________
____ Head d
diameter _____
____________
_in.
Point type ____________
_ _____________
_____
MIBANT an
ngle ________
_______deg. Performance F
FWI ________
___________
Performa
ance FSI ___
_____________
_____
_____________
Code ____ _________

(2) STAPLES Quantity ______

_______lb
Manufacture
er _________
_____________
____________
_____________
____________
_
Manufacture
er’s Code ___
_____________
____________
_ Lot _______
____________
_

Type: Palle
et Staple ____
_____________
____________
_________
Length ___
_____________
_______ in. Wire diameterr ___________
________in.
Nominal wirre diameter __
___________ in
n. Leg crosss section ____
______ x _____
______ in.

Metal: Regular-stock stee

el __________
_______
ght _______
Finish: Brig Galvanized __
_______ Coa
ated (type) ___
___________

Crown type: Flattened

Point type: Chisel
NT angle _____
MIBAN __________de
eg. Performan
nce FWI ____
_____________
___
Performa
ance FSI ___
_____________
_____
_____________
Code ____ _________

22
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 6
Proto
ocol for Me
easuring Quality
Q of P
Pallet Nails
s and Staplles
1 NTRODUCTIO
IN ON

The performance
p of
o reusable an nd single-use, stringer andd block, wood pallets, durin ng their life prrior
and after
a their repa
air or remanuffacture, is dra
amatically affe
ected by the ttype, quality, quantity, and d
locatio
on of the fasteners used fo or pallet assembly. These fasteners incclude driven n nails and
staple
es (see Figure e 6-1) and, att times, wood screws, lag b bolts, and bolts. Pallet perrformance and
that of
o its fastenerss are also influenced by thee use of the ppallets, which
h includes the anticipated
norma al use as welll as anticipate
ed abuse during assembly of the unit load on top of tthe pallet, its
storing, stacking, handling,
h and transporting while empty o or loaded.

Figure
F 6-1
Exam
mples of Drriven Nails
s and Staplles
2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of this
s protocol is to
t delineate th he steps to bee taken to meeasure and reecord the quality
of the
e nails and sta aples used forr pallet assem mbly. This qu uality assessmment makes itt possible to
predicct the performmance of the driven
d fasteneers and to dettermine wheth her they meet the
requirrements of ap pplicable spec cifications, such as the min nimum requireements descrribed in Part 3
of this
s Standard. Additionally,
A th
his fastener-qquality assesssment provide es the informaation required
d
to facilitate the commputerized “P Pallet Design System
S (PDSS)” analysis, u
used to predicct the
perforrmance of wo ood pallets under given use e conditions.

3 SCOPE

The observations
o to
t be made ac ccording to th
he stipulationss of this proto
ocol are eitherr to ascertain
that th
he assembled d end productt meets specified requirem ments or to pro ovide reasonss for rejectionn
or corrrection of the
e end productt. The stipulations of this p
protocol can sserve as guide elines for the
fastenner manufactu urer, not as his manufacturing standard ds.

23
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

The quality
q of nails
s and staples is determined
d by their phyysical and me
echanical prop
perties as well
as by any defects observed
o in accordance
a with
w relevant U U.S. consensu us standards,, promulgated
d
e ASTM Intern
by the national and The
T American n Society of MMechanical Engineers (ASME).

The mechanical
m prroperties obseerved during this
t pallet-fasstener quality assessment are those
requirred for the PD
DS evaluation of wood palle ets. Other reelevant mecha anical propertties, which ca
an
be used during spe ecific fastenerr-quality asse
essments, are e covered in AASTM F 680 a and ASTM F
1575.

All ap
pplicable meassurements lissted in this pro
otocol shall be
e taken and rrecorded, in o
order to make
e it
possibble to determine the fasten
ner quality under given con nditions of use
e.

U.S. customary
c units are govern
ning in any dispute regardiing dimension
ns and perforrmance of the
e
fasten
ners.

The protocol
p does not purport to o address anyy safety conc erns associatted with its usse. Particularrly,
when testing hardeened-steel na ails, wearing protective
p eye
eglasses is a requirement w which should
neverr be waived, even
e if this req
quirement is not
n specifical ly stated.

4 REFERENCED
R D DOCUMEN
NTS

MHIAA MH1 – 20055, Part 1: Deffinitions and Terminology

T Covering Palllets and Related Structure
C es
MHIAA MH1 – 20055, Part 3: Woood Pallets
MHIAA MH1 – 20055, Part 5: Driv
ven Fastenerrs for Assemb bly of Pallets a
and Related S Structures
Publis
sher: The Am
merican Socieety of Mechan nical Engineerrs (ASME), Three Park Avvenue, New
York, NY 10016-59
990; Order De epartment: 22 2 Law Drive, B
Box 2300, Fa airfield, NJ 07007-2300

ASTMM A 510 – 199 90 and ASTM M A 510M, Sp pecification fo r General Requirements fo or Wire Rods
and Coarse
C Round d Wire, Carbo on Steel
ASTMM E18, Test Materials
M for Rockwell
R Harddness and Ro ockwell Superrficial Hardness of Metallicc
Materrials
ASTMM F 547 – 199 95, Definitions
s of Terms Re elating to Nai ls for Use witth Wood and W Wood-Base
Materrials
ASTMM F 592 – 199 95, Definitions
s of Terms Re elating to Col lated and Cohered Fasten ners and Their
Applic
cation Tools
ASTMM F 680 – 199 93, Test Methhods for Nails
ASTMM F 1575 – 19 995, Test Metthod for Deterrmining Bend ding Yield Mom ment of Nailss
ASTMM F 1667 – 19 996, Specificaation for Drive
en Fasteners:: Nails, Spikess, and Staple es
Publis
sher: ASTM International,
I 100 Barr Harrbor Drive, W West Conshohocken, PA 19 9428.
www.palletcentral.com

NWPC CA Pallet De m (PDS®) Vers

esign System sion 4.1
Publis
sher: Nationaal Wooden Pa
allet & Container Associatio
on (NWPCA)), 1421 Prince
e Street, Suite
e
340, Alexandria,
A VA 22314-2805 www.pallettcentral.com

SAE J417b
J – 1983
3, Hardness Test
T and Harddness Numbe er Conversion
ns
Publis
sher: Society
y of Automotiv
ve Engineers (SAE), 400 C
Commonwealth Drive, Warrrendale, PA
150966-0001

Hershhovitz, Allen. “P.I.N.s and

d Nails.” AST
TM Standardizzation News 2 24(7): pp. 34--39, 1996.
Loferrski, Joseph R., and Sternn, E. Georgee. “Understannding Impact TTesting of Pa
allet Nails and
d
Staple
es.” Journal of
o Testing andd Evaluation 19(5): pp. 379
9-384, 1991.

24
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Loferrski, Joseph R., and Gam malath, Sandh hya. “Predictting Rotationa al Stiffness off Nail Joints.”
Foresst Products Joournal 39(7): pp.
p 8-16, 199 90.
McLe eod III, John A.
A Fastener Quality Analy ysis Version 1 1.0: User’s Guuide, 1993.
Osboourne, Lawrence E. Faste ener Quality Analysis
A Protoocol, 1986.
Stern
n, E. George. “The Testing g of Improvedd Nails.” AST TM Materials R Research & S Standards
6(12): pp. 602-607 7, 1966.
n, E. George. “Nails – Deffinitions and Sizes,
Stern S A Handdbook for Nail Users.” VPII&SU, Pallet &
Contaainer Researc ch Laboratoryy Bulletin No. 61, 1967.
Stern
n, E. George. Nails, Spike es, and Staplees – Chapter 2 in “Mechan ical Connections in Wood
Structtures.” ASCE E Manual NO.. 84, pp. 27-9 90, 1996.
Whitee, Marshall S.
S “Effect of Mat-Fastener
M Stiffness on tthe Diagonal Rigidity of Wo ooden Block
Pallett.” Forest Pro
oducts Journaal 41(1): pp. 57-60,
5 1991.
Whitee, Marshall S.
S and Gales, Theresa L. “Quality Varia ations in Heliccally Threade
ed Nails.”
Foresst Products Joournal 49(11/112): pp. 64-666, 1990.
Whitee, Marshall S.,
S McLain, T..E., Padla, D.. and Kasal, B. “Hardnesss Gradients W Within Roll-
Threaaded Steel Na ails.” Journal of Testing an
nd Evaluation 18(2): pp. 12 28-130.
Whitee, Marshall S.,
S McLain, T..E., and Padla, D. “Relatio onships Betwween the Resu ults of Nail
Impacct Bending Te ests and Selected Nail Matterial Propertiies.” Journal of Testing an nd Evaluation
18(3): pp. 219-226 6.
sher: Virginia
Publis a Polytechnic Institute and State Universsity (VPI&SU), Departmen nt of Wood
Scien
nce and Fores st Products, William
W H. Sarrdo Jr. Pallet aand Containeer Research L Laboratory,
1650 Ramble Road d, Blacksburg
g, VA 24061-0 0503

NOTE: It is the obligaation of the userr of this protoco

ol to ensure tha
at the applicable
e referenced sta
andard document
is the appropriate
a issu
ue relevant to th
he particular invvestigation undder way and the latest issue in a
any new
investiigation.

25
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5 DEFINITIONS
D

erminology us
The te sed in this pro
otocol is in line with Part 1 of this Stand
dard. The termminology
coverring the principal dimensionns for pallet nails
n and stapples is provide
ed in Figure 6
6-2.

Figure
F 6-2
Schematic Diagramm of Nails and Staples s Used for Pallet Asssembly,
Indica
ating Measu
urements tot be Take en in Orderr to Determ
mine
the Physic
cal Charactteristics off These Fa
asteners
The fo
ollowing defin
nitions are spe
ecific to this protocol:
p

meas
suring: act of quantifying particular prop
perties and dim
mensions.

pallett: portable, ho
orizontal, rigid
d, composite platform used
d as a base fo
or assembling
g, storing,
stackiing, handling,, and transporting goods as unit loads.

pallett-mat assembly nail: brightt or coated, plain-shank orr threaded, round-wire, steel nail with
short, blunt, chisel point and fille
eted, flat head
d, 1 to 2 in. (2
25 to 50 mm) long.

pallett-mat assembly staple: brig ght or coated, plain-shank , flattened (re

ectangular) steel-wire staple
with short,
s blunt, ch
hisel point and flattened crrown connectting the two equally long leegs at their
ends opposite their points, 1 to 2 in. (25 to 500 mm) long.

pallett nail: helically

y or annularly
y threaded, ro ound-wire, steeel fastener m
made from end dless wire by
cutting the point an nd forming thee filleted, flat head at the sshank end opp posite the poiint end, 1.5 to
o
3.5 in. (38 to 89 mm m) long.

26
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallett staple: brigh

ht or coated, plain-shank,
p flattened
f (recttangular) stee
el-wire fastener produced b
by
bending wire to forrm two equally y long legs an
nd a flattenedd crown conne ecting both le
egs at their
ends opposite their points, 2 to 3.75 in. (50 to
o 95 mm) long g.

protoc
col: formal se
et of conventions governing the treatme
ent and forma
atting of data.

quality
ty: relative me
easure of perrformance cha
aracteristics.

6 ASTENER DESCRIPTION
FA N

6.1 Fastener Le
ength

6.1.1 For nails

ength is the distance, meas
The nail le sured parallel to the nail-sh
hank axis, from the
maximum diameter of th he head-bearring surface to
o the top end of the point, as shown in
Figure 6-2. For this me easurement, a ruler is usedd to the neare est 0.031 in. (0.8 mm) or a
ale measuring
vernier sca g 0.010 in. (0..3 mm).
NOTE: This definition differs from the AST TM F 547 definittion which inclu
udes the nail po
oint in the overa
all
nail length or
o one-third of th
he point length in evaluating n ail performance
e.

6.1.2 For staplees

The staplee length is the
e distance, me
easured paralllel to the stap
ple-leg axis, ffrom the botto
om
of the crow
wn to the top end
e of the point, as is show
wn in Figure 6 6-2, using a rruler to the
nearest 0.0031 in. (0.8 mm).
m
NOTE: This definition differs from the AST TM F 592 definittion which inclu
udes the crown and point in the
e
overall staplle length. The exception
e applie
es in the case o
of bulk staples w
which are driven n by hand-
hammer, wh here the staple length is measuured from the boottom of the croown to the tip off the point.

6.2 Thread Leng

gth

The thread le
ength is the continuous
c dis
stance from thhe top end off the thread allong the nail
shank to the top end of thhe point or the
e bottom end of the thread in the case o of the pilot point
(see ASTM F 547). If the thread is nott continuous, the thread len ngth is the len
ngth of the
threaded porrtion of the na
ail shank pene etrating the n ailing membeer for the requuired depth.
The thread le
ength is meas sured with a ruler
r to the ne
earest 0.031 iin. (0.8 mm).

6.3 Wire Diameter

6.3.1 For plain-shank, helically threaded d, and annul arly round-w wire nails
The wire diameter
d is the
e distance across the non--threaded pottion of the naiil shank awayy
from the gripper marks. The wire dia ameter is meaasured with a micrometer tto the nearesst
0.03 mm). If the nail is coa
0.001 in. (0 ated, the coatting has to be
e removed whhere the
measurem ment is to be done.
d

6.3.2 ed square-wire nails

For twiste
The wire diameter
d WD of
o twisted squ uare-wire naills cannot be m
measured directly. It shall
be approxiimated using the following equation:

WD = 0.9
9 TD

where TD is the average measured thread-crest

t d
diameter of thhe sample, wiith the
dimension obtained with
h a micromete
er to the nearrest 0.001 in. (0.03 mm).

27
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.3.3 For staple

es
The wire diiameter of both staple legs is the same. F For round-wire e bulk staples,, it is the
distance accross one of thhe staple legs.. For flattenedd-wire staples, usually havin ng a rectangular
cross sectioon, the wire diiameter is bassed on the mea asurements of the thicknesss and the widtth
of the staplle leg. The thiickness is the wire dimensio on in the direcction perpendiccular to the
staple crowwn. The thickn ness is normallly the largest cross-sectiona al leg dimension. The width h
is the wire dimension in the
t direction parallel
p to the sstaple crown. This is indica ated in Figure 6
6-
2. Both thickness and width are measured along the e uncoated po ortion of the staple leg with a
micrometerr to the neares st 0.001 in. (.0
03 mm).

6.4 Thread-cres
st Diameter

6.4.1 For fluted and threade

ed nails
The thread-crest diamete er of fluted andd threaded na ails is the distaance from cresst to crest alon
ng
the deformed portion of thet nail shank. It is measure ed in the direcction perpendicular to the naail
axis with a flat-spindle micrometer to th he nearest 0.0 001 in. (0.03 m mm) (see Nonm mandatory
Appendix A6-D).
A To acccount for any non-uniformity
n or taper of thee shank deformations,
measureme ents shall be made
m at least at three locati ons, that is, near to two end
ds and along tthe
center of th
he flutes or thrreads while rottating the nail..

6.4.2 For Individ

dual Nails
The thread-crest diamete er of an individ
dual nail is the
e average of att least three m
measurementss.
This diameeter may vary considerably
c for
f nails taken from a single sample or fro om a lot of nails
as well as from
f several lo
ots of nails of the same ship pment. Thereffore, the threa ad-crest
diameter shhall be measured for each of o 25 nails (see e Table 6-1), rrandomly takeen from each
sample or lot
l and recorde ed in the apprropriate colum n of the Faste ener Quality An nalysis
worksheet (Form 1). The e mean thread d-crest diametter AVG and th he standard deeviation SDEV V
shall be computed. Usin ng these data, the coefficien t of variation CCV is determin ned, based onn
ng relationship
the followin p:

CV = (SDEV / AVG) x 100

1

Both AVG and b recorded on the workshe

a CV shall be eet.

Table
T 6-1
Faste
ener Sampliing
mum Number off
Minim
Property Fastener Minim
mum Number off Meassurements per
Classification Property Sam
mples Required Sammple Required
Mandatory Length 5 1
Thread Length 5 1
Wire dia
ameter 5 1
Thread--crest diameter 25 3 along
sha
ank deformation
Thread helixes 5 1
Thread rings 5 1
Thread flutes 25 1
Thread angle 5 1
Point length and width 5 1
Nail-heaad diameter and
5 1
rim thickness
Staple-ccrown length,
5 1
width, and thickness
s
MIBANT T angle 25 1
Optiona
al Carbon content 5 1
Rockwe ell hardness 5 3
Ductility
y 5 1
Bending g yield moment 5 1

28
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.5 Thread Helix

xes

6.5.1 For helica

ally threaded round-wire nails
The numbe er of helixes ofo helically threaded round d-wire nails is the number o of major threa ad
crossings along
a the full thread lengthh (see Figure 6-2). Major tthreads are th hose threads in
double thre
ead-crest nails where the majorm and mi nor threads aare located clo ose and parallel
to each oth
her. Using a nail with a thrread diamete er equal to the
e average thre ead diameter of
the samplee, and placing g a ruler or strraight edge aalong the threaad parallel to the nail axis,
the numbeer of helixes iss the number of points in ccontact with th he ruler or straight edge an nd
the thread crests or proojected thread d crests in thee case of a tappered thread.. In the case
where the thread extend ds beyond the e last contactt point or whe
ere discontinu uities exist in
the thread, an accurate number of he elixes can bee obtained by dividing the n number of
oints of projected contact points by the e
contact po exact thread length over w which they werre
counted annd multiplying g the results value
v by the to
otal thread length. This va alue shall be
rounded offf to the neare est 0.1 helix.

6.5.2 For twiste ed square-wire nails

The flutes of twisted square-wire nails extend the entire length
h of the nail sh
hank from thee
e underside of
point to the o the head. The
T determina ation of the number of heliixes of twisted
d
square-wirre nails shall be
b the same as
a that for he
elically threade
ed round-wire e nails.

6.6 Thread Ring

gs

For annularlyy threaded naails, the numb ber of major th hread rings along the nail sshank shall b be
counted and recorded. Major
M thread riings are those e thread ringss in double th hread-crest na ails
where the major and mino or thread rings are close a nd parallel to o each other. These rings
are shown in n Figure 6-3. To determine e the number of rings per inch along the e threaded
portion of the
e nail shank, the number ofo major threa ad rings shall be counted a and divided byy
the thread le
ength. Since there
t is usually little variat ion of the nummber of majorr thread ringss
within a sammple lot of ann
nularly threadeed nails, the e examination o of five fasteneers is sufficien
nt
(see Table 6-1)
6 to obtain a reliable valu ue for the num mber of rings.

Figure
F 6-3
Schematic Diagram a Minor Thread Rings on An
m of Major and nnularly
Threadedd and Helic
cally Threaaded Pallett Nails

29
12

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.7 Thread Flutes

6.7.1 For helicaally threaded round-wire and twisted square-wire e nails

The numbe er of helical fllutes along th
he nail shank can be obserrved by lookin ng at the point
end of the nail and coun nting the majo or depression
ns along the ssurface or of tthe cross
section of the nail shank (see Figure e 6-2). The tw
wisted square-wire nail hass four flutes.
The thread ded round-wirre nail normallly has four orr five flutes. F
For special naails, and
particularly
y for stout nails, the use off a larger num
mber of flutes may be appro opriate.

6.7.2 Variationss
Variations in the numbe er of flutes can be found w ithin a samplee of helically tthreaded nails.
Therefore, all nails of a sample of thrreaded nails sshall be exammined for the number of
flutes along the shank. The thread anglea and fasttener withdra
awal index FW WI value have to
be computted for each nail
n with a diffferent numberr of flutes. Th he number off nails with a
given number of flutes shall
s be recorrded on the w
worksheet. If tthe number o of flutes is
higher thann six, the com
mputed FWI value is unrelia able, and anyy predictions o of the fastene
er
performance can be hig gher than justified.

6.8 gle
Thread Ang

6.8.1 For helicaally threaded round-wire and twisted square-wire e nails

The threadd angle is mea asured relativ
ve to a plane perpendicula ar to the axis o
of the nail
shank, as is illustrated in Figure 6-2. This angle ccan be measu ured with a prrotractor from
m
the carbonn impression obtained
o afterr having the n
nail shank rollled over a she
eet of carbon
paper. Ho owever, more consistent an ngle values caan be obtaine ed by computting the avera age
thread anggle TA in degrrees, using a calculator wh hich is progra mmed in line with the
following equation:
e
TAN [F / (TD x π x (H/TL))]
TA - ARCT

where
ARCTA
AN = arctange
ent
F = number of
o flutes along the nail shank
H = number of
o helixes alongg the nail shan
nk
TD
T = average thread-crest diameter, in. (m
mm)
TL
T = thread le
ength, in. (mm))
π = 3.14
The thread
d-angle value shall be roun
nded off to the
e nearest deg
gree.

If any varia
ation in the nu
umber of thread flutes is ob
bserved withiin a sample o or lot, the thread
angle shall be computed for each na ail having a diffferent numbe
er of flutes byy inputting the
e
appropriatee number of helixes
h for ea
ach number off flutes.

6.9 Point Lengtth and Width

6.9.1 Point leng gth

The lengthh of the nail an nd staple poin nts, measured d along the edge of the po oint, extends
from the toope end of the e point to its bottom
b end orr tip. A “bluntt” or “dull” point has a rounnd
point end, in contrast to o a “sharp” po oint which hass a “keen” point end. The p pallet fastene
er
may be “po ointless” as a result of she earing the fasttener wire at a right angle to the wire axxis
during the fastener man nufacture. Ac ccording to Paart 3 of this Sttandard, the llength of the
pallet-nail and pallet-sta aple point sha all not exceedd 0.156 in. (4 mm). Accord ding to ASTM F
547, a “sho ort” point of th
he fastener with
w a wire dia meter of 0.07 72 to 0.225 in. (1.8 to 5.7
mm) has a 45 deg or grreater include ed angle, while e the “medium m” point of su uch a fastenerr
has a 32 too 38 deg inclu uded angle, and
a a “long” p point of such a fastener hass a 25 deg orr
smaller inccluded angle.

30
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.9.2 Point typees

The most common
c typee of point is th
he diamond po oint, a symme etrical point h
having four
approxima ately equal be
eveled planes which form a pyramid. Fo or pallet nails and staples,
chisel and wedge points s are often sppecified. The chisel point iis a point with h two major
planes formming a “V” annd a pair of minor planes o n each flank, forming a he exagonal cross
section. In
n contrast, the
e wedge point has two con nvergent planes forming a “V”, and the
tapered we edge point haas two major planes
p for a “V
V” and a singgle minor plan ne on each
flank forming a rectangu ular cross secction. The sta aple leg often
n has a bevel point; that is,, a
point sheaared obliquely to the leg axis during the manufacturin ng process. T The beveled
face of the
e outside-beve el divergent point
p is to prodduce an outw ward clinch or to provide
additional penetration, or
o both, in a thin stapling m member (see ASTM F 547 for details).

6.9.3 Point widtth

The width of the chisel point shall no
ot exceed the wire diamete
er.

6.9.4 Defects
ns, thin wing-like projection
Burrs or fin ns protruding from the sidee or edge of cchisel and
wedge points, sometime es formed during the pointting process a and intended to be remove ed
during the manufacturin ng process, are defects wh hich shall be rrecorded during the qualityy
assessment of nails and d staples. Fa asteners with such burrs orr fins larger th
han 0.010 in.
(0.3 mm) shall
s be culled
d.

6.10 Nail-Head Diameter

D and Head-Rim Thickness
T

6.10.1
1 Nail-head diameter
The head ofo a pallet nail shall be flat or checkered d and slightly countersunk. The head iss
often oval shaped instead of round. It shall be co oncentric or neearly concenttric. The head
diameter iss the distancee across the nail
n head perp pendicular to the nail axis. In the case of
an over-shhaped head, the average diameter
d is the
e average of the smallest a and largest
diameters observed. They can be measuredm withh a micromete er to the nearest 0.001 in.
(0.03 mm). According to t the ASTM F 547 definitio on, the head diameter is thhe maximum
distance across the nail head perpen ndicular to thee nail axis. This permits th
he
determinattion of the nail-head size by b using a me etal gauging ddevice with a nnumber of na ail
holes repreesentative of common nail-head sizes. If the nail he ead can be pu ushed through ha
nail hole of a certain siz
ze, the nail-heead size is smmaller than thaat representative of the
particular hole
h size; andd if the nail he
ead cannot be e pushed throough a nail hoole, the nail-
head size is larger than that representative of the particular ho ole size. Otheer gauges havve
a graduateed tapered slo ot which perm mits measuring g the nail-heaad size by mooving the head d
along the slot
s until the la argest head diameter
d cannnot be moved d any further. The gauge
marks at thhat location in
ndicate the na ail-head size.

6.10.2
2 Collated nails
n
Collated na ails often havve partial, thatt is incomplette, notched, o
or “D” heads w with a
semicircula ar rim and a portion
p of the head omitted d during the hheading proce ess to allow
tight collating of nails in strips or coils
s. The head--bearing area ads shall not be
a of partial hea
smaller thaan that of com mplete heads of same-size e nails. Yet, in
n computing tthe head-pull--
through resistance of co ollated nails with
w partial he eads, only 90% % of the maximum head
diameter is s used.

6.10.3
3 Head-rim thickness
The head-rim thickness s is the thickne
ess of the pe ripheral part o
of the head, mmeasured
parallel to the nail-shank axis with a micrometer to o the nearestt 0.001 in. (0.0
03 mm). The e
rim shall be without any y cracks whichh can result frrom improperr forming of thhe head durin ng
the manufa acturing proceess. The rim thickness sh hall be such as not to result in rim failure
e
during drivving of the naiil.

31
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.10.4
4 Fillet
Every nail shall have a fillet at the inttersection of h
head and sha ank. This currved
intersection shall be speecified by its radius. For sstout as well aas long nails tto be driven in
nto
dense mem mbers, the fillet shall be larger than thatt used for a lig
ght nail to pre
event
separationn of head and shank during g driving of the
e nail as well as during loaad transfer fro
om
head to shhank.

6.11 Staple-Crow
wn Length, Width,
W and Th
hickness

1 Staple-cro
6.11.1 own length
The lengthh of the staple e distance me asured along
e crown is the g the crown be etween the
staple legs
s, as shown inn Figure 6-2. It is measureed to the nearrest 0.03 in. (0.8 mm). This
measurem ment is not the
e same as thee “crown widthh” as defined in ASTM F 592 and used by
the staple manufacturerrs insofar as crown
c width iss representattive of the ove
erall dimensio
on
ple-crown leng
of the stap gth, which inc
cludes the widdths of both staple legs.

2 Staple-cro
6.11.2 own width
The width of the staple crown is the dimension
d of the staple croown measure ed with a
micromete er to the neare
est 0.001 in. (0.03
( mm), peerpendicular tto the crown llength in the
plane perppendicular to the
t leg axis. The staple wwire along the crown is norm mally flattened
more than the wire alon ng the crown is
i normally fla
attened more than the wire e along the
s, to provide for
staple legs f a large croown-bearing a area and pull--through resisstance.

3 Staple-cro
6.11.3 own thicknes ss
The thickness of the staaple crown is the dimensio on of the staplle crown meaasured with a
micromete er to the neare
est 0.001 in. (0.08
( mm), peerpendicular tto the staple-ccrown length
and width. As a result of
o the flattenin
ng of the stap
ple-crown wiree, the crown tthickness is
an the leg thic
smaller tha ckness.

7 ASTENER SA
FA AMPLING

The minimum
m nummber of random mly selected fastener
f sam ples per lot of fasteners (ssee Note) and d
the minimum
m numb ber of measurrements required for each sample are listed in Table e 6-1 for the
determ mination of th
he physical an nd mechanica al fastener pro operties to be
e observed. W Where possib ble,
all of the
t measurem ments shall be e made for th he same faste ener and recoorded in prope er sequence in
order to make it fea asible to relatte each meas surement to th he particular ffastener samp ple. It is
recommmended thatt more than th he minimum number
n of sammples be seccured in orderr to have a
sufficiient number of
o samples av vailable if it sh
hould be nece essary to cull some sample es for good
reasoon. The latter shall be reco orded in full de etail in the tesst report.

NOTE E: A lot shall consist

c of fastteners of a sin
ngle shipment of the same ttype, grade, annd finish, take
en
from the
t same man nufacturing lott of fasteners produced und der essentially
y like conditio
ons and offere ed
for pu
urchase and ac cceptance at any
a one time (see( ASTM F 1
1667 for maximmum lot size).

32
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8 PRE-TESTING
G STEPS AND
D ACTIONS

STEPS A
ACTIONS
8.1 Record
R date of
o receipt of fa
astener(s) at the
t 8.1 Pla ace the date o
of receipt of tthe fastener(ss)
labora
atory. on the correspondence, notes, and package(ss)
of the ffasteners rece
eived.

8.2 Assign
A conseccutive Fastene
er Identificatio
on 8.2.1 EEnter the namme of the fasteener supplierr
(ID) Number(s)
N to the
t fastener(ss) received. and thee date of the ffastener rece
eipt at the
laborattory on the ap
ppropriate line
es on the
perman nent fastenerr log which seerves as the
invento
ory of the fastteners tested

8.2.2 E Enter Fastene er ID Numberr on all

corresp pondence and d notes relating to the
fasteneer(s) involved
d and on the p package(s) off
the fassteners receivved.

8.3 Determine
D whether the info
ormation 8.3 Ch
heck the inforrmation provid
ded and the
provid
ded by the fasstener supplieer in the numbeer of fastenerss at hand.
corres
spondence an nd on the fasttener
packaage(s) is in ag
greement and d whether the
numbbers of fastene ers submitted
d is sufficient to
t
perforrm the tests required.

8.4 Iff any discrepa

ancy appears to exist and if 8.4 If n
necessary, co
ontact the fasstener supplie
er.
not all the fastenerrs required forr testing are
able, attempt to
availa t correct this
s situation.

8.5 Determine
D whether the fasttener supplierr is 8.5 If n
necessary, prrovide informa
ation to the
familia
ar with the ch
harges to be made
m for the fasteneer supplier on
n the charges to be made
servic
ces to be renddered and whhether the and thee method of ppayment.
methood of paymen nt has been aggreed upon.

33
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

9 DETERMINAT
D TION OF PHY
YSICAL FAST
TENER PROP
PERTIES

STEPS A
ACTIONS
9.1 Obtain
O workshheet form (see e Form 1) for 9.1.1 F
Fill out the wo
orksheet inforrmation with a
all
Faste ener Quality Analysis
A of eacch fastener the app
plicable inform
mation. If neccessary,
sample lot submitte ed and enter any and all thhe contactt the fastenerr supplier to o
obtain any
fastenner identifying
g information submitted and missing
g information.
obserrved. This inc cludes informa ation on the
fastenner manufactu urer, which is important forr a 9.1.2 IInclude on the e worksheet a any informatio on
numb ber of reasonss. One of them is the fact that
t submitttted by the fasstener supplie er and
all tes
sted fastener samples and the data observved concernin ng the carbon content of the
obtainned are to be filed in accorrdance with thhe wire (ee.g., C-1030), the type of w wire (e.g., stiff--
name e of the fasten
ner manufactu urer and not stock), the wire trea atment (e.g., hhardened, hea at-
accorrding to the faastener supplier and not treatedd, and temperred), the faste ener finish (e.g.,
accorrding to the Fa astener ID Nuumber. bright, dull, oily, rustty), and coating (e.g.,
polyme er coated, hott-dip galvanizzed,
mecha anically galvan nized), bulk o
or machine
quality,, and method d of collation ((e.g., welded
wire).

9.1.3 R Record inform mation on the shank

straigh tness and shank deformattions, if any
(e.g., tyypes of barbss, flutes, and tthreads;
incomp plete, that is p
partially forme
ed threads,
non-un niform thread crests, discontinuous
threadss, and tapered threads); po oint type (e.g.,
diamon nd, chisel, weedge, bevel; bblunt, sharp)
and po oint length (e.gg., short, med
dium, long);
head o or crown type (e.g., flat, cheeckered,
counte ersunk; round;; oval; concen ntric;
incomp plete) and hea ad or crown ssize; type of
fillet be
elow the head d.

9.1.4 OObserve and record the magnitude and d

the sig nificance of a
any defects (e
e.g., burrs or
ong the point and/or underr the head,
fins alo
eccenttricity of point and/or head and non-roun nd,
incomp plete head).

9.1.5 C
Consult Figurre 6-2 for the fastener
termino
ology used.

9.1.6 IIf any dimenssions are provvided or

observved in fraction
ns of an inch, determine the
e
decimaal equivalent ((see Appendiix A) and
record the latter.

9.1.7 IIf any gauge oof the wire ussed is provide

ed,
mine the decim
determ mal equivalent (see
Append dix B) and reccord the latter.

9.2 Take
T and reco
ord all measurrements 9.2.1 W
When observving dimensions, use ruler,
requirred. accura
ate to 0.03 in. (0.8 mm), or micrometer,
ate to 0.001 in
accura n. (0.03 mm), whichever is
approppriate. Conveert any fraction
ns to decimall

34
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

equiva lents (see No

onmandatory Appendix A6-
A) for rrecording.

9.2.2 WWhen direct m

measurementts are not
feasible
e, use compuuted value and indicate how
w
it was d
derived.

10 DETERMINAT
D TION OF MEC
CHANICAL FASTENER
F P
PROPERTIES
S

STEPS A
ACTIONS
10.1 MIBANT Ang
gle

10.1.11 The resista ance shall be observed of 10.1.1 Randomly se elect 25 repre esentative
nails and
a staples to o impact force es, applied sample es from each lot of fastene ers submitted
vertically to the naiil head and staple
s crown ata for the performance e of MIBANT ttests. If 25
an an ngle of 80 deg g to the incline
es fastener fasteneer samples arre not availab ble, a smaller
shank a an angle of 10 deg from the
k/leg, that is at numbe er may be testted; yet the data obtained
horizoontal. This ob bservation is made
m in order to cannott be considere ed fully repressentative of th
he
determ mine (a) the ductility,
d the pliability,
p the lot. Plaace the fasten ner between tthe tool chuckks,
tough hness, and any brittleness of o the fastene er, with thee fastener he ead/crown pro otruding 0.469 9
(b) its
s driveability and
a its bucklin ng resistance in. (12 mm) from the e chucks. Impact the
duringg driving, and (c) its capab bility to transmmit fasteneer head/crown n with the 3.550 lb (1.58 kg))
shearr loads from th he fastened member
m to the
e standaard weight free e-falling from the height off
fastenning member of the connec ction within 12in. TThis results inn an energy a application of
given serviceability y limitations. The latter 3.33 ft--lbf (4.52 joule
es). If the fasstener to be
prope erty can be of major influen nce on the tested has a small sshank/leg diam meter and if the
perforrmance chara acteristics of the
t assembled MIBAN NT test would result in the o observation oof
structture, since thiss property inffluences to a a MIBA ANT angle of 46 deg or mo ore, use the
large extent the pe erformance, and particularly standaard 2.00 or 0.7 75 lb (0.91 or 0.34 kg)
gidity, of the assembly
the rig a esppecially when it is dropwe eight, instead of the 3.50 lb b (1.58 kg)
expos sed to impacting, vibrationa al, and other dropwe eight. This wo ould result in the applicatioon
dynam mic shear forc ces. of kinettic energies aat the point off impact of 1.990
or 0.71 ft-lbf (2.57 oor 0.96 joules)), respectivelyy.
Becau use of the significance of these properties
underr given field conditions, the ese properties s
shall be
b evaluated for those nails and staples s
that are
a used for th he assembly of o pallets and
relate
ed structures. Additionally, these
evaluation shall be e made for suc ch structures
that are
a assembled d with nails annd staples annd
are deesigned to res sist dynamic forces
f resultin
ng
from storms,
s waves, earthquake es, and
vibrattions caused by b mechanica al equipment
installled in or place
ed on these structures.
s Thhe
releva
ant properties s of the fasten
ners commonly
used for these purp poses are obs served with th he
Morga an Impact Bend-Angle Nail Tester, the
MIBAANT device (se ee ASTM F 680),
6 to
determmine the charracteristic MIB BANT angle.

10.1.2 Perform the MIBANT testts and record

on the Fastener Quality Analysiss worksheet th
he
measu red MIBANT angles as we ell as the
compu ted MIBANT angles adjusted for the usse

35
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

of the ssmaller 2.0 orr 0.75 lb (0.91

1 or 0.34 kg)
dropwe eight by multiplying the me easured
MIBAN NT angle value e with the 1.775 or 4.70
consta nt, respectiveely.

3 Detailed ins
10.1.3 structions cov
vering the use
e of 10.1.3 Refer to Non
nmandatory A
Appendix A6-C.
the MIBANT tool are given in Noonmandatory
Appenndix A6-C.

4 If more than 8%, that is, two of the 25

10.1.4 5 10.1.4 Record on th he worksheett all observed d
fasten
ners failed, the lot of fasten
ners cannot be
b fasteneer failures which occurred during testing g
acceppted because of unaccepta able fastener (e.g., h
head/crown fa ailure, partial o
or complete
perforrmance. shank//leg failure), u
using the apprropriate
abbrevviations (HF, P PSF/PLF, and d CSF/CLF).

5 Evaluate th
10.1.5 he MIBANT te
est values. 10.1.5 Compute an nd record the mean MIBAN NT
angle, the standard deviation, an nd the
on for those ffasteners whicch
coefficiient of variatio
did nott exhibit any tyype of shank//leg failure
during testing. The mean bend a angle shall be
e
recordeed to the nea arest degree. The coefficie ent
of varia
ation shall be recorded to tthe nearest
0.01 peercent.

10.1.66 In order to determine thee cohesiveness 10.1.6 Indicate alon ng the X-axis of the
of the
e sample, grap phically depic
ct on the frequen ncy distributio
on diagram thhe range of the
works sheet the MIBBANT angle frrequency MIBAN NT angles obsserved and place an “X” in
distrib
bution for each tested log of
o fasteners. the app propriate spott on the diagrram. Check tthe
numbe er of observations represen nted by the
“X”s, to
o ensure that the total nummber of
observved MIBANT a angles is equal to the
numbe er of tested fassteners whichh did not exhibit
any sh ank/leg failure.

7 Mean MIB
10.1.7 BANT angle
The mean MIBANT ang gle, representtative of the te
ested lot faste
eners, indicattes the fastener
y. This MIBAN
driveability NT value is used for tentattively classifying the fastenners of 0.135--
in. (3.5-mmm) and smalle
er wire diametters, as is ind
dicated in the following tabulation:

Meean MIBANT Angle, deg Fastener Cla assification

7 and below
b Too sti ff to be accep
ptable
8 to 46 Hardenned or stiff-sto
ock steel fastener
47 and higher Too so
oft to be accep ptable

The mean MIBANT ang gle provides an

a important i nput in the Pa allet Design SSystem (PDS)
analysis. There,
T it is on
ne of the majo
or variables w which can be u used to comp pensate for an
ny
other phys
sical and mechanical prope erties – which h meet or exce eed the acceptable
minimum performance
p requirements s – in attaining
g the accepta able minimum, or any
desirable higher,
h overalll performance e requiremen nts for the qua
ality of Multiplle-Use (M) an
nd
Limited-Usse (L) pallets, as stated in Table
T 3-3.

36
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10.2 Supplementtary Mechanical Fastene

er Properties

1 Properties
10.2.1 s of nails and d staples
g mechanical properties off nails and sta
If required, the following aples can be determined in n
line with ASTM F 680 and a ASTM F 1575:
1
(a) Rockw well hardness,, observed alo
ong the faste ner shank/leg e cross section
g or along the
of the faste
ener shank/le eg

(b) ductilitty of the faste

ener shank/leg
g, determined ding it over a mandrel, and
d by cold-bend d

(c) bendinng yield mome ent, determine

ed by observ ing the deflecction of the fastener loaded
d
at the centter of a single
e free span.

37
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Form 6-1
Fa
astener Quality Analysis Worksheet

Faste
ener No: Submitted
S by: G
General Appearanc
ce: D
Date of Receipt:
Sourc
ce: Address:
A D
Date of Testing:
Faste
ener Identification: Lab Report Comple
L eted by:

Fastener Description: Type:

Fastener Length: Avg.

A Wire Dia: T
Thread Length: A
Avg. Thread Dia:

Numb
ber of Helixes: Thread Angle, deg: N
Number of Flutes: N
Number of Rings:

Avg. M
MIBANT Angle, deg:: Head
H Dia: W
Wire Width: W
Wire Thickness:

Crown
n Length: Fastener Withdrawal Index: F
Fastener Shear Indexx:

Fasttener Thread-crest MIBANT

Nummber diameter,, in. angle, deg MIBANT A
Angle Frequency Disstribution
1 15

2 14

3 13

4 12

5 11

6 10

7 9

8 8

9 7

10 6

11 5

12 4

13 3

14 2

15 1

16

17

18 Bend Angle Degrrees

19 Comments:

2
20

2
21

2
22

2
23

2
24

2
25

AV
VG

Min.

Ma
ax.

C
CV

38
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10.2.2
2 Properties s of wire
Certain me echanical properties of thee wire, from w
which nails and d staples are made, can
influence the fastener performance.
p These prope erties can servve as guides in the wire
selection by
b the fasteneer manufacturrer. The carb bon content off the fastenerr wire can be
determined d using the prrovisions indic
cated in AST M A 510 and A 510M. Re egular-stock
steel nails and staples are
a made from m low-carbon n steel wire; w
while stiff-stocck and
hardened stiff-stock
s ste
eel nails are made
m from me edium-carbon n steel wire. S Stiff-stock steel
wire shouldd have a minimum tensile strength of 12 20,000 psi (88400 kg/cm2). Stiff-stock
steel nails should have a minimum Rockwell
R hard
dness of HRC C 24, as obserrved or
determined d by conversion of tensile strength to ha ardness in acccordance witth SAE J 417b b;
while hardened steel na ails shall have
e a minimum Rockwell harrdness of HRC C 37 unless
specified otherwise.
o Since manufactturing variable es, such as wwork-hardenin ng as a result of
wire-drawing and fasten ner heat-treattment tempera ature and sub bsequent que enching
influence the mechanica al properties of the fasteneers and sincee actual fasten ner
performance is the criticcal governing factor, the abbove-describe ed wire and ffastener
properties should not be e specified by
y the pallet m anufacturer oor user and ne eed not be
observed during
d the dettermination of the actual fa
astener performance.

11 FA
ASTENER PERFORMANCE

11.1 Performanc
ce Estimates

An indication
n of the actua al fastener perrformance is p
provided by th he estimates of the fastener
withdrawal in
ndex FWI and d fastener she
ear index FSII values, assuuming that thee fastener-
head/crown pull-through resistance
r is higher than th
he fastener-sh hank/leg with
hdrawal
resistance. If this is not th
he case, the fastener-head
f d/crown pull-tthrough resisttance is the
governing prroperty and sh hall be used in any assesssment of the ffastener perfoormance.

ence Part 3 Annex F for altternative meth

Note: Refere hods to deterrmine fastene
er performancce.

11.2 Performanc
ce Requireme
ents

The detailed description of

o the fasteneer and the estiimates of FWWI and FSI pro ovide
information whether
w and why
w the fastener performa nce requirem ments of given n fastener
specifications are or are not
n met. With h this informattion at hand, corrective ste
eps can be
ect appropriatte fasteners which
taken to sele w meet th e requiremennt of the governing
specification. For determination of FWWI and FSI, se ee Part 5 of th
his Standard.

11.3 Fastener Withdrawal Ind

dex

(a) The faste ener withdrawwal index FWWI value is a m measure of the e estimated w withdrawal
resistance off a given nail or staple relaative to the wi thdrawal resistance of a base nail. The e
FWI, based on o the fastener geometry, is dependentt on the physiical characterristics of the
fastener pen netrating the fa
astening mem mber for a 1-in n. (25-mm) de epth; howeve er, independent
of the materiial into which the fastener is driven. Th e base nail iss assigned an n FWI equal too
100. It is a helically
h threa
aded, steel, 1..75 to 2.5-in. ((44.5 to 63.5--mm) long, 0.112-in. (2.9-
mm) wire-dia ameter nail with a 0.132-in. (3.34-mm) tthread-crest d diameter, havving a 60-deg
thread angle e, four thread flutes, and 5.25 helixes pe er inch of penetration of the e threaded
shank into th he nailing mem mber. It has a flat, slightlyy countersunkk, 0.28-in. (7.11-mm) diametter
head. It is known as a “1¾ ¾ to 2½ x 112 AA” nail acccording to Pa art 5 of this Sttandard. In
light of this, a fastener witth an FWI equual to 75 provvides 75% of tthe withdrawa al resistance of
the base nail.

39
13

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

(b) The FWWI of the specific nail to be evaluated

e is ba
ased on the in
nformation found in the
relevant Fa
astener Quality
y Assessmentt Worksheet.

WI is computed
(c) The FW d as shown in Part 5 of this Standard. Fo
or the metric equation, see
Part 5.

1.24 (WD) [1 + 27.15 (TD – WD)(H / TL)]

FWI = 221

where:
H = observed number
n of heliixes along thee thread length
h of the nail ha
aving an
average th
hread length and an average e thread-crest diameter
TD = average obbserved threadd-crest diametter, in.
TL = average obbserved threadd length, in.
WD = average obbserved wire diameter,
d meaasured or com puted, in.

(d) This eqquation is valid

d for use with nails
n having a
an effective, coontinuous thread. Since the e
effects of discontinuous
d helical
h threadss on the withd rawal resistannce of bulk and d collated nailss
have not be een fully documented, this equation
e is nott applicable to
o nails with disscontinuous
threads.

(e) Since annularly

a threa
aded nails hav
ve no helical fl utes or helixe s and since bo
oth variable arre
required for input in the computation
c off FWI, it is asssumed that, fo
or computation
n purposes,
hreaded nails have four thre
annularly th ead flutes alon ng their shank and a 60-degg thread angle..

sted square-wiire nails is nee

he wire diametter WD of twis
(f) Since th eded when computing FWI
and since WD
W of twisted square-wire nails
n cannot be
e measured diirectly, it is derived, for
computatioon purposes, in
n accordance with the follow
wing equation:

WD = 0.9 TD
T
where:

TD = measured
m threa
ad-crest diame
eter

(g) Since plain-shank

p na
ails have no th
hreads along thhe nail shank and since the equation for
determining
g FWI requires
s input coverin
ng certain thre
ead characterisstics, the following inputs arre
used:

Thre
ead-crest diam
meter, TD = 0.0 Number of helixxes, H = 0.0
N
Num
mber of thread flutes, F = 0.0 T
Thread length, TL = 0.0

(h) Since staples

s have twwo equal-size legs and sincce the equation n for determining FWI
requires inp
put for the equuivalent of a siingle round-wiire diameter to
o compute thee leg surface
area, the to
otal surface arrea of two stapple legs is com
mputed in acco ordance with th
he following
equations.

s with two roun

For staples nd-wire legs: WD = 2 WD
D of one leg

For staples
s with two flatte
ened-wire legs
s: WD = 2
[1.273 (wid
dth, WW + thic ckness, WT, off one flattened
d leg)]

with
F = 0.0
H = 0.0
TD = 0.0
TL = 1.0

40
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Therefore, for staples with two flattened-wire legs, whe

en using U.S. Customary Units:

FWI = 221 [1.273 (W

WW + WT)]

(i)
( The compu utation of FWI for coated fas
steners is norm mally the same e as that for nooncoated
fasteners,
f sinc
ce the effects of
o coating on their
t withdraw
wal resistance is normally sm maller than tha
at
of
o effectively helically
h and an
nnularly threadded nails. If, o
on the other h
hand, the coate ed fastener
provides
p a 33%
% or higher de elayed withdra
awal resistance e than that of the identical b
bright fastenerr,
when
w driven in
nto green wood and tested after
a its seasonning to 12% mmoisture conte ent, the benefitt of
such
s coating can
c be given consideration
c in the determin nation of FWI..

11.4 Fastener Sh
hear Index

(a) The faste ener shear index FSI value e, based on t he load at 0.0015-in. laterall deformation of
the connectio on, is a meas
sure of the estimated shea r resistance o of a given nail or staple
relative to the shear resistance of the base
b nail desccribed in para
a. 11.3 coveriing FWI. The e
FSI is depen ndent on the wire
w diameterr of the fasten ner and its imp pact shear ressistance, as
expressed by the MIBANT T angle; howe ever, indepen ndent of the m
material into wwhich the
fastener is driven. Thus, the fastener with
w an FSI off 75 providess 75% of the sshear
resistance off the base nail. The base nail with an F FSI equal to 1 00 is a 0.112 2-in. (2.85-mmm)
wire-diamete er hardened-ssteel nail with a MIBANT a ngle of 20 de eg. The base nail with an
FWI of 100 hash an FSI wh hich may rang ge from 55 to 78 for stiff-sttock steel nails with MIBANNT
angles ranging from 28 to o 8 deg.

(b) The FSI of the specific nail to be evaluated is ba

ased on the innformation included in the
uality Analysis
Fastener Qu s worksheet (F Form 1). Forr the SI unit eq
quation, see Part 5 of this
Standard.

(c) The FSI for nails and staples is sho

own in Sectio
on 5 of Part 5..

For round-wire nails: FSI = 263,260 WD1.5 / (3

3M + 40)

d-wire staples: FSI = 263,260 [0.8476 ((WW + WT)]1.5 / (3M + 40)

For flattened

where:

M MIBANT an ngle, deg., ussing the stand

dard 3½-lb (1.588-kg) drop
= weight
W wire diametter, measured d or compute d, in.
D =
W thickness of
o flattened-wiire staple, in.
T =
W width of flatttened-wire sttaple, in.
W=

ail shank reacch into the shank portion w

s along the na
(d) If the threads or flutes which is bent
during the MIBANT
M test, use
u the thread d-root diametter RD instead d of the wire d
diameter WDD in
the equation for round-wirre nails. The thread-root ddiameter can be assumed to be equal to o
the wire diammeter minus the difference between the e thread-root ddiameter and the wire
diameter, or 2WD-TD.

41
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

12 APPLICATION
A N OF FINDINGS

12.1 Determining
g Estimates

Having estab blished the “re

elative” estimates of the faastener withdrrawal index F
FWI and the
fastener shear index FSI values, the es stimates of th
he “actual” pe
erformance vaalues for the
fasteners invvolved can bee determined, based on the e 5% exclusioon level (as sh
hown in para. 6
of Part 5 of this Standard)). These calc culations can be useful in ddetermining p
performance
equivalency for fasteners which fail to meet certain minimum perrformance levvels based on n
FWI and FSII. For SI units s equations, see
s Part 5 of this Standard d.

Fastener Withdrawal
W Re
esistance FW
WRF: FWRF WI (GS2.25) (P
F = 222.2 FW P) / (MC – 3)

Fastener Head
H Pull-Thrrough Resista
ance HPRF:

For Nails: 0 (T) (GD2.25) ((HD2 – WD2) / (MC – 3)

HPRF = 1,250,000

es:
For Staple 0 (T) (GD2.25) ((CL) (WW) / ((MC – 3)
HPRF = 1,594,550

Fastener Shear
S ance FSRF: FSRF = 61..93 FSI (GD) (T) (C) / (MC
Resista C – 3)

where:
C = numberr of fastener couples,
c with single staple
e representing
g one fastener
(see Fig
gure 1 of ASMME MH1.7M) , that is
Fastenerrs per connection
n: 23456
Fastenerr couples per con
nnection: 13456

CL = staple-ccrown length,, in.

D
GD = oven-drry specific gra
avity of fastenned member
GS = oven-drry specific gra
avity of fastenning member
HD = nail-heaad diameter, in.
C
MC = moisturre content durring assemblyy, in percent o of dry weight,, with maximu
um of
28% for green wood d and minimum m 12% for dryy wood
P = penetraation of thread
ded shank po ortion of fastenner into fastening memberr, in.
T = thickness of fastened member, in n., limited to a maximum off 3/4 in. (19 mmm)
in compputation of naail-head pull-th
hrough resistance
WD
D = wire dia
ameter of fasttener, measu red or compu uted, in.
WW
W= flattene
ed staple-wire
e width, meas ured perpend dicular to crow
wn axis, in.

Thus, for a helically

h threaded, hardeneed-steel, 250 x 112AA (2½ ½ x 0.112-in.) n nail with a 20
deg MIBANT T angle and a 99 FSI, driveen through thee side-grain oof a 1¼-in. thiick, dry (12%
MC) hardwood lumber of 0.60 oven-dry specific gra avity, the estim
mated ultimatte resistance tto
single shear forces is deteermined as fo
ollows:

FRSF = 61.93 (99) (0.6

60) (1¼) (12 – 3) = 511 lb

and the design value for normal-duratio

n on loading at 0.015-in. defformation of the connection
n
in the case of
o hardwoods, based on a reduction facctor of seven, is P = 511/7 = 73 lb (see
Stern in para
a. 4 for additio
onal information).

42
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

12.2 Quality Assessment

The influence of the many y independen nt variables onn the quality oof the nails an nd staples use ed
in the assemmbly of pallets and related structures,
s co
omponents off buildings, an nd buildings iss
highly significant on their performance. Therefore, tthe assessme ent of the qua ality of these
fasteners based on the manym parameteers involved ccan be of utmmost importance. This is
particularly th
he case when n it is desirable to use alte rnate, readilyy available fassteners instea ad
of those specified, which meet the requ uirements of tthe governing g specification n. By
introducing minute
m changes in the phys sical and mecchanical prop perties of the ffasteners
involved, thee most effectiv ve and efficient fasteners ccan be selected to meet th he specific
requirements s under given n conditions ofo use of the a assembled strructure. The use of this
procedure ca an result in th
he most comp petitive assem mbly. Therefo ore, observancce of the
statements and
a recomme endations mad de in this prottocol can resu ult in significa
ant benefits.

43
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmand datory Apppendix A6-A

A
Inch Fractions
s and Decim
mal Equiva
alents

Ta
able A6-1
Inch Fractions
F and
a Decima al Equivale
ents
Fra
action, in. Decimall Equivalent, in.
1/16 0
0.0625
1/8 0
0.125
3/16 0
0.1875
1/4 0
0.25
5/16 0
0.3125
3/8 0
0.375
7/16 0
0.4375
1/2 0
0.50
9/16 0
0.5625
5/8 0
0.625
11/16 0
0.6875
3/4 0
0.75
13/16 0
0.8125
7/8 0
0.875
15/16 0
0.9375

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A6-B

Com
mmon Wire
e Gauges for
f Pallet N
Nails and SStaples and
d
Theiir Decimal Equivalen
nts in Inche
es

Taable B6-1
Com
mmon Wire
e Gauges for
f Pallet NNails and S
Staples and
d
Theiir Decimal Equivalen
nts in Inche
es
Wiire Gauge Decimall Equivalent, in.
10 0
0.135
10½ 0
0.128
11 0
0.1205
11½ 0
0.113
12 0
0.1055
12½ 0
0.099
13 0
0.0915
13½ 0
0.086
14 0
0.080
14½ 0
0.076
15 0
0.072
15½ 0
0.067
16 0
0.0625

GENERAL NOTE: Nails and staples made off wire of smaller diameter shall n ot be used for pa allet assembly
because the limited compress sion-perpendicular-to-grain beari ng area of these
e fasteners resultt in the crushing of
the wood fibe
ers under the fasteners; hence, in nd, especially in rotational shear resistance of the
n limited shear an e
connection.

44
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A6-C

Th
he Morgan Impact Be
end-Angle Nail Teste
er, The MIB
BANT Devic
ce or Tool
Modeel TE-154 Morrgan Impact Bend-Angle
B N Tester (M IBANT)1 has been made to
Nail o provide a
more effective and accurate me
ethod for measuring the be end resistance
e angle of naiils and staples.
Besides its rugged, heavy consttruction, other features incclude:

(a) Test
T Reliability
y. Model TE-1 154 MIBANT tester will pro ovide a consisstent measure from test-to
o-
test without
w deviation. This reliaability could not
n be maintaiined by an oill application o or the rusting of
the weight guide (s shaft). At the heart of this reliability is a case-hardenned stainless steel shaft.

(b) Circular
C Level and Leveling Pads. Regardless of the levelness of ttester environ
nment, the
testerr can be leveled by its builtt-in circular level and leveliing pads.

(c) Capability of te
esting staples and lighter nails has been
n added.

(d) Easy
E Operation
n. Easy set-u
up and testing
g.

54 Tester Characteristics
TE-15 s

(a) Size: 8 in. x 12

2 in. x 22 in. high
h (20.32 cmm x 30.48 cm m x 55.88 cm high)
(b) Weight:
W 56.9 lb (25.81 kg)
(c) Drop Height: 121 in. (30.48 cm)
c
(d) Angle
A of fasten
ner while in sppecimen holder: 10 deg frrom horizonta al
(e) Fastener protruusion while inn specimen ho older: 0.468 (15/32) in.
(f) Kinetic
K energy at point of im
mpact: 0.755 lb (0.96 joulles)
2 lb (2.57 joules))
3.5 lb (4.52 joule
es)

Up Instruction
Set-U ns

CAUTION: The TE-154 tester is a hea

avy unit for its size.
s Place testter on movable cart when going
g from one
locatio
on to another.

Step 1. Place the tester

t on a table or workbeench in the arrea where the
e tests will be made. Table
e
needs to be
b level. (Note e: The following numbers in parenthese es are referen nce number a
as
noted in Fiigure C6-1).

2 To level the tester, loos

Step 2. sen nuts (17) ofo the leveling
g pads (15) a
and observe th he circular levvel
n threaded portion of levelin
(14). Turn ng pad by usiing 1/4 in. hexx socket on a
all four leveling
pads until bubble is perrfectly centere
ed. Then tighhten each leveeling pad nut (17)
accordingly.

Step 3.
3 The dropw weight (1), (2),, or (3) and gu
uide shaft (6)) must be “dusst-free” clean. The
application
n of oil or grea
ase to the guide shaft (6) iss discouraged d.

_____
___
1
The MIBANT
M Model TE-154
T is availab
ble from Bentech, Roanoke, VA 2
24017.

45
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure C6-1
The TE-15
54 MIBANT T Tester

46
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Testting Methods for TE-1

154 MIBAN
NT
The original
o MIBAN NT tester has s been primarily used for quuality control of various pa
allet nails. In
the pa
allet industry, the “bend an ngle” is based on the 3.5 lb
b (1.588 kg) wweight. If the 2 lb (0.907 kg g)
weighht is used for testing,
t the re
esultant meann angle should d be multiplie
ed by 1.75. If the 0.75 lb
(0.340
0 kg) weight is used, the re esultant meann angle shoul d be multiplieed by 4.70.

When n testing smaller or softer nails

n and stapples and a heaavy dropweig ght bends the specimen pa ast
a reas
sonable angle e (46 deg), a lighter dropwweight should be used. Alw ways record th he dropweigh ht
[3.50 lb (1.588 kg),, 2 lb (0.907 kg),
k or 0.75 lb b (0.340 kg)] w
with the resultting angle and indicate
whethher it is “as measured” or iss multiplied by
y the 1.75 or 4.70 constannts. Random samples of 25
of eac
ch fastener sh hould be testeed. The number of partial or complete h head and sha ank failures
should be observed and recorde ed.

The MIBANT
M devic
ce was design ned for testing h standard heads. When
g pallet nails provided with
testing wires, headdless nails, an
nd staples, ceertain factors m
may be introd
duced under ggiven
condittions, which may
m influence e the test data
a. This has too be given consideration w
when evaluatin
ng
the te
est data.

ng Instructio
Testin ons

Step 1. There arre three weigh hts used with the tester; 0..75 lb (0.304 kg) weight (1); 2 lb (0.907
kg) weight (2); 3.5 lb (1.588 kg) weeight (3). Sele weight for the application.
ect the dropw

Step 2.
2 Change dropweight (1), (2), or (3) by removing weight catch assembly (4)) by moving
ch (18) outwa
shaft latc ard and lifting from the drop
pweight guide
e (6).

Step 3.
3 Place the selected we
eight (1), (2), or (3) onto th
he dropweightt guide.

Step 4.
4 Replace weight catch
h assembly (4
4) onto dropwe
eight guide (6
6).

Step 5.
5 Ready th
he selected weight
w g the weight up the dropw
in posittion by moving weight guide a
and
engaging
g dropweight catch (5).

Step 6.
6 At the prrotractor plate
e (7), move th
he indicator ha
andle (8) to th
he most uprig
ght position.

Step 7. Open sp pecimen holde er (9) by turning clamp scre

rew (10). Placce nail in crevvice or both
staple le
egs horizontally with both le
egs evenly sppaced from crrevice betwee en the clampinng
plates off the specime
en holder, pos sitioning head
d or crown of ffastener against clamp
gauge (111) and then tightening
t cla
amp screw (10 0). See Figurre C6-2.

WARNING: Move e the clamp gauge

g to the Down positiion, keeping it out of the path of the
g dropweigh
falling ht.

Step 8.
8 Move the andle (8) down and let the gauge pin (12
e indicator ha 2) rest againsst the bottom
side of specimen.
s Lo
oosen thumb screw
s (13) an
nd move protrractor plate (7
7) to align ma
ark
or indicaator handle with 0º line on protractor
p pla
ate, as shown in Figure C6-3. Lock
protractoor plate (7) in place by tightening thumbb screw (13) a
and return inddicator handle
e
(8) to top
p position and d the gauge pin
p (12) down .

47
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure C6-2
Step 7

Figure C6-3
Step 8

48
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Step 9.
9 Keeping your free hannd out of the way, release selected dropweight by prressing weigh
ht
release knob
k (5). Afte
er the weight drops, relatc h dropweightt to the top.

Step 10. To deterrmine the testt results, move indicator haandle (8) dow
wn to let gauge e pin (12) resst
against bent
b specime en. (Do not manipulate
m the
e MIBANT tesst data by pusshing the gaug ge
pin with any force aga ainst the bentt specimen.) Read the tesst result at the
e position of th
he
indicatorr handle (8), and
a record it. Move indica ator handle (8) to the most upright
position. Open clamp p and remove e bent specim
men. Continue e testing with Step 7.

Step 11. Read an

nd record the MIBANT angle to the nearrest degree of the protracto
or scale (or to
o
one-half degree if the
e indicator is midway
m betwe
een the degre
ee marks).

Step 12. Use the mean test va

alue for all tested specimen
ns which did n not break as tthe
represen
ntative MIBAN
NT test value (not he indiviidual test valu
ues). Also reccord any parttial
or complete head/sha
ank failures ob bserved.

ollowing is a basic
The fo b list of pa
arts by functio
on based on tthe numerical listing, as re
eferenced in
Figure
e C6-1.

Numbber Part Name oro Descriptio on

1 0.75 lb (0.34
40 kg) weight
2 2 lb (0.907 kg)
k weight
3 3.5 lb (1.588
8 kg) weight
4 Weight catchh assembly
5 Shaft latch
6 Drop weight guide
7 Protractor plate
8 ndle
Indicator han
9 Specimen ho older
10 Clamp screw w
11 Clamp gauge e
12 Gauge pin
13 Thumb screw w
14 Bubble level
15 Leveling padds
16 Bumpers
17 Leveling padd nut
18 Shaft hatch

49
14

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A6-D

ment of Thrread-Crest Diameter for Helicallly Threade
Measurem ed Nails

Figure D6-1
Me
easuremennt of Threa
ad Crest Diiameter forr Helically
Threa
aded Nails – Correct MMeasurem ment

Figure D6-2
Measurrement of Thread
T Cre
est Diametter for Helically Threa
aded
Nails – Incoorrect Meassurement

50
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 7
Testing
g for Pallets and Rela
ated Structtures
1 SCOPE

(a) Numerous tech hniques of tes sting pallets have

h been pro oposed and p published. Thiis part does nnot
mpt to rewrite these
attem t procedu ures, but to urge all palletss to be perform mance evalua ated.
Laborratory evaluattion of pallet performance
p is encouraged d for pallets o
of all material types.
Approopriate in-serv
vice testing unnder actual-use conditionss may be requ uired for final evaluation off
labora
atory-tested pallets.
p

(b) Only
O those pro
ocedures shou uld be used th
hat are consid
dered approp priate in a give
en instance o
of
use should be inveestigated. In many
m instanc
ces, only two o
or three typess of tests mayy have to be
perforrmed, whereaas, in other ins
stances moree tests need to
o be given coonsideration. For potentiall
uses of these desccribed test proocedures, refe
er to Nonmanndatory Appen ndix A7-A.

(c) Thhe performan nce of pallets under anticipated field con

nditions shoulld be the sole e criterion for
the se
election of the
e test proceduures to be useed. Each testt procedure ssimulates exposures during g
whichh certain stres
sses imposed by given exte ernal forces a
are applied. T These forces result from
propeer use, abuse,, handling, tra
ansportation, storage, and other hazard ds to which paallets are
subjected. A given n test proceduure may simulate only one e, or at best, a few of such hazards that
contribute to the fo
orces to be withstood by paallets without excessive de eterioration.

(d) The testing of a single palle

et per test doe e satisfactory qualitative infformation for
es not provide
most use conditionns encountere ed. The requiired number o of test replica
ations varies w
with the use
underr consideratio
on. However, a minimum of o three palletts should be ssubjected to eeach type of
test to
o be performe
ed to assure some
s degree of confidence e in the test re
esults.

(e) For uniformity of evaluation, it is suggestted that the de

etailed proced dures be follo
owed in the
testing of pallets as
s long as therre is no urgen
nt reason to d
deviate from th hem. If such a reason
should exist, the reeasoning shou uld be include
ed in the repoort in which th
he findings are
e presented.

(f) It is
i difficult to determine
d how
w much or ho ow little deterio
oration can be allowed beffore a pallet
should be required d or discarded
d. Such criterria have to be e established by the pallet user. No
consid deration is givven to these criteria
c in the test procedurres describedd.

2 PURPOSE

(a) The main objective of Part 7 is to provide

e pallet manu facturers and
d users with a list of possib
ble
test procedures to determine annticipated perfformance of p
pallets when used in indusstry, transportt,
and service.

(b) Performance criteria

c are listted in severall test methodss and are reccommended; h however,
perforrmance criteria should be established
e by
b the pallet u sers to meet their particula
ar
requirrements.

51
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

3 NORMATIVE
N REFERENCE
R ES

ASTMM D 1185, Tes

st Methods fo
or Pallets and Related Stru
uctures Emplo
oyed in Materrials Handling
g
and Shipping
S

ISO 8611-1,
8 General-Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Tra
ansit of Good
ds – Test Meth
hods
ISO 8611-2,
8 General Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Traansit of Good
ds – Performa
ance
requirrements and selection
s of te
ests
ISO 8611-3,
8 General-Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Tra
ansit of Good
ds – Maximumm Working Load

4 PALLET CONDITIONING

(a) Special conditioning is not always

a require
ed. Howeverr, the physical characteristics and
perforrmance of pallets can vary y greatly depeending not onlly on ambientt temperature e and relative
humiddity at time of test, but also
o on the conditions at time of manufactu ure as well ass on interim
storag
ge conditions and length of time in stora age. These in nfluencing facctors can be p particularly
imporrtant if the ma
aterials of whicch the pallets
s are made arre hygroscopiic in nature ass well as in th he
instan
nce of lumberr which may haveh been gre een or partiall y of fully seassoned during assembly. In n
addition, most palleets are placed d into service
e shortly after being manufa factured and, thus, are
subjected to loadinng, vibration, shock,
s and haazards of usee while at or cclose to the initial moisture
content of the com mponents prev vailing at the time
t of manuffacture.

Conse equently, it may

m be prefera able to evaluaate pallets shoortly after havving been manufactured,
foregooing conditionning to simula
ate potential actual
a field co
onditions. On the other han nd, conditioning
prior to
t testing may y be necessary to simulate e effects resu lting from exp posure to high
h or low or bo
oth
levels
s of temperatu ure as well as
s high or low or
o both levelss of humidity d during actual use.

(b) Where
W pallet re
euse is a facttor and, espec ectancy is anticipated, it ma
cially, where llong life expe ay
be advisable to exp pose pallets to
t prescribed conditions fo or periods of tiime up to sevveral weeks
prior to
t testing. In the instance of pallets inco orporating ma aterials highlyy susceptible to moisture
condittions and cha anges in mois sture content, proper condi tioning prior tto testing as w
well as during g
testing in a controlled atmosphe ere may be a mandatory re equirement. F For wooden p pallets, 5 to 8--
week storage of the pallets in 50 0% relative humidity and 770ºF (57ºC) te emperature mmay be
sufficiient to result in
i such conditions as are often
o encounttered in wareh houses.

ack of any pre

(c) La econditioning, chosen prec conditioning, o or exposure tto given cyclicc laboratory
preco
onditioning sho
ould be reporrted on in deta
ail in the test report.

5 DYNAMIC
D (RE T IMPACT) TESTS
ESISTANCE TO

5.1 DROP TEST

TS

The drop tes

sts simulate stresses and strains
s impose ed by droppinng pallets durring handling.
Such droppin
ng may occurr during unsticcking of palle ts and during
g removal of p
pallets with
handling and
d lifting equipm
ment. This dropping may occur with bo oth loaded and unloaded
pallets.

(a) Three ba asic types of tests

t fall in this category: (1) corner dro
op of verticallyy suspended
pallet; (2) ed
dge drop of slightly inclined d suspended pallet; and (33) corner dropp of more or
less horizonttally suspended loaded pa allet.

52
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

(b) The palle et is dropped from a given height. Therrefore, the paallet weight is of significant
influence on the test data. To eliminate such a test parameter, a given weigh ht could be
dropped on a pallet from a given heigh ht. No standaard procedurees of testing ccomplete
pallets, baseed on the latte
er principle, ha
ave been advvanced to datte. On the oth her hand,
procedures for
f testing palllet sections, based
b on the dropping of a given weigh ht onto the
pallet section
n from predettermined heig ghts, have beeen developedd. These proccedures are
covered in Nonmandatory
N y Appendix A7 7-B.

5.2 INCLINE IMPACT TESTS

S

The purposee of these testts is to simula

ate the stresse
es imposed b es applied to
by lateral force
various parts
s of the pallet. These stressses occur att certain stage
es of the palleet handling
cycle such as:

(a) sudden acceleration

a and
a decelerattion of transpo ortation vehiccles (switching
g rail cars);
(b) fork heel impact when n forklift truck-fork heels sttrike the leading-edge deckkboard upon
termination of
o fork entry;
(c) fork impaact when misa aligned forks strike the corrner posts or stringers upo on pallet entryy;
(d) fork toe pressure whe en the pallet iss turned on itss axis by a fo
ork pushing ag gainst the palllet
corners (sluing).

A supplemen ntary test is th

he lateral colla
apse test whiich determine
es the resistan
nce of the
loaded pallett to forces applied perpend dicular to the deckboard ennds.

6 LOAD CAPAC
CITY TESTS

Load tests simulate e stresses an nd strains imp posed by verti cal line load(ss) or patch lo
oad(s), or a
uniforrmly distribute
ed load placed d on the palleets. These loa ads occur during use of the loaded
pallets, in stacking, lifting, and handling
h operrations. The l oad capacity can be stated in three
separrate parts. Static load capa acity refers to
o the capacityy when floor sstacked in a w warehouse,
dynammic load capa acity during a lifting or hand dling operatio
on such as forrklift handling, and racking
load capacity
c durin
ng warehouse e racking.

Four basic
b tests fall under this category:
c
(a) pa
allet stiffness and flexural strength
s test;
(b) de
eckboard stifffness and flex xural strength
h test;
(c) co
ombined deck kboard, stringger, and pallett stiffness and
d flexural stre
ength test; and
d
(d) pa
allet compres ssion test.

A fifth
h test is applic
cable only to loaded wing pallets
p ned to be handled with sling bars placed
design d
underr the top deck kboard wings.

7 VIBRATION
V TEST
T

(a) The vibration te

est simulates posed by vert ical and latera
s stresses imp al vibratory m
motions to whiich
the loaded pallet may
m be exposed. These motions
m to whicch the loaded d pallet may b
be exposed.
These e motions maay occur durin
ng handling an
nd transportattion of the loa
aded pallet.

(b) The test pallet is loaded with a specified load or a sim of the same or approximate
mulated load o ely
ame density as
the sa a that norma ally placed on the pallet.

53
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

(c) Thhe load is sec cured to the to

op deck of the e pallet. The loaded pallett is placed on n the table of
the vibration machine without be eing fastened d thereto. Ga ates are used to prevent exxcessive laterral
movement of the lo oaded pallet on
o the table. The pallet is tested in two o positions. First, the pallett
ced on the table of the vibrration machin
is plac ne so that the horizontal co omponent of tthe vibratory
motion is parallel too the fore-andd-aft axis of th
he pallet wheen it is in its noormal position
n in the type oof
vehiclle in which it would
w normallly be transpo orted. Second d, the pallet iss turned 90 deeg with respeect
to the
e direction of horizontal
h mootion of the tabble of the vibrration machin ne.

(d) The frequency y and amplitud de of the vibraations and the e duration of tthe tests shalll be as
presccribed in the users’ criteria for the test pa
allet, except tthat the tests shall be term
minated if palle
et
failure
e occurs priorr to the speciffied time. Tessting at reson
nant frequencyy can accelerrate failure of
the paallet.

54
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A7-A

Pottential Use
es of Descrribed Tests
s
Tablee A7-1 represeents the Commmittee’s sugg gested guide as to the appplicability of th
he test
proceedures towardds evaluating pallets constrructed of diffe
erent materialls. For examp ple, little valid
d
data can
c be obtained by corner--dropping a very lightweigh ht pallet. The user of Part 7 should be the
ultima
ate judge of a given test’s applicability
a to
o his own nee
eds.

Ta
able A7-1
Test Wood Wood Pape
er Press
Reusable
R Single
S use Panel Pllastic base
e Metal wood
Drop Tests
Corner drrop (vertical) 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
Edge drop (almost vertic cal) 1 2 2 1 2 1 1
Corner drrop (horizontal,, loaded) 1 2 2 1 2 1 2

Incline-Impact Tests
Pallet botttom (loaded) 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Pallet top
p (loaded) 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Stringer or
o block (loadedd) 1 2 2 1 2 1 1
Pallet distortion 1 2 1 1 1 1 2
Deck-strinnger separation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Vibration Test (Loaded) 2 2 1 1 1 1 2

Static Tests s
Pallet stifffness 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Deck stifffness 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Combined stiffness, stre
ength 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Compression 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

Impact Tessts on Pallet Se

ections
Separatio
on 1 1 1 3 3 3 3
Torsion 1 1 3 3 3 3 3

GENER RAL NOTE: Classification

1 = meaningful, dependding on intended use
2 = of questionable
q app
plicability, requirin
ng careful interprretation of resultss
3 = of questionable
q valu
ue, if applicable

55
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen ndix A7-B

Selected
d Standards, Specific
cations, Arrticles,
an
nd Reports
s Reference ed in Text
ollowing docu
The fo uments were reviewed
r in during the pre paration of Pa
art 7:

ASTMM D 880, Meth e Impact Test for Shipping Containers

hod of Incline
ASTMM D 1185, Tes or Pallets and Related Stru
st Methods fo uctures Emplo
oyed in Materrials Handling
g
and Shipping
S
ASTMM F 680, Testt Methods for Nails
ASTMM F 1575, Tesst Methods foor Determiningg Bending Yieeld Moment o
of Nails
Publis
sher: American Society for Testing andd Materials (A
ASTM), 200 Baarr Harbor Drrive, West
Conshhohocken, PAA 19428-2959 9

ISO 445,
4 Pallets fo
or Materials Handling
H – Voccabulary
ISO 6780,
6 General-Purpose Fla at Pallets for Through
T Trannsit of Goods – Principal Dimensions annd
Toleraances
ISO 8611-1,
8 General-Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Tra ansit of Good
ds – Test Methhods
ISO 12771, Method ds of Test forr Pallet Joints, Part 1 – Dettermination of Bending Reesistance of
Pallett Nails, Staple
es, and Otherr Dowel-Type Fasteners
ISO 12777-2, Meth hods of Test for
f Pallet Join nts – Part 2: D
Determinationn of Withdrawaal and Head
Through Resis
Pull-T stance of Palllet Nails and Staples
ISO 8611-2,
8 General Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Tra ansit of Goodds – Design RRating and
Maximmum Working g Load
ISO 8611-3,
8 General-Purpose Flat
F Pallets for Through Tra ansit of Good
ds – Performaance
Requirements

orm Standard
Unifo d for Wood Pallets
P (2012))
Publis
sher: Nationa
al Wooden Paallet and Conttainer Associa
ation (NWPC
CA), 1421 Prin
nce Street,
Suite 340, Alexand
dria, VA 22314-2805

Recommended Hardwood Pallet Specifica ations for the

e Grocery Industry
sher: Grocery
Publis y Manufacturers of Americ
ca (GMA), 24001 Pennsylva
ania Avenue, NW, 2nd Floo
or,
Washhington, DC 20037

onal Design Specification

Natio S n for Wood Construction
C
Comm mentary on the
t National Design Spec cification forr Wood Cons struction
Publis
sher: American Forest and
d Paper Asso
ociation (AF&P PA), 1111 Nin
neteenth Stre
eet, NW, Suite
e
800, Washington,
W DC
D 20036

Federral Test Meth

hods Standard No. 101b, Method 5005 5, Cornerwise e-Drop (Rotattional) Test
Federral Test Meth
hods Standard No. 101b, Method 5008 8, Edgewise-Drop (Rotatio onal) Test
Federral Test Meth
hods Standard No. 101b, Method 5011 1, Mechanica al Handling Te
est
Federral Test Meth
hods Standard No. 101b, Method 5016 6, Superimpo osed-Load Test (Stackabilitty
with Dunnage)
D
Federral Test Meth
hods Standard No. 101b, Method 5019 9, Vibration (R
Repetitive Sh
hock) Test
NATO O Document – STANAG No. N 2828, Staandardization Agreement; S Subject: Milittary Pallets,
Packaages and Conntainers
Publis
sher: Superin
ntendent of Documents, U..S. Governmeent Printing O
Office, Washin
ngton, DC
204022-9325

GENER
RAL NOTE: Tec d.vt.edu.
chnical reports on pallet testing are available at www.unitload

56
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 8
Sllip Sheets
1 SCOPE

Part 8 is applicablee to the assemmbling, handling, storing, aand transportiing of products and goods in
unit lo
oad form, withh a unit, place
ed on a slip sh
heet, being a collection of one or more pieces of a
produuct whose mass or weight is i too great foor a single pe rson to handlle without usin
ng a
mechanical device e. Part 8 defin
nes terms, sizzes, materialss, testing, and
d specific characteristics
relevaant to slip she
eets and the appropriate
a ty
ype and opera ation of materrial handling e
equipment.

The system
s of slip sheet unit loa
ad handling in
nvolves the usse of a thin s heet of materrial, the slip
sheett, as a base on which items s are assembbled as a unit load for hand dling, storage, and transpo ort.
Palletts provide a unique approa ach to a material handling b
base. Slip sh heeting providdes another
technique for assembling, handling, storing, and shipping of goods in u unit load form.

The slip
s sheet is us sed in conjunction with a pallet,
p ed, at certain stages in the
if desire e distribution
cycle.. If all lift trucks in the cycle are equippe ed with the prroper attachm ment, an appro opriate slip
sheett is the only material
m handliing base requ uired. Unit loaads on slip shheets are lifted and stacked
depennding on the strength
s of the
e unit load paackaging, and d then retrieve
ed and handle ed singularly.
The stacking
s heighht can be as high
h as five un
nit loads.

nally develope
Origin ed in the United States, the
e use of slip ssheets has sp
pread to otherr countries. Itt
provid
des an inexpeensive and lightweight unit load base tha at occupies liittle shipping cube and is
more easily dispossed of than co
onventional paallets. If both
h the shipper aand receiver have the
opriate equipm
appro ment, and other basic requuirements are met, the ben nefits of unitizeed load
handling can be re
ealized.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Pa
art 8 is to provvide a basis fo
or understand
ding, evaluatin
ng, and seleccting slip shee
ets
and choosing
c the correct
c unit load handling equipment.
e

3 REFERENCED
R D STANDARDS

ollowing is a list of publicattions referenc

The fo ced in this Sta
andard, show
wing the year o
of approval.

ASTMM D 1083 – 19 988, Methodss of Testing th

he Mechanica al Handling off Unitized Loa
ads and Large
e
Shipp
ping Cases an nd Crates, Se
ection 9.4.2, “S
Slip Sheet Ta
ab Clamp and d Pull”
ASTMM D 1185 – 19 994, Methodss of Testing Pallets
P and Re
elated Structu
ures Employed in Materialss
Handling and Shipping
ASTMM D 4727 – 19 996, Standardd Specificatio
on for Corrugaated and Solid
d Fiberboard Sheet Stock
(conta
ainer grade) and
a Cut Shap pes
ASTMM D 6055 – 19 996, Standardd Test Method ds for Mecha ng of Unitized Loads and
anical Handlin
Large
e Shipping Caases and Crattes
Publis
sher: American Society for Testing and d Materials (A
ASTM), 200 Ba arr Harbor Drrive, West
Conshhohocken, PA A 19428-29599

ISO 178 – 1993, Plastics

P – Dete
ermination of Flexural Propperties
ISO 534
5 – 1988, Paper
P and Boaard – Determiination of Thicckness and BBulk Density o
or Apparent
Sheett Density
ISO 1924-1 – 19922, Paper and Board – Deteermination of T Tensile Propeerties
ISO 2493
2 – 1992, Paper and Booard – Determ
mination of Re esistance to B
Bending

57
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ISO 2759
2 – 1983, Board – Dete ermination of Bursting
B Stre ngth
ISO 3034
3 – 1975, Corrugated Fiberboard
F – Determination
D n of Thicknesss
ISO 3268
3 – 1978, Plastics – Glaass – Reinforcced Materialss – Determina ation of Tensile Properties
ISO 3676
3 – 1983, Unit Load Sizzes – Dimensions
ISO 5629
5 – 1983, Paper and Bo oard – Determ mination of Be ess – Resonance Method
ending Stiffne
ISO 5638
5 – 1978, Solid Fiberbooard – Determ mination of Grrammage of S Single Layers
ISO 6780
6 – 1994, General Purp pose Flat Palleets for Througgh Transit of Goods – Prinncipal
Dimennsions and To olerances
ISO 8611
8 – 1992, General Purp pose Flat Palleets for Througgh Transit of Goods – Tesst Methods
ISO/T
TR 527 – 1966 6, Plastics – Determination
D n of Tensile P
Properties
ISO/T
TR 10232 – 19 992, General Purpose Flatt Pallets for T Through Transsit of Goods – Design Rating
and Maximum
M Worrking Load
ISO/T
TR 10233 – 19 992, General Purpose Flatt Pallets for T Through Transsit of Goods – Performancce
Requirements
TR 10234 – 19
ISO/T 990, General Purpose Flatt Pallets for T Through Transsit of Goods – Phytosanita ary
(Plantt Health) Requirements forr Wooden Pallets
ISO/T
TR 12776 – 19 995, Slip Sheeets
Publis
sher: Internattional Organizzation for Sta
andardization (ISO), 1 rue dde Varembé, Case Postale e
56, CH-1121, Genève 20, Switz zerland/Suisse e

4 – 1988, Tensile Breaking Properties off Paper and P

T 494 Paperboard
Publis
sher: Technic cal Associatio
on of the Pulp
p and Paper In
ndustry (TAPPI), Technolo
ogy Park /
Atlantta, P.O. Box 105113,
1 Atlannta, GA 303488-5113

4 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

Definiitions and term

minology whic
ch are include
ed in Part 1 o
of this Standard apply to Pa
art 8.
Additional items arre given below
w.

4.1 Slip Sheet

slip sheet: a flat sheet of material with a tab on one

e or more side
es, used as a base for
assembling, handling, sto oring, and tran
nsporting gooods and produucts in unit loa
ad form. Slip
elated to palle
sheets are re ets and can be
b used in connjunction with
h pallets or haandled
separately.

able slip sheet: a sheet inttended to be d

expenda discarded afte
er a single cyycle of use.

ble slip sheet: sheet materrial which can be reprocesssed.

recyclab

e slip sheet: a sheet intend

reusable ded for multip
ple cycles of u
use.

score line: ana impression aterial that is provided to lo

n or crease in slip sheet ma ocate and
facilitate fold
ding to create a tab.

ad surface: th
slip sheet loa hat portion off the slip shee
et under the uunit load of go
oods or
products. Th he surface caan be solid or provided with h ventilation h
holes of approopriate size,
configurationn, and location.

bs: those parrts of the slip sheet that exxtend beyond the unit load dimensions tto
slip sheet tab
facilitate matterial handling
g by a pulling device equippped with a grripper jaw. In
n some locale
es,
the terms lip or flap are ussed to designnate the slip s heet tab.

58
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

double thickn
ness tab: a ta
ab having twice the thickneess of the flatt sheet, forme
ed by folding
excess sheeet material 180
0 deg to allow
w a portion of it to be under the unit load
d. The tab caan
be secured in place by fas
stening materials.

laminated tab: a tab whose thickness is increased by fastening p paper, plasticc, fabric, or
similar material to the tab and sheet load surface, a allowing a porrtion of it to be
e under the un
nit
load. Norma ally, the width of the extra material
m is tw
wice the tab wiidth.

4.2 Push Pull

push pull: a generic term for a mechan nically/hydrau

ulically powerred attachmen
nt on an
industrial truck to retrieve or discharge a slip sheet unit load.

gripper jaw: the hydrauliccally powered d mechanical assembly of a push pull atttachment tha at
ab of the slip sheet uniform
clamps the ta mly along the tab length to pull the unit load onto the
load plate du
uring load retrrieval. The ja
aw’s clamp is opened durinng unit load discharge.

heet retainer: a modified gripper jaw wh

slip sh hich disconnects form the ppusher rack b
but
retains
s its clamping
g hold on the slip
s sheet and d allows the u
unit load to be
e discharged
from th
he slip sheet and load plate by the push
her rack.

load plate: a rigid metal component,

c usually of stee
el, of the push
h pull that sup
pports a slip
sheet unit loa
ad. Normally y, the plate is finished smooothly and hass a chisel tip a
and a taperedd
configurationn to its mounting point.

adjustaable load platte: a load plaate with platenns which can be moved tog gether or apa
art
in the same horizon ntal plane to change
c the ovverall width off the load platte. This load
plate allows
a insertio
on of the plate
ens and hand dling of compa atible pallet sizes.

ndustry forks: a substitute for a load pla

food in ate, consistingg of four or six tapered andd
polishe
ed tines, equaally spaced la
aterally in the same horizon ntal plane, annd permitting
handlin
ng of slip she
eet unit loads and compatib ble pallet size
es.

platens: two or more componen

nt assemblies with open sp
pace between
n them,
comprrising of load plate.
p

hift load plate

side sh e: a load platee which move es independently of the pusher rack, witth
or with
hout its unit lo
oad, in a latera
al direction to
o the longitudiinal axis of the lift truck.

d load plate: a load plate consisting

slotted c platens in the same
of ttwo or more p
horizontal plane, sppaced apart to
o allow a void
d between the e platens. This load plate
allows insertion of the
t platens intto pallet opennings and hanndling of compatible pallet
sizes.

pusher rack:: a vertical mechanical ass e push pull, moveable forw

sembly of the ward and
backward, providing the means
m and force to discha rge or retrieve e a slip sheett unit load. Th
he
rack can be extended bey yond the tip of
o the load pla
ate or fully retrracted.

59
15

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ate: term for pusher rack.

facepla

stop pusher ra
multi-s ack: a pusher rack with on
ne or more re tracting stop positions,
betwee en fully exten
nded and retra
acted position
ns, to accomm
modate differe ent lengths off
slip sh
heet unit loadss.

4.3 Slip Sheet Dispenser

D

slip sheet dis

spenser: a po owered mech hanical device
e, holding multiple slip sheets, which
automaticallyy discharges one sheet at a time to form
m the base too accommoda ate a unit load
d of
goods or prooducts. The dispenser
d is normally
n usedd in conjunctio
on with an auttomatic or
semi-automa atic product unitizer.

4.4 Slip Sheet Caliper

C

slip sheet ca
aliper: the me
easured thickn
ness of slip sh
heet material. Caliper is frrequently
expressed as a decimal.

4.5 Slip Sheet Tensile

T Stren
ngth

slip sheet ten

nsile strength
h: the resistan
nce to tearing
g of a slip she
eet subject to an applied
pulling force.

5 MATERIALS
M

5.1 Typical Materials

Typical mate
erials used forr the manufac
cture of slip sh
heets are tho
ose described
d below.

5.1.1 Corrugate ed fiberboard d

Corrugated d fiberboard is a board with paperboard d facings bond ded to a fluted or corrugate ed
medium prroviding adeq quate tensile strength.
s Thee board is ofteen referred to o in terms of
flute size and
a board tes st or basis weight and tens ile strength. For slip sheet applicationss,
corrugated d fiberboard shall
s be speciffied using ten
nsile strength (see Part 8, p para. 7). To
obtain ade equate performmance where e high moisturre conditions exist, the flute es and
paperboarrd facings, imp pregnated or coated with a water-repelllent material, shall be
bonded to each other using a weathe er-resistant (ssee ASTM D 4727 – 1996)) adhesive. Iff
equired, nylon string can be
additional strength is re e incorporated d into the slip
p sheet duringg
its manufaacture, with the nylon string
g oriented in tthe pulling dirrection of the slip sheet.

5.1.2 Solid fiberboard

board is defin
Solid fiberb ned as plies of
o paperboard laminated to ogether to provide adequatte
tensile stre
ength for slip sheet requireements. Calip per is expresssed in points, where 1 poin
nt
= 0.001 in.. (0.025 mm). To obtain ad dequate perfoormance whe ere high moistture condition
ns
exist, the plies
p of the slip sheet, imprregnated or cooated with a w
water-repellent material,
shall be boonded to each h other using a moisture-reesistant adhesive.

5.1.3 Plastics
Plastics arre any kind orr combination of polymerize ed materials in sheet form
m, including bu
ut
not limited to polyethyle
ene or polyproopylene, that provides ade equate tensile strength andd
other requirements of th he slip sheet. Caliper is exxpressed in m
mils, where 1 mil = 0.001 in
n.
(0.025 mm m).

60
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.2 Other Materrials

Such materia en fabric with a laminated ttab or paper o

als as a wove overlayed ven
neer, for
example, can be used pro ovided tensilee strength and
d caliper requ
uirements are met. Sheet
metal shall not
n be used fo or slip sheets..

6 DIMENSIONS
D

6.1 Base Size

The load surrface size of a slip sheet, which

w exclude
es tab(s), shall approximatee the plan vieew
(footprint) dim
mensions of the
t unit loads. The longer of the two dim mensions sha all be the leng
gth
and the shorrter of the twoo dimensions, excluding ta b(s), shall be the width. The length sha all
at least equaal the unit load
d length dimeension and maay exceed the e load length by a maximu um
of 2 in. (50 mm).
m The widdth shall not be
b more than 2 in. (50 mm)) smaller thann the load wid dth
nor more tha an 1 in. (25 mm) greater than the load wwidth.

6.2 Unit Load Size

S

Reference iss made to ISOO 6780, ISO 3676,

3 and Parrt 2 of ASME MH1 for guid
dance in
selecting the
e appropriate load surface dimensions.

6.3 Tab Width

um of 3 in. (7 5 mm) and a maximum of 4⅛ in. (105

The width off the tabs shall be a minimu
mm). A shorter width makes the sheett difficult for th
he operator to
o see and gra
ab.

6.4 Overall Size

e

ation of the ba
The combina ase and tab dimensions
d de
etermines the
e full slip shee
et size.

6.5 Tolerances

The overall size

s of the slip
p sheet shall be within ±9/3
32 in. or ±0.2 503 in. (±7 m
mm) of the
dimensions specified
s by the user.

6.6 Slip Sheet Thickness

T

The minimum
m caliper of th mon materialss used for slip
he three comm p sheets shalll be as follow
ws.

6.6.1 Corrugate ed fiberboard

d
0.118 in. (3
3.0 mm); morre for double-wall and triple
e-wall corruga
ated fiberboard

6.6.2 Solid fiberboard

0.039 in. (1.0 mm)

6.6.3 Plastics
0.039 in. (1.0 mm)

61
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7 PERFORMAN
NCE REQUIRE
EMENTS

7.1 Tensile Stre

ength

Tensile stren
ngth is the maaximum pullin ng strength deeveloped prior to failure of the slip sheet.
For a particu
ular unit load, the slip shee
et shall possesss sufficient ttensile strengtth to avoid
rupture whenn the tab is prroperly pulled
d by the grippeer jaw and the e unit load is in place.

7.1.1 Tensile sttrength guide elines

Tensile strrength cannott be considereed a performaance determin nant by itself. Other factorrs
such as sccoring, stiffnes
ss, moisture, and sheet co
onstruction intterrelate and affect slip
sheet perfo ormance. In general, higher tensile stre
engths are required for hea avier unit load
ds
or loads suubjected to re
epeated handling by push p pull equipmen nt.

7.1.2 Tensile sttrength value

es
Dependingg on the type of paperboarrd used, the te
ensile strengtth values shall range as
shown in Part
P 8, Table 1, when teste ed according tto the constant rate of elonngation metho
od
(see TAPPPI T 494 and ISO
I 1924).

Table
T 8-1
Range of Ten
nsile Strength Values
s

Type of Pape
erboard Grain Direction of P
Paperboard

Machine
M Crosss
Corrug
gated fiberboarrd 40-65
4 kN/m 25-40 kN/m
(23
30-370 lbf/in.) (140-230
0 lbf/in.)

Solid fiberboard
f 45-95
4 kN/m 20-40 kN/m
(26
60-540 lbf/in.) 0 lbf/in.)
(115-230

7.1.3 Estimating g tensile stre

ength require ements for c corrugated fiberboard sliipsheets
Depending g upon the typpe of unit-load
d and handlinng equipment, it is possible
e to estimate a
minimum tensile
t strength requiremen nt for the macchine and cro
oss directions. This estimaate
is also use
eful in determining which pull tab should d be aligned to
o the stronge
er machine
direction (F
Figure 8-1).

A minimum
m tensile stren
ngth requirem
ment [T, lbf/in. (kN/m)] for a given slip sh
heet direction
may be es
stimated from::

T = (W
W x µ x SF) / L
where:
T = pull tab len
ngth, in.
SF = safety facttor, typically 6.0
6
W = unit load weight
w in pounnds
µ = Coefficiennt of friction, ty
ypically 0.6
This is an estimating prrocedure. Verification by th prototypes is recommende
he testing of p ed.

62
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.2 Stiffness

Adequate stiiffness of the slip sheet is required

r for h
handling certa
ain products ssuch as baggeed
goods or irre
egularly shape ed materials to
t avoid deforrmation of thee tab, which ccan prevent
proper clampping by the grripper jaw. Ad dditional stiffn
ness is norma
ally obtained by increasing
g
the thicknesss of the slip sheet.

7.3 Markings

No markings
s are set forth as requiremeents. Individuual manufactu
urers of slip ssheets or the
user may designate appro opriate markin
ngs for their o
own purposess.

Figure
F 8-1
Corrugated Ma
achine Dirrection (MD
D)
8 TESTING

8.1 Maximum Tensile

T Strength of Solid Fiberboard

Maximum tensile strength

h of solid fiberrboard is obta
ained by pullin
ng in the macchine direction
n
of the fibers.

8.2 Maximum Tensile

T Strength of Corrugated Fiberb
board

Maximum tensile strength h of corrugateed fiberboard is obtained byy pulling in th he machine

direction of the paper face
es, that is, at a right angle to the directio
on of the flute
es.

63
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8.3 Tensile Stre

ength at Righ
ht Angle to th
he Slip Shee
et Score Line
e

Tensile stren
ngth at right angle
a to the slip sheet scorre line is obtaiined after ben
nding the tab
along the sco
ore line 90 deeg in either the up or downn direction. Th he test sample of the
material shall include the score line.

8.4 Durability of Tab

Durability is tested by bennding the tab a minimum o of 15 times alo

ong the score e line from
horizontal to a 90 deg verrtical position,, then returnin
ng the tab to tthe horizontal position prio
or
to applicationn of tension fo
or tensile stre
ength testing. The tab sha all remain funcctional
throughout th he slip sheet unit load distribution cycle
e.

8.5 Stiffness Te
esting

Stiffness testing is a functtion of the bending stressees imposed on

n the slip she
eet by baggedd
egularly shape
goods or irre ed materials and
a is influen ced by whethher or not the tab can be
properly inse
erted into the gripper jaw fo or clamping.

8.6 Final Test

The final test is a function nce througho ut the actual distribution cyycle.
n of performan

9 DESIGN
D

9.1 Tabs

Tabs are loc

cated on one or
o more sides
s of a slip she
eet to facilitate
e handling.

9.2 Tab Configu

urations

Tab configurrations are de

escribed and illustrated
i in F
Figures 8-2 th
hrough 8-6, w
with broken lin
nes
representing
g score lines.

Fiigure 8-2 Figure 8-3

One-Tab Slip Sheet Two-Ta
ab Slip She
eet, Oppos
site

64
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 8-4
4 Figure 8--5
b Slip Shee
Two-Tab et, Adjacen
nt Thrree-Tab Slip Sheet
9.2.1 One-tab slip
s sheet
A one-tab slip sheet has
s a single tab
b located at on
ne edge of the sheet. Thiss design is
popular whhere a uniform
m in-a-row loa
ading pattern in transport vvehicles is pre
evalent. See
Figure 8-2.

9.2.2 Two-tab slip

s sheet, op pposite
In a two-ta
ab slip sheet, opposite, tabs are located at opposite eedges of the ssheet. This
design is used
u for uniform in-a-row lo
oading patter n in transportt vehicles. In addition, it
provides a safety factorr against damage to one taab. See Figurre 8-3.

9.2.3 Two-tab slip

s sheet, ad djacent
In a two-ta
ab slip sheet, adjacent, tabs are located at adjacent e
edges of the ssheet. This
design is used
u where unit loads are loaded in a p in-wheel patte
ern in transpo
ort vehicles
having diffferent interior widths such as
a railroad ca
ars and highw
way trucks. See Figure 8-4 4.

9.2.4 Three-tab slip sheet

In a three-tab slip sheett, tabs are loc
cated at three
e adjacent edg
ges of the sheeet. This
design is occasionally
o used
u to capture the feature
es and advanttages of tab locations show
wn
in Figures 8-3 and 8-4. See Figure 8-5.8

9.2.5 Four-tab slip

s sheet
In a four-ta
ab slip sheet, tabs are loca
ated at all fourr edges of thee sheet. Thiss design is
occasionally used to ca apture the feattures and advvantages of ta ab locations sshown in
Figures 8-33 and 8-4. It is used for re
eusable slip s heets. Some etimes, two op pposite tabs aare
folded up against
a the sides of the unit load for loa
ad stability and
d are secured d in place by
fastening materials.
m Seee Figure 8-6..

65
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 8-6 Figure 8-7

Four--Tab Slip Sheet
S Ninety--Degree Coorner Cuto
out

Figure 8--8 Figure 8-9

Diago
onal Corneer Cutout S
Slit-Corner Design

9.3 Tab Corner Configuratio

ons

Tab corner configurations

c s are describe
ed and illustra
ated as follow
ws, with broken lines
representing
g score lines. Examples sh hown are slip sheets with ttabs on adjaccent edges.
See Figure 8-7
8 through 8--9.

9.3.1 Ninety-degree (90 deg g) corner cuto out

Ninety-deggree (90 deg) corner cutou ut is a commoon design whicch is easily produced. Thiis
design perrmits tabs to be
b folded inde ependently off each other. Independentt folding is
required to
o avoid crushiing or tearing of tabs which
h can result in
n tab failure.
See Figuree 8-7.

9.3.2 Diagonal corner

c cutou
ut
A majority of slip sheets
s have the dia
agonal cornerr cutout desig uces potential of
gn which redu
damage off adjacent tab bs. This desig
gn also permiits tabs to be folded indepe
endently of
each otherr. See Figure e 8-8.

9.3.3 Slit-corneer design

Slit-cornerr design is useed occasionally when the a
adjacent tab iis to be folded
d up against
the side off the unit load. See Figure
e 8-9.

66
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Mandatorry Appenddix A8-I

Guidelines
G for
f Slip Sh
heet Uses

Ta
able A8-1
S
Slip Sheet Ma
aterial

Corrugaated
Fiberbo
oard
Typpe of Product and Corrugated
C Sheet W
With
Condition Fiberboard Laminate
ed Tab Plastic Solid Fib
berboard
Heavyy and wet P P G P
Heavyy and dry F G G G
Lightw
weight and wet P P G F
Lightw
weight and dry G G G G
Frozenn goods F F G G
Refrigerated goods F F G F
Baggeed goods F F G G
Boxedd or case goodss, dry G G G G
Cratedd G G G G
Steel or
o fiber drums P P G G
Bulk bin
b G G G G
Fiberb
board sheets G G G G
Mason nry products P P G F
Bales P P G G

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Rating method: G = Good; F = Fairr; P = Poor
(b) Note potential influe
ence of moisture
e content of slip sheet
s on its perfo
ormance.

67
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Mandatorry Appendix A8-II

Guidelin arting a Slip Sheet Un
nes for Sta nit Load Ha
andling Sy
ystem
The fo
ollowing facto
ors shall be ta
aken into cons
sideration wh en selecting sslip sheets an
nd starting a
system
m for shippingg goods and products on slip
s sheets:

(a) ype
ty
(b) ch
haracteristics
(c) dimensions
(d) paacking
(e) unnit load mass
s, weight, com
mposition, andd stability
(f) addverse expossure
(g) ty
ype of availab
ble handling equipment
(h) eqquipment opeerator experieence
(i) re
eceiver require
ements
(j) nu
umber of timees unit load is
s to be handle
ed

ollowing facto
The fo onsidered when receiving unit loads on slip sheets:
ors shall be co

(a) siize and load capacity

c of slip sheet hand dling equipme ent dictated byy unit load sizzes
(b) heeight of storagge of unit loadds
(c) deeposit of unit loads on palle ets for storagge or future ha
andling by forrk tines
(d) eqquipment ope erator skill to unload
u slip sh
heet unit load s
(e) sccooping of loaads by chiseliing the load plate
p underne ath the slip shheet or pullingg of load onto
o
the load plate with gripper jaw clamping
c ontoo the sheet tabb
eloading of un
(f) re nit loads into another
a transport vehicle
(g) diisposition of slip
s sheets

68
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen
ndix A8-A
Developme
D S Sheet Handling C
ent of the Slip Concept
What is known as slip
s sheet han ndling of unitized loads waas created in 11946 by threee sales and
engineering emplo oyees of Clark
k Equipment Company
C to mmeet a custom mer’s need to
o transfer
palletized loads of bagged goodds into a rail car
c without lossing the pallet or expendinng labor to hand
stack the goods. After
A extensiv
ve experimenttation, a visit tto fiberboard manufacturer by the group p’s
leader, Glen R. Johhnson, produced the idea of using kraftt paper as a m material handling base, sin
nce
it had good tensile strength.

Desiggn of the devic

ce to handle unit
u loads on a piece of kra aft paper began with the need for a solid
base rather than coonventional pallet
p forks. A flat plate atta
ached to a sccissor device provided the
pushing action, and d an “alligator jaw” clamp ata the base off the pusher pplate provided
d the pulling
n. Making the
action e kraft paper base
b slightly longer
l than th
he unit load p
provided a surrface to be
grabbbed by the alligator jaw clammp.

Like most
m new conncepts, this prroject was vie
ewed by peerss with skepticcism and curioosity, but the
first fo
ormal test of the
t concept wasw successfu ul. The unit lo
oad was pulleed onto the platens and
pushe ed off several times, then another
a unit lo
oad was pulle ed onto the platens and pla
aced atop the e
first and the platens were withdrrawn. The top unit load wa as then retrie
eved and placced beside the e
first. This success s sparked enth husiasm amo ong witnessess, and prototyypes were soo on on the
drawing board, in production,
p annd ultimately on display at an industry sshow.

Manyy companies began

b experim
menting with alternatives
a o kraft paper. Solid fiberbo
to oard,
corrug
gated fiberboard, canvas, thin
t laminated
d plywood, mmultiple-ply newspaper, galvvanized shee et
metal, and sheet aluminum
a werre tried as ma
aterial handlin g bases. Pla astics were no
ot initially
dered, because that industtry was not as
consid s fully develo ped as it is to
oday.

Clark Equipment trrademarked the name PUL L-PAC to dessignate the ne ew technique in 1947, and
nts were secured in the nam
paten mes of the thrree men who originated the concept. T The generic
namee push pull eventually gaine
ed prominenc ce as more liftt truck manuffacturers bega
an producing
the atttachments.

Over the next ten years,

y the pro
ocess gained popularity witth the refinem
ment of the ma
aterial handlin
ng
base. The term sliip sheet survived to becom me the genera
al name of the e concept, but the product
that itt originally des
scribed has fa
aded into histtory.

Popullarity of slip sheet handling

g waned while e squeeze cla
amps became e popular for ssome of the
same reasons thatt slip sheets were
w initially designed.
d Pa
allet users wannted the advaantage of
unitiziing, but did no
ot want the weight,
w cube, or
o expense off managing a pallet invento ory. Over tim
me,
palletless unit load handling techniques sorte ed themselvess out along product and usse lines.
Today y, both conce epts are used singularly and together. In amping appliccations are for
n general, cla
in-houuse use and slip
s sheets are for dual warehouse and transport app plications.

Technnology has ke ept pace with increased sh hipper interestt, offering imp
provements in n both the
handling equipmen nt and the slip
p sheets. Plastics are now w part of the s lip sheet indu ustry. Not onlly
he concept grrown in the Un
has th nited States, but is has sprread, to some e extent, worldwide.
Unitiz
zed handling, a major laborr-saving techn nique is any ccountry, gene erally starts with the use off
pallets. As the unit load concep pt spreads and develops, t he need for a an alternative to pallets will
arise aboard, just as
a it did dome estically in 1946.

69
16

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Nonmandattory Appen
ndix A8-B
Publishe
ed Docume
ents Coverring Slip S
Sheets
ollowing docu
The fo uments were reviewed
r duriing the prepa
aration of Partt 8:

JIS Z0607 – 1983, Sheet Palletts

sher: Japan Pallet
Publis P Associa
ation, 2-14-12
2 Chuo-ku, To
okyo, Japan

What is a Slip Sheet? Question ns and Answeers About Slip

p Sheets
Why Slip
S Sheets?
How to
t Specify Slip
p Sheets
The Slip-Sheet
S Driver Training Manual
M
Publis
sher: American Forest and d Paper Asso
ociation (AF&P
PA) 111 Nine
eteenth Streett, NW, Suite
800, Washington,
W DC
D 20036

Boumma, John C. and a Paul F. Shaffer.

S Evalluation of Slip
p Sheet for Unnitized Shipm
ment of
Groceeries in Trailers. Marketing
g Research Report
R Numbe er 1121, Agriccultural Marke
eting Service..
Ris, R.E.,
R and R.T T. Hinsch. Slip-Sheet Han ndling of Califo
ornia Nectarin
nes and Canttaloupes. AA AT-
W-15 (September 1980) Scienc ce and Education Administtration Advancces in Agricultural
Technnology.
Publis
sher: U.S. De epartment of Agriculture,
A 1400 Independ dence Avenu ue, SW, Wash hington, DC
202500

Otherr Publications
s

American Frozen Food

F Institute
e. The Unitize
ed Handling o
of Frozen Foo
ods Using Slip
p Sheets. Suite
100, 1700
1 Old Mea
adow Road, McLean,
M VA 22102
2

ainer Corpora
Conta ation of Americ
ca, Containerr Division. Pa
alapad Slip Sheets. 500 E
East North
Avenu
ue, Carol Stre
eam, IL 60187
7

mit Nobel AG
Dynam G. Transport and w Trovidur PE 200. DIN Deutsches In
a Stacking with nstitute fr
Normung E.V., Pos
stfach 1107, D-1000,
D Berlin 30, German
ny.

all, Inc. Ly-Pa

Lynda ak™ Slip Shee
ets. P.O. Box
x 9350, Richm
mond, VA 232
228

n Camp Corpo
Union oration. Fibre
elift Slip Shee
ets. P.O. Boxx 558, Monroe
e, MI 48161

nal Articles
Journ

Boumma, John C. “PPotential for Slip

S Sheet Shipment of Gro oceries in Trailers.” Journa
al of Food
Distrib
bution Research (February y 1980): 61; Food
F Distribu
ution Researcch Society, Incc., P.O. Box
44111 10, Fort Wash
hington, MD 20744
2

sh-Pull or Pallets? Distribution’s Dilemm

ng, C.W. “Pus
Ebelin g & Shipping Managementt
ma.” Handling
(October 1978); Pe
enton Publishhing, 1100 Superior Avenu e, Cleveland,, OH 44114

_____
__. “Push-Puull’s Global Prrogress.” Han
ndling & Ship ping Manage
ement. Penton
n Publishing,
1100 Superior Ave
enue, Cleveland, OH 44114 4

70
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Johnsson, Glen R. “Slip

“ Sheets, Pros & Cons.” Western M Material Hand ling Packaginng/Shipping
(Dece
ember 1980): 18; Baymer Publications, Inc., 606 Larrchmont Boullevard, Los Angeles, Ca
900044. [Also published in Foodd Engineering (November 1 1980): 122; C
Clinton Co., C
Chilton Way,
Box 2035,
2 Radnor,, PA 19084; and
a in Grocerry Distribution
n (March/Aprill 1980): 13; 3
39 LaSalle
Streett, Chicago, IL
L 60603]

wind, Gene F. “Slip-Sheet Attachments,

Schw A More Choicees.” Material Handling Eng
gineering
(Nove
ember 1989); Penton Publiishing, 1100 Superior
S Aven nd, OH 44114
nue, Clevelan 4.

71
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 9
Wood Pa
allets for Department
D t of Defens
se Use

1 SCOPE

Part 9 applies to wood

w pallets used by the De epartment of Defense (DoD) and DoD ccontractors.
Federral agencies and
a commerc cial entities maay find this Pa
art useful in m
meeting DoD procurementt
requirrements. The ese pallets are
e commonly used
u by DoD activities for handling, sto
orage, and
transp
portation of ge
eneral suppliees and ammu unition in worl dwide logisticcs.

Part 1, g Pallets and Related Strucctures, shall a

1 Definitions and Terminollogy Covering apply to Part 9.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Pa
art 9 is to prov
vide the releva
ant physical d
details for con
nstruction of D
DoD pallets. It
provid
des the minimmum standards for construc ction of lumbe
er-deck stringger and block pallets. Partt 9
define
es the size, class, type, sty
yle, species class, minimumm nails requirred, preservattion, marking,
and quality of the assembled
a pa
allets.

3 SIZES

e 9-1, Military Pallet Sizes, lists the commonly used ssizes.

Table

Table
T 9-1
DoD Pallet Size
es
Size Len
ngth x Width, inch
1 32 x 40
2 40 x 48
3 48 x 48
4 48 x 60
5 44 x 44
6 35 x 45.5
7 42 x 53
8 48 x 40

4 CONSTRUCTI
C ION DETAILS
S

4.1 Wood Comp

ponents

Wood compo onents for pallet manufacture are to be per Part 3, S

Subpart I, para
a. 5.1, Lumbe
er
Components s and Table 3-1, Minimum Pallet Compo onent Qualityy, except that no decay,
wane or bark
k is allowed.

4.1.1 Phytosanitary measurres requirem ment

DoD palletts shall comply with ISPM 15 requireme
ents as descriibed in Part 3
3, Wood Pallets.

4.2 Pallet Construction

Tables 9-2 and

a 9-3 cover the size and number of de eckboards an nd stringers/bllocks required
d
in constructin
ng pallets. Th
he basic palle
et class, type,, style, wood quality, and o
other essentiaal
pallet design
n features are explained in Part 3, Subppart I, para. 4.

72
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.2.1 Unassemb bled, class 2 pallet comp ponents

Only when n specified by the requesto or, Class 2 pa llets may be sshipped unasssembled. Th he
method forr packing thes se individual pallet compon nents shall bee in accordan
nce with the
instructions stated in MIL-DTL-15011 1 for a Type I I, unassembled pallet. Thhe pallet
componen nts are to be consolidated
c and
a stacked i n accordance e with figure 4 of MIL-DTL--
15011, which specifies a six step pro ocess that con ntains 20 unaassembled pa allet
componen nts and neces ssary nails. Th
he pallets are to be reasse embled prior too use in
accordanc ce with figure 5 of MIL-DTL L-15011.

5 PRESERVATION (REQUIR
RED FOR CERTAIN PALL
LETS LISTED
D IN TABLE 9
9-4)

5.1 Wood Pallett Preservatio

on

When speciffied in Table 9-4,

9 the assem mbled pallets (or unassemmbled pallet co
omponents)
shall be pres
served. Moistuure content of o the wood sh hall not excee
ed 19% prior tto treatment.
The wood sh hall not be cutt after treatmeent.

5.2 Preservative
e Materials

Pallet compo
onents (or asssembled palle ets) shall be ccompletely im
mmersed for a minimum of
one minute in one of the following
f liste
ed wood prese ervative soluttions:

(a) copper-88-quinolinolate ater down to a solution of 1.8% copper

e reduced (diluted) with wa
(as a metal) by volume in water. (This compound iss also known as oxine cop pper).

phthenate reduced (diluted) with water d

(b) zinc nap down to a solu
ution of 3% ziinc (as a meta
al)
by volume in
n water.

(c) copper naphthenate

n reduced
r (dilutted) with wate
er down to a ssolution of 2%
% copper (as a
metal) by volume in waterr.

5.3 nts
Requiremen

All interior an
nd exterior su urfaces of the assembled p pallet are to b e completely immersed in
the preserva ative solution. Care shall beb exercised tto assure com mplete covera age of all
surfaces of the pallets or pallet compon nents. After iimmersion, pa allets shall be
e air dried for
24 hour (min n.) in a well-ve
entilated area
a allowing free
e air circulatio
on around all surfaces of th he
wood. Accelerated drying g in an oven or
o kiln is perm
mitted, provideed that oven o or kiln
temperatures s do not exce eed 160ºF (711ºC). The pre eservative on the pallets sh hall be
thoroughly dried to the tou uch prior to shipment to th e customer.

5.4 Concentratiion Level

The concenttration of the applicable

a preeservatives w
within the dipp
ping tank shalll be checked in
accordance with
w the manu ufacturer’s re
ecommendatio ons prior to uttilization of th
he tank and
every 8 hourr of use therea
after.

73
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6 MARKING
M

6.1 Manufacture
er’s Marking
g

block) pallets shall be perm

All Class 2 (b manently marrked (stenciled or branded) with the prim me
contractor’s CAGE code or o the manufa acturer’s markking. All markking shall be on the outsid
de
of the centerr block and bee easily visible
e. Characterrs shall be a m
minimum of 0.75 inch (19
mm) in heigh ht.

6.2 ISPM 15 Certification Ma

arkings

All pallets sh
hall be permanently marked d (stamped, sstenciled or b
branded) in acccordance witth
ISPM 15 cerrtification markings. Pallet certification m
markings sha all be applied to the stringe
er
or block on opposite
o sides
s or ends of th
he pallet and be clearly vissible.

6.3 Preservation Marking

All Class 2 (b
block) pallets shall be marked with 1-incch high (min.)) letters. The
e letters “PA”
shall be marked on all pallets immerse ed in copper-88-quinolinolatee preservativee; the letters
“PB” shall be
e marked on alla pallets sub
bjected to zincc naphthenate e preservativee; and the
letters “PC” shall
s be markked on all pallets immersed d in the coppeer naphthenatte preservativve.
The preserva ative markingg shall be app
plied to the ce nter block on the side of th
he pallet, (seee
Figures 9-4, 9-6, or 9-8).

7 QUALITY
Q ASS
SURANCE PR
ROVISIONS

7.1 Wood Qualiity

Materials shaall comply witth the minimu

um requiremeents of reusabble (M) grade in Part 3, Parrt
I, para. 5, Ma
aterials and Part
P I, para. 6, Manufacture e, and the speecific requirem
ments of this
Part. Wood shall be free of decay thatt can be visua
ally detected oor detected bby normal
brashness when
w picked with
w a sharp in nstrument.

7.1.1 Wood shall be free from m insects, beeetles, powder--post beetles , and any other organismss,
which may y result in the spread of inv
vasive pests a
and/or subseq quent pallet d
deterioration, at
time of delivery to the DoD.
D

7.1.2 Wood com mponents shall be bark-freee for all palletts in this Part to insure thatt the pallet is
free from the “oak wilt fu
ungus.” Bark
k and/or wane e shall not app pear on any ttimber (lumbe er)
member off the assembled pallet.

7.1.3 Splits (and

d cracks), for all
a Class 2 blo ock pallets, th
hat are no lonnger than the width of the
wood mem mber (deckboa ards and strinngerboards) a are permitted for ANSI Parrt numbers
MH1/9-10B BW4048, MH1/9-11BW404 48P, MH1/9-1 12BW3545P, and MH1/9-1 13BW4253P.
Splits (and
d cracks) for Class
C 1 (string
ger pallets) sh
hall be per thiis Part 9, para
a. 7, Quality
Assurance e Provisions, and
a Part 3, Part I, para. 5, Materials, an nd Part I, paraa. 6,
Manufactu ure.

7.2 Moisture Co
ontent

Unless specified in the co

ontract or ordeer, moisture ccontent of all p
pallet compon
nents or
assembled pallets
p shall be as listed in the Moisture Content of W Wood Column of Table 9-4
(including pe
ertinent notes) at the time of
o pallet shipmment to the DDoD.

74
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.3 Reclaimed/ Recycled-wo

ood compon
nents

On all reclaim
med/recycled-wood compo onents, the cu
ut-off nails shall be flush w
with, or below,,
the surface of
o the wood at a time of deliv
very to the DooD. Presence e of sharp endd(s) of cut-offf
nails is cause for rejection
n of the pallett.

7.4 Contractor Certification

C

The contracttor shall certiffy and maintaain substantiatting evidencee that: the pro
oduct (pallet)
meets the re equirements ofo Tables 9-1, 9-2, 9-3, and d 9-4 and all p
pertinent secttions of Part 9
9;
the finished pallet conformms to the DoD D drawings, s pecifications, workmanship standards;
shed pallets meet
and, the finis m standard d industry qua
ality assurancce practices. Pallets with
known defec cts shall not be submitted for
f DoD accep ptance. DoDD procurementt reserves the e
right to perfo
orm or witness s any of the in
nspections it d
deems necesssary to insure e supplies annd
services con nform to presccribed requireements.

7.5 Precedence
e

In the event of a conflict between

b the figure (drawin g) of a pallet and the four tables in Partt
9, the figure (drawing) shaall have preceedence over tthe tables of ccomponent specifications or
tolerances. This precede ence applies too componentts, constructio on details, ma
aterials,
dimensions, and tolerance es.

75
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 9-2
Stringer and Blockk Sizes
Stringers a
and Blocks
Pallet Size, inch
Clas
ss Type Style Size No. [S
See Note (5)] Reeference
1 1 2 1 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 32 See Notess (1), (2), and ((4)
1 1 2 2 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40
1 1 2 2 4 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40
1 2 2 2 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40 See Figure 9-1
1 1 2 3 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 48

1 2 6 3 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 48
1 1 2 4 5 1 .5 x 3.5 x 48 See
e Note (3)
1 1 2 5 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 44 See Figure 9-2
1 1 6 2 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40
1 1 6 3 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 48

1 2 6 1 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 32
1 2 2 1 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 32
1 2 6 2 4 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40 See Figure 9-3
1 2 6 2 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40
1 2 2 2 3 1 .5 x 3.5 x 40

2 3 6 2 3 5
7.2 5 x 3.63 x 2.75 Cennter Blocks
… … … 2 6 5.5 0 x 3.63 x 2.75
5 Sid
de Blocks
2 3 6 6 3 7.2 5 x 3.63 x 2.75
5 Cennter Blocks
… … … 6 6 5.5 0 x 3.63 x 2.75
5 Sid
de Blocks
2 3 6 7 3 7.2 5 x 3.63 x 2.75
5 Cennter Blocks
… … … 7 6 5.5 0 x 3.63 x 2.75
5 Sid
de Blocks

1 2 2 8 3 1.5
50 x 3.50 x 48

GENER RAL NOTE: See

e Part 3, Subpartt I, para. 3 for explanation of Classs, Type, Style o
of Pallets and Tab
ble 9-1 for Pallet
Size.

NOTES S:
(1) Strrapping slots shaall be provided in the upper surfac ce of all stringer ffor all wing (Classs 1) pallets (exccept recycled or
med wood pallets) as shown in Fig
reclaim gures 9-3, 9-10, 9-11, and 9-12. Strapping slots ffor Class 2 (blocck) pallets are
shown in Figures 9-4 th hrough 9-9 and Figure
F 9-17.
(2) See e Subpart I, para
a. 5.1.4.3 of Part 3, for size of striinger (fork entry)) notches on the bottom of stringe ers. Notch
openings shall begin 6 inch from the end of the stringer,, except for the S Size 1 pallet. No otch openings forr the Size 1 pallet
will beg he end of the stringer and will be 8½ inch in lengt h.
gin 5 inch from th
(3) Strringers shall be equally
e spaced, unless
u otherwise noted on drawin ng(s).
allets, unless otherwise specified, moisture conten
(4) Forr all untreated pa nt of all pallet co
omponents shall b be as listed in the
Moisturre Content colum mn of Table 9-4 ata the time of ship pment. For treatted pallets, the m moisture content shall not exceed d
19% prrior to preservativve applications.
(5) Strringers/blocks of any one pallet shall be uniform in n thickness and w width. Note thatt Table 9-2 does not apply to
recycleed-wood pallets (Part No. MH1/9--14SW4048R as listed in Table 9 9-4).

76
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 9-3
Actual
A Deck
kboard Sizzes (inch)

p and
Top
Top annd Botttom
Bottom Inte
erior
Lead End
E Deckbo oards Deckbboards
Deckboa ards oard
Deckbo Oveer (Ranndom Deckboard
(Min. Wiidth) Thickn
ness Strappping dth)
Wid Side Center Spacing
Pallet [Notes (1) (min
n.) Slots [Nottes (4) Strin
ngerboard S
Stringerboard (max.)
Class
s Type Size 2)]
and (2 [Note (3)] (Min. Width)
W andd (5)] Size Size [Note (5)]
1 1 1 5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 1 2 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 1 3 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 1 4 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 1 5 3.5 0.75
5 N/AA See F
Fig. 9-2 N/A N/A See Fig. 9-2
2
1 2 1 5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 2 2 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
1 2 3 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5
2 3 2 5.5 0.81
1 See Figg. 9-5 3.5 tto 7.5 0.8
81 x 7.25 0.81 x 3.50 1.5
2 3 6 See Fig.. 9-7 0.81
1 See Figg. 9-7 5
5.5 0.881 x 7.25 0.81 x 3.50 1.5
2 3 7 5.5 0.81
1 See Figg. 9-9 3.5 tto 7.5 0.8
81 x 7.25 0.81 x 3.50 1.5
1 2 8 5.5 0.69
9 4.5
5 3.5 tto 7.5 N/A N/A 1.5

GENERRAL NOTE: Unless otherwise sp

pecified, moisture
e content of all p
pallet component s shall be as liste
ed in the Moisturre
Conten
nt column in Table 9-4.

NOTES S:
(1) Exccept for pallet siz
ze 4, the upper edges
e of all bottom deckboards sh hall be chamfere
ed in accordance e with Part 3,
Subparrt I, para. 5.1.4, Preparation
P of Pa
allet Components s. Upper edges of bottom deckb boards shall not bbe chamfered forr
Part No
os. MH1/9-02SW W4048 and MH1/9 9-14SW4048.
(2) Topp and bottom lea ad deckboards sh hall be of the sam me thickness and d width except fo
or Size 1 pallets. Bottom lead
deckbooards, of Size 1 pallets,
p shall be 5 inch in width. See S Figure 9-10.
(3) Deckboard thicknes ss tolerances sha all be +/- 0.06, (o or +/- 1/16,) for th
he thickness dim
mensions listed inn Table 9-3, unlesss
otherwise specified in Part
P 9 figures (dra awings). Deckbo oard thickness is intended to be t he “as received (by the Military)
thickne
ess.”
(4) Seee Figures 9-1 thrrough 9-16 for siz ze and location of o bottom interiorr deckboards.
(5) Deckboards shall be b equally spaced d, unless otherwise noted on dra awing(s). Deckbo oard length shall correspond to thhe
width of
o the size pallet being
b fabricated,, e.g., a 40 x 48 inch
i pallet requirres 48 inch deckbboards.

77
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table 9--4
allets, by Part Numbe
DoD Pa er
Moisture
Speciees Contentt of Preserv.
No. of
o Class (PPer Wood ((%, Nails Req’d Load Ratingg,
P
Part No. String
gers Part 3
3) Max.) [N
Note Req’d (Note lb [Note (2)]]
[N
Note (1)] Class Typ
pe Style Size (Note No.)
N [Note ((3)] (4)] (Note No.) No.)
MH1/9
9-01SW3240 1 2 6 1 3 1, 3, 4, 21 30 (5) No 1,500
1, 3, 11, 12,
MH1/9
9-02SW4048 1 2 6 2 3 30 (5) No 1,500
22, 299
MH1/9
9-03SW4048 1 2 6 2 4 1, 3, 4, 21 30 (5) No 3,000
No
MH1/9-04SF4048 1 1 2 2 3 2, 22
3, 11, 12 30 (5) 3,000

9-05SW4048
MH1/9 1 2 6 2 3 1, 3, 4, 21 30 (5) No 3,000
No
11, 12, 13,
MH1/9
9-06SW4048 1 2 6 2 4 25 (5) 3,000
22
MH1/9
9-07SW4848 1 1 6 3 3 1, 3, 4, 21 30 (5) No 3,000
No
MH1/9-08SF4860 1 1 2 4 5 1, 3, 4, 21 30 (5) 3,000
11, 12, 13, No
MH1/9-09SF4444 1 1 2 5 3 25 (5) 3,000
22
9-10BW4048
MH1/9 2 3 6 2 6)
0, (6 1, 3, 4, 21 19 (7) No 4,000
MH1/9
9-11BW4048P 2 3 6 2 0, (6
6) 1, 4, 2
21 19 (7) Yes (8) 4,000
9-12BW3545P
MH1/9 2 3 6 6 0, (6
6) 1, 4, 2
21 19 (7) Yes (8) 4,000
9-13BW4253P
MH1/9 2 3 6 7 0, (6
6) 1, 4, 2
21 19 (7) Yes (8) 4,000
No
1, 3, 11, 12, 30
MH1/9-14SW4048R 1 2 6 2 3, (9
9) (5), (9) 1,500
22, 299 (stringe rs)
MH1/9-15SF4840 1 2 2 8 3 1, 3, 4, 21 25 (5) No 2,500

NOTES S:
(1) Parrt No. Codes: B = block; S = stringe er; F = flush; W = wing;
w P = preservvative used; R = re eclaimed- or recyccled-wood conten nt
(2) Loaad Rating: The loa aded pallet weight is limited to a ma aximum number o of pounds as show wn in the Load Ra ating column of
Table 9-4.
9
(3) Wood species are lis sted by Species Class.
C
(4) Forr all untreated pallets, unless otherwwise specified, mo oisture content of all pallet compone ents, at the time o
of shipment to the
e
DoD, shhall be as listed in
n the Moisture Con ntent column in Taable 9-4. For trea ated pallets (Part NNos. MH1/9-11BW W4048P, MH1/9-
12BW3545P, and MH1/9 9-13BW4253P), th he moisture content shall not excee ed 19% (19% maxximum) prior to pre eservative
applicattion (immersion).
(5) Minnimum nail require ements (for all stringer pallets) are listed in Part 3, Ap
ppendix A3-A, Tab ble A3-1 for Categgory M (new,
multiple
e-use) pallets. They are 11½ gauge e, 0.112 inch wire
e diameter, helical ly threaded nails.
(6) Dennotes block pallets s which require 9 blocks per pallet.
(7) Harrdened nails, fabriicated of suitable steel wire, are reqquired for block pa allets that are prim
marily used for am
mmunition loads.
hall be staggered and evenly space
Nails sh ed throughout the joint area per Fig gure 9-17. All fasteeners bent in driving shall be removved
or brokeen off below the surface
s and replacced. The heads of fasteners shall b be driven down be eneath the surfacee of the board. Th
he
hardene ed nails are specified in ASTM F 16 667, Table 25, and are designated as Type 1, Style 18 pallet nails:

ASTM
M F 1667 (Dash No.) Length (inc
ch) Diameter (inc
ch)
NL PL-01D 1.500 0.120
NL PL-04D 2.250 0.120
NL PL-10D 3.250 0.135

(8) Preeservative treatme ent of finished, nailed pallets or palle

et components (fo or ammunition palllets) is required fo or the part numbe
er
listed. See
S para. 5, Pres servation, of Part 9 for requirements s and process.
(9) Pallet (Part No. MH1/9-14SW4048R) is i constructed of reclaimed-
r or recyycled-wood deckb boards, nails, and new stringers
(moisture content – 30% max.). Interior to op- and bottom-de eckboards may be e of two-piece con nstruction (i.e., two
o 24 inch
deckboards, butted at ce enter stringer). Ou utside stringers may be fabricated o of 1.25- by 3.5- byy 40-inch length hardwood or 1.50- by
3.5- by 40.inch length ha ardwood or softwo ood. The center sttringer is fabricateed of 2.25- by 3.5-- by 40-inch length wood (Species
Class 1, 3, or 11) or 1.500- by 3.5- by 40-inch length wood (S Species Class 1, 3 3, 11, 12, or 29). Chamfers on top of bottom
deckboards and strap slo ots on top of string
gers are not required. On all reclaimmed-/recycled-wo ood components, cut-off nails shall be
flush wiith, or below, the surface
s of the woood. Presence of sharp
s end(s) of cu
ut-off nails is causse for rejection of tthe pallet.

78
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTE: Sho own is a Class 1,, Type 2, Style (4 Two interior bottom deckboards are
40 x 48 inch), 3-sstringer pallet. T
require
ed of random width (3.50 to 5.00 inch),
i with a max
ximum deckboard d spacing of 1.5 inch allowed bettween the two
bottom deckboards. All dimensions are e in inches.

Figure
F 9-1
Isometriic View, Pa
artial 4-Way Entry, Siize 2, Doub
ble Deck, F
Flush,
Nonreversible Paallet for W
Warehouse Use

GENER RAL NOTE: Sho

own is a Class 1,, Type 1, Style 2,, Size 5 (44 x 44 inch), 3-stringerr pallet. All dimensions are in
inches..
Figure
F 9-2
Is
sometric View,
V 2-Way
y Entry, Siize 5, Doub
ble Deck,
Flush, Nonreversibl e Pallet

79
17

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Shoown is a Class 1, Type 2, Style 6,
6 Size 2 (40 x 488 inch), 4-stringe r pallet. Strappin
ng slots shall be included, as
shown in Figure 9-3. All
A dimensions are e in inches.
(b) Supplier may choos se one of two interior bottom decckboard options.
(1) One interior botttom deckboard is
i required, of 5.5
5 inch (min.) wid
dth, centered on 1 or stringer foot.
10.00 inch interio
(2) Two interior dec
ckboards are reqquired, of randomm width (3.50 to 55.00 inch), with a maximum deckkboard spacing o of
1.5 inch allowed between the two bo ottom interior deckboards.

Figure
F 9-3
Top and Side
S View, Partial 4-W
Way Entry, Size 2,
Do
ouble Deckk, Double-W Wing Pallett

80
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Shoown in Class 2, Type
T 3, Style 6, Size
S 2 (40 x 48 inch), block palle
et. All dimension s are in inches.
(b) Forr nail quantities and
a nailing patterrn, see Figure 9--17.

Figure
F 9-4
Top, Side
e, and End
d Views, Fu
ull 4-Way EEntry, Size 2, Double Deck,
Double
e-Wing, Noonreversib le Block Pallet

81
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure
F 9-5
Componentts for a Fulll 4-Way Enntry, Size 2
2, Double D
Deck, Doub
ble-Wing,
Nonreverssible Blockk Pallet

82
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Shoown is a Class 2,2 Type 3, Style 6,
6 Size 6 (35 x 455.5 inch), block p
pallet. All dimenssions are in inche
es.
(b) Forr nail quantities and
a nailing patterrn, see Figure 9--17.

Figure
F 9-6
Top, Side
e, and End
d Views, Fu
ull 4-Way EEntry, Size 6, Double Deck,
Double
e-Wing, Noonreversib le Block Pallet

83
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENERRAL NOTE: Sho own are compone

ents for a Class 2, Type 3, Style 6, Size 6 (35 x 4
45.5 inch), block pallet. All
dimens
sions are in inche
es.
Figure
F 9-7
Com
mponents fo
or a Full 4--Way Entry
y, Size 6, D
Double Dec
ck,
Doublee-Wing, No onreversib le Block Pallet

84
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Shoown is a Class 2,2 Type 3, Style 6,
6 Size 7 (42 x 533 inch), block pal let. All dimensio
ons are in inchess.
(b) Forr nail quantities and
a nailing patterrn, see Figure 9--17.

Figure
F 9-8
Top, Side
e, and End
d Views, Fu
ull 4-Way EEntry, Size 7, Double Deck,
Double
e-Wing, Noonreversib le Block Pallet

85
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENERRAL NOTE: Sho own are compone

ents for a Class 2, Type 3, Style 6, Size 7 (42 x 5
53 inch), block pa
allet. All
dimens
sions are in inche
es.

Figure
F 9-9
Com
mponents fo
or a Full 4--Way Entry
y, Size 7, D
Double Dec
ck,
Doublee-Wing, No onreversib le Block Pallet

86
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTE: Sho

own is a Class 1,, Type 2, Style 6,, Size 1 (32 x 40 inch), 3-stringerr pallet. All dimensions are show
wn
in inche
es.

Figure 9-10
Top
p, End, and
d Side View
ws of Partia
al 4-Way E ntry, Size 1, Double--Wing Palle
et

87
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Detail shows a strinnger for a Size 2 (40 x 48 inch) pa allet and the loca
ation and size of the strapping slo
ots.
(b) Supplier may choos se one of two bottom-interior dec ckboard options.
(1) One bottom-in nterior deckboardd is required, of 5.5
5 inch (min.) wiidth, centered on n 10.00 inch interrior stringer foot.
(2
2) Two bottom-in nterior deckboardds are required, of
o random width (3.50 to 5.00 incch), with a maxim mum deckboard
sppacing of 1.5 inch
h allowed betwee en the two bottom m-interior deckbo oards.
(c) All dimensions are in inches.

Figure 9-11
Side
S Views, Partial 4-Way Entry
y, Flush or Double-W
Wing, String
ger Pallet

88
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Detail shows a Classs 1, Type 2, Sty
yle 6, Size 3 (48 x 48 inch), 3-strin
nger pallet.
wo or three bottom
(b) Tw m-interior deckbooards may be use ed and supplier m may choose one e of the two botto
om-interior
deckbooard options.
(1) Two bottom-innterior deckboardds are required, of
o 5.50 inch (min n.) width, centere
ed on the 18.00 in nch interior string
ger
foot, with maximumm spacing of 1.50 inch between deckboards.
d
(2
2) Three bottom--interior deckboaards are required, of random width h [3.50 (min.) to 5.50 inch], with a maximum
deeckboard spacingg of 1.50 inch allowed between th he three bottom--interior deckboa ards.
(c) Stra
apping slots on top
t of surface of stringer to be loccated 8.38 inch ffrom each end off stringer, as sho own in Figure 9-11.
(d) All dimensions are in inches.

Figure 9-12
Top, En
nd, and Sid
de Views, Partial 4-W
Way Entry, Size 3, Do ouble
Deck,
D Doubble-Wing, Nonrevers
N ible String
ger Pallet

89
18

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Stringer Palleet Constructioon Details

(See pa
ara. 1-3, Part 3,
3 for Classes, T
Types, and Styyles)

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Detail shows a Classs 1, Type 2, Siz
ze 8 (48 x40 inch), 3-stringer palle
et.
wo or three bottom
(b) Tw m-interior deckbo oards may be useed and supplier m may choose one e of the following bottom-interior
deckbooard options.
(1) Two bottom-innterior deckboardds are required, of
o 5.50 inch (min n.) width, centere
ed on the 18.00 in nch interior string
ger
foot, with maximum
m spacing of 1.50 inch between deckboards.
d
(2
2) Three bottom--interior deckboaards are required, of random width h [3.50 (min.) to 5.50 inch], with a maximum
deeckboard spacingg of 1.50 inch allowed between thhe three bottom--interior deckboa ards.
(c) All dimensions are in inches.

Figure 9-13
Top
p, End, and
d Side Viewws, Partiall 4-Way Enntry, Size 8,
Double
D Decck, Flush, Nonrevers
N sible String
ger Pallet

90
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Stringer Palleet Constructio on Details

(See Para.
P 3, Part 3, for Classes, T
Types, and Styles)

GENER RAL NOTE: Dettail shows a Clas

ss 1, Type 1, Stylle 2, Size 4 (48 x 60 inch), 5-strin
nger pallet. All dimensions are in
n
inches..

Figure 9-14
Top, End,
E and Side Views, 2-Way Enttry, Size 4,, Double Deck,
Flus
sh, Nonrev
versible Strringer Palle
et

91
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Stringer Palleet Constructioon Details

(See Pa
ara. 1-3, Part 3,
3 for Classes, T
Types, and Styyles)

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Detail shows a Clas ss 1, Type 2, Styyle 6, Size 2 (40 x 48 inch), 3-strin
nger pallet consttructed with recla
aimed-/recycled-
wood deckboards
d and new
n stringers.
ub, or cut-off, nails remaining in deckboards
(b) Stu d used in pallet construuction shall be flu
ush or below the deckboard surfaace
at time of manufacture.
(c) All dimensions are in inches.

Figure 9-15
Top
p, Side, and
d End Viewws, Partial 4-Way Enttry, Double
e Deck, Do
ouble-Wing
g,
Non
nreversiblee Stringer Pallet with
h Reclaimeed-/Recycle
ed-Wood DDeckboardss

92
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENERRAL NOTE: Sho own in a Class 1,, Type 1, Style 2, Size 2 (40 x 48
8 inch), 3-stringerr pallet. Bottom intermediate
deckbo her two 3.5 inch wide deckboards
oards may be eith s or one 7.25 incch wide deckboa rd. All dimensions are in inches..

Figure 9-16
Isometric View, Siz
ze 2, Doub
ble Deck, F
Flush, Nonrreversible Pallet

93
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) Topp deckboards sh hall be fastened to stringerboards s with 1.50 inch n
nails. For quantitties and locations, please see
diagramms above. Top deckboards
d and stringerboards shall be nailed to blocks with 3.25 5 inch nails. These nails are not
shown in the diagrams above, only 1.50 0 inch nails are shown.
s Three naails shall be used d for the 5.50 inch
h blocks and four
nails sh
hall be used for the
t 7.25 inch bloc cks with the nailss to be evenly disstributed throughhout the joint are
ea. No nails shalll
be naileed through the sttrapping slots. Bottom
B deckboarrds shall be naileed to blocks with 2.25 inch nails o or alternatively 3.25
inch naails may be used. Three nails sha all be used for th
he 5.50 inch blocck and four nails shall be used forr the 7.25 inch
blocks with the nails to be evenly distrib
buted throughout the joint area. A All nails shall be no closer than 00.75 inch from
edges and/or ends of boards.
(b) All dimensions are in inches.
(c) Nail locations showwn are generalize ed. Nails shall be staggered to pre event splitting, seee Table 9-4.

Figure 9-17
Nailing Diagrams an
nd Nail Sizzes for Size
es 2, 6,
d 7, Nonrev
and versible Bl ock Pallets
s

94
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table
T 9-5
Cross Reference
R List and CCharacteris
stics,
Parrt No. to Na
ational Stoock Numbe er

Pa
art No., ANSI National Stock Class Type
e Style Siize No. of No. of Species See Figure
Nummber Stringerrs Blocks Class
FSC NIIN (See Part 3)

MH1//9-01SW3240 3990 00-542-3294 1 2 6 1 3 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-10

1, 3, 11, 12, 9-3 [Notes (1)),
MH1//9-02SW4048 3990 00-935-7960 1 2 6 2 3 0
22, 29 (3)]
MH1//9-03SW4048 3990 00-599-5326 1 2 6 2 4 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-3

MH1//9-04SF4048 3990 00-555-0458 1 1 2 2 3 0 3, 11, 12, 22 9-1 [Note (2)]

MH1//9-05SW4048 3990 01-041-8803 1 2 6 2 3 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-3 [Note (1)]

11, 12, 13,
MH1//9-06SW4048 3990 01-320-1436 1 2 6 2 4 0 9-3
22
MH1//9-07SW4848 3990 00-959-0743 1 1 6 3 3 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-12

MH1//9-08SF4860 3990 00-222-1044 1 1 2 4 5 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-14

11, 12, 13,
MH1//9-09SF4444 3990 01-025-1568 1 1 2 5 3 0 9-2
22
MH1//9-10BW4048 3990 00-141-7261 2 3 6 2 0 9 1, 3, 4, 21 9-4, 9-5

MH1//9-11BW4048P
P 3990 00-935-7826 2 3 6 2 0 9 1, 4, 21 9-4, 9-5

MH1//9-12BW3545P
P 3990 01-090-0611 2 3 6 6 0 9 1, 4, 21 9-6, 9-7

MH1//9-13BW4253P
P 3990 01-093-6848 2 3 6 7 0 9 1, 4, 21 9-8, 9-9
1, 3, 11, 12,
MH1//9-14SW4048R
R 3990 01-448-4254 1 2 6 2 3 0 9-15
22, 29
MH1//9-15SF4840 3990 01-105-9584 1 2 2 8 3 0 1, 3, 4, 21 9-13

NOTES S:
(1) Fig
g. 9-3 is a partial 4-way pallet with
h 4 stringers. Parrt No. MH1/9-02SSW4048 and MH H1/9-05SW4048 have 3 stringerss.
(2) Fig
g. 9-1 depicts a partial
p 4-way palleet; however, Parrt No. MH1/9-04S SF4048 describe es a 2-way pallet for procurementt
purposes.
(3) Part No. MH1/9-02S SW4048 has a 30%3 limit on mois
sture content (se
ee Table 9-4) and
d top deckboardss shall be 3 inch
(maxim
mum) apart.

95
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Mandatorry Append
dix A9-I
Referenced Docum
ments
ollowing docu
The fo uments were reviewed
r duriing the prepa
aration of this Part:

ASTM andard Speciffication for Driven Fastene rs: Nails, Spikes, and Staples
M F 1667, Sta

ISPM 15, Internatio

onal Standard
ds for Phytosaanitary Measuures Revision
n of ISPM No. 15
Regulation of Woood Packaging Material in In
nternational T rade

DTL-15011, Pallets,
MIL-D P Materiial Handling, Wood,
W Construction, 4-Way Entry.
Post C

Nonmandattory Appen
ndix A9-A
Referenced Docum
ments
ollowing docu
The fo uments were reviewed
r aration of this Part:
duriing the prepa

M D 1185, Sta
ASTM andard Test Methods
M for Pallets
P and Re ures Employed in Materialss
elated Structu
Handling and Shipping

M D 6199, Sta
ASTM andard Practic
ce for Quality
y of Wood Me mbers of Con
ntainers and P
Pallets

DoD 4140.65M,
4 Co ompliance forr Defense Pac
ckaging: Phyytosanitary Re
equirements ffor Wood
Packa
aging Materia
als (WPM)

ISO 6780,
6 General Purpose Fla
at Pallets for Through
T Tran sit of Goods – Test Metho
ods – Principa
al
Dimennsions and To
olerances

ISO 8611,
8 General Purpose Fla
at Pallets for Through
T Tran sit of Goods – Test Metho
ods –
Amenndment 1: Wing Pallets

MIL-S
STD-147, Pallletized Unit Lo
oads

STD-1660, Do
MIL-S oD Design Crriteria Standarrd for Ammun
nition Unit Loa
ads

Note. Copies of ce ertain DoD do ocuments are available onlline at

https://assist.daps..dla.mil/online
e/start/ or from
m the Docume
ent Automatio
on and Produ
uction Service
es,
Building 4D, 700 Robbins
R Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 1911 1-5094.

96
19

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 10
Pe
erformance Specifica
ation for P
Pallets to b
be Used in
Automated
A Unit Load Material HHandling Eq quipment
1 SCOPE

Part 10
1 of this Stanndard is applicable to any new, used, orr reconditione ed pallets dessigned and
fabric
cated from anyy materials including wood nded for use in
d, plastic, mettal, or paper, that are inten
autommatic unit-load
d material han ms. These auttomatic material handing ssystems include
ndling system
such equipment as s automatic sttorage and re
etrieval warehhouse racks, a automatic palletizers, unit-
load stretch
s wrapping, strappingg, and shrink--wrapping ma achines, autom matic guided vehicles, floww
racks, and chain and roller convveyors.

The use
u of automa atic unit-load material
m hand dling devices is growing in the U.S., Eurrope, and Asia.
The re
equirements of
o pallets useed in these syystems are diffferent from th
he requiremen nts of pallets
used in more manuual systems based
b on “ride
er-on-board” fforked equipmment.

Autommatic systems s are more se ensitive to varriations in palllet quality and

d to deflection
ns and
deformmations which h will occur in
n pallets durin
ng use. [See Ref. (1) in No onmandatory Appendix A10-
B.] When
W both auttomatic and manual
m systemms are used ttogether, palle ets should meeet the
requirrements of thee most sensittive component, which is tyypically an au utomatic devicce. For a palllet
to perrform satisfac
ctorily in autom
matic material handling sysstems, it shou uld meet the ttest criteria fo
or
flatness, size and shape
s uniform
mity, and stiffn
ness required d in this Stand dard.

2 PURPOSE

Part 10
1 contains pa allet performaance and qua ality criteria tha
at will aid pallet producerss and their
customers design, manufacture e, and select pallets
p which will function eefficiently in a
automatic unitt
load material
m handling systems.. The sensitiv vity of automa atic unit-load material hand dling systemss
to varriation in palle
et quality diffe
ers from syste
em to system. Pallets mee eting the qualiity and
perforrmance chara acteristics in this
t standard may not funcction efficientlyy in all such ssystems. [See
Ref. (1) in Nonman ndatory Appendix A10-B.]

3 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

The teerminology ussed in Part 10

0 is in accorda
ance with Parrt 1. The follo
owing specificc definitions a
are
not included in Parrt 1.

matic guided vehicle

autom v (AGV)): automated floor travelin g material ha
andling system
ms used to
move materials thrroughout facilities.

matic palletize
autom er: a machinee which autom es packaged product onto a pallet deckk.
matically place
They are generallyy of three designs: vacuum
m head, row sttripping, or ro
obotic.

autommatic storage and retrieval systems (ASSRS): fully (ridderless) or seemi- (rider-on--board)
autommatic systemss that store an
nd retrieve ma
aterial typicallly consisting o
of racks, pickkup and delive
ery
stations, and storage and retriev
val.

chain conveyors: multiple

m poweered chains, typically
t 0.50 to 1 in. (13 to
o 25 mm) wide, generally 2
gh 5 “strands,” in channels
throug s acting on thee bottom dec k of unit loadss to transportt and transferr
betweeen conveyorss.

19
97

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

flow rack:
r a storag
ge rack in the form of a con
nveyor, eitherr powered or driven by the force of
gravitty.

push--back storage
e racks: gene erally 2 to 5 un
nit-loads-deepp warehouse racking syste
ems using
shuttles moved typ
pically by the force
f of gravity for storing palletized pro
oduct.

roller conveyors: horizontal

h con
nveyors with powered
p on-powered rrollers, typically 2 to 5 in. (5
or no 51
to 1277 mm) in diammeter and spa
aced 3 to 6 in. (76 to 152 m
mm) apart (on n center). Rollers are
typica
ally longer tha
an the dimens
sions of the un
nit loads bein g transported
d.

shuttlle carts: geneerally cable drriven, wheele

ed carts with to
op decks thatt may be elevvated to
transpport unit loads
s within “deepp-bay” wareho ouse racking and sortation
n systems.

skate-wheel conve eyors: narrow w rollers typica

ally 1 in. (25 m n width, of varying
mm) or less in
diameeters, forming
g 2 or 3 “strands” of rollers which suppo rt unitized loaads.

4 PERFORMAN NCE SPECIFIC

CATIONS FO
OR PALLETS
S TO BE USE
ED IN AUTOM
MATIC
UNIT
U LOAD MATERIAL
M HAANDLING SY
YSTEMS

For coonvenience, the

t criteria in paragraphs 4.14 through 4..7 are summa arized in the NNonmandatorry
Appen ndix A10-I. Unless
U otherw
wise specified,, measureme ent shall be made to the ne earest 0.02 in.
(0.5 mm).
m Samplin
ng procedures s are not spec cified becausse they will de epend on (1) tthe level of
conformance requiired by the paallet user; (2) the variabilityy of the palletss; and (3) the
e volume of
pallets used. Oncee these factorrs are known,, standard sta atistical proceedures are ava ailable for
determmining sample size and saampling freque ency.

4.1 Maximum Allowable

A Palllet Size and Shape Varia
ations

Narrow gapss or clearancees between sttructural mem

mbers, moving g componentss of automaticc
unit-load material handling equipment and pallets, rrequire palletss to be consisstent in size
and shape. Nonmandato ory Appendix A10-A
A contain ns diagrams sshowing typiccal design
etween pallets
clearance be s and componnents of auto matic handlinng equipment. [See Ref. (1 1)
in Nonmanda atory Append dix A10-B.]

4.1.1 Test criterria

Variations in pallet size and shape should not excceed the follow wing:
(a) pallet length
l and wiidth +0.13/-0.25 in. (+3.3/-6
6.4 mm) of taarget pallet sizze
(b) pallet height
h +0.13/-0.38 in. (+3.3
3/-9.7 mm) off target pallet height
(c) squareeness 0.50 in. (13 mm) ma aximum differe ence in pallett diagonals

4.1.2 Method off measureme ent

pallet leng t pallet on a flat surface.. Lay an appropriate lengtth T-square
gth (l): Place the
across pallet length. Place carpente er square at o
opposite pallett end and reaad length as
intersection of carpenteer and T-squaares (see Figuure 10-1). No
ote that this in
ncludes
characterisstics such as a bottom enddboard overha ang. It may bbe necessary to measure a at
more than one location.. The maximum length is rrecorded. Te emperature m may affect the
dimensions of plastic orr metal pallets
s.

Therefore, dimensional measuremen nts of plastic o

or metal shou
uld be at a tem
mperature
agreeable to the specifier of the palle
et (22 ±2ºC iss recommended). During u use, expansio
on
action of plasttic or metal pa
and contra allets will be 0
0.1% per 10º temperature change.

19
98

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

pallet width
h (w): The measurement is
i similar to p allet length, e
except measu
ured across th
he
pallet width
h. The maximmum pallet width is recorde
ed.

ght (h): The pallet is placed

pallet heig d on a flat surrface. Place sstraight edge across the
pallet top deck.
d The heeight is the dis
stance from s traight edge tto flat surfacee. Maximum
height is re
ecorded. Notte that solid timber pallets a are typically mmanufactured d green
(moisture content
c greater than 30%) and dry to 10 0-15% moistu ure content duuring use.
Timber pallets may shrink up at 4% in i pallet heigh ht [0.25 in. (6 mm) of a 5 too 7 in. (127 to
o
178 mm) pallet
p height]. If less height variation witth timber palleet is required, it is
suggested that pallets be
b manufactured 4% over height and th hen dried befoore use.
Plywood and
a predried timber pallets will not expe rience significcant shrinkag ge or
dimensional changes.

pallet squa
areness: Meaasure the opp
posite pallet d he top deck, including
diagonals of th
overhangin ng componen
nts, as shown in Figure 10--2. This is ussually measurred with a tap
pe
or straight edge. Repea
at this measu
urement on th e bottom decck.

Figure 10-1
Measu
urement off Pallet Len
ngth (l), W
Width (w), an
nd Height (h),
with a “T” Squarre and Carp penter Squ uare

Figure 10-2
Measuring
M the
t Diagon
nals of Pallet Top and
d Bottom
4.2 Pallet Deck Flatness

Nonflat palle
et decks interffere with the efficient
e opera
ation of some
e palletizing eqquipment and
d
may affect th
he efficient mo ovement of palletized loadds on differentt types of con
nveyors.

19
99

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.2.2 Method off measureme ent

The pallet is placed on a level, flat su
urface. A stra aight edge with a bubble le
evel is laid
across pallet diagonals.. Only pallet components designed to p physically conntact the load
able. Intentio
are applica onal protrusion ns, such as lipps or deformaations on pallet decks whicch
do not inte
erfere with han
ndling efficienncy, may be ig gnored. Mea asure the maxximum deviatiion
between thhe straight ed
dge and these e applicable ccomponents, a as shown in FFigure 10-3.
Turn the pallet over, and repeat the procedure
p onn the bottom d
deck of double e deck palletss,
measuring g only those components designed for p physical conta
act with a floo
or or conveyorr
surfaces.

4.3 sistance of pallet

Slipping res p decks

The slip resisstance of palllet decks affects the efficieent movementt of unit loadss on conveyorrs,
in push-back k racks, and on
o forked equipment. Slip resistance off pallet decks also affects
the stability of
o loads placeed on the pallet, as well ass the stability o of stacks of e
empty pallets
being moved d. The slip re
esistance of thhree surfaces of pallets is iimportant. Th hese are the
top and botto om surfaces ofo the top dec ck, and the bo ottom surface e of the bottom
m deck. The
measure of slip
s resistance e is the static coefficient off friction (COFF).

When condittions of pallet use will alterr the static coe

efficient of fricction, such ass cold
temperatures s or water, the pallet deck surfaces sho ould be tested d in the condittion that
represents thhe least resistance to slipp
ping. Green w wood pallets o or plastic pallets that would
d
be used in frreezers should be tested under the froze en conditionss of use.

Figure 10-3
Schematic
c Diagram Showing the
t Measuring of Palllet Deck F
Flatness
4.3.1 Test criterria
The minimmum allowable
e static coeffic
cient of frictio n shall be 0.1
15.

4.3.2 Method off measureme ent

The Coefficient of Friction (COF) is the ratio of no ormal force (in n this test the empty pallet
weight) to horizontal forrce required too move the p allet from a p position of resst. To test CO OF
under the top
t deck, plac ce bottom surrface of the to op deck of an n empty pallett on two fork
tines longeer than the pa
allet length. Typical
T tines mmeasure 4 in. in width. Atttach a scale to
a pallet edge and gradu ually apply a horizontal
h forcce to the palle
et until first pa
allet moveme ent
is observed. This is sho own schemattically in Figurre 10-4. Reco ord the force required to
move the pallet.
p Repeaat the procedu ure on all sidees and ends o of the pallet d designed for
fork tine en
ntry. Repeat this procedurre for the top surface of the e bottom deck and the
bottom surrface of the boottom deck by y placing the pallet on a flaat steel sheett larger than the
pallet. Calculate the staatic coefficien
nt of surface ffriction using E
Eq. (1) for each surface.

CO
OF = N/H
where:
mal force
N = norm
H = horizontal force

20
00

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 10-4
Schema m of the Slip Resista
atic Diagram ance Tests
s of Pallet D
Decks

4.4 Pallet Comp

ponent Place
ement Variation

This specific arily intended for pallets asssembled with

cation is prima h glues or meechanical
fasteners, annd is not nece
essarily appliccable to mold ed plastic palllets. Large ccomponents o of
pallets shoulld be accurateely placed during manufaccture. If the lo ocation of pallet componen nts
is altered during use, they
y should be re eplaced or reppositioned. M Many automattic handling
systems hav ve optical systtems which automatically p position or staage palletized
d loads based d
on identifying
g the location
n of a pallet co
omponent. Th herefore, if co
omponents arre not
accurately placed, the pallet will not bee correctly possitioned. Also o, misplaced components
may compro omise the design clearance es between ha andling equip pment and thee pallet (see
Nonmandato ory Appendix A10-A).

4.4.1 Test criterria

Componen nts, therefore, shall be with
hin 0.25 in. (6
6 mm) of the ttarget location
n.

4.4.2 Method off measureme ent

Componennt location sha
all be measurred in the follo
owing manne
er:

deckboard ds: deckboard d placement is measured a as the distancce from the end of each
stringer, sttringerboard, or post. Record the place
ement that givves the maximmum deviation
n
from the sp pecified location.

stringers, stringerboard
s ds, and blocks
s: placement is measured as the distannce from the
pallet side or end. Recoord the placement that givves the maxim
mum deviation
n from the
ocation.
specified lo

4.5 ction Under Load

Pallet Deflec

Deflection off a pallet unde

er load depennds on the stifffness of the p
pallet, the spa
ans between
the supports of the handling equipmen nt, the mass uupon the palle et, and the disstribution
pattern of the
e load placedd on the pallett. Excessive deformation w will compromise design
clearance be etween the bo ottom of the pallet
p and the supporting syystem of auto omated
handling equ uipment. This s reduces unit load handlinng efficiency aand may prevvent operationn
of the systemm. These defflections are shown
s schemmatically in Fig
gure 10-5.

20
01

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 10-5
Measuring
g Pallet De
eflection
4.5.1 Test criterria
Maximum design deflec ctions of palle ets under loadd should not e exceed 0.50 in n. (13 mm). T
To
ariations in sttiffness, this deflection
allow for va d limi t should inclu
ude a minimall allowable
clearance between the loaded pallet and the hand dling device o of 0.50 in. (13
3 mm).

4.5.2 Measurem ment method

The actuall load to be pllaced on the pallet
p during u
use should be e used for the
e test.
However, a reasonable facsimile of both b the load and automattic equipmentt can be used if
either or booth are not avvailable. Maxximum deflecttion of the pallet under load can be
measured by placing a straight edge e across the raack, chain, orr other supports, and
measuring g the location of the bottomm pallet deck rrelative to the
e supports. WWhen this
deformatio on varies acrooss the bottomm deck, it is th
he maximum deflection tha at is used.
Automatic equipment de esigned for pallets conformming to this SStandard shou uld be designeed
to allow at least 0.50 in.. (13 mm) clearance betwe een the bottom m of the palle
et under load
and the fraame supports of conveyors s and racks o r the top surfa ace of the shuuttle cart.
When cond ditions during
g use, such as s temperature e and humiditty are known to affect unit
load stiffne
ess, the test should
s be connducted unde r those conditions, which w would result in
n
the greates st deflection.

4.6 Maximum Allowable

A allet Compo nents Underr Load
Defflection of Pa

During some e movements, one or more e componentss of a pallet mmay be subjeccted to stresse
es
that result in deflections of
o part of the pallet
p rather th
han the entire
e pallet. An e
example of thiis
is the deflecttion of the pallet bottom de
eck when movving on skate e wheel type oor chain
conveyors su uch as shown n in Figure 10
0-6.

Figure 10-6
Schematic Diag
gram Showwing Pallet Compone ent Deflectiion
When
W Suppoorted in Au
utomatic HHandling Equipment

20
02

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.6.1 Test criterria

Deflection of pallet commponents shall be limited too 0.25 in. (6 m
mm), and cleaarance betweeen
the pallet and
a the equip pment must be e 0.50 in. (13
3 mm) as in paara. 4.5.1. W
When effects a
are
cumulative e, i.e., component and palleet deflection a
as in para. 4.4, the cumula
ative total
deformatioon is limited to
o 0.50 in. (13 mm).

4.6.2 Method off measureme ent

To measurre maximum deflection
d of pallet
p compon nents under lo oad, place the design-use,
actual load d the pallet wiill support on the pallet andd support the pallet on a faacsimile of the
e
actual auto omatic device e that will support the palle t for a typical duration thatt may occur
during use e. Place straig ght edge acro oss pallet decck. Measure maximum pallet componen nt
deflection below this strraight edge. Repeat
R the m
measurement of all applicab ble
componen nts on top and d bottom deck ks. When con nditions such as temperatu ure or humiditty
will affect stiffness,
s the test should be e conducted under the con ndition of use
e that results in
the greates st deformation.

4.7 Other Pallett Bottom Dec

ck Design Crriteria

The bottom deckd of a pallet will interfac

ce with manyy automatic ha andling device es. When the e
direction of movement
m on roller convey yors is perpen ndicular to the
e bottom deckk component
orientation, the
t width of bottom deck co omponents sh hall exceed thhe center-to-ccenter spacinng
of the rollers. Pallets with
h mesh or ribb bed bottom de eck compone ents may expe erience
difficulty in conveyance on n skate whee el conveyors. Interactions between the mesh or rib
spacing, botttom deck stifffness, unit loa ad weight, and d skate whee el configuratio
on determine
the ability to convey. One e solution is too incorporate solid regionss at least 3 in.. (76 mm) in
width in all bottom deck components. Pallets with lo ow bottom de eck compresssion strength
(typically plastic post desiigns) may exp perience difficculty during conveyance on rollers. If
deflections occur,
o comparrison tests using design loa ads and facsiimilies of the skate wheelss
can be used to determine e whether problems may occcur.

4.8 Pallet Mainttenance Crite

eria

The condition of pallets will

w change during use. Detterioration in a pallet may lead to the loss
ctionality in au
of pallet func utomated han ndling system s. Wood palllets should be e maintained in
accordance with
w the guide elines in Part 3. [See Ref. (2) in Nonma andatory Apppendix A10-B..]
Additionally, the following characteristics of used pa allets are neceessary for effficient
utilization:
(a) No bro oken or loose components
(b) No exp posed fastene ers
(c) No looose stretch wrrap, packaging, etc., that m may interfere w with equipme ent
(d) No com mpanion strin ngers, half striingers, or plu g stringer rep
pairs
(e) Metal repair plates are allowed iff covered with h dark, non-reeflective paintt

The condition of the autom quipment will also change during use.
matic unit load handling eq
For example e, design clearance betwee may also change. It is,
en equipmentt and pallets m
therefore, ne
ecessary to maintain
m the haandling equip
pment as well as the palletss for efficient
operation.

20
03

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Mandatorry Appendiix A10-I

Pe
erformance
e Specifica
ations for P
Pallets to b
be Used in
Automated Unit-Load Material HHandling Eq quipment

Ta
able A10-1
Pe
erformance
e Specifica
ations for P
Pallets to b
be Used in
Automated Unit-Load Material HHandling Eq quipment

Pallet size and shape

e variation
length +0.13/-0
0.25 in. (+3.3/-6 mm)
dth
wid +0.13/-0
0.25 in. (+3.3/-6 mm)
height +0.13/-0
0.38 in. (+3.3/-9.5 mm)
squuareness Diagonaals shall be witthin 0.50 in. (25
5 mm)

ess of decks (su

Flatne upporting no lo
oad) Within 0
0.25 in. (6 mm)) of target levell [Note (1)]

Minimum static coeffficient of surfac

ce friction: Top
p
and boottom surface of
o top deck and d bottom surfacce 0.15
of botttom deck

Component placeme
ent variation Within 0
0.25 in. (6 mm)) of target locattion

mum deflection of the pallet un

Maxim nder load 0.50 in. (13 mm)

Minimum clearance between

b pallet under load and
0.50 in. (13 mm)
handling equipment

mum deflection of pallet compo

Maxim onents under lo
oad 0.25 in. (6 mm)

GENER RAL NOTES:

(a) No standard pallet design is implied d by these recom mmendations. Pa allet design shall be specified by the system
designeer.
(b) In addition,
a the follo
owing requiremen nts must also bee met:
(1) no broken or lo oose componentts
(2
2) no exposed fa asteners
(3
3) no loose stretc ch wrap, packaging, etc., that ma ay interfere with eequipment
(4
4) no companion n stringers, half stringers, or plug stringer repairs
(5
5) metal repair plates are allowed d if covered with dark, non-reflecttive paint
(6
6) bottom deck components
c shouuld span the centter-to-center disttance between ro ollers and skate wwheels
(7
7) pallets with me esh or ribbed botttom deck compo onents may expe erience difficulty in conveyance o on skate wheel
coonveyors. Interactions between the t mesh or rib spacing,
s bottom d deck stiffness, un
nit load weight, a
and skate wheel
coonfiguration determine the ability to convey. One solution is to inccorporate solid re egions at least 3 in. (76 mm) widtth
in all bottom deck components.
(8
8) pallets with loww bottom-deck co ompression stren ngth (typically pla
astic post designns) may experien nce difficulty in
coonveyance on rollers

NOTE:
(1) Intentional prrotrusions exceed
ding these limits may be accepta onsent by both buyer and seller.
able by mutual co

20
04

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

No
onmandatoory Appen dix A10-A
Typical Cllearances Between Componen
C nts and Bettween Pallets and
Comp ponents off Automate
ed Unit Loa
ad Handlin
ng Equipme ent
0
0.88 to 2.0 in. (22
2 to 51 mm)
0.5
50 in. (13 mm)

2.00 in. (51 mm) side to side ack

Ra 0
0.88 to 2.0 in. (22
2 to 51 mm)
AS/RS tine

0.75 in. (19 mm)

0.50 in. (13 mm)

m side to side
e
0.63 in. (16 mm)

0.50 i n. (13 mm) side to side

Fig
gure A10-1
Typical Cllearances Between Componen
C nts and Bettween Pallets and
Comp ponents off Automate
ed Unit Loa
ad Handlin
ng Equipme ent

No
onmandato
ory Appen dix A10-B
Reeferences
Devellopment of Pe
erformance Specification
S fo
or Pallets use
ed in Automatted Unit-Load
d Material
Handling Equipment. White, M..S. and J.W. Clarke,
C 1997..
sher: Center for Unit-Load
Publis d Design, Virg
ginia Tech, Bla A 24061-0503
acksburg, VA 3

20
05

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 11
Plasttic and Plastic Comp
posite Palle
ets
1 SCOPE

Part 11
1 (referred too as “Part”) off the MH1 sta andard (referre ed to as “Stan
ndard”) applie
es to pallets
made e primarily of plastic,
p plastic
c composites,, or plastic coomponents eitther new or re epaired.
Criterria contained in this Standa ard are applic cable only at tthe completion of manufaccture or repairr
of pre
eviously manu ufactured plas stic or plastic composite pa allets.

This Part
P of the Sta andard is pressented in threee subparts: Subpart I is tthe Prescriptivve Standard,
whichh concerns the e manufacture of the pallett. This Subpa art includes p
pallet and pallet-componen nt
descrriptions, materials, fastenin
ng and connec ction descripttions, workmaanship criteriaa, dimensiona
al
tolera
ances and rep pair practices. Subpart II iss the Perform ance Standard, which con ncerns the
functionality of the pallet. This Subpart
S conta
ains referencees to the testiing of physica
al and
computer models to t assist manufacturers, distributors, an nd users to deetermine the p performance
level of
o a specified pallet. Subp part III covers Marking.

P does not address the safety problems, if any, asssociated with

This Part h the use of p
plastic pallets..
It is th
he responsibillity of the use
er of this Part to establish a
appropriate sa afety and hea
alth practices
and determine the applicability of o regulatory limitations priior to its use.

y dispute rega
In any arding dimens
sions of comp efects, the U. S. Customaryy Units are
ponents or de
goverrning.

Plastic pallets are manufactured d or repaired for the sole p

purpose of sto oring and/or trransporting
materrial. Under noo circumstanc ces should anny person stan nd, step, or le
ean upon them m or otherwisse
use th
hem for suppo ort unless the
ey are specific
cally designed d for such usaage. The pallet user has tthe
obliga
ation and respponsibility to inspect for da
amage prior too each pallet use and to de etermine that
the pa
allet design is
s appropriate for that partic
cular unit load
d application.

2 PURPOSE
The purpose
p of Paart 11 of this Standard
S is to establish nattionally recog gnized minimu um quality
requirrements for th
he principal ty
ypes of plasticc pallets and tto provide a bbasis for common
underrstanding amo ong manufactturers, recond ditioners, dist ributors, and users of palle
ets.

3 REFERENCED
R D AND RELA
ATED DOCUM
MENTS

ASTM D11
185 Staandard Test Methods
M for P
Pallets and Re elated Structu
ures employedd
in materials
m handling.
ISO 8611-1 Pallets for material handling – flat pallets – Part 1: Tesst methods.
ISO 8611-2 Pallets for Materials handlingg – flat palletss. Part 2. Perrformance
reqquirements an nd selection o
of tests.
ISO 8611-3 Pallets for materials handlingg – flat palletss. Part 3. Maaximum workinng
loaads.
ssist the user of Part 11, other related sttandards are listed in Nonm
To as mandatory Ap ppendix A1I-B
B.

Subp
part I PRES
SCRIPTIVE
E STANDA
ARD
4 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY
For th
he purposes of
o this docume
ent the definittions and term
minology in M
MHI/ANSI MH1 Part 1 shall
apply.

20
06

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5 CLASSIFICAT
C TION

5.1 Use Catego

ories

5.1.1 Reusable
Pallet designed for repe
eated uses in more than on
ne unit load.

5.1.2 Single usee

Pallet designed for the storage
s and distribution
d off one unit load
d.

5.2 Types

5.2.1 Type 1, twwo-way entryy

Pallet with openings acc
cepting comm
mon handling equipment, ((pallet truck, ffork lift, etc.)
o opposite end
only at two ds.

Figure 11-1
Type
e 1, Two-w
way Entry PPlastic Palllet
5.2.2 Type 2, pa artial four-wa
ay entry
Pallet with openings at both ends and sides with llimiting accesssibility of ope
enings to
common handling
h equip
pment.

Figure 11-2
Type 2, Partial Fou
ur-way Enttry Plastic Pallet

20
07

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.2.3 Type 3 fulll four-way entry

Pallet with openings at both opposite
e ends and sid
des with acce
essibility of all openings no
ot
limited to common
c handdling equipmeent.

Figure 11-3
Type 3, Full Fourr-way Entry
y Plastic P
Pallet

5.3 Styles

5.3.1 Nestable
Pallet without a bottom deck having hollow cups o or other suitab
ble spacers aallowing those
e
her for stackin
of adjacent pallets to fit into each oth ng. There are e two styles o
of nestable
estable” and Mirror
pallets, “ne M Image Legs

Ne
estable Miirror Image

Figure 11-4
Nesttable Palle
ets

5.3.2 Stackable e (non-nestab ble) pallet

Pallets with or without bottom
b decks that are not nnestable. The ere are a feww variations off
stackable pallets that in
nclude picture
e frame stringe
er pallets, perimeter string
ger pallets, leg
g
pallets, double deck pallets, and runner pallets.

20
08

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Picture
e Frame String
ger Perime
eter Stringer

Leg
gs Double
e Deck

Ru
unner

Figure 11-5
kable Palle
Stack ets

20
09

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.4 Top Deck Design Featurres

5.4.1 Solid surfface

at has no openings to perm
A deck tha mit flow of liqu
uids or particu
ulates through
h the deck.

5.4.2 Open decks

A pallet de ng structures exposed and having open
eck with ribbin nings through the deck top
and/or botttom surfaces.

5.4.3 Non-skid surfaces

on of pallet de
Modificatio ecks that incre ease slip resisstance of pacckaging on paallets and
pallets sup
pported by diffferent materia als handling e
equipment an nd shipping de evices.
Generally these are app plied to the to
op and bottomm surface of th he top deck. They can be in
the form off coatings or fixtures
f whichh increase thee static surfacce coefficient of friction.
Textured or
o roughened surface may be applied to o improve slipp resistance.

210

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 11-6
Photoggraph of Ru
ubberized Spray Coa ating
of a Pallet Dec
ck to Reduc
ce Slippingg of Packa
aged Produ
uct

Figure 11-7
Pho
otograph off Rubber Grommet
G a
and Texturiing in Palle
et
Deck to Reduc ce Slipping
g of Producct

211

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.4.4 Cargo lipss

Vertical pro
otrusion of a pallet deck us
sed to stabilizze stacked pa
allets by nesting.

Figure 11-8
Partia
al Cargo Liips
5.4.5 Inserts
Componen nts placed into
o the decks of
o plastic palle
ets which rein
nforce, stiffen,, or otherwise
e
improve th
he performancce of plastic pallets.
p

Figure 11
1-9
Photograph of Inserrts Placed in Inside o
of Pallet De
eck

212

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.5 Pallet Sizes and Designs

Each of the classified

c palllets is availab
ble in many si zes and desig
gns. Therefo
ore, size and
design details need to be specified.

5.5.1 Pallet lenggth

In full 4-wa
ay, rectangula
ar, pallets the length is the longer dimen nsion. In 2-wway and partiaal
4-way palleets the length
h corresponds s to the dimennsion of the sside with restrricted access..
In full 4-wa
ay square pallets, pallet len
ngth and widtth are not spe ecified.

5.5.2 Pallet width

The length
h of the top de
eck in the dire
ection oppositte of the palle
et length.

6 MATERIALS
M

Plastic materials are not limited by this stand

dard. Howeveer, properties of plastics va
ary and
thereffore selection of material should
s consider the manufa
acturing proceess and cond ditions of palle
et
use.

6.1 Thermoset Resins

These resinss hardened by y a heat or caatalyst activatted polymerization processs. While these
materials are
e relatively stiiff and expens
sive, their pro
operties are unaffected by moderate
temperature changes. Th hese resins ca annot be reprrocessed and d are seldom uused for plasttic
pallet manuffacture.

6.2 Thermoplas
stic Resin

These are po olymerized re

esins with properties affectted by temperrature change es. They are
typically less
s expensive th
han thermose etting resins a
and are the mmost commonly used for
pallet manuffacture. High Density Poly yethylene HDP PE and Poly P Propylene (PP) are the mo ost
common thermoplastic resins used forr pallet manuffacture. Thesse resins reprresent a
balance of co ost and prope
erties. Other thermoplasticc resins occasionally used for pallet
manufacture e include: Pollyvinyl Chlorid
de (PVC), Pollyethylene Te erephthalate ((PET),
Polyamides (nylon), Polys styrene (PS), Polycarbona ates, acrylonitrile – butadiene – styrene
(ABS) and Polyphenylene
P e Oxide (PPO O).

6.3 Composite Plastic Mate

erials

Occasionallyy various fibro

ous materials are added too plastics to im
mprove prope
erties, reduce
costs, and/or reduce dens sity or weight. The most ccommon fiberss used are glaass or wood.
These are offten called co
omposite mate erials.

6.4 Recycled Pllastics

These plastic
cs composedd of post cons
sumer materia
al or recovere
ed material on
nly or both. T
The
number of tim
mes the mate
erial has been
n reprocessed
d may affect p
physical propeerties.

6.5 Virgin Plasttics

A plastic material in the fo

orm of pellets, granular, poowder that has not been su
ubjected to usse
or processing other than that
t required for the initial manufacture..

213

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.6 Plastic Mate

erial Treatme
ents or Addittives

6.6.1 UV inhibittors
Additives to
t plastics tha
at reduces the
e effect of ultrraviolet radiattion on the pro
operties of the
e
plastics.

6.6.2 Fire or flame retardant

Additives that
t reduce th
he heat releasse rate and/orr flame spread rate of plasstic exposed to
fire. Thesee additives may also retard
d ignition.

6.6.3 Pigments
Liquid or powdered
p matterials which alter
a and/or m niform the color of plastic
make more un
materials.

6.6.4 Blowing agent-nitroge

a en gas
Forms a ce
ellular structu
ure which changes propertiies and reducces resin volu
ume.

6.6.5 Cold temp perature additives

Additives that
t increase the impact re
esistance of p
plastics at low
w temperaturess.

6.6.6 Plastic filllers

Materials added
a to plas
stics that are primarily
p used
d to reduce co
osts by displa
acing or
reducing plastic
p materia
al and not inteended to alterr performance
e.

6.6.7 Inserts
Componennts placed in the
t pallet to reinforce,
r stre
engthen and/o
or stiffen the p
pallet.

6.6.8 Hybrid pa allet

A pallet co
ontaining components mad
de of different materials.

7 MANUFACTU
M ODS
RING METHO

7.1 ure Injection Molding

High Pressu

Plastic resin is fed through a rotating screw

s and me elted. The hott plastic is forrced at high
pressure intoo a closed mo old to form thee shape of the
e product. Th
he mold is cooled, the
plastic solidiffies and the part
p is remove ed from the mmold.

7.2 Low Pressu

ure Structura
al Foam Mold
ding

The process is similar to high

h pressuree injection mo olding howeveer a foaming ((blowing) age
ent
or an inert ga
as is injected with the plastic resin into tthe mold. Th
his is a commoon technique
used for plasstic pallet man
nufacture.

Fig
gure 11-10
A Cut-Away
C of a Plastic Pallet
P Sectio
on Shows tthe Foamed
d
Interior of
o Ribs fromm Structureed Foam Moolding

214

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7-3 Thermoform
ming

Shaping one e or two extrud

ded sheets off heat softene
ed plastic in a mold by the use of vacuu
um
or positive pressure. Theermoforming is
s a common m method of pa allet manufactturing.

Fig
gure 11-11
A Cut-A--Way View
w of a Twin Sheet The
ermoforme
ed Pallet Se
ection

7.4 Rotational Molding

M

Resin is plac
ced in a mold then the mold is placed in
n a heating ch
hamber and ro otated biaxially.
The mold is cooled and thhe molded pa
art is removed d. Cycle timess are longer tthan injection
molding and thermoformin ng.

7.5 Compressio
on Molding

Resins in mo
olten form are
e placed into the
t mold. Th e componentts of the mold d are closed
(compressedd). The resin solidifies by cooling
c or by polymerizatio
on if thermose
etting resins
are used.

7.6 Blow Moldin

ng

A preformed or “parision” plastic structture, while mo

olten, is inflate
ed or reshape
ed with air
side a female mold cavity.
pressure, ins

215

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7.7 Profile Extru

usion

Viscous moltten resin is pu

ushed under pressure thro
ough a die thaat shapes the object along
two dimensio
ons of width and
a height. The
T componen nt is continuo
ous in length. The extruded
components are cooled and cut to lenggth and then aassembled in nto the shape of a pallet.

Fig
gure 11-12
Exa
ample of a Pallet Ass
sembled with
w Profile Extended Plastic Co
omponents
s

8 ASTENING OF
FA O PLASTIC PALLET CO
OMPONENTS
S

8.1 Snap Fits

A connectionn of interlocking clips forme

ed by pressinng two compo onents togetheer. In plastic
pallets, deck
ks are sometimmes connecte ed to posts ussing snap fit cconnections.

216

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Fig
gure 11-13
3
Exam
mple of a sn
nap fitting between a pallet dec
ck and a po
ost
8.2 Welding

Pallet compoonents are fussed together by melting thee surfaces to be joined. A hot plate can n
be applied to
o the surfaces
s to soften the
e plastics. Ul trasonic radia
ation or vibrattion welding
can be used to heat the surfaces.
s

8.3 Adhesives

Glues may be
b used to hold together plastic pallet co
omponents. A
Adhesives ma
ay be hot
melts, thermosetting glues, or strong solvents.

8.4 Mechanical Connections

This includes
s use large grroup of bolts, screws, or naails. These faasteners can be used to
connect extruded plastic parts
p during pallet
p assemb assembly of plastic pallets
bly. For the a
with metal orr plastic connectors, fasten
ner quality an
nd fastening sschedule shall be in
compliance with
w ANSI/MH H1 Part 3 Sec ction 6.2.4 and
d 6.2.4.1.

9 WORKMANSH
W HIP

9.1 Componentt Placement

When conne ecting extrude

ed plastic com
mponents toge
ether, placem
ment shall be a
according to
section I-6.2.1 of MH1 Paart 3.

217

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

9.2 Pallet-Size Deviation

D

The pallet siz

ze shall be lim
mited to +¼ in. (+6 mm) a nd –½ in. (-133 mm) of the target
dimension, as
a measured at specific po oints along the
e pallet length
h and width. The pallets
must be flat on their top and
a bottom su urfaces to with
hin ¼ in. (6 m
mm) maximum m deviation fro
om
o-corner straig
the corner-to ght line.

9.3 Squareness
s

Square or reectangular palllets shall be limited to 1.5%

% or 1 in. (25
5 mm) differennce in the
measured length of the tw
wo principal to op-deck diago onals of square part of palllet, whichever
is greater.

utomatic mate
Note: For au erial handling systems, reffer to part 10.

10 REPAIR
R AND REPLACEMENT OF DAM
MAGED PAL LETS

Prope er repair and/o ng of pallets is an environm

or the recyclin mentally consscientious pra
actice, which
also in
ncreases unitt load materiaal handling effficiency and rreduces the ccost of producct storage and
d
distrib
bution. All pallets should be
b removed frrom service a nd be repaire ed, or properlyy disposed off, if
determmined to be unsafe
u and da
angerous to persons
p or gooods. Plastic p
pallets should
d be repaired or
replacced when dam mage significa antly reducess pallet streng
gth and/or functionality.

10.1 Damage to Be Repaired

Pallets should be repaired

d or the pallett should be re
emoved from service and rrecycled if the
e
following con
nditions apply
y:

1 Missing components
10.1.1

218

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10.1.2
2 Broken coomponents
Broken implies that the component is
s in two or mo
ore pieces, orr as a result o
of the break,
has negligible residual strength.
s

10.1.3
3 Completely separated
d connections between co
omponents

10.2 Quality of Replacement

R Componentts

Replacemen
nt components s shall be equ
uivalent in qu ality and perfformance to th
he original
components being replaced.

10.3 Repair Work

kmanship

Workmanshiip shall conform to criteria in section I-8

8.

Subp
part II PER
RFORMANC
CE STAND
DARD
11 CONDITIONS
C OF PALLET USE

The use
u conditions s which palletts shall sustain during unit--load materials handling va
ary. Thereforre,
the co
onditions of us
se shall be sppecified, inclu
uding perform ance levels. Where condiitions of use
vary, the condition which resultss in the highest stress leve
els shall be ussed as a basiss of
mining performance.
determ

11.1 Load Conditions

1 Descriptio
11.1.1 on
Provide the e description of the packag
ges, containe
ers or units to be placed on
n the pallet (i.e.
bags, boxe es, barrels, bu
ulk containers
s, blocks and machinery inncluding the u
use of load
stabilizers)).

219

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

11.1.2
2 Measurem ments and be earing areas
Provide meeasurements and location of bearing arreas for the packages, con
ntainers or units
to be place
ed on the pallet and the pa
allet top and b
bottom decks

11.1.3
3 Load leve
els and variattions
Provide ma
aximum and average
a load levels and lo
oad level varia
ations.

11.2 Support Conditions

11.2.1
1 Maximum unsupporte ed free span
Indicate maximum unsu gth and width when placed
upported free span along t he pallet leng d in
warehouse e storage rack
ks or on conv
veyors.

11.2.2
2 Unit loadss in a stack
Indicate maximum number of unit-loa
ads in a stackk.

11.2.3
3 Fork tiness
Indicate the geometry of
o fork tines us
se to lift and m
move unit loa
ads as well ass spacing
between foork tines.

11.2.4
4 Sling desiign
Indicate the design and geometry of slings if used
d for lifting unit loads.

12 MEASURE
M OF
F PALLET PE
ERFORMANC
CE

12.1 Strength

verage load causing

This is the av c failure
e from replica
ate tests for e
each support ccondition and
d
each load coondition. Failu
ure can be duue to fracture of a pallet orr pallet compo
onent or
excessive de eformation.

12.2 Design of Safe Working Load Levels

s

These are leess than strenngth when adjusted for variiation in mate
erials, manufa
acture, and
conditions off pallets use as
a well as the
e relative conssequence of ffailure. These
e safe workin
ng
load levels are
a typically ex xpressed as:

1 Dynamic capacity
12.2.1 c
Capacity when
w supporte ed on fork tine
es, AGV deckks or conveyo ors
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.4
8 Bending te est on pallet – forktine sup
pport
ISO 8611 Fork lifting tes
st

2 Static cap
12.2.2 pacity
Capacity during
d wareho
ouse block sta ack storage. The capacityy is determine
ed as the lowe
er
result of th
he bending or compression n tests
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.3
8 compressiion
Section 8.5
8 bending te est on pallet d
deck
ISO 8611 Test
T 3 Compression test
Test 4 Stacking test 4a, 4b

3 Racking capacity
12.2.3 c
Capacity when
w supporteed in free spa
an warehouse e racks.
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.4
8 Bending te est of pallet – rack supportt
ISO 8611 Test
T 1 Bendin
ng test 1a, 1bb

22
20

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

12.3 Stiffness

This is the re
elative deform
mation of a pallet or pallet ccomponent un nder load and d depending
support cond ditions. Meassurements of stiffness inclu ude relative d
deflection, stra
ains, as
deformation per unit of ma ass or load on the pallet.

12.4 Durability

This is a meaasure of resis

stance to roug
gh handling. Measuremen nts may includ de cumulative e
impact energgy prior to failure or numbe
er of handling
g cycles prior tto failure or ssignificant losss
of strength and
a functionality.

12.5 Other functionality requ

uirements

These may include pallet weight, pallet size, locatio

on and size off openings, firre performancce,
resistance to
o biological co
ontamination, etc.

13 TEST PROCEDURES

13.1 Testing Of Physical

P Mod
dels or Proto
otypes

When possibble, actual loa

ads and suppo
orts should bee used in the test. Howevver, load and
support analogs, based ono sound engineering princciples, are accceptable. The
e following test
e recognized:
methods are

1 ISO-8611 “General Purrpose Flat Palllets for Throu

13.1.1 ugh Transit off Goods – Tesst Methods.”
nal Standards
Internation s Organization
n (ISO). C. P . 56, CH 1211, Geneva 20 0, Switzerland
d.

2 ASTM D-1185 “Standa

13.1.2 ard Test Methods for Palletts and Relate
ed Structures Employed in
Material Handling and Shipping.”
S Am
merican Socie ety for Testing
g and Materia
als (ASTM),
100 Barr Harbor
H Drive, West Conshoohocken, PA 19428-2959.

13.2 Testing of Computer

C Mo
odels

Structural annalyses can be performed using computter models off pallet structuures. These
computer mo odels must bee capable of simulating
s thee load and support conditio
ons as well ass
the pallet structure and th
he properties of
o the plastic materials.

13.3 Field Trials

It is recommended that prrototype palleet designs havving been tessted according

g to section
13.1 or 13.2,, be tested in an actual use
e situation to verify perform
mance.

Note: Test criteria

c may be established
d by the userss of this stand
dard.

22
21

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Subp
part III MARKING
Non
n-Mandatorry

14 MARKING
M ME
ETHODS AND
D LOCATION
N

Marking
M can bee molded or embossed
e into the surface e, painted or in
n the form of tags. The
marking
m shall be
b readable fo or the duratioon of the palleets expected sservice life. T
The location o
of
minimum
m mark king informatio
on is at the diiscretion of th
he pallet manu ufacturer.

15 MARKING
M INF
FORMATION

15.1 Date of Man

nufacture

Date of Manufacture (two a two-digit year) for example: 10-08,, 09-07.

o-digit month and

15.2 Manufacture
er Identificattion

Manufacture
e identification
n (for example
e ABC, XYZ, A
AB-XY).

15.3 SPI Resin Code

C

15.4 Ownership Identification

n

15.5 Certification
ns

For example
e UL2335.

15.6 Identificatio
on of Reinforrced Pallets “R”.
“

22
22

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 12
Co
orrugated/P
Paper-Bas
sed Pallets

1 SCOPE

Part 12
1 of this Stan
ndard appliess to pallets maade primarily of corrugated
d/paper-basedd board
constructed of krafft paper. The criteria conta
ained in the S
Standard are a
applicable only after the
completion of the pallet
p manufacturing proce ess.

Part 12
1 includes thhe referenced standards, definitions and
d terminologyy, materials, tyypical styles
availa
able in the ma
arket and recy
ycling.

This Standard
S does not address s any safety concerns
c asso ociated with tthe use of corrrugated/pape er-
basedd pallets. It is
s the responsiibility of the user to determ
mine the appro opriate safetyy and health
practices and determine the app plicability of reegulatory limiitations prior tto use.

y disputes reg
In any garding dimen
nsions of com defects, the U .S. Customarry Units are
mponents or d
goverrning.

Corrugated/paper-based pallets s are manufac ctured for the sole purpose e of storing an
nd/or
transpporting material and goodss. Under no circumstances
c s should any person stand d, step or lean
n
upon them or otherwise use the em for supporrt unless they are specifica ally engineere ed and
manufactured for such
s usage. The
T pallet use er has the obbligation and rresponsibility to inspect forr
dama age prior to us
sage to ensurre that the pallet design an d construction is appropriaate for the
partic
cular load bein
ng stored and
d shipped.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Pa
art 12 of this Standard
S is to establish nattionally recog
gnized minimuum quality
requirrements for thhe principal ty
ypes of corruggated pallets aand to provide a basis for common
underrstanding amo ong manufactturers, distributors and use ers of corrugaated/paper-baased pallets.
The ability
a to fold and
a form the basic
b corruga ated material ccommonly ussed there are an infinite
numbber of possible e design variaations. This part
p will descrribe the basic categories off designs in thhe
realm
m of paper-bas sed pallets.

3 RELATED
R STA
ANDARDS

ollowing is a list of publicattions applicab

The fo ble in this Sta
andard:

ASTMM D 1185, Meethods of Testting Pallets an

nd Related Sttructures Emp ployed in Matterials Handlin
ng
and Shipping
S
ASTMM D 4332, Conditioning Co
ontainers, Pac ckages, or Pa
ackaging Com mponents for T Testing
ASTMM D 472, Stan
ndard Specific
cation for Corrrugated and SSolid Fiberbooard Sheet Stock (containe er
grade
e) and Cut Shapes
ASTMMD 6055, Stanndard Test Methods for Me echanical Ha ndling of Unittized Loads a
and Large
Shipp
ping Cases an
nd Crates Pubblisher: American Society ffor Testing an nd Materials
(ASTM
M), 100 Barr Harbor Drive,, West Consh hohocken, PAA 19428-2959 9

223

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ASTMM C363 Stand dard Test Metthod for Delam mination Stre ngth of Honeycomb Core Materials
ISO 534,
5 Paper an nd Board-Dete ermination of Thickness an nd Bulk Density or Apparent Sheet
Densiity
ISO 1924-1, Paperr and Board-D Determination n of Tensile P
Properties
ISO 2493,
2 Paper and
a Board-De etermination ofo Resistance to Bending
ISO 2759,
2 Board-D Determination n of Bursting Strength
S
ISO 3034,
3 Corruga ated Fiberboa ard-Determina ation of Thicknness
ISO 3676,
3 Unit Loa ad Sizes-Dimensions
ISO 5629,
5 Paper and
a Board-De etermination ofo Bending Stiiffness-Reson nance Method d
ISO 5638,
5 Solid Fiberboard-Dettermination off Grammage of Single Layyers
ISO 6780,
6 General Purpose Fla at Pallets for Through
T Transit of Goods--Principal Dim
mensions and
Tolera
ances
ISO 8611,
8 General Purpose Fla at Pallets for Through
T Transit of Goods--Test Methodss
ISO 8611-2,
8 Palletts for Materials Handling - Flat Pallets - Part 2 : Perfo
ormance Requirements an nd
Selec
ction of Tests
ISO 8611-3,
8 General-Purpose FlatF Pallets for Through Tra ansit of Good
ds – Maximum m Working Load
ISO 12776, Slip Sh heets
sher: International Organiz
Publis zation for Stanndardization ((ISO), 1 rue d
de Varembe, C Case Postale
e
56, CH1211, Gene eve 20, Switze erland/Suisse e
4, Tensile Breaking Propertties of Paper and Paperbo
T 494 oard
Publis
sher: Technic cal Association of the Pulp and Paper In ndustry (TAPPPI), Technology
Park/A
Atlanta, P.O. Box 105113, Atlanta, GA 30348-5113
3
Code of Federal Regulations Tittle 21 Volume e 3, Food and d Drugs Chap pter I--Food and Drug
Adminnistration Deppartment of Health and Human Servicess, Sub-Chaptter B Food forr Human
Consuumption, revis sed April 1, 2006.
ANSI MH1 Pallets,, Slip Sheets, and other ba ases for unit lo
oads- Part 8 S
Slip Sheets
Fibre Box Associattion, Fibre Bo ox Handbook
Fibre Box Associattion, Repulpa ability Standarrd

4 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

Definiitions and term

minology whic
ch are include of this Standard apply to Pa
ed in Part 1 o art 12.
Additional items arre given below
w.

4.1 Paper-based
d Pallet

A pallet mad
de of a paper product used as a base fo or assembling, handling, sttoring, and
These pallets can be either designed for
transporting goods and prroducts in uniit load form. T
single use orr reusable applications.

4.2 ed Pallet Load

Paper-Base d Surface

That portion of the paper--based pallet under the un it load of goo ds or productts also referreed
to as the pallet deck. The surface can n be solid or cconfigured witth ventilation holes of
appropriate size
s and location, when airr circulation iss required. Th
he load surfacce may also
serve as an integral comp ponent of the total packagi ng design, esspecially when die cut to
accommodate the produc ct being handlled. The dec k could range e from solid fiberboard,
single/doublee/triple wall co
orrugated, or honeycomb ssheets. The single and/orr double wall
corrugated sheets
s are ofte
en cross lamiinated to crea ate a more isootropic sheet to meet deckk
stiffness requirements.

224

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.3 Paper-Base
ed Pallet Tabs
s (Slip Sheetts)

Those parts of the Single and Reusablle Corrugated d/Paper-Base ed Pallet that e
extend beyonnd
the unit load dimensions to
t facilitate material handli ng by a pullinng device equ uipped with a
gripper jaw. In some locales, the terms ab. See Part 8
s lip or flap arre used to dessignate the ta
n of slip sheetts.
for a complete description

4.4 ed Pallet Bloc

Paper-Base cks

Typically a square or rectangular struccture of varyinng height, width and depth made from
laminated shheets of corrugated, solid fiberboard,
f or paper honeyycomb. Spiral wound coress
are another possible block material. Blocks are glue ed to the top aand bottom surfaces of thee
pallet and prrovide the top
p to bottom strructural strenggth for the pa
allet. A few de
esigns also use
corrugated members
m to fo
orm a top surfface picture frrame supportt across the bblocks.

4.5 ed Pallet Run

Paper-Base nners/Stringe
ers/Struts

Typically a re
ectangular strructure of varrying height, w
width and leng
gth made fromm laminated
sheets of corrugated, solid fiberboard, or paper hon neycomb. Runners/Stringe ers/Struts are
ottom surfaces of the pallett and provide
glued to the top and/or bo e the top to bo
ottom structurral
strength for the
t pallet.

5 MATERIALS
M

Typical materials used

u for the manufacture
m of
o a Paper-Ba
ased Pallet tho
ose described
d below.

5.1 Corrugated Fiberboard/Paperboard

Corrugated fiberboard/pa
f perboard is a board with kkraft liner-board facings bonded to a flutted
or corrugatedd medium pro oviding adequ uate tensile a nd stacking sstrength. The board is often
n
referred to in
n terms of boa
ard test (ECT or Burst) and d/or basis we ight (liner/me
edium weightss
and flute size
e). Table 12-1
1 is a limited guideline
g list of board grad
des and test. Numerous
board grades s may be con nstructed and still meet the e board tests.

225

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Table 12-1
Typical Corrugate
ed Board Specificatio
S ons used in Paper Pa
allets

ECTT Burst P
Potential Boa
ard Grade
23 125 26-Med-26
6
26 150 33-Med-33
3
33-Med-42
2
29 175
33-Med-35
5HP
42-Med-42
2
32 200
35HP-Med
d-35HP
Single Wall
W
42-Med-69
9
40 250
35HP-Med
d-56HP
69-Med-69
9
44 275
56HP-Med
d-56HP
90-Med-90
0
55 350
74HP-Med
d-74HP

42 200 33-Med-26
6-Med-33
42-Med-26
6-Med-42
48 275
35HP-Med
d-26-Med-35HP
42-Med-42
2-Med-43
51 350
35HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--35Hp
Double wall
w 69-Med-42
2-Med-69
61 400
56HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--56HP
90-Med-42
2-Med-90
71 500
74HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--74HP
90-Med-90
0-Med-90
82 600
74HP-Med
d-74HP-Med--74HP

42-Med-42
2-Med-42-Me
ed-42
67 700
35HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--35HP-Med-3
35HP
69-Med-42
2-Med-42-Me
ed-69
80 900
56HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--35HP-Med-5
56HP
Triple wall
w
90-Med-42
2-Med-42-Me
ed-90
90 1100
74HP-Med
d-35HP-Med--35HP-Med-7
74HP
90-Med-90
0-Med-90-Me
ed-90
112
2 1300
74HP-Med
d-74HP-Med--74HP-Med-7
74HP
Med - the
e medium co
ould be spec
cified as 26/3 3/36/40 in A//B/C flute

226

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

To obtain ad
dequate performance wherre high moistu ure conditionss exist, the flu
utes and
paperboard facings,
f impre
egnated or co
oated with a w
water-repellennt material, shhall be bonde
ed
to each other using a wea
ather-resistan
nt (see ASTM D 4727) adh esive.

5.2 Solid Fiberb

board

Solid fiberbo
oard is defined
d as plies of paperboard
p la
aminated toge
ether to provid
de adequate
strength.

xpressed in po
Caliper is ex oints, where 1 point = 0.0001 in. (0.025 m mm). To obtain adequate
performance e where high moisture
m condditions exist, tthe plies of th
he slip sheet a
are
impregnated d or coated with a water-repellent materrial and may b be bonded to each other
using a moissture-resistant adhesive

5.3 Solid Fiber Cores

Spiral-woundd Kraft paper tubes or corees may be a n necessary addition to the ssingle use or
reusable pallet for extrem
me loads. In orrder to mainta
ain recyclable
e status for the
e single or
multi-use pallet, the combbined weight of
o the cores pper pallet mayy not exceed 3 al
3% of the tota
pallet weightt. The core must be constructed from m materials approoved for Old Corrugated
Cartons (OCCC) recycling standards.

5.4 b
Honeycomb

Honeycomb is formed by laminating krraft sheets intto a hexagona al cell pattern

n which utilize
es
h in the load bearing
flute strength b directtion. Honeyco omb may be use in combination with
corrugated too form a Singgle Use and Reusable
R Corrrugated/Pape
er-Based Palle et. Uses mayy
include forming the top de eck, blocks orr stringers.

Honeycomb is similar to corrugated

c bo
oard as there are two linerss separated b
by an inner
structure. Th
he inner structture of honeyycomb is a cellled structure formed from vertical stripss
of glued krafft paper that, when
w pulled open,
o form a honeycomb sstructure. Ho oneycomb is
specified by the cell diameter and the overall
o thickn ess of the bo
oard. Typical cell diameterrs
ranged from 1 to 2 inches s with board th
hickness from
m 0.5 to 4 inchhes. The line
ers and vertica al
so be specifie
strips can als ed as the basis weight of th
he componen nts.

Figure 12-1
Hone
eycomb Pa
ad (left) and Sample w with Liner Removed to
Expose
e Honeyco omb Cell Sttructure (right)

227

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5.5 Adhesives

FDA approve ed adhesives for corrugate

ed/paper-base ed packagingg products are e preferred for
bonding the components of paper palle ets into the fin
nished form. IIntroducing no
ovel adhesive es
to the pallet--making proce
ess may take the pallet outtside establisshed standard ds for
recyclables. For FDA app plications a ce
ertificate-of-co
ompliance covvering adhesiives is requireed

5.6 esistant Coattings

Moisture Re

Approved co oatings that co

omply with OC CC recycling standards do o not require a additional
testing for re
ecyclables. Offf-line coatings such as the
ermal reactive e polymer dispersions
(TRPD) may y be a recyclable alternative to wax. Thee TRPD coatings may be u used in
conjunction with
w a recycla able limited ammount of waxx and still com
mply as recyclable. If any o off
line coatingss are applied to
t the single oro multi-use-p
pallet, they mu ust be identifiied to the end
d
user and the e end user shoould be furnisshed with a ce
ertificate of re
ecyclability byy the single usse
or reusable pallet
p produceer.

6 DESIGN
D AND MANUFACT
TURE

6.1 Types

Paper based d pallets are manufactured

m to meet the ssimilar types as sold wood
d pallets
including one
e way, partial 4-way, and full
f 4-way type es.

6.2 Design style

es

6.2.1 Engineere ed pallets

Engineered pallets are designed utiliizing two or m more compone ent parts in a manner that
ngular interloc
forms a sin cked unit so the design mittigates the rissk of failure due to
dislodging an individual pallet compo onent. For e ngineered pa allets the top a and bottom
egrate so thatt they are held
surface of the pallet inte d together byy more than ju ust an adhesivve
bond. Eng gineered palle ets can be maade in two of ffour way entrry and with orr without palle
et-
jack acces
ss.

228

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 12-2
Folde
ed Interloc
cking Corruugated Palllet
courrtesy of Unip
pal

6.2.2 Runner/sttringer/strut pallet

While designs may vary y slightly, runn
ner/stringer ppallets are typ
pically comprissed of a top
sheet, an optional
o botto
om sheet and three or four corrugated ru unners/stringers/struts (thaat
are formedd by laminatin
ng several die e cut or non-d ie cut sheets of corrugated d material
together to
o form a long narrow runne er/stringer) or honeycomb runners/string gers that are
glued to bo
oth the top an
nd bottom pallet componen nts. Runners /stringers/struuts pallets cann
be made inn two of four way
w entry and d with or withoout pallet-jackk access.

229

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 12-3
Laminated
d Corrugated Strips tto Form a S
Stringer

Figure 12-4
Folde
ed Stringer Style with Folded D
Deck Corru
ugated Pallet
cou
urtesy of Unipal

6.2.3 Block palllets

While the design
d may vary
v slightly, block
b pallets aare typically ccomprised of a top sheet, a
bottom she eet and nine or
o more corru ugated blockss, honeycomb b blocks or solid fiber coress
that are glu
ued to both th
he top and bo ottom pallet coomponents. B Block pallets can be made e in
two of fourr way entry an
nd with or with hout pallet-jacck access.

230

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 12-5
Folded Block
B Style
e with Folde
ed Sandwiich Deck C
Corrugated
d Pallet
cou
urtesy of Unipall

Figure 12-6
Spiral
S Wou
und Tube Block
B Style
e Corrugate
ed Pallet
courtesy of Son
nonco Protectiv
ve Products

231

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7 PALLET PERF
FORMANCE

7.1 Strength

This is the av
verage load causing
c failure
e from replica
ate tests for e
each support ccondition and
d
each load coondition. Failu
ure can be duue to fracture of a pallet orr pallet compo
onent or
excessive de eformation.

7.2 Design of Safe Working Load Levels

s

These are leess than strenngth when adjusted for variiation in mate
erials, manufa
acture, and
conditions off pallets use as
a well as the
e relative conssequence of ffailure. These
e safe workin
ng
load levels are
a typically ex xpressed as:

7.2.1 Dynamic capacity

c
Capacity when
w supporte ed on fork tine
es, AGV deckks or conveyo ors.
ASTM D1185 Section 8.4 Bendin ng test on pa llet – forktine support
ISO 86611 Fork lifting test

7.2.2 Static cap pacity

Capacity during
d warehoouse block staack storage. The capacityy is determine
ed as the lowe
er
result of th
he bending or compression n tests
ASTM D1185 Section 8.3 comprression
5 bending testt on pallet decck
Section 8.5
ISO 86 611 Test 3 Coompression te est
Test 4 Sttacking test 4a,
4 4b

7.2.3 Racking capacity

c
Capacity when
w supporte
ed in free spa
an warehouse e racks.
ASTM D1185 Section 8.4 Bendin ng test of palllet – rack sup
pport
ISO 86611 Test 1 Be
ending test 1a
a, 1b

7.3 Stiffness

elative deform
This is the re mation of a pallet or pallet ccomponent un nder load and d depending
support cond ditions. Meassurements of stiffness inclu ude relative d
deflection, stra
ains, as
deformation per unit of ma ass or load on the pallet.

7.4 Durability

This is a meaasure of resis

stance to roug
gh handling. Measuremen nts may includ de cumulative e
impact energgy prior to failure or numbe
er of handling
g cycles prior tto failure or ssignificant losss
of strength and
a functionality.

7.5 Other functionality requ

uirements

These may include pallet weight, pallet size, locatio

on and size off openings, firre performancce,
resistance to
o biological co
ontamination, etc.

232

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

8 RECYCLING/R
R REPULPING

The Paper-Based
P pallets are typ
pically develo
oped to be reccycled along w with other corrrugated Krafft
packaaging productts. The symbo ols used by th
he Kraft paperr industries to
o identify Krafft paper
produ
ucts as recyclaable can onlyy be displayed d when all ma
aterials used iin the Paper-B Based pallet
comply to the repulpablity standdard. This sta andard was d eveloped by a joint commiittee of the
Fibre Box Associattion and the American
A Forest and Papeer Association n to develop a standard
wheree various coatting and mate erials could be
e evaluated fo
or their effectt on repulping
g of used
packaaging.

http:///www.corruga
ated.org/uploa
ad/WaxAlternativesStanda
ard.pdf

233

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part 13
Me
etal Pallets
s

Subp
part I PRES
SCRIPTIVE
E STANDA
ARD

1 SCOPE

Part 13
1 applies to pallets
p made from steel, alluminum, or o other metals. Metal pallets may be of a
size and
a form inten nded to duplic
cate the functtion of standaard material haandling palletts or be custo
om
designed with adde ed superstruccture for a verry specific pu rpose and/or product. Onlyy standard
metal pallets will be covered in this
t documen nt. Part 13 deffines typical m
materials, form
ming methodss
used to shape mettals into structtural components, industryy standard co omponents, an nd joining
methoods used to assemble
a com
mponents into finished strucctures. Also ccovered are ccoatings that
can be applied to individual commponents or entire
e structurres for appearrance, anti-sliip, and/or,
sion preventio
corros on purposes.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Pa
art 13 is to pro
ovide a basis for understan
nding the consstruction and use of metal
pallets.

3 REFERENCED
R D STANDARDS

M A 18 – 08b Standard Tes

ASTM st Method forr Rockwell Ha
ardness of Me
etallic Materia
als

M A 36 / 36M – 08 Standarrd Specificatio

ASTM on for Carbon
n Structural Steel

M A 276 – 08a
ASTM a Standard Specification fo
or Stainless S
Steel Bars and
d Shapes

ASTMM A 370 – 09 Standard Tes nd Definitionss for Mechaniical Testing of Steel

st Methods an
Produ
ucts

ASTMM A 500 / 500 0M - 07 Stand

dard Specifica
ation for Cold--Formed Weld
ded and Seam
mless Carbon
n
Steel Structural Tu
ubing in Rounds and Shape es

M A 513 - 08 Standard
ASTM S ecification for Electric-resisstance-Welde
Spe ed Carbon and
d Alloy Steel
Mechanical Tubing
g

ASTMM A 653/A 653 M – 06 Standard Specification for Steeel Sheet, Zin

nc-Coated (Ga
alvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coa
ated (Galvann
nealed) by the
e Hot-Dip Pro
ocess

M A 941 – 06a
ASTM a Terminology
y Relating to Steel, Stainle
ess Steel, Related Alloys, a
and Ferroallo
oys

ASTMM A 1008/A 1008 M – 08 Standard

S Specification for S
Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structtural, High-Sttrength Low-A
Alloy, High-Strrength Low-AAlloy with Imp roved Formabbility, Solution
n
Hardeened, and Bake Hardenable

ASTMM A 1011/A 1011 M – 08 Standard

S Specification for S
Steel, Sheet a
and Strip, Ho
ot-Rolled,
Carbo
on, Structural, High-Streng
gth Low-Alloy,, High-Streng th Low-Alloy with Improved Formabilityy,
and Ultra-High
U Stre
ength

23
34

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

ASTM
M D 1185 – 09 9 Standard Te
est Methods for
f Pallets an d Related Strructures Used
d in Materialss
Handling and Shipping

ASTMM D 4169 – 05
5 Standard Practice for Pe
erformance Te
esting of Ship
pping Contain
ners and
Syste
ems

sher: America
Publis an Society forr Testing and Materials (AS
STM), 200 Ba
arr Harbor Driive, West
Conshhohocken, PAA 17428-2959 9 (www.astm.org) 1.610.83 32.9500

M – 2008 Structural Weldin

AWS D1.1 / D1.1M ng Code - Ste el

sher: America
Publis ociety (AWS), 550 LeJeun
an Welding So ne Road, Miam
mi, FL 33126
(www
w.aws.org) 1.8800.443.9353 or 1.305.443
3.9353

439 – Test forr Sharpness of

UL 14 o Edges on Equipment
E

sher: Underwriter’s Labora

Publis atory, Inc. (UL
L), 26 N.W. La
ake Road, Ca
amas, WA 986
607-
8542 (www.ul.comm) 1.877.854.33577

C – Paint COM
SSPC M – Commen
ntary on Paintt Specification
ns

C – SP COM – Surface Pre

SSPC eparation Com
mmentary

C – PS COM – Commentarry on Painting

SSPC g Systems

sher: The Soc

Publis ciety for Prote
ective Coating
gs (SSPC), 40
0 24th Street,, 6th floor, Pitttsburgh,
PA 155222-4656 (wwww.sspc.org)) 1.877.281.7 7772
Guideelines for Po
owder Coatin ng Various Su ubstrates

sher: Powder Coating Institute (PCI), 21

Publis 170 Buckthorn
ne Place, Ste
e 250, The
Wooddlands, TX 77
7380 (www.po owdercoating..org) 1.800.9888.2628

ISTA Series 1: No
on-Simulation
n Integrity Pe Tests
erformance T

ISTA Series 2: Pa
artial Simulattion Integrity
y Performanc
ce Tests

ISTA Series 3: Ge
eneral Simula
ation Perform
mance Tests
s

sher: The Inte

Publis ernational Saffe Transit Ass
sociation (IST
TA), 1400 Abb
bot Road, Easst
Lansing, MI 488233-1900 (www.ista.org) 1.517.333.3437

4 CLASSIFICAT
C TIONS

4.1 Classes
Metal palletss may be desiigned and con nstructed in a way which m make them
physically annd functionallyy similar or eq
quivalent to th
he classes annd styles outlined for
wood pallets s in Part 3; Su
ubpart I; paraggraph 3. For eexample, a CClass 1 Stringeer Pallet
and Class 2 Block Pallet canc be made similar in form m using steell componentss as
shown in Fig gures 13-1 and 13-2. Sizes s and gauges of componen nts can be chosen to
more closely y resemble eq quivalent woo od pallets or a
add specific sttrength and/o
or
functionality in certain are
eas of the struucture.

23
35

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figure 13--1 Figuure 13-2

Metal Stringer Pallet
P Metal B
Block Palle
et

4.2 Use Catego

ories

Category 1 – Multiple Us se (M): A mettal pallet desiigned for multtiple uses of m

more
than 10 trips, usually man
ny more. Generally, palletss in this category are made e of heavy
gauge materrials, are very
y durable, and
d can stand u p to the rough hest handling g
environmentts with infrequ
uent need for repair.

Category 2 – Limited Us se (L): A meta al pallet desig

gned for limite
ed use of up tto
approximately 10 trips. Paallets in this category
c may go multiple trrips without reepair or
refurbishmen nt or may be examined
e andd refurbished
d as needed a after each trip,
depending ono the distribution and use processes in specific applications. In
applications where extremme rough handling is norm al, refurbishin ng after each trip will
uired.
likely be requ

Category 3 – Expendable e or One-Way Use (E): A m metal pallet dessigned with lighter
materials to minimize
m cost, and usually used
u one trip. Pallets in this categ
for only o gory
are generallyy not refurbishe
ed or repaired, but collected
d for recycling after a single trip
distribution prrocess is completed.

4.3 Types

Types outlineed for wood paallets in Part 3; Subpart I; pa

aragraph 3 are
e
essentially du
uplicated for metal
m pallets.

Type 1: two-wway entry palle

et with openings accepting h
handling equip
pment only at two
pallet ends.

Type 2: partiaal four-way entry pallet with openings at b

both ends and sides with lim
mited
accessibility at
a two of the openings
o to common handlin ng equipment..

Type 3: full fo
our-way entry pallet with ope
enings at both
h ends and sides with
accessibility at
a all openings
s not limited to
o standard han
ndling equipm ent

23
36

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

4.4 Styles

Styles 1 throu
ugh 15 as outlined for wood pallets in Parrt 3; Subpart I;;
paragraph 3.44 can be dupliicated in form and function u
using various metal
components. These styles may be refere enced to descrribe a metal p allet.

Style 1 Singlee-deck (face), flush, nonreveersible pallet.

Style 2 Double-deck (face), flush, nonrev versible pallet..
Style 3 Double-deck (face), flush, reversible pallet.
Style 4 Singlee-deck (face), single wing, nonreversible
n pallet.
p
Style 5 Double-deck (face), single wing, nonreversible e pallet.
Style 6 Double-deck (face), double wing,, nonreversible e pallet.
Style 7 Double-deck (face), double wing,, reversible pa allet.
Style 8 Singlee-deck (face), single-cantilev
ver top and bo ottom stringer boards, flush, nonreversible
e
pallett.
Style 9 Singlee-deck (face), single-cantilev
ver, single-win ng, nonreversiible pallet.
Style 10 Double-deck (face e), single-cantiilever, flush, n
nonreversible ppallet.
Style 11 Double-deck (face e), single-cantiilever, single-wwing, nonreveersible pallet.
Style 12 Double-deck (face e), single-cantiilever, double--wing, nonreve ersible pallet.
Style 13 Double-deck (face e), double-cantilever, single--wing, nonreve ersible pallet.
Style 14 Double-deck (face e), double-cantilever, double e-wing, nonrevversible pallet..
Style 15 Double-deck (face e), double-cantilever, double e-wing, reversible pallet.

4.5 Examples

g figures illustrrate the diversity of different forms of meta

The following al pallets and is intended to
expose the re
eader to some e of the designn possibilities.

Fiigure 13-3 Figu

ure 13-4

Fiigure 13-5 Figu

ure 13-6

23
37

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Fiigure 13-7 Figu

ure 13-8

Fiigure 13-9 Figu

ure 13-10

Fiigure 13-11
1

23
38

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

5 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

Definiitions and term

minology thatt are included
d in Part 1 of tthis Standard apply to Partt 13. Additional
items are listed below:

angle: structural metal

m profile in
n the shape of
o a right angle
e.

anodiizing: an elecctrolytic passiv

vation processs used to inccrease the thicckness of the e natural oxidee
layer on the surfacce of metal paarts. The proccess is called "anodizing" b because the p part to be
treate
ed forms the anode
a electrode of an elec Anodizing inccreases corrosion resistancce
ctrical circuit. A
and wear
w resistanc
ce, and providdes better adh hesion for paiint primers an nd glues than does bare
metal. Anodic filmss can also be used for a nu umber of cosm metic effects, either with th
hick porous
coatin
ngs that can absorb
a dyes or
o with thin tra
ansparent coa atings that ad
dd interference e effects to
reflec
cted light.
anti-s
slip coating: coating
c applie
ed to bearing surface(s)
s of a metal pallet or metal sup
perstructure
whichh increases the coefficient of
o friction betw
ween it and th
he load.

e press: mach
brake hine used ma
ainly to bend sheet
s metal p
products.

aterial left on the edge of a metal piece after machin

burr: unwanted ma ning or cutting
g

nel: structura
chann al metal profile
e in the shape
e of a “U” sha
aped channel..

coil: A roll of sheet metal materrial cut to a sp

pecific strip w
width that is offten placed in automated
forminng machines such as roll foormers or sta amping presse es.

cold rolling:
r a metalworking pro
ocess in whichh metal is defformed by passsing it throug
gh rollers at a
tempeerature below
w its recrystallization tempe
erature

cutofff: the last step in a metal fo

orming proce
ess where ind ividual formed
d pieces are separated fro
om
the sttrip.

edge flange: flange formed alon

ng the edge of
o a piece of ssheet metal

electrro-galvanize: the process ofo bonding a layer of zinc tto steel in ord der to protect against
corrossion that involves electropllating, running
g a current off electricity through a saline/zinc solutio
on
with a zinc anode and
a steel con nductor.

ded aluminum
extrud m: process off taking aluminum that hass been cast into logs and heating to high
h
tempeerature and fo
orcing through
h a predeterm
mined die to fo
orm a specificc shape

fillet weld:
w weld be
etween metal components that follows a
an edge and fforms a fillet o
or curve
where e the components are joine
ed

e: external orr internal rim or

flange o lip often pla
aced on the e
edge of a she
eet metal pane
el to provide a
surfac
ce for bearing
g or fastening to other com mponents.

ar: structural metal profile in the shape of a bar whicch is wider tha
flat ba an it is thick.

galvanize: the process of coatin

ng iron or steel with a thin zinc layer us ing one of several different
esses. (also se
proce ee Electro-ga
alvanize and Hot
H Dipped G Galvanize).

23
39

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

gauge
e: (sometime es spelled "ga
age") indicates
s the standard
rd thickness o
of sheet metall for a specificc
materrial. As the ga
auge number increases, the material thi ckness decreeases.

hem: a small 180 degree fold along

a a cut ed metal leaving a double thicckness of
dge of sheet m
materrial along the edge.

hot diipped galvaniz

ize: a process
s of coating irron or steel w assing it through
with a thin zincc layer, by pa
a molten bath of zinc at a tempe
erature of aro
ound 860 °F (4 460 °C).

hot roolling: a hot working

w metalw
working proce ess where larrge pieces of metal, such a
as slabs or
billets
s, are heated above their re
ecrystallizatio
on temperaturre and then deeformed betwween rollers to
o
form thinner
t cross sections.

olled pickled and

hot ro a oiled (HR RPO): a metal working proccess that includes hot rolling with the
addition of chemica al treatment to remove sca
ale from the m
metal and oil tto help resist corrosion
g storage prio
during or to end use.

load: the product(s

s) being carried by a metal pallet.

mig welding:
w metaal inert gas a semi-automat
s tic or automa
atic arc weldin
ng process in which a
contin
nuous and consumable wirre electrode anda a shieldin ng gas are fedd through a w
welding gun
weldin
ng. The shield
ding gas enve elops the arc to reduce oxiidation.

plasmma cutting: a process that is used to cutt steel and oth her metals (or sometimes other
materrials) using a plasma torch. In this proce ess, an inert g
gas (in some units, compre essed air) is
blownn at high spee ed out of a nozzle; at the saame time an eelectrical arc is formed thrrough that gass
from the
t nozzle to the surface being
b cut, turn
ning some of tthat gas to plaasma. The plasma is
sufficiiently hot to melt
m the metall being cut an nd moves suffficiently fast to
o blow moltenn metal away
from the
t cut.

plate: steel or alum

minum sheet in a thickness
s of .25 inch ((6 mm) or gre
eater.

plug weld:
w a weld which holds two
t layers of material toge
ether, through
h a hole in an upper layer o
of
materrial to a lowerr layer.

post notch:
n notching or punchin ng operation which
w occurs as part of the
e roll forming process at th
he
end of
o the processs, after all othe
er forming of the strip is co
omplete.

powder coating: A type of finish

h coating often used on me etals which iss applied as a free flowing
dry po
owder then cuured under heeat to allow it to flow and fo
orm a “skin”. TThe powder m may be a
therm
moplastic or a thermoset poolymer and is usually applie ed electrostattically.

otch: notching
preno g or punchingg operation wh
hich occurs a as part of the rroll forming process at the
beginning of the prrocess, before
e any forming
g of the strip h
has occurred..

e: standard or
profile o custom sha ed piece of m etal
ape of a forme

essive stamping: A metalw

progre working proce ess that can e
encompass punching, coin ning, bending
and several other ways
w of modiffying metal, combined
c with
h an automatiic feeding sysstem.

essive stamping die: toolin

progre ng used in the
e progressivee stamping prrocess, generrally consisting
of sev
veral stations,, each of whic
ch performs a different ope
eration.

24
40

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

resisttance welding g: a group of welding

w proce
esses such ass spot and seeam welding tthat produce
coalescence surfac ces in contac
ct where heat to form the w
weld is genera
ated by the re
esistance of th
he
weldin ng current thrrough the worrkpieces.

rod: structural
s mettal profile in th
he shape of a circle.

roll formed compon

nent: compon
nent made wiith the roll forrming processs.

roll forming: a continuous bending operation n in which a sttrip of metal iss passed thro
ough
conse ecutive sets of
o rolls, or stan
nds, each perrforming only an incrementtal part of the e total bend,
until to
o desired cross section proofile is obtained.

roll form mill: machine used forr roll forming consisting

c of sseveral standds which hold rolls for
formin ng the metal passing
p throu
ugh the mill. The
T number o of rolls require
ed to bend a ppart varies,
depen nding on the complexity
c of the part and other factors . The mill also o includes faccilities for
attachhing prenotchh or postnotch
h, as well as cutoff
c tooling.

sheett metal: meta al formed into thin, flat pieces. It is one o

of the fundam
mental forms u
used in
metalworking, and can be cut and bent into a variety of diffferent shape es. Thickness or gauge
generrally varies fro
om a few thouusandths of an inch up to . 25 inches.

ped compone
stamp nent made with the progre
ent: a compon essive stampin
ng process.

ping press: a machine in which

stamp w a progre ping die is mounted for man
essive stamp nufacturing
components using the progresssive stamping process.

stampping: a collecction of sheet metal forming g processes p

performed witth a stampingg press
includ
ding punching g, blanking, em
mbossing, bending, flangin ng, and coinin
ng. Stamping may be a
single
e stage operation where ev very stroke off the stamping
g press produuces the desirred form on th
he
sheett metal part, or
o could occurr through a seeries of stagess known as pprogressive sttamping.

strip: a length of metal,

m often ro
olled up as a coil,
c often pla mated forming machines su
aced in autom uch
as roll formers or stamping
s pres
sses.

strip width:
w specific dimension specified
s for the
t width of a strip.

TIG welding
w – tung
gsten inert gas welding: ann arc welding process thatt uses a noncconsumable
tungsten electrode
e to produce th
he weld. The weld area is protected from atmospherric
contamination by a shielding ga
as (usually an inert gas succh as argon), and a filler m
metal is norma
ally
used, though some e welds, know
wn as autogen nous welds, ddo not require
e it.

yield strength
s – or yield point: the stress at which
w a materrial begins to deform plastiically and
deformmation becom mes permanent and non-re eversible. Prio
or to the yield point the ma
aterial will
deformm elastically and
a will returnn to its origina
al shape when n the applied stress is remmoved.

24
41

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6 MATERIALS
M AND
A COMPO
ONENTS

6.1 Materials

6.1.1 Steel
Steel, in its
s various form
ms, is a useful material for pallet constru uction due to its consistentt
properties,, strength, durability, immuunity to insectt infestation, a
and nonflamm mability. Steel is
also a non-porous mate erial which giv
ves it excellennt resistance to contamination and
suitability for
f various higgh pressure/h high temperatture cleaning processes. T The design
properties and specifica ations for stee
el used in mettal pallets ma ay vary, depennding on use
and design n requirementts, and is speecified by the end user in m many situation
ns.

Steel properties are gen nerally specified using the conventions outlined in ASTM A
1008/A100 08 M – 08 Sta andard Speciffication for Stteel, Sheet, C
Cold-Rolled, CCarbon,
Structural, High-Strengtth Low-Alloy, High-Strengtth Low-Alloy w with Improved d Formability,
Solution Hardened,and Bake Harden nable and AS STM A 1011/A A 1011 M – 08 Standard
Specification for Steel, Sheet
S and Strip, Hot-Rolle
ed, Carbon, S Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, High-Strengtth Low-Alloy with
w Improved d Formability, and Ultra-Hiigh Strength

6.1.2 Aluminum m
Aluminum is also a useful material fo or pallet consttruction for m
many of the sa ame reasons
outlined in paragraph 6.1.1 above. WithW regard to o use in metal pallets, the b biggest
differencess between alu uminum and steel
s are the ddensity and sstrength of the e two materials
per unit vo
olume. Alumin num is lighterr but weaker p per unit volumme than steel,, but with
proper enggineering alum minum can re each high perfformance standards for pa allets.
Aluminum is also more corrosion res sistant than stteel and will n
not allow mosst bacteria to
grow on itss surface. Alluminum’s inittial cost is mo ore than steell, but is infinite e
ely recyclable
without los
sing integrity or
o mass. The ere are two ba asic approach hes to fabrica ating aluminum m
pallets, we
elding and fitting extruded parts
p with rive
ets. Welding requires a more
sophisticatted and less available
a proccess. Weldin g aluminum a also weakenss it and the
aluminum becomes mo ore brittle. Extrruded alumin um parts can n be cut to varrious sizes
or custom size
allowing fo e pallets. Aluminum palletts become an n asset to anyy business as
their recyc
cle value in alw
ways inherent. Aluminum parts can be ordered and specified in
several allo
oy types depe ending on the e intended use e. Some alum minum alloys are stronger
and more brittle than others and thos se also tend tto be less like
ely to receive anodizing as
the harderr alloys do nott anodize as well.
w The finaal choice of mmaterial comess down to
which one best satisfies s specific requuirements forr each applica ation. These requirementss
ut are not limited to, streng
include, bu gth for carryingg the extendeed load as we ell as expecte
ed
handling foorces, weight, corrosion re esistance, ma nufacturabilityy, and cost.

6.2 Componentts

6.2.1 Pre-formeed componen nts

Pre-formedd metal comp ponents are quite useful in the design off metal palletss since can bbe
delivered to
t the pallet producer
p as re
eady-to-use ccomponents w which reduce or eliminate tthe
need for processing beffore they can be assemble ed into a palle
et design. In m
many cases,
vailable as ind
they are av dustry standaard parts or prrofiles from m
many sources of supply. In
some case es, custom deesigned comp ponents are thhe most efficieent way to meeet specific
design req
quirements. Custom
C compo onents are typpically less w
widely available, usually from
a one or a limited numbber of supplierrs.

24
42

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.2.1.1 Standa
ard pre-forme
ed components

Standaard structural components

Compo onents in spe ecific shapes and
a profiles a are commercially available and can be
economically used in metal palle et designs, evven in lower vvolumes, sincee they are
y available in quantities ran
readily nging from smmall to large. TThe following are example
es
of stan
ndard metal structural com mponents.

- flat
f bar
Structural meetal profile in the
t shape of a bar which iss wider than iit is thick (see e
Figure
F 13-12)). Flat bar use ed in metal pa
allet construcction is typicallly 1/8th inch tto
½ inch in thic
ckness and be etween 1 inchh and 3 inchess wide.

Fig
gure 13-12
Flat Bar
- angle
a
t shape of a right angle (see Figure 1
etal profile in the
Structural me 13-13).
The legs of angle may or maym not be eq qual. Angle u used in metal p
pallet
construction is
i typically 1/88th inch to ½ inch in thickn
ness. Legs arre typically
between
b ½ in
nch and 3 inch hes wide.

Fig
gure 13-13
3
Angle

24
43

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

- rod
r
etal profile in the
Structural me t shape of a circle (see F
Figure 13-14)). Can be use
ed
as
a a structura
al member or formed into ccomponents ssuch as liftingg loops or
handles.
h

Fig
gure 13-14
4
Rod
- channel
etal profile in the
Structural me t shape of a “U” shaped
d channel (see
e Figure
13-15).

Fig
gure 13-15
5
Channel
C

24
44

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

- tubing
Seamed or ex xtruded meta al profile in the
e shape of a ssquare (Figurre 13-16),
rectangle
r (Fig
gure 13-17), round
r (Figuree 13-18), or ovval. Overall prrofile size and
d
wall thicknesss varies with the many stan ndard configuurations availlable.

Fig
gure 13-16
6
Squ
uare Tubin g

Fig
gure 13-17
7
Rectan
ngular Tub
bing

24
45

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Fig
gure 13-18
8
Rouund Tubingg
Standa ard roll formed componentts
Some roll form supp pliers have sttandard profile
e tooling and produce qua antities of roll
form pieces
p in stand
dard lengths for
f sale to me etal pallet manufacturers a
and others (se ee
Section 5 for a detaailed description of the roll form processs). Many of this type of
compo onent are similar in profile to
t standard sstructural commponents liste
ed in paragrap ph
6.2.1.11 above. For example,
e onee common sta andard roll forrmed compon nent has its
profile in the form of
o a “U”, much h like channel explained ab bove. The staandard roll
formed d channel has s rounder corners, but can be a better cchoice than thhe standard
structu
ural part in some applicatioons (see Figu re 13-19).

Fig
gure 13-19
Roll Fo
ormed Cha annel

24
46

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Standaard stamped components

Some stamped partt suppliers ha ave progressivve stamp die tooling which h produce
quantitties of standa
ard off-the-sheelf parts for sa
ale to metal ppallet manufacturers and
others. A typical example of this would be sta amped stackin ng guides which can be
weldedd to top of a vertical
v tube and
a be inserte ed in the corre
esponding tubbe in the palle
et
above in a stack. Thhere are man ny styles of staandard stack ing guides avvailable. (see
exampple in Figure 13-20).
1

Fig
gure 13-20
Example of Stan
ndard Stam
mped Comp ponent (sttacking guiide)

6.2.1.2 Customm pre-formed d components s

Compo onents not avvailable as a standard
s partt often require e custom tooliing such as
progreessive stampin ng dies or roll form tool setts. Because o of the investmment required
for suc
ch tooling, cusstom compon nents requiring it are typica ally used onlyy on higher
volume e designs which use a high h enough qua antity to justifyy the tooling iinvestment.
Customm componentts may be a variation
v on a standard com mponent such h as an odd
size off angle or cha
annel, or may be complete ly unique as iin the case off some custom m
stamped or fabricatted componen nts In many ccases, custom m designed co omponents ca an
be dessigned to reduuce total part count and we elding by dup plicating the sttructure that
would require severral standard or o fabricated ccomponents. By doing thiss, custom
designned components can reduc ce total pallet cost per unit, even when ttooling costs
are considered. The e following arre examples o of custom com mponents.

Custom m designed ro oll formed commponents

Roll foorming produc ces parts withh a continuouss profile that vvary in length h from a few
inches s to 20 feet orr more, depen nding on the a application. The roll forming process is a
continu uous bending g operation in which a strip p of metal is ppassed throug gh consecutive
sets off rolls, or stan
nds, each perfforming only an incrementtal part of the total bend,
until to
o desired cros ss section proofile is obtaine orming processs is done using
ed. The roll fo
a roll form mill whic ch consists of several stand ds which hold d rolls for form
ming the meta al
passin ng through the e mill. The number of rolls required to bend a part va aries,
depending on the complexity
c of the
t part and o other factors. The mill also o includes
es for attachin
facilitie ng custom designed preno otch or postno otch, as well aas cutoff
toolingg. See Figures s 13-21 and 13-22
1 for exam
mples of custtom designed d roll formed
compo onents.

24
47

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Figgure 13-21
ustom Roll Formed C
Cu Componentt

Figgure 13-22
Cu
ustom Roll Formed CComponentt
Custom m designed stamped
s comp ponents
When standard stam mped parts do not provide e the required functionality in an
assemmbly, custom designed
d stam
mped compon nents may be e considered. As with otherr
customm designed pa arts, custom stampings
s req
quire specificc tooling to forrm the parts.
This to
ooling may require a signifiicant investm ent, and as ssuch, this type e of part is
generaally best used d on high voluume applicatioons where the e cost can be e amortized
over greater quantitties. The grea at advantage of a custom d designed stam mped
compo onent is that itt can be desiggned to servee multiple funcctions and likely reduce the
cost off the overall design
d in othe
er areas by re
educing the nu umber of partts required or
simpliffying assembly and/or fastening. Figure es 13-23 and 13-24 show e examples of
customm designed sttamped parts.

24
48

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Fig
gure 13-23
3
Custom
C Sta
amped Com mponent

Fig
gure 13-24
4
Custom
C Sta
amped Com mponent

24
49

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.2.2 Fabricatedd componen nts

With somee applications, especially where
w volume is low, and/o or the requiremments do not
allow use of
o pre-formedd components s, it is most effficient to simpply fabricate ccomponents a
as
needed, byy hand or usin
ng metal fabrrication equipm ment.

6.2.3 Extruded components s

Aluminum pallets can anda do use custom and ofte en patented d die designs to
o make pallet
parts that comprise
c a paallet. Extruding is the proccess of forcing
g heated alumminum logs
through a custom
c die to
o form aluminum parts to p predetermined d lengths thatt can be cut to
o
specific dim
mensions to build
b pallets of
o many differeent sizes andd configuration ns. The
stringer an
nd slats are exxtruded separately and ca n differ in sha ape, size and alloy.

6.3 Coatings

ngs are often applied to metal pallets orr individual co

Coatin omponents off metal palletss to improve
corros
sion resistancce, antiskid prroperties, cos
smetic appearrance, or a coombination off these factorss.
Color of paint or co
oating is some etimes used for
f identificati on of materia
als, pallet man
nufacturer, orr
other process relatted reasons.

6.3.1 Corrosion n resistant co oatings

Some metals such as ordinary
o steel will corrode i n normal air o
over time. In ssome
applicationns, this is acce
eptable such as single use e, low cost pa
allets. In applications where e
corrosion is unacceptab ble, coatings can
c be added d to reduce orr eliminate thiis issue. The
coatings outlined below w each have different
d cost, performance e, and processs
characterisstics. Requireements in thes se areas will d determine wh hich corrosionn resistant
coating, if any, is best suited
s to each
h application.

6.3.1.1 Galvan nizing for steeel

Galvan nize is simplyy the application of a thin c oating of zincc over the surrfaces of iron or
steel. Galvanizing
G will
w essentially y eliminate ru sting of plain steel as long
g as it is intactt.
Galvan nize can be applied
a to base materials oof steel compo onents beforee they are
formed d and assemb bled, or to a completed
c asssembly. Coatting compone ent base
materials can be do one using hot dipping or el ectro-galvanizing processe es. Further
manuffacturing operrations with co omponents ca an remove ga alvanize wherrever the
surface of the steel is re-exposed from mecha anical operatiions or burn-o off from
weldinng. Depending g on corrosion n resistance rrequirements of the applica ation, it may b
be
necess sary to re-coa
at areas wherre galvanize h has been worrn or burnt offf to reduce or
eliminaate corrosion in these area as. This issue
e can be avoid ded or reduce ed by
galvannizing the entiire assembly after all otherr manufacturing processess are complete
using the
t hot dippin ng process. The way the ziinc gets applied produces different
charac cteristics. Hott dipping applies a somewh hat rough app pearing or “sp
pangled” finish h
that re
eflects light un
nevenly. Electtro-galvanizinng applies a m more even butt less shiny
finish.

6.3.1.2 Paintin
ng
Paintin
ng is a commo on and econo omical way too get good corrrosion protecction on metaal
pallets
s. It may be ap
pplied using spray,
s brush, or dipping prrocesses. Surrface
preparration is important to gettin
ng a high quallity coat that w
will provide th
he desired
corrosion resistancee and service e life.

25
50

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6.3.1.3 Powde er coating

Powde er coating is a process wheere a powderr thermoplastic
material is applied to
t an object, such
s as a me
etal pallet, which is then he
eated to melt
the powder into a toough plastic coating.
c Powd
der coating is more expenssive than
ng, but is muc
paintin ch more durabble.

6.3.1.4 Antiskkid coatings an

nd features
In applications that require highe er coefficient oof friction than a metal pallet can providde,
speciaal coatings or features can be applied to o the metal su urfaces where e this is
needed. These surffaces may inc clude upper d deck areas wh here the load is placed,
lower deck
d areas where
w a metal pallet rests o
on the floor, coonveyor liness, or other pallet
loads, and other surfaces that co ome to rest on n material handling equipm ment such as
pallet jacks
j and fork
k lift trucks. Coatings
C are g
generally applied as a liquid using brush h
on or spray
s processses. Some fea atures may b e added as d dry, self adhessive sheets or
strips. Other feature
es may be added by modiffying the surfa ace of the meetal itself.

Poolyurea
A coating that can
c be selectiively applied tto surfaces w with spray or bbrush
ocesses, poly
pro yurea creates s a pliable, taccky surface w
when dry. It caan increase
co
oefficient of friction both by the nature off its surface bbeing much ta ackier than
sm
mooth metal, anda because its surface w will deform slig
ghtly, allowing
g irregularitiess
to “sink in” sligh
htly, providing
g more resista ance to lateraal movement.

Ab
brasive coatin ngs/features
Maany abrasive coatings use paint or othe er coating/bind ding material,, mixed with a an
ab
brasive grit, arre selectively applied to re quired surfacces. This type e of coating is
oftten uses brussh or roll processes for app plication, sincce the grit is n
not compatible e
with most spray ying equipment. A similar rresult can be achieved using normal pa aint
pplication follo
ap owed by disbu ursing abrasivve grit into the e wet paint. Iff needed, top
co
oating can theen be used to cover the gritt and provide e consistent lo ook/color. Selff
ad
dhesive strips and sheets withw abrasive grit on one siide are also a available and
ca
an be applied to surfaces as a needed to g get a similar rresult. These approaches
woork best wherre higher coeffficient of fricttion is needed d against softe er materials
su
uch as corruga ated boxes orr paper shipp ing bags.

Otther rubber-lik
ke coatings/fe
eatures
Th
here are coatings of other rubber-like
r m aterials that w
work in a wayy similar to
po
olyurea, as ouutlined above.. Some of theese products a are also available as self
ad
dhesive strips that can be applied
a to surrfaces as requuired.

Meetal process features

f
In some applica ations, the use of features formed into o or attached to
o metal surfacces
an be effective
ca e. Knurling or small raised ribs and depressions presssed into metal
be
earing surfacees may increa ase coefficien t of friction in some cases.. Also,
pu
unched, raised d holes in a metal
m surface can provide iirregularities tthat will grip
pro
oducts or pac ckages to inhiibit lateral mo
ovement. These features a are similar to
tho
ose often seeen on metal sttair steps whi ch provide a slip resistant surface for
pe
eople walking on the steps. Metal strips or shapes ca an also be attaached directlyy
to surfaces to in
ncrease grip where
w neededd. Custom die es used in alu
uminum
xtrusion can have
ex h predetermined serratiions engineerred into the die to create a
no
on-slip surfacee on the slat.

25
51

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

7 MANUFACTU
M RE

Metal pallets are to

o be manufac ctured in acco
ordance with a
applicable maaterial and pro
ocess
speciffications, consistent with customer requuirements esta
ablished for e
each applicatiion.

8 PALLET REPA
AIR OR REFU
URBISHMEN
NT

Multi-use metal pallets may require repair or refurbishmen nt, depending g on the appliccation. Where
e
repairr and refurbishment are ex
xpected to be part of the prrocess, inspecction criteria sshould be
established based on system re equirements in ncluding but n
not limited to safety and pe erformance.
Criterria to determin
ne when a pa
allet is beyond
d economical repair should d also be inclu
uded.

Subp
part II PER
RFORMANC
CE STAND
DARD
9 PERFORMAN
NCE REQUIRE
EMENTS

9.1 Complete Structure

The completed
c pallet assembly must pass alll applicable te
esting as outllined in parag
graph 2.
Additionally, the as
ssembly mustt pass any oth
her testing sp pecified by the
e customer.

9.2 Componentts and Materiials

Compponents and materials

m mus
st conform witth applicable standards listed in Subparrt I,
Parag
graph 3.

9.3 Welds

Weldss must conforrm to performance requirem

ments outline 1.1 / D1.1M – 2008
ed in AWS D1
Structtural Welding Code - Steell

9.4 Finishes

hes must confform with all applicable

Finish a sta d in Subpart I,, Paragraph 3 as well as all
andards listed
customer requirem
ments.

10 Pallet Perform
mance

10.1 Strength

This is the av
verage load causing
c failure
e from replica
ate tests for e
each support ccondition and
d
each load coondition. Failu
ure can be duue to fracture of a pallet orr pallet compo
onent or
excessive de eformation.

10.2 Design of Safe Working Load Levels

s

These are leess than strenngth when adjusted for variiation in mate
erials, manufa
acture, and
conditions off pallets use as
a well as the
e relative conssequence of ffailure. These
e safe workin
ng
load levels are
a typically ex xpressed as:

25
52

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10.2.1
1 Dynamic capacity
c
Capacity when
w supporte ed on fork tine
es, AGV deckks or conveyo ors.
ASTM D1185 Section 8.4 Bendin ng test on pa llet – forktine support
ISO 86611 Fork lifting test

2 Static cap
10.2.2 pacity
Capacity during
d warehoouse block sta ack storage. The capacityy is determine
ed as the lowe
er
result of th
he bending or compression n tests
ASTM D1185 Section 8.3 comprression
Section 8.5 bendin ng test on palllet deck
ISO 86 611 Test 3 Co ompression te est
Test 4 Sttacking test 4a
a, 4b

10.2.3
3 Racking capacity
c
Capacity when
w supporte
ed in free spa
an warehouse e racks.
ASTM D1185 Section 8.4 Bendin ng test of palllet – rack sup
pport
ISO 86611 Test 1 Be
ending test 1a
a, 1b

10.3 Stiffness

This is the re
elative deform
mation of a pallet or pallet ccomponent un nder load and d depending
support cond ditions. Meassurements of stiffness inclu ude relative d
deflection, stra
ains, as
deformation per unit of ma ass or load on the pallet.

10.4 Durability

This is a meaasure of resis

stance to roug
gh handling. Measuremen nts may includ de cumulative e
impact energgy prior to failure or numbe
er of handling
g cycles prior tto failure or ssignificant losss
of strength and
a functionality.

11 TESTING

11.1 Conditionin
ng Requireme
ents Specific
c to Metals

Test specific
cations for pac ckaging mate erials and woo od often havee specific temperature and
humidity connditioning requ uirements wh hich have little
e to do with peerformance o of metal palletts
in these tests s. One excep ption to this statement is wh hen non-meta allic loads are
e placed on
metal pallets
s during any of o the test. In these situatio ons, the effectts of temperaature and
humidity on thet non-meta allic components can influe ence test resuults, and condditioning should
be done. If itt is clear to the testing orgaanization thatt conditioning of metal palle et samples wwill
have no effect on the outc come of testinng, they may, at their discrretion, omit thhe conditioning.
Conditioningg should be do one if there is
s any doubt orr concern tha at results would be different.

11.2 Pallet Testin

ng

c pallet testing
Basic g, as outlined in Part 7 and ASTM D 118 85, will be performed on ne
ew designs a
as
appro
opriate, in adddition to any customer
c palle
et testing spe
ecified.

11.3 Packaging and

a Shipping
g Testing

Basicc pallet testing

g included in ASTM
A D 41699, ISTA Serie
es Tests, and specific custo
omer required
d
tests, will be perforrmed on new designs as appropriate.
a

25
53

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

11.3.1
1 Field testiing
It is highly recommende ed that, in adddition to tests outlined above, actual tessting of new
designs through real life e shipping pro ocesses be co onducted. Su uch field tests should includ
de
enough qu uantity and dis stribution dive
ersity to exposse new desig gns to the full range of
expected transport
t and handling env vironments the ey could expe erience in acttual use. Such
h
testing is extremely
e valuuable for getting real life peerformance fe eedback from m all aspects o
of
the distribuution process and is essen ntial for provin
ng out designss for high voluume
application ns. Before field testing is sttarted, a detaailed test plan should be de eveloped and
documente ed. Also, a tesst team with key
k individualls from all sta akeholders sh hould be
established d so the test can
c be run with full visibilitty and feedba ack from participating
organizatio ons.

2 Material and
11.3.2 a compone ent testing
Materials and
a compone ent testing sho
ould be done,, as appropriaate and as ne
eeded per the
applicable material stan
ndard listed in
n Subpart I, P aragraph 3.

3 Weld testiing
11.3.3
Welds may y be tested, as
a appropriate
e, using proce
edures and re
equirements o
outlined in AW
WS
D1.1 / D1.1M – 2008 Sttructural Weld
ding Code – SSteel

25
54

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Part
P 14
Molded, Wood-Ba
ased Commposite P
Pallets
1 SCOPE

Part 14
1 of this Stanndard applies
s to molded, wood-based
w ccomposite palllets. They are
e commonly
referred to as presswood palletss. They are made
m entirely o on molded, highly
of compressio
proceessed wood flaakes and resiin. A typical example is s hown in Figu re 1. Criteria contained in
this Standard
S are applicable
a onlly at the comp
pletion of man nufacture.

Figure 14
4-1
A Presswood
P d Pallet
Photograph courtesy of Litco
o International, In
nc.

This Standard
S is prresented in thhree parts: Subpart I is the e Prescriptive
e Standard, w
which concerns
the manufacture
m off the pallet. This
T Subpart includes
i palle
et descriptionss, workmansh
hip criteria,
dimennsional tolerances and markings. Subpa art II is the Peerformance an nd Use Stand
dard, which
conceerns the functtionality of the
e pallet and ad
ddresses the environmenttal aspects of the presswoo od
pallets. Subpart III addressees thet Recycling g of the Pressswood Palletss.

This part
p does not address the safetys associated with the use of presswwood pallets.. It is the
respo
onsibility of the
e user of this Part to estab
blish appropriaate safety and
d health practtices and
determ
mine the appllicability of reg
gulatory limita
ations prior to
o its use.

Pressswood pallets are manufac ctured for the sole purpose e of storing an
nd/or transporrting material..
Under no circumstances should d any person stand,
s step, o
or lean upon tthem or otherrwise use them m
for support unless they are spec cifically designed for such usage. The pallet user ha as the
obliga
ation and respponsibility to inspect for daamage prior too each pallet use and to de etermine that
the pa
allet design is
s appropriate for that particcular unit load
d application.

2 PURPOSE

The purpose
p of Paart 14 of this Standard
S is to establish nattionally recog
gnized minimu
um quality
requirrements for presswood palllets and to prrovide a basiss for common n understanding among
purch
hasers, distributors and use ers of presswwood pallets.

25
55

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

3 REFERENCED
R D AND RELA
ATED DOCUM
MENTS

ISO 8611
8 Generaal Purpose Flaat Pallets for T
Through Trannsit of Goods – Test
Methodds. International Standard s Organizatioon (ISO). C. P P. 56, CH
1211, Geneva
G 20, Switzerland.
S
ASTM
M D1185 Standa
ard Test Methods for Palletts and Relate ed Structures Employed in
Materia
al Handling annd Shipping. American So ociety for Testing and
Materia
als (ASTM), 100 Barr Harb bor Drive, Wesst Conshohoccken, PA
19428-2959.

Subp
part I Prescriptive Sttandard
4 DEFINITIONS
D AND TERMIINOLOGY

he purpose off this document, the definitions and term

For th minology in MHI/ANSI MH1
1 Part 1 shall
apply.

able pallet – skid

Nesta s having ho
ollow cups or other suitable e spacers allo
owing those o
of adjacent
empty
y sides to fit in
nto each othe
er for stacking
g; also, appliccable to nesta
able wood pallets.

5 CLASSIFICAT
C TION

5.1 Use Catego

ories

5.1.1 Reusable – Pallet is inttended for mo

ore than one u
unit load.

5.1.2 Single-Us
se – Pallet is used
u for the storage
s and d istribution of one unit load.

5.2 Types
Presswood pallets
p pically a solid single deck, nestable pallet. However,, such pallets
are typ
can be molded with openings in the de ecks and sepa arate bottom deck parts ca
an be attached.
k may have structural ribbing molded th
The top deck hroughout to eenhance stren
ngth and
stiffness.

5.2.1 Type 1 Tw wo way entryy pallet

A pallet with openings accepting
a han
ndling equipm
ment only on tw
wo pallet end
ds.

5.2.2 Type 2 Pa artial four-wa

ay entry
A pallet with openings at
a both ends and
a sides, witth limiting acccessibility of o
openings to
common handling
h equip
pment on twoo sides and op
penings not limmited to common handling g
equipmentt on the otherr two sides.

5.2.3 Type 3, Fu ull four-way entry

e
A pallet with openings at
a both oppos
site ends and sides with acccessibility of all openings
not limited to common handling
h equipment.

25
56

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

6 MATERIALS
M

A presswood pallet consists of two

t main matterial compon
nents:

I. Typically
y, wood flake
es, wafers and d/or particles. .
II. Glue bin
nder consistin
ng of:
1. Resin (for wood bonding g)
2. Wax emuls sion (for waterr resistance)

3. Catalyst or hardener (to react the ressin for curing)

7 MANUFACTU
M RING

Wood d chips are firs

st mixed by species to a de etermined rattio, typically ssome combina ation of
hardwwood chips, pine chips and d recycled woo od. This mixtture of wood chips is then refined to
produuce a smaller flake. The fin nished wood particle dimen nsions are typ pically 0.375((+/- 0.125)
inches long and 0.04(+/- 0.02) in nches in thickkness and wid dth. Figure 2 shows a typiccal particle
size. Other size wafers
w or flakees similar in size to those u
used in wafer board or OSB B panels can
be used. The partic cles are driedd to approxima ately 3% moissture which p prepares them m for absorptio
on
sin and eradic
of res cation of all pe
ests and larva a. Fine dust a
and oversize fflakes are screened out an nd
the co
orrect size and correct moisture particle es are stored iin a large silo
o, ready for usse.

Figure 14-2
Typical Woo
od Particle
es Used in Presswoo
od Pallets
Photograph
P courttesy of Litco Inte
ernational, Inc

The dried
d wood an nd liquid glue are blended in a mixer. Th he blended w wood is conve eyed to a presss
hoppeer where it is stored until pressing. The e blended woo od is then depposited into a mold. The
press closes and compresses
c th
he wood with typically 1,20 00 tons of forcce. The moldd is heated wiith
high temperature
t (typically 400°° F) during the
e pressing of the pallet cauusing the resiin to react andd
hardeen to bond thee wood flakes s together. Va arious resin fo
ormulations aare available, some that
contain urea forma aldehyde. Ca are should be given to ensu ure that formaaldehyde leveels, if any, are
e
n regulatory le
within evels.

25
57

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

After a preset time, the pressure e is released and the palleet is removed from the mold. Pallet
moisture at the time of manufac cture is approx ximately 8 pe
ercent and approximately 1 13 percent at
brium. Edges
equilib s should be trimmed to rem move sharp ed dges. Pallets are typically a
allowed to
condittion for 24 ho
ours prior to sh
hipment to pe ermit off gass ing emissionss. Most pressswood pallets
are noot regulated by
b The Interna ational Standard for Phytossanitary Mea sures for Soliid Wood
Packaaging Materia al (ISPM-15) because
b the manufacturing
m g process rennders them sa anitary. Moldeed
presswood pallets are uniform in size and sh hould be withi n -0/+0.125 innches of the pplanned
dimennsion in lengthh, width, and height. The thickness of th he deck wall sshould be witth +/-0.06” of
targett thickness.

Subp
part II Perfformance and
a Use Sttandard

8 GENERAL
G ST
TORAGE AND
D HANDLING
G

8.1 Pallet Storaage

Presswood pallets
p shouldd be stored ind doors or at le
east under rooof at all times.. Due to the
fact that woo
od is hygrosco opic (readily taking
t or givin
ng up moisturre), the pressw wood pallet w will
absorb moisture. Normal air moisture will not adverrsely affect th he pallet. If th
he wood
moisture is below
b 30 perccent, little change occurs. However, if th he pallets takke on high
moisture via rain or snow for a prolong ged period, the e wood fiber moisture mayy rise above 3 30
percent and begin to swell. Excessive swelling in th he range of 15 percent ma ay cause the
ome rough te
pallet to beco extured and maym cause the e nested palleets to stick tog
gether and
become difficcult to de-nes st when stack ked. Upon de e-nesting, the leg may actu ually pull off
from the decck and stick in n the nested position
p with tthe bottom pa allet. The process for this tto
occur may ta ake days, wee eks, or month hs, depending g on the climaate and condittions. For
these reason ns, it is not recommended to store pressswood palletss outside.

orage is unavo
If outside sto oidable, a poly bag should d be used to ccover each staack of pallets.
These bags can be placed over each stacks of palletts at the manufacturing pla
ant prior to
shipment. The
T bag will he elp protect the
e pallet from the elementss and contamiinates to keep p
them clean and
a dry for immmediate use..

8.2 Pallet Handling

Presswood pallets
p shouldd be designed
d to separate a desired qua antity of pallets easily,
manually, with a lift truck or an automa
ated pallet disspenser, and ffrom a stack oof nested
operly handled, the pressw
pallets. If pro wood pallet ca an be reused.

8.3 Shipping
ed that pressw
It is suggeste wood pallets be shipped in n closed vanss to ensure that they are
clean and drry upon arriva
al for best usee. Because off their nestable design a 533 foot trailer
load capacityy can contain up to 1,320 pallets,
p size 4
48 inch x 40 innch. This featture yields
greater shippping and handdling efficienc
cies.

9. PERFORMAN
NCE

9.1 Conditions of pallet use e

The use conditions which presswood pallets
p shall s ustain during unit-load maaterials handling
herefore, the conditions
will vary. Th c of use
u shall be sspecified, inclluding perform mance levels.
Where conditions of use vary,
v the cond dition which reesults in the h
highest stresss levels shall be
used as a baasis of determmining performmance.
Actual load capacity
c is ap
pplication speccific and depe endent upon tthe product, ppackaging, load
containment and handling g environment. The testing g of the pallet with and with
hin the specifiic
s strongly rec
application is commended.

25
58

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

Testing per ISO

I 8611and ASTM D1185 can be don
ne with specifiic loads for sttrength and
stiffness exp
pectations.

9.1.1 Load Cond ditions

Provide thee description of the packagges, containe ers, or units to
o be placed on the pallet (i.e.
bags, casee goods, bund dles, barrels, flexible interm
mediate bulk ccontainers (FFIBC bags),
blocks andd machinery inncluding the use
u of load sttabilizers.
Provide me easurements and location of bearing arreas for the packages, con ntainers, or
units to be
e placed on the pallet and the
t pallet top and bottom d decks.
Provide ma aximum and average
a load levels and lo oad level variaations.

9.1.2 Support Conditions

C
Indicate maximum unsu
upported free span along t he pallet leng
gth and width when placed
d
on conveyors.

Standard designs
d of pre
esswood palle ets are not re commended for storage inn open beam
and drive through
t rackss. Extreme ca aution should be used if raccking cannot be avoided.
Use of rack supports that act like floo
oring is strong
gly recommen nded.

Presswoodd pallets may be custom designed for s ome types off loads and so
ome designs of
open racks
s.

Indicate maximum number of unit-loa

ads in a stackk.

Indicate the geometry of

o fork tines us
sed to lift and
d move unit lo
oads as well a
as spacing
between foork tines.

Indicate the design and geometry of slings, if used

d, for lifting unit loads.

9.2 MEASURES
S OF PALLET
T PERFORMA
ANCE

9.2.1 Strength
This is the average load
d causing failu
ure from repliicate tests forr each supporrt condition an
nd
each load condition. Faailure can be due to fracturre of a pallet or pallet component or
excessive deformation.

9.2.2 Design off Safe Workin ng Load Leve els

These are less than streength when adjusted
a for va
ariation in ma
aterials, manuufacture, and
conditions of pallets use
e as well as th
he relative co
onsequence o of failure. The
ese safe
ad levels are typically exprressed as:
working loa

9.2.2.1 Dynamic capacity

c
Capacity when
w supporte ed on fork tine
es, AGV deckks or conveyo ors.
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.4
8 Bending te est on pallet – forktine sup
pport
ISO 8611 Fork lifting tes
st

9.2.2.2 Static Cap

pacity
Capacity during
d wareho
ouse block staack storage. The capacityy is determine
ed as the
lower result of the bend
ding or compreession tests
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.3
8 compressiion
Section 8.5 bendingg test on palle
et deck
ISO 8611 Test
T 3 Compression test
Tes
st 4 Stacking test 4a, 4b

25
59

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
Pallets, Slip
p Sheets, and
d Other Basess for Unit Loads

9.2.2.3 Racking Capacity

C
Capacity when
w supporteed in free spa
an warehouse e racks.
ASTM D11 185 Section 8.4
8 Bending te est of pallet – rack supportt
ISO 8611 Test
T 1 Bendin
ng test 1a, 1bb

9.2.3 Stiffness
This is the relative deformation of a pallet
p or palle
et component under load and depending g
support coonditions. Me easurements of o stiffness incclude relative
e deflection, sstrains, as
deformatio on per unit of mass or load on the pallett.
9.2.4 Durabilityy
This is a measure
m of ressistance to ha
andling. Mea asurements m may include cu umulative
impact ene ergy prior to fa
ailure or number of handlin ng cycles prio
or to failure orr significant
loss of stre
ength and fun nctionality.

9.2.5 ctionality req

Other func quirements
These mayy include palle
et weight, palllet size, locattion and size of openings, fire
performance, resistancee to biologica
al contaminatio on, etc.

9.2.6 Example classification

c n of presswo ood pallets b by weight and d capacity
Presswood d pallets can be divided intto general weeight and load
d carrying cap pacity
classifications. For easse of selection
n, each weigh ht class can b
be identified in
n some manner.
For examp ple, a painted stripe on a pallet stack co
ould corresponnd to an apprroximated
dynamic lo oad carrying capacity.
c An example of s uch a classification for a ccommon size
48” x 40” is
s shown in Ta able 1:

Table 1: Example of
o Weight C Class Distrributions.
Basic weeights are targets
t and
d are at thee time of
manufac cture. Dyna
amic capac cities are b
based on fu ull uniform
m
loads. Th
hey are guidelines annd may difffer from m manufacturrer
to manuffacturer.

Examplee Basic Weight Dynamic Exam

mple Color C
Code
Weight Class (lb.) Capacity ((lb.)
Light 31((+/-1.5) 1,000 Yello
ow
Medium 35((+/-1.5) 1,500 Greeen
Heavy 39((+/-1.5) 2,000 Red
Extra He
eavy 41((+/-1.5) 2,500 Whitee

As shown in Table 1, baasic pallet we eights of a 48XX40 range widely from 31 lbs. to 41 lbs.
dependingg on size and dynamic capa acity. When using the Light Weight Cla ass as a
baseline, in this examplle, the pallet deck
d thicknesss increases a
approximatelyy 0.06 inches
ubsequent we
for each su eight class.

These load d capacities are

a approxima uniform loads and cannot
ated values b ased on full u
fully be applied for everry application encountered . Investigatioon of the speccific applicatio
on
d to properly discern
is required d which weight classs of pallet wouuld best suit th
he customerss’
needs.

26
60

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
 American National Standard MH1 – 201 16
p Sheets, and
Pallets, Slip d Other Basess for Unit Loads

10 TEST PROCEDURES

10.1 Testing Of Physical

P Mod dels or Proto
otypes
When possibble, actual loa
ads and suppoorts should be
e used in the test. Howevver, load and
support analogs, based ono sound engineering princciples, are accceptable. The
e following test
methods aree recognized:

1 ISO-8611 “General Purrpose Flat Palllets for Throu

10.1.1 ugh Transit off Goods – Tesst Methods.”
Intern
national Stand
dards Organiz
zation (ISO). C. P. 56, CH
H 1211, Genevva 20, Switzeerland.

2 ASTM D-1185 “Standa

10.1.2 ard Test Methods for Palletts and Relate
ed Structures Employed in
Materrial Handling and
a Shipping.” American Society for Teesting and Ma aterials (ASTM), 100 Barr
Harboor Drive, Wesst Conshohocken, PA 1942
28-2959.

10.2 Testing of Computer

C Moodels
Structural analyses cann be performe ed using comp puter models of pallet strucctures. Thesee
computer models
m must be capable ofo simulating tthe load and ssupport condiitions as well as
the pallet structure
s and the propertie
es of the mate
erials.

10.3 Field Trials

It is recommended that prrototype palleet designs havving been tessted according
g to section
10.1 or 10.2,, be tested in an actual use
e situation to verify perform
mance.
Note: Test criteria
c may be established d by the userss of this stand
dard.

Subp
part III Rec
cycling of the
t Pressw
wood Pallets
11 Recycling
R Into
o New Press
swood Pallets euse of Material
s and the Re

ecommended, where economy permits, that spent prresswood palllets be recycled. Example
It is re es
of thee re-use for grround pressw wood pallets in
nclude:
Recyc cled into new presswood
p prroducts
Livestoock bedding
Absorb bent floor commpound
Top so oil additive
Compo ost material
Boiler Fuel

26
61

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.
MH1 - 2016

This publication is available at the MHI Bookstore: www.mhistore.org

8720 Red Oak Blvd., Suite 201

Charlotte, NC 28217-3992
www.mhi.org

Licensed to CITEmadera user. ANSI store order # Free Download. Downloaded 06/15/2023. Single user license only. Copying and networking prohibited.